Reference Manual: C42385 January 2020

Reference Manual
C42385
January 2020
Printed in U.S.A.
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.
BECKMAN COULTER, INC. • 250 S. KRAEMER BLVD. • BREA, CA 92821 • U.S.A.
Publication Notes
This manual, P/N C42385, release date 2020-01, supports:
• Access 2 published system software version 3, including full versions 3.4.2, 3.4.3, 3.5.0, 3.6.0, and
3.7.0.
• Access 2i published software version 6, including full versions 6.2.2, 6.2.3, and 6.3.0.
Changes to this Revision
Chapter Page(s) Change Description
Title Page Publication Notes Added software version 3.7.0. Updated the Revision History table.
4 4-16 Depending on the version of your PC, you may need the system password to restart the
7 7-13, 7-15 PC.
Revision History
C30217, December 2018 Access 2 software versions 3.4.2, 3.4.3, 3.5.0, and 3.6.0
Access 2i software verrsions 6.2.2 , 6.2.3, and 6.3.0
C02061-AA, April 2017 Access 2 software versions 3.4.2, 3.4.3, and 3.5.0
Access 2i software verrsions 6.2.2 and 6.2.3
B14253E, July 2016 Access 2 software versions 3.4.2 and 3.4.3
Access 2i software versions 6.2.2 and 6.2.3
B14253D, February 2015 Access 2 software version 3.4.2
Access 2i software version 6.2.2
This manual is intended for use with the Access 2 Immunoassay System. This manual also can be used as
supplemental material for the UniCel DxC 600i system, which consists of an Access 2 system integrated with a
UniCel DxC 600 system.
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Beckman Coulter, Inc. grants a limited non-exclusive license to the Access 2 system owner or operator to make
a copy of all or a portion of this book solely for laboratory use.
Beckman Coulter, the stylized logo, and the Beckman Coulter product and service marks mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Beckman Coulter, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
Citranox is a trademark of Alconox, Inc.
Contrad is a trademark of Decon Laboratories, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Access 2 Reference Manual Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface-1
1 Technology Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 System Technology Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Instrument Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3 Assay Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
2 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Space and Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Sample Processing Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Luminometer Calibration Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3 Assay Calibration Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4 Quality Control Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.5 System Check Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.6 Obstruction Detection Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2 System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3 Bar Code Reader Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.4 Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.5 Test Panels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.6 Derived Result Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.7 Ranges Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. i

C42385
Table of Contents Access 2 Reference Manual
4.8 Reflex Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

4.9 LIS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.10 PC Administration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
5 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Initialize System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3 Prime Fluidics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4 Volume Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5 Mechanics and Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.6 Analog and Digital Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5.7 Luminometer Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.8 Advanced Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.9 LIS Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5.10 Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5.11 Individual System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
6 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Reviewing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3 Troubleshooting Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4 List of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
7 System Support Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 System Support Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2 Instrument Cover Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.3 Rebooting, Shutting Down, and Restarting Procedures . . . . . . 7-12
7.4 Fluids Tray and Instrument Base Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.5 Incubator Belt and Shuttle Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.6 Main Pipettor Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.7 Pump, Valve, and Vacuum Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7.8 Wash/Read Carousel Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
ii © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual Table of Contents
A Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.2 System Check Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.3 Instrument Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A.4 Assay Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. iii

C42385
Table of Contents Access 2 Reference Manual
iv © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual Preface
Preface
About the Reference Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface-2
Access 2 System Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface-3
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface-4
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface-4
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Preface-1

C42385
Preface Access 2 Reference Manual
About the Ref- The Reference Manual provides background, theory, troubleshooting, and advanced
erence Man- maintenance information. The Reference Manual contains the following chapters:
ual
Preface • A listing of the Access 2 system documentation
• Information about contacting Technical Support
Chapter 1 • Technical overviews of the Access 2 system and its
Technology hardware modules
Overview • Overview of the immunoassay technology used by the
system to detect and measure analytes
Chapter 2 • Access 2 system spatial requirements, operating
System environment requirements, and electrical requirements
Specifications • Component performance characteristics, system and
supply capacities, bar code sample requirements, and
other specifications
Chapter 3 • Theory of sample processing, including typical
Theory of movement of an RV through the system and
Operation obstruction detection
• Theory of luminometer and assay calibrations, quality
controls, and how the System Check routine can be
used to verify system performance
Chapter 4 • How to configure general system parameters for your
System laboratory, including report, printer, back up
Configuration scheduling, and LIS (laboratory information system)
information
• How to set up the bar code reader for the symbologies
you use
• How to configure tests, result information, test panels,
and reflex tests
Chapter 5 • How to initialize the system, prime the fluidics, and
Diagnostics perform dispense and aspirate volume checks
• How to view and perform diagnostic checks on
mechanical, analog, and digital devices, and the LIS
Chapter 6 • How to review and troubleshoot caution and warning
Event Log events
• Numeric list of cautions and warnings by system
module
Table 1 Reference Manual Chapters
Preface-2 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual Preface
Chapter 7 • How to service the instrument as needed for

System Support troubleshooting or as directed by Technical Support
Procedures
Appendix A • How to troubleshoot general instrument operation
Troubleshooting problems and out-of-range System Check routine
results
• How to troubleshoot out-of-range assay calibration,
quality control, and patient sample results
Table 1 Reference Manual Chapters (continued)
Access 2 Sys- The Access 2 system includes the following documentation.

tem Docu- • The Access 2 Help system, which provides detailed operating and reference
mentation information, linked to the system software.
• The Instructions for Use, which contains information intended to be used
after you have become familiar with the Access 2 system.
• The LIS Vendor Information document, which provides interface information
for your laboratory information system vendor.
• The Operator's Guide and Reference Manual, which provide the same text
delivered in the Help system system Operating Procedures and Reference
Information books. These manuals are available in the English language.
Manuals, Instructions for Use, and other supporting documents for your Access 2
system are available on the Beckman Coulter website. Examples of available
documents include:
• Access 2 Instructions for Use
• Access 2 Operator's Guide & Reference Manual
• Access 2/UniCel DxI LIS Vendor Information Document
• Access assay instructions for use
• Safety Data Sheets for Access assays and consumables
• Certificates of analysis
To view or download electronic copies of Access 2 system documentation, visit the
Beckman Coulter website at techdocs.beckmancoulter.com. To receive email alerts
when new or updated Access 2 system documents are released on the website, register
for the "My Technical Documents" notification tool.
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Preface-3

C42385
Preface Access 2 Reference Manual
Notes, Cau- The Access 2 system documentation uses notes, cautions, and warnings to draw your
tions, and attention to important information, instrument operation instructions, and safety
Warnings information.
Help Manual
Description
Icon Graphic
(Note icon) Notes highlight or provide additional

NOTE information.
(Caution icon) Cautions emphasize the possibility

CAUTION of damage to the instrument.
(Warning icon) Warnings emphasize the

WARNING possibility either of harm to the operator, or
because erroneous test results might be reported,
of harm to the patient.
Table 2 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
Technical For technical assistance with the Access 2 Immunoassay System:

Support • In the U.S.A. or Canada, contact Beckman Coulter Technical Support by
phone at 1-800-854-3633 or online at www.beckmancoulter.com. Before
using online support the first time, you will need to register online.
• Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your technical support
representative.
NOTE
Be prepared to provide your system ID.
Preface-4 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 1: Technology Overview
1 Technology Overview
1.1 System Technology Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Workgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
LIS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2 Instrument Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Carousel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Main Pipettor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Analytical Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Fluidic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Electronics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Peripherals Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.3 Assay Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Paramagnetic Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Chemiluminescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Competitive Binding Assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Sandwich Assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Antibody Detection Assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Reagent Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. 1-1

C42385
1: Technology Overview Access 2 Reference Manual
1.1 System Technology Overview
The Access 2 Immunoassay System is an automated analyzer that performs a wide

variety of immunoassays on body fluid samples.
The immunoassays are heterogeneous, enzyme-mediated assays. Coated

paramagnetic particles bind sample analyte, a magnetic field separates the bound and
unbound analyte, and a chemiluminescent substrate detects the analyte. A
luminometer measures the resulting relative light units (RLUs) and the system
converts this reading into a sample result.
The system processes calibration, quality control, and patient samples in individual,
disposable plastic tubes called reaction vessels (RVs) with reagents from up to 24
onboard reagent packs.
The system uses six instrument hardware modules to perform processing, control, and
interface functions (see Figure 1-1). The carousel, main pipettor, analytical, and
fluidic modules provide sample processing functions. The electronics module
connects each of the processing modules to control mechanisms, including the
operating system software. The peripherals module provides the software that you use
to direct and monitor the system.
In a workgroup of one to four immunoassay systems, one external computer (PC) is

designated as the server. If you have a Laboratory Information System (LIS), the LIS
is connected to the server.
To optimize laboratory efficiency, the system provides random, continuous, and

STAT access. The system uses a real-time, multi-tasking environment to allocate
instrument resources, and intermixes assay steps to process various assay
methodologies at the same time. For example, while the instrument is processing
samples, you can load additional sample racks or STAT samples, replenish most
system supplies, and change waste containers.
For information about the instrument hardware, see Section 1.2: Instrument
Technology.
For information about how to use the system interface, see Chapter 1: System
Overview in the Operator's Guide.
1-2 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 1.1: System Technology Overview
Processing Functions
Carousel Module Main Pipettor Module Analytical Module
 Sample Carousel  Precision Pump and Valve  Reaction Vessel Loader
 Internal Sample Bar Code  Pipettor Gantry  Incubator Belt
Reader  Ultrasonic Transducer  Wash/Read Carousel
 Cup/Tube Detector  Primary Probe  Luminometer
 Reagent Carousel
 Internal Reagent Bar Code
Reader (if equipped)
Fluidic Module
 Probe Wash Tower
 Vacuum Pump
 Vacuum Reservoir
 Substrate Pump, Valve, and
Heater
 Wash Pump and Valve
 Peristaltic Waste Pump
 Fluids Tray
Control Functions
Electronics Module
 Power Supply
 Printed Circuit Boards
 Reset Button
 Internal Hard Drive
 3.5-Inch Disk Drive
 Interlock Switch
 RV Load Door Alarm
 Status Light Bar (if equipped)
Instrument Software
Interface Functions For

Workgroup and Server
Peripherals Module
 Printer
 Touch Screen Monitor
 Mouse
 Keyboard
 Articulated Arm
 External Bar Code Reader
 External Computer (PC)
Optional Link to 1-3

LIS System Linked to User Interface
Client PCs in the
Workgroup Server PC Software Workgroup
0501F.wmf
Figure 1-1 Access 2 System Functional Overview

C42385
1.1: System Technology Overview Access 2 Reference Manual
Workgroups A workgroup consists of 1 to 4 Access 2 Immunoassay Systems. Sample information

transmitted through the LIS interface to the workgroup, as well as data generated by
the workgroup, is managed by one of the external computers (PCs) acting as the
workgroup server. The server links to the client PCs in the workgroup through a
network port.
The workgroup database can store large amounts of lot, ID, and test result
information. The database capacity is usually shared over the 1-4 instruments in the
workgroup, but is sometimes limited per instrument. For example, the workgroup can
store 400 rack IDs, but a single instrument can only store 100 of them.
For more information about workgroup database capacities, see

Section 2.2: Performance Characteristics.
LIS Interface The Laboratory Information System (LIS) interface allows your Access 2 system to
communicate with an external LIS. When the LIS interface is switched on through the
software, it can communicate with the server PC in your workgroup. The LIS links to
the workgroup through an LIS connection port located on the server computer.
You must set up the LIS interface before you try to transmit data. You set up the LIS
interface in the LIS Setup window. When the interface is on, you can enter sample
demographic information and test requests at the LIS, and transmit them to the
workgroup. When a sample ID is entered into the system, the rest of the test request
information is supplied by the LIS transmission.
Once processing is complete, test results and associated flags are transmitted to the
LIS either automatically or manually. When the LIS receives a test result, it transmits
a confirmation to the workgroup server.
For more information about setting up the LIS interface, see Section 4.9: LIS Setup.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 1.2: Instrument Technology
1.2 Instrument Technology
The Access 2 system uses the following six instrument hardware modules to execute
processing, control, and interface functions.
• Carousel module
• Main pipettor module
• Analytical module
• Fluidic module
• Electronics module
• Peripherals module
The carousel module contains onboard racks, samples, and reagent packs on two
independently rotating carousels. This module also includes the cup/tube detector that
detects containers in sample positions, and the internal sample bar code reader that
reads the rack and sample container bar code labels. The internal reagent bar code
reader (on instruments with serial numbers ≥570000) reads the printed bar code label
on the reagent packs.
The main pipettor module transfers samples, reagents, and wash buffer (for dilutions,
if necessary) to the reaction vessels (RVs).
The analytical module transports RVs through six stages: pipetting, incubation,
washing, addition of substrate, luminometer reading, and ejection into the RV waste
bag. The luminometer reading is transmitted to the electronics module.
The fluidic module acts in concert with the main pipettor module and the analytical
module to dispense reagents and samples, wash samples and the primary probe,
dispense substrate, and remove liquid waste into the liquid waste bottle.
The electronics module contains an interface circuit board assembly that connects
each of the processing modules to control mechanisms. A hard disk stores the portions
of the instrument software that interface with the instrument’s control mechanisms to
direct the actions of the processing modules. The status light bar (on instruments with
serial numbers ≥570000) changes color to indicate the operational status of the
instrument.
The peripherals module includes the external computer (PC) and other auxiliary
devices, such as the monitor and printer. The user interface software (UI) is stored on

C42385
1.2: Instrument Technology Access 2 Reference Manual
the hard drive of the PC. You use the touch screen monitor, the UI software, mouse,
and keyboard to direct and monitor the system.
Carousel The carousel module holds the samples to be processed and the specific assay reagent
Module packs. The carousel module (see Figure 1-2) includes the internal bar code reader,
cup/tube detector, reagent carousel, and sample carousel.
2
3
4
6
0048C.eps
1 Internal Sample Bar Code Reader

2 Cup/Tube Detector
3 Reagent Carousel
4 Reagent Packs
5 Sample Carousel
6 Sample Rack
Figure 1-2 Carousel Module
Sample Carousel
You load samples onto the Access 2 instrument in racks. Each rack is capable of
holding ten samples. The sample carousel holds up to six racks for a total onboard
capacity of 60 patient, quality control, or calibration samples. When loading or
unloading sample racks, positions on the sample carousel are accessed one at a time.
The sample racks are fitted with bar code labels that represent the rack identification
number (ID). The system uses the bar code label to track a rack’s location and the
samples it contains.

C42385
Internal Sample Bar Code Reader

After you load a rack onto the instrument, the sample carousel rotates until the rack
passes the internal sample bar code reader and cup/tube detector. The internal sample
bar code reader automatically scans each sample rack for the rack IDs. The internal
sample bar code reader can also be configured to read sample IDs. The internal
sample bar code reader supports four major bar code symbologies.
The rack ID indicates the type of sample container used in the rack. The system
verifies the rack ID, and then scans the bar code labels on the sample containers. For
each position on the rack, the system automatically adds scanned sample IDs to test
requests.
If the system cannot read a sample container bar code label, you can enter the sample
ID manually or scan it with an external bar code reader.
For information on how to configure the internal sample bar code reader, see
Section 4.3: Bar Code Reader Setup.
For information about racks and corresponding sample containers, see Appendix A:
Racks and Sample Containers in the Operator's Guide.
For a list of supported bar code symbologies and bar code label specifications, see
Section 2.2: Performance Characteristics.
Cup/Tube Detector
The cup/tube detector determines if a sample container is present in each position on
the rack. If a sample container is detected and there is no test request for that position
in the rack, the system will scan the sample container for a sample ID bar code label.
If a sample container is not detected on a scanned rack, but a test request has been
entered for that rack position, the system deletes the test request. The cup/tube
detector cannot be disabled.
Reagent Carousel
The reagent carousel refrigerator temperature is maintained at 1 °C to 5 °C. This
temperature range ensures that the air and onboard reagent pack temperatures will be
within 3 °C to10 °C. The reagent carousel holds up to 24 reagent packs. When loading
or unloading reagent packs, positions on the reagent carousel are accessed one at time.
You define each reagent pack in the system by entering the pack name, lot number,
expiration date, and serial number from the bar code label on the reagent pack. This
information can be entered by typing the bar code information or manually scanning
the information using an external bar code reader before loading the reagent pack.
If the instrument is equipped with an internal reagent bar code reader (available on
instruments with serial numbers ≥ 570000) and the reagent bar code reader is enabled,

C42385
you load the reagent packs first and then the instrument reads the information from
the reagent pack bar code and loads the packs that are valid.
Main Pipettor The main pipettor module (see Figure 1-3) transfers measured volumes of samples
Module and reagents to the reaction vessels (RVs) in the analytical module, and prepares
onboard sample dilutions (if necessary). The main pipettor module includes the
precision pump and valve, pipettor gantry, and the main pipettor. The main pipettor
includes the electronic transducer and the primary probe.
2 3a
3
4
1
6
0055E.eps
1 Precision Pump
2 Precision Valve
3 Pipettor Gantry
3a Pressure Monitor (When Installed)
4 Main Pipettor (Top View)
5 Ultrasonic Transducer (Front View)
6 Primary Probe (Front View)
Figure 1-3 Main Pipettor Module

C42385
Precision Pump and Valve

The Access 2 system uses a precision pump with dual (high and low) resolution
delivery, and a precision valve to achieve accurate delivery of both small and large
fluid volumes. The precision pump aspirates samples, reagents, and wash buffer into
the primary probe.
Pipettor Gantry
The pipettor gantry supports the main pipettor and allows it to move horizontally and
vertically.
Pressure Monitor
Access 2 instruments equipped with pressure monitoring have a device mounted on
the pipettor gantry. The pressure monitor is used to detect obstructions in the primary
probe.
Ultrasonic Transducer
The main pipettor is equipped with an ultrasonic transducer. The transducer applies
ultrasonic vibrations to the tip of the primary probe to mix reagents in the reagent
pack before sampling, mix the contents in the RV, clean the probe after each use, and
sense the level of the sample fluid. Level sensing determines the depth that the
primary probe is immersed in a solution or sample. At an optimal depth, the primary
probe can aspirate the correct amount of fluid, and carryover of fluid on the probe is
minimized. Level sensing also helps the instrument determine if there is enough
sample in the container to perform the assay.
Primary Probe
The primary probe transfers appropriate volumes of samples and reagents into RVs,
and dispenses wash buffer to prepare onboard sample dilutions.

C42385
Analytical The analytical module transports and incubates reaction vessels during processing,
Module and washes and reads the reaction vessels when the processing is complete. The
analytical module (see Figure 1-4) includes the wash/read carousel, luminometer,
incubator belt, and the RV loader.
1
2
3
4
7 6
0046D.eps
1 Wash/Read Carousel
2 Luminometer
3 Incubator Track and Belt
4 Wash Arm
5 RV Waste Bag
6 RV Loader (Includes Rake and Shuttle)
7 RV Load Door
Figure 1-4 Analytical Module
Reaction Vessel (RV) Loader

RVs are loaded onto the instrument in cartridges that contain 98 vessels. You can load
up to 3 cartridges at a time for a maximum capacity of 294 vessels. If the RV supply is
low, the system displays a caution. If not enough RVs are available, the system will
not allow you to schedule more tests. To maintain optimal reaction conditions, the
RVs are preheated on the instrument before assay reagents are added.
The RV loader includes the rake and shuttle. After you load an RV cartridge, the rake
moves the vessels into the supply area. The shuttle moves the vessels from the supply
area to a position where the main pipettor adds the samples and reagents. Then the
shuttle moves the vessels onto the incubator belt.

C42385
Incubator Belt
The incubator belt carries RVs for the incubation time defined in the assay protocol
file (APF). To provide optimal assay conditions the system maintains the incubator
temperature within a specific range.
When incubation is complete, the system transfers the RVs from the incubator belt to
the wash/read carousel for washing, addition of substrate, and luminometer reading.
After the system reads the samples, the RVs are transferred to the incubator belt,
which carries the RVs to the waste chute. The shuttle ejects the RVs from the
incubator belt into the waste chute, which leads to the disposable RV waste bag. If the
available space in the waste bag is low, the system displays a caution. If not enough
space is available, the system will not allow you to schedule more tests.
For more information on RV transport, see Chapter 3: Theory of Operation.
Wash/Read Carousel
The wash/read carousel includes the wash/read area, the wash arm, three aspirate
probes, three dispense probes, the substrate probe, separation magnets, and the
luminometer.
The wash/read carousel contains three wash positions. After incubation, the system
transfers each RV to the first wash position. After washing the paramagnetic particles,
the system moves the RV to the second and third positions for additional wash cycles.
If defined in the APF, the system returns the RV to the incubator belt for further
processing.
If no further processing is required, the RV is moved to the substrate position. The

system adds preheated substrate (Lumi-Phos 530) to the RV, which initiates a
chemiluminescent reaction. The system spins the RV to mix the contents, and
incubates the RV for a short time as it advances to the luminometer.
Luminometer
The luminometer is a photomultiplier tube (PMT) that measures the amount of light
produced by the chemiluminescent reaction occurring in the RVs. This measurement
is transmitted as an electronic signal to the user interface (UI) software, where it is
converted to a calculated test result.

C42385
Fluidic Mod- The fluidic module acts in concert with the main pipettor module and the analytical
ule module to dispense reagents and samples, wash the samples and the primary probe,
and dispense substrate. The fluidic module (see Figure 1-5) includes the vacuum and
wash pumps, vacuum reservoir bottle, wash valve, substrate pump, substrate valve,
substrate heater, probe wash tower and wash valve, peristaltic waste pump, and the
fluids tray.
1
2
3
4
5
7
9
8
0051E.eps
1 Vacuum Pump
2 Wash Pump
3 Vacuum Reservoir Bottle
4 Wash Valve
5 Substrate Pump, Valve, and Heater
6 Probe Wash Tower
7 Probe Wash Valve
8 Peristaltic Waste Pump
9 Fluids Tray
Figure 1-5 Fluidic Module

C42385
Probe Wash Tower

To minimize sample carryover, the system thoroughly washes the primary probe after
each pipetting. The probe wash tower showers wash buffer around the outside of the
probe tip while the inside of the probe is flushed. The ultrasonic transducer applies
ultrasonic waves to the probe to loosen residue during washing, and then dry the
probe.
Vacuum Pump
During primary probe washing, the vacuum pump removes wash buffer from the
probe wash tower. As the primary probe is lifted from the wash tower, the vacuum
pump also removes any droplets clinging to the outside of the probe.
Vacuum Reservoir Bottle

The vacuum reservoir bottle temporarily stores liquid removed from the probe wash
tower during its wash cycle.
Substrate Pump, Valve, and Heater

The substrate pump and valve dispense substrate through the substrate probe into the
RVs. The substrate heater preheats the substrate before it is dispensed.
Wash Pump and Valve

The wash pump and valve dispense wash buffer through the dispense probes into the
RVs during wash cycles. The wash pump also dispenses wash buffer to the probe
wash tower.
Peristaltic Waste Pump

The peristaltic waste pump removes liquid from the RVs through the aspirate probes
during wash cycles. The waste pump also transports the liquid from the vacuum
reservoir bottle into the liquid waste bottle.

C42385
Fluids Tray
The fluids tray includes the wash buffer bottle, a float level sensor for monitoring the
wash buffer volume, wash buffer reservoir, waste filter/bottle assembly for filtering
microscopic particles from the waste and vacuum pump exhausts, substrate bottles,
and the liquid waste bottle. The tray holds up to two substrate bottles. One bottle
supplies substrate during processing, and the second equilibrates at room temperature
until it is needed. The liquid waste bottle is positioned in the tray over a scale for
monitoring the weight of the liquid waste.
Two fluids trays are available (see Figure 1-6).
1060A.eps
1 Wash Buffer Bottle

2 Float Level Sensor
3 Wash Buffer Reservoir
4 Waste Filter/Bottle Assembly
5 Substrate Bottles
6 Liquid Waste Bottle
Figure 1-6 Fluids Tray

C42385
Electronics The electronics module performs control functions that direct the operation of the
Module instrument’s carousel, main pipettor, analytical, and fluidic modules. The electronics
module (see Figure 1-7) includes the power supply, printed circuit boards (PCBs),
reset button, internal hard drive, 3.5-inch disk drive (in some instruments), interlock
switch, and RV load door alarm.
1
2
4 5
0049C.bmp
1 Power Supply (Located Under the PCBs)
2 Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
3 Reset Button
4 One Internal Hard Drive (Either Attached to a PCB or Positioned
Further Forward in the Module)
5 3.5-Inch Disk Drive (Not Available in Some Instruments)
Figure 1-7 Electronics Module
Power Supply
The power supply provides and regulates the power for the operating system and the
electronic subsystems. The power supply is located underneath the printed circuit
boards.
Printed Circuit Boards

The printed circuit boards (PCBs) control the motor drivers, ultrasonic transducer,
heaters, temperature sensors, and luminometer.
Reset Button
The reset button is located inside the front panel to the right of the main pipettor.
Pressing the reset button reboots the instrument.
For information about rebooting the instrument, see Section 7.3: Rebooting, Shutting
Down, and Restarting Procedures.

C42385
Internal Hard Drive

The internal hard drive stores the portion of the instrument software that controls the
instrument’s mechanical functions. In some instruments, this is a hard disk drive and
in other instruments it is a flash drive. Some flash drives are installed on the CPU
printed circuit board.
3.5-Inch Disk Drive

The 3.5-inch, 1.44 megabyte disk drive may be used by technical support
representatives to troubleshoot the system. The drive is not available on some
instruments.
Interlock Switch
The instrument is equipped with an interlock switch to protect you from injury. When
you open the front panel of the instrument, the interlock switch stops the movement of
the main pipettor. Other mechanical devices will continue to operate with the front
panel open. If the front panel of the instrument is opened while samples are being
processed, the system may cancel tests.
WARNING
The Access 2 instrument has moving parts and uses high voltage in the ultrasonic
transducer. Both present an injury hazard. You should not operate the
instrument with the covers open.
Reaction Vessel Load Door Alarm

An alarm sounds if you open the RV load door without selecting Load RVs F4 on the
Supplies screen. The alarm signals that the RV rake is not in the appropriate position
for loading RVs. When you follow the procedure for loading RVs, the system will
move the rake to the loading position and no alarm will sound.
NOTE
RVs can fall between the rake and the wall of the incubator if you do not load
RVs properly by selecting Load RVs F4 from the Supplies or Supplies Required
screen.
For the proper procedure for loading RVs, see Section 2.5: Reaction Vessels (RVs) in
the Operator's Guide.
Status Light Bar

Some instruments (serial numbers ≥ 570000) are equipped with a status light bar that
changes color to indicate the operational status of the instrument. The color of the
light bar matches the color of the system mode area of the user interface.

C42385
Peripherals The peripherals module provides the software interface you use to direct and monitor
Module the Access 2 system. The peripherals module consists of the instrument’s external
devices. This includes the touch screen monitor, external computer (PC), articulated
arm, keyboard, an external bar code reader, mouse, and printer.
Printer
The single-sheet printer produces letter quality reports and screen printouts. For more
information about the printer, see the documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Touch Screen Monitor

The Access 2 monitor is a flat LCD touch screen, color monitor. You can touch the
screen with the tip of your finger, fingernail, or use the mouse to navigate through the
system screens or select various system functions. For more information about the
monitor, see the documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Mouse
You can use the mouse as an alternative to touching the monitor to navigate screens
and select system functions.
Keyboard
The keyboard is a standard, 101 key model with a full set of function keys from F1 to
F12.
Articulated Arm
The articulated arm elevates the monitor and keyboard off of the surface of your work
area, allowing you to place both devices in a comfortable position. The arm moves
horizontally and vertically, and can swivel to the left or right.
External Bar Code Readers

Your instrument is equipped with an external handheld bar code reader or an external
bar code wand. For some Access 2 systems the handheld bar code reader also operates
in a hands-free mode.
The external bar code readers are enabled whenever they are connected to the external
computer. You use the external bar code readers to scan bar-coded substrate, reagent
pack, and calibrator information into the system. As a backup to the internal bar code
reader, you can also scan sample IDs, and rack IDs with the handheld bar code reader
and bar code wand. Do not scan sample container and rack IDs if your handheld
reader is operating in the hands-free mode.

C42385
External Computer (PC)

The PC stores the Access 2 system user interface (UI) software. The UI software
allows you to interface with and direct the instrument software. Through the software
you can direct and monitor the operation of the instrument.
NOTE
Technological advances and availability may determine the specific external
computer components of your instrument.
The PC is equipped with a 3.5-inch disk and/or USB flash drive, PC hard drive, and
CD-ROM or DVD drive. You use the CD-ROM or DVD drive to load system
software and APF software upgrades.You can use the 3.5-inch disk or USB flash
drive to copy diagnostic, quality control, or test result data. The PC is also equipped
with a tape or USB flash drive for backing up the system’s database. The PC can link
to an LIS system and interface with up to three other Access 2 systems. In a
workgroup of more than one Access 2 system, one PC is designated as the server
which controls more functions than the client PCs.
For more information about server functions, see Appendix B: System and Mode
Availability Tables.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 1.3: Assay Technology
1.3 Assay Technology
An immunoassay is an analytical method that uses antigen-antibody reactions to

detect or measure a specific antigen or antibody (analyte) in a sample of body fluid,
such as serum or plasma.
Access 2 immunoassays employ paramagnetic particles in the solid phase of the

assay, and an enzyme-mediated chemiluminescent reaction in the detection phase.
The solid phase and detection technologies allow you to measure a broad range of
analytes.
The Access 2 system supports three types of assay calibrations: quantitative,

qualitative, or semi-quantitative. Quantitative assays use a calibration curve to
measure the amount of analyte present in a sample. Qualitative assays use a
calibration cutoff value to classify the result as either reactive or non-reactive for the
analyte being detected. Semi-quantitative assays use a calibration curve to measure
the amount of analyte present in a sample. These assays may report their quantitative
results with a qualitative interpretation.
Immunoassays use a variety of assay formats to measure or detect analyte in samples.

The most common formats are competitive binding, sandwich, and antibody
detection. The type of format used depends upon the analyte being measured.
NOTE
The number of processing steps for each assay format are defined in the assay
protocol file (APF), and can differ from assay-to-assay. The text and illustrations
describing each format are meant to provide you with an overview of the
technology, not to represent a specific assay format.
Each assay format uses reagents that react with a specific analyte to form immune
complexes. Assay reagents include an enzyme-labeled antigen or antibody
(conjugate), coated paramagnetic particles, and other assay-specific reagents (such as
antigens or antibodies specific for the analyte being detected, stripping agents, or
buffered protein solutions).
Analyte in the sample reacts with the conjugate and assay-specific reagents to create
immune complexes. These complexes bind to the paramagnetic particles. A magnetic
field separates the particle-bound components from the unbound, and washing
removes the unbound material from the system.

C42385
1.3: Assay Technology Access 2 Reference Manual
In the detection phase, a chemiluminescent substrate is added to the paramagnetic

particles. The substrate reacts with the enzyme label present in the bound immune
complexes and releases light. The luminometer measures the light emitted, and the
system software converts the relative light units (RLUs) into a sample test result.
The total assay time depends on the incubation time and number of wash cycles
defined in the APF. Assays are optimized for rapid time to first result. Most tests are
completed in 15-30 minutes. The system can process up to 100 tests per hour for
one-step assays (assays with one processing stage), or up to 50 tests per hour for
two-step assays (two processing stages).
For more information about specific assays, see the reagent instructions for use.
Paramagnetic Access Immunoassay Systems assays use micron-sized paramagnetic particles, either
Particles directly or indirectly coated with antigen or antibody, to detect analyte in the sample.
After the analyte binds to the particles, a magnetic field pulls the particles to the side
of the RV to allow for complete aspiration of the wash fluid containing the unbound
analyte. The system resuspends the particles by adding wash buffer and then spinning
the RV.
Chemilumi- Luminescence is the emission of light associated with the dissipation of energy from
nescence an excited substance.
The Access 2 system uses enzyme-mediated chemiluminescence. Assay conjugates

are labeled with the enzyme alkaline phosphatase (ALP). ALP removes a phosphoryl
group from the dioxetane-based chemiluminescent substrate. The resulting chemical
reaction emits light.
Alkaline phosphatase is coupled to an assay-specific analyte. This enzyme-labeled

conjugate forms immune complexes with sample analyte and the other assay-specific
reagents. When substrate is added to the washed particles it reacts with the alkaline
phosphatase present in the bound immune complexes, resulting in
chemiluminescence.
A luminometer measures the relative light units (RLUs) of light emitted from the
chemiluminescent reaction. Depending on the assay format, the amount of light
produced is either proportional or inversely proportional to the amount of analyte in
the sample. If proportional, as more analyte is present in the sample, more
enzyme-labeled conjugate can bind to the captured analyte, and more RLUs are
produced. If inversely proportional, as more analyte is present, less enzyme-labeled
conjugate can bind to the particles, and fewer RLUs are produced. Based on the APF
for each assay, the system converts the measured RLUs into a test result.

C42385
Competitive Competitive binding assays (see Figure 1-8) use coated paramagnetic particles to
Binding measure antigen in a sample. The particles can be either directly or indirectly coated
Assays with capture antibody. A sample is mixed with the particles, an antigen-specific
antibody, and an enzyme-labeled antigen (conjugate). The sample antigen competes
with the conjugate for antibody binding sites. The antibody and conjugate form
immune complexes that bind to the particles. Magnets separate the particle-bound
immune complexes from the unbound components, and washing removes the
unbound components. After adding chemiluminescent substrate, the measured RLUs
are inversely proportional to the amount of antigen in the sample.
0156Bc.bmp
Figure 1-8 Competitive Binding Assays

C42385
Sandwich Sandwich assays (see Figure 1-9) use coated paramagnetic particles to measure
Assays antigen in a sample. The particles can be either directly or indirectly coated with
capture antibody. A sample is mixed with the particles and an enzyme-labeled
antibody (conjugate). The sample analyte and conjugate form immune complexes that
bind to the particles. Magnets separate the particle-bound immune complexes from
the unbound components, and washing removes the unbound components. After
adding chemiluminescent substrate, the measured RLUs are directly proportional to
the amount of antigen in the sample.
0158Bc.bmp
Figure 1-9 Sandwich Assays

C42385
Antibody Antibody detection assays (see Figure 1-10) use paramagnetic particles coated with
Detection antigen to detect antibody in a sample. A sample is mixed with the particles, forming
Assays immune complexes. Magnets separate the particle-bound immune complexes from
the unbound antibody, and washing removes the unbound components. An
enzyme-labeled antibody (conjugate) is added. The conjugate binds to the antibody
captured on the particle to form immune complexes. Magnets separate the bound
immune complexes from the unbound antibody, and washing removes the unbound
components. After adding chemiluminescent substrate, the measured RLUs are
directly proportional to the amount of antibody in the sample.
0154Bc.bmp
Figure 1-10 Antibody Detection Assays

C42385
Reagent Reagent packs contain assay-specific paramagnetic particles, conjugate, and other
Packs reagents within five wells. Most reagent packs contain enough reagents to perform up
to 50 tests.
Reagent packs are sealed with an elastomeric coating to maintain reagent integrity
and prevent evaporation. The coating will reseal after a well is punctured by the
primary probe.
Reagent packs loaded on the instrument are maintained at 3 °C to 10 °C. You should
store unused reagent packs upright in a refrigerator. To dislodge particles from the
underside of the seal, invert unpunctured pack several times immediately before
loading. It is not necessary to remix packs after loading. Do not invert a punctured
pack.
NOTE
Do not shake packs or use a vortex mixer, except for the Access 25(OH)
Vitamin D Total assay. For the Access 25(OH) Vitamin D Total assay, see the
reagent IFU for pack mixing instructions.
For information about reagent pack contents and storage, see the reagent instructions
for use or the reagent pack label.
Reagent Pack Usage

The Access 2 system uses bar coded information to track the number of tests that can
be processed with the reagents remaining in the pack, and to determine the location of
the pack on the reagent carousel. When you start sample processing, the system
matches the requested tests to the onboard reagent packs, and applies the following
rules to determine which pack will be used:
• Calibrated reagent packs are used before packs that are not calibrated.
• If multiple calibrated reagent packs are onboard, the pack that was punctured
first is used first.
• If multiple calibrated, punctured reagent packs are onboard, the pack that
expires first is used first.
• If onboard reagent packs are not punctured, the pack that expires first is used
first.
• If the unpunctured pack expiration dates match, the pack that was loaded
onto the instrument first is used first.
For information about loading reagent packs and reagent pack inventory, see
Chapter 2: Supplies in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Reagent Pack Monitoring

The Access 2 system uses the pressure monitor in the main pipettor to sense whether
sufficient reagent is dispensed for testing. Reagent pack monitoring can detect
unexpected levels of reagent in the pack, thereby avoiding errors due to improper
pack loading. Reagent pack monitoring can also detect some leaks in the fluidic
system.
If sufficient reagent is not dispensed from a reagent pack, one or more events are
reported in the Event Log. Some events are informational. Troubleshooting is
provided for caution and warning events.
If the system detects a pattern of reagent pack monitoring failures, the main pipettor
may be set to disabled or the pack may be rejected.

C42385

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 2: System Specifications
2 System Specifications
2.1 Space and Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Instrument and Peripheral Device Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Operating Environment Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Instrument Operating Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Instrument Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Luminometer Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Reaction Vessel Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Database Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Supply and Sample Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Bar Code Hardware Performance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Bar Code Label Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

C42385
2: System Specifications Access 2 Reference Manual
2.1 Space and Environmental

Requirements
To operate properly, the Access 2 system requires certain spatial, environmental, and
electrical conditions.
Space The dimensions of the instrument and the peripheral devices as of the date of this
Requirements document are listed in the following table. The Access 2 system operates from a
bench top. Be sure that the surface and surrounding area designated for these
components is large enough to accommodate the system. For information about the
external computer, monitor, and printer, see the documentation provided by the
manufacturer.
Instrument Width = 39 in (99 cm)

Height = 18.5 in (47 cm) (Instrument Serial Numbers < 570000)
Height = 19.5 in (49.54 cm) (Instrument Serial Numbers ≥ 570000)
Depth = 24 in (61 cm)
Instrument clearance Rear = 2 in (5 cm)
required Left = 12 in (30 cm)
• Left clearance is for the Right = 30 in (76 cm)
fluids tray
Top = 30 in (76 cm)
• Right clearance is for the
monitor and keyboard on
the articulated arm
• Top clearance is measured
from the bench top
Table 2-1 Instrument Component Dimensions

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 2.1: Space and Environmental Requirements
Instrument The weight of the instrument is listed in the following table. Be sure that the surface
and Periph- where the instrument, external computer, monitor, and printer will reside can support
eral Device the system.
Weights Instrument (before supplies and 200 lb (91 kg)

samples added)
External computer See the documentation provided by the
manufacturer.
Monitor
Printer
Table 2-2 Instrument Component Weights
Operating The Access 2 system is for indoor use only and requires the following environmental
Environment conditions to operate properly:
Requirements
Humidity Operational: 20% to 80%
Exposure: 10% to 80%
Maximum altitude Operational: 6,500 ft (2,000 m)
Exposure: 40,000 ft (12,200 m)
Temperature Operational*,**: 64 °F to 82 °F (18 °C to 28°C)
Exposure: -22 °F to 122 °F (-30 °C to 50 °C)
Maximum ambient 3.6 °F per 30 min (2 °C)
temperature change
rate
Ambient light Results not affected by ambient light levels of 0–200
foot-candles (0–2150 lx)
Pollution degrees 2
Table 2-3 Operating Environment Requirements

* Some assays require additional temperature restrictions. See Appendix A of the Access 2 Instruc-
tions for Use manual for information on these restrictions.
** The operating environment temperature is influenced by factors such as room temperature, air
circulation, heat sources near the system, and direct sunlight.

C42385
2.1: Space and Environmental Requirements Access 2 Reference Manual
Electrical The electrical line and any surge suppressors, backup power supplies (UPS units), and
Requirements line conditioning transformers you use with the instrument must meet specific
requirements.
Electrical Line
The electrical line supplies power to the Access 2 instrument. To avoid damaging the
instrument, the electrical line should meet the following requirements:
Line power supply 115–120 V alternating current (V AC)

at 15 A, or 220–240 V AC at 6 A, at
either 50 or 60 Hz, single phase power
Line dedication Dedicated (Access 2 system is the only
equipment connected to the electrical
line)
Line outlet Located within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
Access 2 system
NOTE
The Access 2 system may be
connected to a line conditioner. In
this case, locate the line conditioner
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the outlet.
Line protection device Circuit breaker rated:
• 15 A (115–120 V AC line)
• 6 A (220–240 V AC line)
Line voltage fluctuations Not to exceed ±10 V AC per cycle
Line voltage sags Not to fall below:
• 90 V AC at 15 A
• 180 V AC at 6 A
Line voltage surges Not to exceed:
• 135 V AC at 15 A
• 250 V AC at 6 A
Line voltage supplied to printer See documentation provided by the
manufacturer
Table 2-4 Electrical Line Requirements

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 2.1: Space and Environmental Requirements
Maximum voltage between Not to exceed 2 V AC root mean

neutral conductor and safety squared (RMS)
ground conductor
Maximum resistance between the Not to exceed 0.1 ohm
safety ground conductor and an
accessible building safety
ground
Transient overvoltages According to UL3101 Installation
Category II
Table 2-4 Electrical Line Requirements (continued)
Electrical Current Consumption, Power Consumption, and Heat

Production
The Access 2 instrument consumes current and power, and produces heat at the
following levels. For information about the external computer, monitor, and printer,
see the documentation provided by their manufacturers.
Electrical
Power
Current Heat Production
Consumption
Consumption
<1.5 kV•A 800 W 2,730 BTU
Table 2-5 Electrical Current Consumption
Surge Suppressors
Beckman Coulter recommends that you do not use a surge suppressor with the
Access 2 instrument. The instrument has built-in protection similar to that provided
by a surge suppressor.
Beckman Coulter does recommend that you use a surge suppressor with the external
computer, monitor, and printer. You should connect the surge suppressor to an outlet,
not a line conditioner.
Instrument Line Conditioning Transformers

If you suspect you have alternating current (AC) power line problems, Beckman
Coulter recommends that you connect the Access 2 system to a line conditioning
transformer with local ground and high frequency isolation.

C42385
2.1: Space and Environmental Requirements Access 2 Reference Manual
If you use a line conditioning transformer, it should meet the following requirements:
Minimum output capacity 1,300 V•A

Output voltage 120 or 240 V AC
Output frequency 50 or 60 Hz, single phase
Output wave form True sine wave (<5% distortion)
Output safety ground Isolated local ground
Approvals UL 1012, CSA C22.2 107.1 (UL 544,
optional)
Table 2-6 Line Conditioning Transformer Requirements
Instrument Backup Power Supplies (UPS Units)

If you want to use an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) unit as a backup power
supply, Beckman Coulter recommends a UPS unit with local ground isolation. UPS
units are designed to provide continuous AC power to equipment when the main AC
power line is lost. These units use a standby battery with an AC inverter circuit to
provide the required electrical output. Some units also provide various combinations
of the protection features found in surge suppressors and line conditioning
transformers. If your system is in a workgroup, the external computer acting as the
server for your workgroup should be connected to a UPS unit.
Your UPS unit should meet the following requirements:
Minimum output capacity 1,300 V•A

Output voltage 120 or 240 V AC
Output frequency 50 or 60 Hz, single phase
Output wave form True sine wave (<5% distortion)
Standby runtime Minimum 15 min at 1,000 W output (low
battery indicator and/or shutdown
recommended)
Approvals UL 1778, CSA C22.2 107.1 (UL 544,
optional)
Table 2-7 Backup Power Supply Requirements

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 2.2: Performance Characteristics
2.2 Performance Characteristics
The Access 2 instrument performance characteristics include instrument operating

characteristics and temperatures, luminometer performance, reaction vessel
characteristics, instrument capacities, and bar code hardware characteristics.
Instrument The Access 2 system has the following operating characteristics:

Operating
Warm up Cold Boot: At operational temperature, it will take 1 hour
Characteris-
maximum to enter the Ready mode.
tics
Warm Boot (rebooting using the reset button when the
instrument is at a controlled temperature): At
operational temperature, it will take 30 minutes maximum
to enter the Ready mode.
Instrument case The system will not report results when the instrument case
temperature temperature is outside the acceptable limits of 64 °F to 97
°F (18 °C to 36 °C). The instrument case temperature is
influenced by factors such as room temperature, air
circulation, heat sources near the system, and direct
sunlight.
Processing The system throughput depends on individual assay
speed protocols and the mix of assays in any run.
Maximum throughput:
• 100 test results per hour for one-step assays.
• 50 test results per hour for two-step assays.
Random access The instrument can run up to 24 different tests on any
sample, depending on available sample volume.
Table 2-8 Instrument Operating Characteristics

C42385
2.2: Performance Characteristics Access 2 Reference Manual
STAT access You can add STAT samples at any time during routine
operation. The instrument automatically reprioritizes the
remaining test requests for the onboard samples to run the
STAT sample first.
Continuous You can enter new test requests while other samples are in
access process. Some system supplies can be loaded during
processing.
Table 2-8 Instrument Operating Characteristics (continued)
Instrument The Access 2 instrument keeps temperature-sensitive devices and reagents within the
Temperatures following ranges:
Incubator 36.4315 °C ±0.3 °C

Reagent carousel 1 °C to 5 °C (This temperature range maintains
refrigeration unit the air and reagent temperature at 3 °C to 10 °C)
Substrate incubation zone 36.4315 °C ±0.2 °C
of wash/read carousel and
substrate when dispensed
Onboard samples Ambient temperature ±4 °C
Table 2-9 Instrument Temperatures
Luminometer The luminometer provides the following read precision and drift characteristics:
Performance
Read precision within a ≤0.2% CV
single reaction vessel
Drift ≤5% in 4 weeks
Table 2-10 Luminometer Performance

C42385
Reaction Ves- The Access 2 system reaction vessels (RVs) have the following properties:
sel Properties c
Size Diameter = 0.3 in (8 mm)

Height = 1.6 in (40 mm)
Composition Polypropylene
Maximum capacity 1 mL
Table 2-11 Reaction Vessel Characteristics
Database The Access 2 system database stores lot, ID, and test result data, as well as some
Capacities additional information. The system has a defined capacity for each item stored in the
database. The capacity is usually shared over the 1 to 4 instruments in the workgroup,
but is sometimes limited per instrument.
The following table lists the capacities of the system database:
.
Database Item System Capacity

Calibration Curves 1,400 per workgroup
Calibrator Lots 300 per workgroup
Control Lots 200 per workgroup
Control Ranges 1,000 per workgroup
Event Log Entries 2,400 per workgroup
Panels 100 per workgroup
Patient Sample IDs 100,000 per workgroup
QC Data Points 200,000 per workgroup
Racks 400 per workgroup
100 maximum per instrument
Reagent Packs 3,000 per workgroup
Reference Ranges 2,500 per workgroup
Sample IDs 100,000 per workgroup
Substrate Lots 400 per workgroup
Tests 200,000 per workgroup
Table 2-12 Database Capacities

C42385
Supply and The Access 2 instrument can hold a defined amount of supplies, reagents, RVs, liquid
Sample waste, and samples for processing. The system status buttons for supplies change
Capacities color when supplies are needed or a waste container is full. When the supply
capacities have been reached, you should replenish the depleted supplies, and empty
or replace full waste containers.
The following table lists the supply and sample capacities of the system:
Item Capacity Location
Liquid waste 4 L (300 tests) Liquid waste bottle

Patient samples 60 Sample carousel
Reaction vessels 294 RV supply area
(RVs)
300 RV waste bag
Reagent packs 24 Reagent carousel
Substrate 130 mL (600 tests) Substrate bottle
Wash buffer 3.95 L (300 tests) Wash buffer bottle (1.95 L)
Wash buffer reservoir (2 L)
Table 2-13 Instrument Capacities
For more information about system status buttons, see Section 1.3: Software
Overview in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Bar Code The Access 2 system has an external handheld bar code reader and an internal sample
Hardware Per- bar code reader. For some Access 2 systems the handheld bar code reader also
formance operates in a hands-free mode.
Properties Handheld Bar Code Reader Properties

The handheld bar code reader has the following performance properties:
Supported bar code Interleaved 2 of 5

symbologies CODABAR
CODE 39
CODE 93 (For Access 2 reagent pack and
substrate bottle labels)
CODE 128 (symbology supported, but no
parameter choices available)
Read distance Minimum and maximum distance determined
by symbol length, scan angle, print resolution,
contrast, and ambient light
Light source Handheld reader that does not operate in a
hands-free mode:
Dual LED array 630 to 670 nm
Handheld reader that operates in a
hands-free mode:
LED array 617 nm
Minimum readable module 7.5 mils (0.2 mm) at high resolution
dimensions or narrow
element width
Minimum reflectivity 37.5%
difference (MRD)
Table 2-14 Handheld Bar Code Reader Performance Properties

C42385
Internal Sample Bar Code Reader Properties

The internal sample bar code reader has the following performance properties:
Bar code symbologies Interleaved 2 of 5, with an odd or even

number of characters from 4 to 15
CODABAR, always 6 to 15 characters
CODE 39
CODE 128 (symbology supported, but no
parameter choics available)
Minimum readable module 7.49 mils (0.19 mm)
dimensions
Reflectance Light Bar: 0.50 minimum
Dark Bar: 0.10 maximum
Minimum reflectivity difference 37.5%
(MRD)
Table 2-15 Internal Sample Bar Code Reader Properties
Bar Code A bar code label consists of vertical black bars (the bar code), the equivalent
Label Specifi- characters printed underneath the bar code, and the quiet zones at either end of the bar
cations code. For a bar code label illustration, see Figure 2-16.
2
ABC123456789 3
0122E.eps
1 Quiet Zones
2 Bar Code
3 Bar Code Characters
Figure 2-16 Bar Code Label
The characters received into a field when you scan a bar code label are identical to the
characters printed below the bar code. However, if you disable the bar code check
digits, or start and stop characters during system configuration, the system does not
receive those characters into the field.

C42385
Sample tube bar code labels must meet the following specifications. Unless noted, the
label specifications for the internal bar code reader and the external bar code reader
are the same.
Quiet zones 10 x (ten times) the element width of the bar code,
with a minimum of 0.2 in (5 mm) at either end of label
Bar code length 3.0 in (80 mm) maximum, including quiet zones at
either end
Bar code height 0.39 in (10 mm) minimum
Minimum bar width 7.5 mils (0.2 mm) at high resolution
Symbology Must meet the requirements for the internal bar code
reader:
Interleaved 2 of 5
CODABAR
CODE 39
CODE 128 (symbology supported, but no parameter
choices available)
Print Quality Quality B or better, as specified in CLSI standard
AUTO2-A, Laboratory Automation: Bar Codes for
Specimen Container Identification
Label angular skew ≤±7.5° tilt
Bar code label Label should be printed on reflective, matte finish
background with a background diffuse reflectance of 70–80%
Bar code label ink 10% for internal bar code reader
color and type
25% for handheld bar code reader
(Maximum allowed
reflectance at the
reading wavelength)
Table 2-17 Sample Tube Bar Code Label Specifications
Beckman Coulter does not provide sample tube bar code labels. Sample rack bar code
labels matching the specifications listed above are provided with the racks, so you can
assign rack IDs according to the type of sample container you intend to use.
For information on the types of containers you can use and the rack IDs associated
with each, see Appendix A: Racks and Sample Containers in the Operator's Guide.
For information about how to configure the internal bar code reader and enable or
disable the bar code reader parameters, see Chapter 4: System Configuration.

C42385

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual :
3 Theory of Operation
3.1 Sample Processing Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Reaction Vessel Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2 Luminometer Calibration Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3 Assay Calibration Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Assay Calibration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Quantitative and Semi- Quantitative Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Qualitative Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.4 Quality Control Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.5 System Check Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Washed Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Substrate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Unwashed Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Clean Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Substrate: Washed Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Wash Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.6 Obstruction Detection Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

C42385
3.1: Sample Processing Theory Access 2 Reference Manual
3.1 Sample Processing Theory
Samples are processed on the Access 2 system by assigning them a position on a

sample rack, entering test requests for those samples, and then loading the sample
racks onto the instrument for processing.
A test request includes:

• A sample ID
• Specific sample information, such as patient ID and priority
• The tests to perform on each sample
For sample processing, the system provides random, continuous, and STAT access.
• Random access allows you to run any test on any sample, using the onboard
reagent packs.
• Continuous access allows you to schedule additional samples, replenish most
supplies, and change waste containers while the instrument is processing
samples.
• STAT access allows you to add or change the status of a test for immediate
processing.
Once the tests have been requested, the system schedules the tests as defined in the
assay protocol file (APF). The system processes samples in the following order:
• STAT patient samples
• Calibrators
• Quality controls and patient samples
Before the system begins processing samples, it automatically verifies the quantities
of onboard supplies and their expiration dates. The system prompts you if additional
supplies are required.
The system also verifies the calibration curve and reagent pack lot expiration date. If
either component is past its expiration, the system alerts you to replace the reagent
pack or recalibrate the assay.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 3.1: Sample Processing Theory
You can process samples using an expired calibration or an expired supply by

overriding the current conditions. The system flags any test results generated with an
expired calibration or supply in the Event Log and the test result report.
For an overview of system, instrument, and assay technology, see

Chapter 1: Technology Overview.
For more detailed information about sample processing, and verifying or overriding
supplies, see Chapter 4: Sample Processing in the Operator's Guide.
For more information about supplies, see Chapter 2: Supplies in the Operator's
Guide.
For more information about entering and editing test requests, or loading racks, see
Chapter 3: Sample Management in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Reaction Ves- The chemical reaction between patient sample and assay-specific reagents occurs in
sel Transport the reaction vessel (RV). During sample processing, the RV shuttle and incubator belt
move the RV along an assay-specific path through the instrument (see Figure 3-1).
The RV stops at various locations, depending on the processing stage and type of
assay. The assay protocol file (APF) for each assay determines how long the RV
remains at a location and what happens at that location.
The instrument moves the RV through the following stages:
Pipetting
RV moves from RV
supply to pipetting
position
Some 2-step assays Incubation

return RV to pipetting RV moves from
position for additional pipetting position to
sample or reagent incubator belt
Washing Some 2-step assays

RV moves from inc. belt return RV to pipetting
to wash position on position for additional
wash/read carousel sample or reagent
Substrate Addition
RV moves from wash
position to substrate
addition position
Luminometer
Reading
RV moves from
substrate to
luminometer position
Ejection
RV moves from
luminometer to inc. belt
and is ejected into RV
waste bag
0506A.wmf
Figure 3-1 RV Transport Flowchart

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 3.1: Sample Processing Theory
Pipetting
• The RV shuttle moves the preheated RV from the RV supply area to the
pipetting position.
• The main pipettor pipettes sample and reagents into the RV in an order
defined by the APF.
• The RV shuttle moves the RV from the pipetting position onto the incubator
belt.
For more information about the main pipettor module, see Section 1.2: Instrument
Technology.
Incubation
• The RV is incubated in the analytical module.
• The RV remains on the incubator belt for the time specified by the APF. The
system controls the module temperature to ensure optimal assay conditions.
• At the end of the incubation period, the incubator belt moves the RV to the
first of three wash positions on the wash/read carousel. For some two-step
assays, the incubator belt moves the RV back onto the RV shuttle, and from
the RV shuttle to the pipetting position for additional pipetting.
For more information about the analytical module, see Section 1.2: Instrument
Technology.
Washing
The RV is washed in the analytical module. Every wash cycle on the system consists
of the following three stages:
First Stage
• The first dispense probe dispenses wash buffer into the RV.
• Magnets draw the paramagnetic particles in the test reaction mixture to the side
of the RV.
• The aspirate probe aspirates the liquid out of the RV.

C42385
Second Stage
• The second dispense probe dispenses wash buffer into the RV.
• A mixer assembly spins the RV. These two actions resuspend the paramagnetic
particles in the wash buffer.
• Magnets draw the paramagnetic particles in the test reaction mixture to the side
of the RV.
• The second aspirate probe aspirates the liquid out of the RV.
Third Stage
• The system repeats the second wash cycle, using the third dispense probe to
dispense the wash buffer, and the third aspirate probe to aspirate the liquid out of
the RV.
• For some two-step assays, the incubator belt and RV shuttle move the RV back
to previous positions for additional pipetting, incubation, and washing.
• The wash/read carousel moves the RV to the substrate addition position.
Substrate Addition
• The substrate probe dispenses substrate into the RV in the wash/read
carousel.
• A mixer assembly spins the RV, which helps to resuspend the magnetic
particles and start the chemiluminescent reaction.
• The RV is incubated a short time as the wash wheel moves the RV to the
luminometer position on the wash/read carousel.
For more information about chemiluminescence, see Section 1.3: Assay Technology.
Luminometer Reading
• The luminometer reading occurs in the analytical module.
• The luminometer reads the RLUs generated by the chemiluminescent
reaction occurring in the RV.
For more information about the luminometer, see Section 1.2: Instrument
Technology.
Ejection
• The incubator belt removes the RV from the wash/read carousel.
• The RV shuttle ejects the RV from the incubator belt into the RV waste bag.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 3.2: Luminometer Calibration Theory
3.2 Luminometer Calibration Theory
Luminometer calibration ensures accurate relative light unit (RLU) readings by

verifying that the luminometer is reading within an acceptable range.
When the instrument is manufactured, a technician calibrates the luminometer against

a luminous standard. Thereafter, the Access 2 system calibrates the luminometer
automatically.
The luminometer is part of the analytical module. To calibrate the luminometer, the
instrument uses a light emitting diode (LED) as an onboard reference standard to
maintain luminometer reading consistency. The LED, located on the wash/read
carousel directly across from the luminometer, is automatically read at
preprogrammed intervals. The system calculates a correction factor based on the LED
reading and applies this factor to all RLU measurements.
For a diagram of the luminometer and analytical module, see Section 1.2: Instrument
Technology.

C42385
3.3: Assay Calibration Theory Access 2 Reference Manual
3.3 Assay Calibration Theory
Assay calibrations are used to establish values that the system uses to report test
results for patient and quality control samples on an instrument.
The Access 2 system supports three types of assay calibrations. The calibrations differ
in the way they calculate and report test results.
• Quantitative
• Semi-quantitative
• Qualitative
To report a test result, the system requires a current calibration for each requested test.
The number of calibrators required, the math model, and all other calibration
parameters are defined in the assay protocol file (APF) for each assay, and by the
information you enter into the system when you set up a new calibrator set.
A calibration should be performed when:
• The current calibration has expired.
• A new reagent pack lot is used.
• Preventive maintenance has been performed on the system, or a major system
component has been repaired or replaced.
• Quality control data indicates a new calibration may be necessary.
For assay-specific calibration information, see the calibrator reagent instructions for
use.
For more information about setting up calibrators, see Section 6.4: Setting Up
Calibrators in the Operator's Guide.
For more information about entering calibration test requests, see Section 3.3:
Calibration Test Requests in the Operator's Guide.
For more information about reviewing calibration test results, see Section 6.2:
Reviewing Calibration Data in the Operator's Guide.
For more information about interpreting a failed calibration,
see Appendix A: Troubleshooting.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 3.3: Assay Calibration Theory
Assay Cali- The Access 2 system performs the following types of assay calibrations:
bration Types
Quantitative Calibrator test results provide a multi-point calibration
curve.
The system uses the calibration curve to convert a
measured response in RLUs to an analyte concentration
and then expresses the result in numerical units.
Semi-Quantitative Calibrator test results provide a multi-point calibration
curve.
The system uses the calibration curve to convert a
measured response in RLUs to an analyte concentration
and then expresses the result in numerical units.
These assays may report their quantitative result as a
qualitative interpretation, such as reactive, non-reactive,
or equivocal.
Qualitative Calibrator test results provide a cutoff value based on a
predefined formula.
The system compares a test result to the cutoff value and
then classifies the result as reactive or non-reactive for
the analyte.
Table 3-2 Types of Assay Calibrations
Quantitative To calibrate these assays, calibrators with known analyte concentrations are tested
and Semi- and the instrument measures the RLU response. The Access 2 system derives a
Quantitative mathematical relationship between the measured response and the analyte
concentration. This mathematical relationship is called a calibration curve. The shape
Calibration
of the curve is determined by the math model used.
Acceptance Criteria
For quantitative and semi-quantitative assays, the system uses the precision profile
method to determine if the calibration meets acceptance criteria. The precision profile
method consists of three steps:
1. Fitting calibration data using the defined math model for that assay.
2. Calculating predicted precision at various analyte concentrations.
3. Comparing predicted precisions and the defined limits for that assay.

C42385
Fitting Calibration Data to a Defined Math Model

The system uses one of the following calibration math models to fit assay calibration
data to a curve:
• Weighted four parameter logistic curve (4PLC)
• Weighted smoothing spline with no inflection points
• Straight line
Because the precision of an assay varies at each analyte concentration, the system
uses weight constants when fitting calibration curve data.
Individual calibrator replicates are used to calculate the calibration curve. As the
system fits the calibration data to the math model, it tries to minimize the distance of
the individual calibrator data points from the calculated curve by adjusting the curve
parameters. If the system reaches a maximum number of tries without calculating an
acceptable curve, the calibration fails. During processing, if a single calibrator
replicate is flagged with a fatal error, the system can ignore it and fit the remaining
data to a curve. If more than one replicate is flagged with a fatal error, the calibration
fails.
Another method for fitting calibration data compares the coefficient of variation
(%CV) of the zero (S0) calibrator RLU replicates to a predefined limit. If the %CV is
outside this limit, the calibration fails.
Calculating Predicted Precision

After an acceptable calibration curve is obtained, the system calculates an error band
around the curve. This calculation is based on the distance of the calibration data
points from the curve (see Figure 3-3). The system uses the calibration data and the
shape of the math model to predict the precision at the predefined analyte
concentrations.

C42385
Comparing Predicted Precision to Defined Limits

The system compares the calculated predicted precision to the limits defined in the
APF. If the result for any analyte concentration is outside the acceptable limits
defined by the error band, the calibration fails.
2
1
0125B.eps
1 Precision
2 Error Band (the Width of the Error Band is Exaggerated for
Illustration Purposes)
3 X Axis: Analyte Concentration
4 Y Axis: RLUs
Figure 3-3 Graphical Representation of an Error Band
Calculating Test Results

To determine the analyte concentration in a sample, the system must have a current
(accepted) calibration curve. When the patient or quality control sample is tested, the
system measures the RLUs and then uses the calibration curve to convert the result to
an analyte concentration.

C42385
Qualitative To calibrate a qualitative assay, calibrators with known analyte reactivity are tested
Calibration and the instrument measures the response in RLUs. A calibrator set will contain both
a reactive and non-reactive calibrator. A qualitative assay calibration is accepted if all
of the individual calibrator replicates and replicate means are within the defined
limits. The system uses the calibrator results to calculate a cutoff. The cutoff is used to
classify test results.
Qualitative Acceptance Criteria

The limits for calibration acceptance are applied to the following items:
• Each replicate of the reactive and non-reactive calibrators.
• The mean of the reactive and non-reactive calibrator replicates.
The APF determines the number of replicates that must be within the RLU limits for
the system to accept the assay calibration. Two or more replicates of each calibrator
must be within the acceptable limits, because each mean must be calculated using at
least two replicates. If the system cannot calculate the mean, or the calculated mean
fails to meet the specified criteria, the calibration fails.
For some qualitative assays, the APF defines acceptable limits for the %CV of the
RLUs obtained for replicates of each calibrator. If the %CV obtained is outside these
limits, the calibration fails.
Calculating Qualitative Test Results

To determine the reactivity of a sample, the system uses the reactive and non-reactive
calibrator results to calculate a cutoff based on a predefined formula. The patient or
quality control sample is then tested for reactivity. The system compares the RLU
measurement of a patient or quality control test result to the cutoff, and classifies the
sample as reactive or non-reactive for the analyte.
Confirmatory Assays
For some qualitative assays, a reactive test result must be confirmed with a
confirmatory assay. The confirmatory assay may consist of one or two tests. For a one
test confirmatory assay, the results of both the screening test and the confirmatory test
are evaluated together to determine whether the reactive result is confirmed. For a two
test confirmatory assay, the results of the two confirmatory tests are evaluated
together.
The formula for evaluating a test result is provided in the reagent instructions for use.
To protect against the possibility of erroneous results due to events such as sample
contamination, dilution, and evaporation, the system will not calculate confirmatory

C42385
result ratios for any sample in a rack if the Get Selected Rack F6 command is used
between the times the tests used in the calculation are aspirated.
To be sure that a confirmatory result is calculated by the system, use one of the
following methods.
• Load the sample and request both tests needed for the confirmatory result at
the same time.
• Load the sample, run the first test needed for the confirmatory result, then run
the second test without using the Get Selected Rack F6 command between
the first and second tests.
For more information about entering test requests, see Section : Test Requests Screen
in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
3.4: Quality Control Theory Access 2 Reference Manual
3.4 Quality Control Theory
Quality controls are samples of known reactivity. You run quality controls along with
patient samples to monitor analytical variation on your Access 2 instrument, and to
ensure the validity of the patient results. Quality controls are also run following
instrument maintenance or repair to verify the assay calibration.
To simulate the characteristics of true patient samples, quality controls are prepared
from materials similar to the patient samples being tested. For example, if an assay
specifies serum as the patient sample type to test, the controls should be serum based.
Several quality controls of varying levels of reactivity should be included in a run to
cover the entire measuring range of the assay.
A laboratory should establish its own acceptable performance ranges for each control
level. The manufacturer's suggested ranges may be used until an adequate number of
tests have been processed to determine a lot-specific mean and standard deviation for
each level.
The Access 2 system monitors the performance of quality controls that you have
defined in the QC Setup screen. When you set up a quality control lot, you enter the
expected mean test result value and the expected standard deviation (SD) from the
mean. The system uses statistical analysis to compare quality control test results to the
acceptable range of expected values configured in the system.
You can also set up the system to apply Westgard QC rules to quality control test
results. The system alerts you if a quality control test result is not within the
acceptable range of expected values, or if it violates an applied QC rule.
For more information about setting up quality controls, establishing QC ranges, and
enabling QC rules, see Chapter 7: Quality Controls in the Operator's Guide.
For more information about entering quality control test requests, see Section 3.4:
Quality Control Test Requests in the Operator's Guide.
For more information about reviewing quality control test results, see Section 7.2:
Reviewing Quality Control Charts and Data in the Operator's Guide.
For more information about interpreting a failed quality control test result,

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 3.5: System Check Theory
3.5 System Check Theory
The System Check routine is designed to verify system performance. You run the
System Check routine weekly to confirm that system performance is within expected
parameters. You run the routine or individual system checks when troubleshooting
system performance.
A better understanding of the System Check routine may assist you in diagnosing and
fixing a problem.
The following table correlates the individual system check with the function or
component that it verifies:
Function or Component Tested Portion of System Check Routine

Reaction vessel (RV) wash system • Clean check
• Washed check
• Wash efficiency
Substrate and substrate dispense system All
Main pipettor module Unwashed check
Luminometer All
Mixing system Washed check
Aspirate probes • Clean check
• Substrate check ratio
• Washed check
• Wash efficiency
For information about running the System Check routine, see Section 8.4: System
Check in the Operator's Guide.
For information about running individual system checks, see Section 5.11: Individual
System Checks.
For information about troubleshooting your System Check routine results,

C42385
3.5: System Check Theory Access 2 Reference Manual
Washed The washed check evaluates the performance of the RV wash and mixing systems.
Check
During the washed check, the main pipettor:
• Pipettes 150 µL of undiluted System Check Solution into ten RVs.
• Performs three wash cycles on each RV.
• Pipettes 200 µL of substrate into each RV.
• Measures the RLUs of each RV with the luminometer.
Each wash cycle should reduce the final concentration of System Check Solution in
the RV by a factor of at least 100. After washing, the mean for all ten RVs should be
within 5,000-20,000 RLUs, and the %CV should be <12%.
If the results are not within the acceptable limits, the performance of the RV wash
and/or mixing systems may be compromised.
Substrate The substrate check evaluates the performance of the substrate dispense system and
Check the luminometer.
During the substrate check, the system:

• Pipettes 200 µL of substrate into ten RVs. No other solution or reagent is
added to the RVs, and the RVs are not washed.
The mean, standard deviation (SD), and %CV results for the substrate check are
calculated from the RLU readings of the last six RVs. This is because the aspirate
probe touches the bottom of the first four RVs when the wash arm is lowered during
the clean check. If the probe is dirty, or if there are other problems with the aspirate
system, the probe could leave behind a small amount of fluid in each of these RVs,
increasing the RLU reading. Therefore, these RVs are not included in the statistical
calculations.
The acceptable range for the substrate check is 5,000-9,000 RLUs. The %CV should
be <5%. If either of these two results are not within the specified limits, the
performance of the substrate dispense probe or the luminometer may be
compromised.
Substrate Ratio
The substrate ratio is a calculation based upon the results from the substrate check. To
obtain a substrate ratio result you must run the entire System Check routine.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 3.5: System Check Theory
The substrate ratio is calculated by dividing the highest RLU reading from the first
four RVs by the mean RLU result for the last six RVs. The calculated ratio should be
<1.4. If the ratio is >1.4, the performance of the aspirate probes may be compromised.
Unwashed The unwashed check evaluates the precision of the main pipettor module.
Check
During the unwashed check, the main pipettor:
• Pipettes 50 µL of diluted System Check Solution into ten RVs. The RVs are
not washed.
The RLUs for the unwashed check will be significantly higher than the washed check
because of the chemical reaction that occurs between the System Check Solution and
the substrate.
The %CV for all ten RVs should be <2%. If the substrate check results are acceptable,
but the unwashed check %CV result fails to meet specifications, the precision of the
main pipettor may be compromised.
The expected range for the unwashed check is 4-10 million RLUs. This range is not a
system specification, but it can be used as a reference guideline. If the mean RLU
result is not within this range, there may have been an error in preparing the diluted
System Check Solution.
Clean Check The clean check evaluates the performance of the pipetting, washing, and substrate
delivery functions. This check is performed as part of the System Check routine, and
cannot be requested as an individual check.
During the clean check, the system:

• Pipettes 150 µL of wash buffer to five RVs.
• Performs three wash cycles on each RV.
The clean check results should be examined to ensure that there is no significant
decline in RLU value from the first to the last RV. This type of RLU decrease could
be caused by carryover occurring in the wash/read carousel.

C42385
3.5: System Check Theory Access 2 Reference Manual
Substrate: The substrate:washed ratio is a calculation based upon the results from the substrate
Washed Ratio and washed checks. To obtain a substrate:washed ratio result you must run the entire
System Check routine.
The substrate:washed ratio is calculated by dividing the substrate check mean RLU
value by the washed check mean RLU value. The calculated ratio should be
within 0 and 1.25. If the ratio is outside this range, it is possible that System Check
Solution was not used when running the washed check, or the substrate supply is
contaminated.
Wash Effi- Wash efficiency is a calculation based upon the results from the washed, substrate,
ciency and unwashed checks. To obtain a wash efficiency result you must run the entire
The wash efficiency result is calculated as follows:
1. The system calculates the volume factor.

(washed volume ÷ unwashed volume) x unwashed dilution ratio
(150 µL ÷ 50 µL) x 501 = 1,503
The volume factor is a constant value that never changes
2. The system calculates the washed mean RLUs reduced by the substrate
mean RLUs.
(washed mean RLUs - substrate mean RLUs)
3. The system multiplies the unwashed mean RLUs by the volume factor, and
then reduces the value by the substrate mean RLUs.
(unwashed mean RLUs x 1,503) - substrate mean RLUs
4. The system calculates the wash efficiency in ppm using the results from
step 2 and step 3.
(step 2 result ÷ step 3 result) x 1,000,000
If the wash efficiency result from step 4 is >-1.0 and <1.0 ppm, the result is
acceptable. If the result is <-1.0 or >1.0 ppm, the performance of the wash system
may be compromised.
NOTE
If the washed check RLUs are low, or if the substrate check RLUs are high, the
wash efficiency result could result in a number <-1. This could mean that the
substrate system is contaminated.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 3.6: Obstruction Detection Theory
3.6 Obstruction Detection Theory
An Access 2 instrument equipped with a pressure monitor can detect an obstruction in

the primary probe while aspirating sample by monitoring the pressure required to
draw a sample.
If the pressure required to draw a sample exceeds an accepted threshold, the test is
cancelled and flagged with the CLT (obstruction) fatal flag, and an event is logged. If
two consecutive failures occur on the same sample, any remaining tests for that
sample are cancelled. If five consecutive failures occur, the system stops scheduling
tests and goes to the Not Ready mode when the tests in progress are completed. The
operator must then initialize the system and inspect, clean, or replace the probe as
necessary. For an overview of the obstruction detection process, see Figure 3-4.
Pressure Monitor Reference Curve Determination

The system determines a reference curve for the pressure monitor by measuring the
pressure profiles for two different sample volumes. The reference curve is used to
identify the expected pressure profile for any given sample volume.
A reference curve is determined when the obstruction detection hardware is installed.

Determine a new curve after the main pipettor is cleared of an obstruction; after the
main pipettor, pressure sensor, or associated tubing is replaced; when following
troubleshooting instructions; or as instructed by a technical support representative.
For more information, see Determining a Reference Curve for Obstruction Detection
in Section 5.6: Analog and Digital Device Diagnostics.
NOTE
The reference curve has no impact on reagent pack monitoring, which is also a
function of the pressure monitor.

C42385
3.6: Obstruction Detection Theory Access 2 Reference Manual
Aspirate the sample.
Was an
obstruction No Process the sample.
detected?
Yes
Cancel the test, wash the probe, log a

warning event, and apply the CLT flag
to test.
Two
consecutive Five
CLT flags for the No consecutive CLT No Continue processing with the next test.
same sample? flags?
Yes Yes
Cancel all remaining tests for the Log a fatal warning event. Stop
sample, wash the probe, log a warning scheduling new tests. Complete any
event, and apply the CLT flag to the tests in progress, then go to the
sample. Not Ready mode.
Continue processing with the next

sample.
1030A.wmf
Figure 3-4 Obstruction Detection Flowchart

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4: System Configuration
4 System Configuration
4.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2 System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Changing the System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Selecting the Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Viewing System Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Setting the Date and Time Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Changing the System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Setting Up Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Automatically Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Selecting a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.3 Bar Code Reader Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Sample Bar Code Reader Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Bar Code Reader Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

C42385
4: System Configuration Access 2 Reference Manual
4.4 Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Tests Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Assigning Unique Test IDs to Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Enabling and Disabling Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Changing Default Sample Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Changing the Decimal Precision of Test Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Applying Filters and Sort Orders for Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Editing a Unit of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Setting a Gray Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Setting a Dilution Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Printing Tests Setup and Ranges Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Updating an APF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.5 Test Panels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Test Panels Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Assigning Unique Test IDs to Test Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Enabling and Disabling Test Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Applying a Test Panels Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Adding a Test Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Editing a Test Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Deleting a Test Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Printing the Test Panels Setup Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.6 Derived Result Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Derived Results Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Enabling and Disabling a Derived Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Changing the Decimal Precision of a Derived Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Adding a Derived Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4: System Configuration
Editing a Derived Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Deleting a Derived Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Printing Derived Results Setup Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.7 Ranges Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Ranges Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Adding a Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Editing a Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Clearing a Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.8 Reflex Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Reflex Test Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Reflex Test Condition Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Reflex Tests Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Enabling and Disabling Reflex Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Selecting Replicates for a Reflex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Suppressing a Reflex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Adding a Reflex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Editing a Reflex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Deleting a Reflex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Printing the Reflex Tests Setup Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4.9 LIS Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
LIS Setup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Connecting One PC and Instrument to the LIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Transmitting Data to the LIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Enabling and Disabling Host Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Configuring the Global LIS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Configuring the LIS Send Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

C42385
: Access 2 Reference Manual
4.10 PC Administration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
PC Admin Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Scheduling System Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Performing Immediate System Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Replacing the Backup Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Restoring System Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Setting the Auto-Delete Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.1: System Configuration
4.1 System Configuration
A Beckman Coulter technical support representative installs the Access 2 system in

your laboratory. During the installation, the technical support representative works
with your laboratory to determine certain system parameters that are unique to your
lab and rarely change. The parameters include configuring server and workgroup
settings, and establishing an LIS connection.
Once the system is installed, you will configure other system parameters from time to
time using the setup procedures in this chapter. You can configure the following
system parameters:
• System (see Section 4.2: System Setup)
• Bar Code Reader (see Section 4.3: Bar Code Reader Setup)
• Tests (see Section 4.4: Test Setup)
• Test panels (see Section 4.5: Test Panels Setup)
• Derived results (see Section 4.6: Derived Result Setup)
• Ranges (see Section 4.7: Ranges Setup)
• Reflex tests (see Section 4.8: Reflex Test Setup)
• Laboratory Information Systems (LIS) (see Section 4.9: LIS Setup)
• PC Admin (see Section 4.10: PC Administration Setup)
NOTE
With the exception of the PC Admin parameters, the bar code reader, and the
system time, you can configure system parameters when the system is in any of
the four modes (Ready, Running, Paused, or Not Ready).
You can document any changes to the system setup by printing the updated screen or
window using [Print Screen] on the keyboard.
For an overview of system configuration, see Figure 4-1.

C42385
4.1: System Configuration Access 2 Reference Manual
Serial Number
Server and Workgroup Settings
System Setup System ID, Date, Time, and Language
Bar Code Reader and Password
Laboratory Information for Reports
System Backup
Schedule Setup
LIS
Available? No
Yes
Configure LIS
Test Setup Unit of Measure, Sample Types, Ranges,

Test IDs, Gray Zones, Decimal Precision,
Dilution Factor
Test Panel Derived Result Reflex Test

Setup Setup Setup
0845b.wmf
Figure 4-1 System Configuration Flowchart

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.1: System Configuration
Configure You use the Configure menu to:

Menu • Select the screens you use to set up your system
• Display configuration information about the system
To get to this menu from the Main Menu, select Configure F8.
0793B.bmp
Figure 4-2 Configure Menu
System Setup F1 (Button) Select to display the System Setup screen. You use this screen to set the
Access 2 system values for the date and time, language, password administration,
laboratory information, and print options.
For more information about system setup, see Section 4.2: System Setup.
Tests F2 (Button) Select to display the Tests screen. You use this screen to enable, disable, and
define tests.
For more information about tests, see Section 4.4: Test Setup.
Table 4-3 Configure Menu Descriptions

C42385
4.1: System Configuration Access 2 Reference Manual
Test Panels F3 (Button) Select to display the Test Panels screen. You use this screen to enable,
disable, and define test panels of two or more tests to be performed on a sample.
For more information about test panels, see Section 4.5: Test Panels Setup.
Derived (Button) Select to display the Derived Results screen. You use this screen to enable,
Results F4 disable, and define the mathematical formulas that operate on test results to report
additional derived results.
For more information about derived results, see Section 4.6: Derived Result Setup.
Reflex Tests F5 (Button) Select to display the Reflex Tests screen. You use this screen to enable,
disable, and define reflex tests, which are tests automatically requested, based on
preceding test results.
For more information about reflex tests, see Section 4.8: Reflex Test Setup.
LIS F6 (Button) Select to display the LIS Setup window. If your laboratory has an LIS, you
use this window to set up interface parameters between the LIS and the system.
For more information about the LIS, see Section 4.9: LIS Setup.
PC Admin F7 (Button) Select to display the PC Admin screen. You use this screen to backup and
restore system data, and shut down the PC.
For more information about PC Admin, see Section 4.10: PC Administration Setup.
About (Button) Select to display the About Access 2 window. You use this window to view
Access 2 F8 license and Technical Support information about the Access 2 system.
Table 4-3 Configure Menu Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.2: System Setup
4.2 System Setup
You can customize the operation of your Access 2 instrument for your laboratory
using the setup procedures in this section. Unless otherwise noted, your changes
affect only the system you are working on, not the entire workgroup. You can change
the following system parameters:
• System settings: Date, time, date and time formats, language, and password
• Laboratory information: Name, address, and telephone number
• Print options: Printer selection and automatic report printing
Your changes to the system parameters occur immediately.

C42385
4.2: System Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
System Setup You use the System Setup screen to:

Screen • Set the system date and time (and how they are formatted)
• Change the system ID
• Change the language
• Set up the internal bar code readers
• Set the system password
• View the instrument serial number, software revisions, and hardware
revisions
• Define laboratory information and printing options for reports
You access the System Setup screen from the Configure menu.
0794C.bmp
Figure 4-4 System Setup Screen

C42385
System ID (Field) Displays the system ID. You can also use the field to change the system ID.
The system ID identifies the system in screens, windows, or reports that show
individual system information for the workgroup.
Language (Field) Displays the language for the information on the screen, in the Help system,
and in reports. You can also use this field to select the language that is appropriate for
your laboratory.
Instrument Serial (Field) Displays the serial number of the Access 2 instrument.
Number The serial number cannot be changed. It is defined by Beckman Coulter at the factory
and is unique for each instrument.
Reagent Bar (Field) Displays the status of the internal Reagent Bar Code Reader.
Code Reader Values are: Enabled, or Disabled
NOTE: This field is available only on instruments with an internal reagent bar code
reader (available on instruments with serial numbers ≥570000).
Date Format (Field) Displays the date format used by the system. Date formats indicate the order
that the day, month, and year are entered and displayed. Formats also indicate the
separator used between the day, month, and year. Changing the date format affects
the way the date displays and prints on the screens and reports. You can use this field
to select the date format that is appropriate for you laboratory.
Values are: MM/DD/YY, MM-DD-YY, YY.MM.DD, DD/MM/YY, DD.MM.YY,
DD-MM-YY, YY/MM/DD, YYMMDD, DD MON YY, and DDMMYY
• DD is the numeric day of the month (for example, 15)

• MM or MON is the numeric or abbreviated month (for example, 03 = March or
MAR = March)
• YY is the numeric year (for example, 00 = 2000)
Time Format (Field) Displays the time format used by the system. The time format affects the way
the time displays and prints on the screens and reports. You can use this field to
select the time format that is appropriate for your laboratory.
Values are: 12 hour (am/pm) and 24 hour
Date/Time Date — (Field) Displays the current date in the selected format for all of the
Settings instruments in the workgroup.
Time — (Field) Displays the current time in the selected format for all of the
instruments in the workgroup.
NOTE: This field is displayed on the server system only.
Table 4-5 System Setup Screen Descriptions

C42385
System (Button) Select to display the System Revisions window. The window displays the
Revisions F1 system software and hardware revisions.
Bar Code Reader (Button) Select to display the Bar Code Reader Setup window. You use the window
Setup F2 to enable or disable the internal reagent bar code reader or the internal sample bar
code reader and to configure the internal sample bar code reader to read the
symbologies you use in your lab.
Set Workgroup (Button) Select to display the Set Workgroup Time window. You use the window to
Date/Time F3 set the time and date for the workgroup.
NOTES:
• This button is displayed on the server system only.
• Changing the date and time on the server changes the date and time on the
workgroup systems.
• Changing the date and time may affect derived results or reflex tests, which
function on results generated within a time frame.
Password (Button) Select to display the Password Setup window. You use the window to
Setup F5 change the system password, if you are authorized.
Table 4-5 System Setup Screen Descriptions (continued)
Changing the Use this procedure to change the system ID, for the individual system you are
System ID working on, not for the workgroup.
1. Go to the System Setup screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu, select
Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select System Setup F1.
2. Select the System ID field. Type the new system ID.
You can make the system ID a maximum of 50 alphanumeric characters.
NOTE
Changing the system ID of an instrument in a workgroup may change the selected
instruments in some quality control and test result filters. Test and update the
filters that you have applied or defined to be sure that the filters operate as
expected.

C42385
Selecting the Use this procedure to select the language used on the screens, Help system, and
Language reports, only for the individual system you are working on, not for the workgroup.
NOTES
• Each system in a workgroup may display and print a different language.
• When either the Japanese or Simplified Chinese language option is selected,
some fields accept data entry using Japanese Katakana or Simplified Chinese
characters.
2. Write down the current date and time format settings. When you change the
language setting, these formats revert to the default settings. For more
information, see the Setting the Date and Time Formats procedure.
3. Select the Language list to display the language options. Select the language that
is appropriate for your laboratory.
The screen text is displayed in the new language.
NOTES
• If you select an unrecognizable language, contact Technical Support to help
you select the appropriate language.
• If you changed the language to or from the Chinese (Simplified) or Japanese
languages, you must configure Microsoft® Windows® options to allow the
system to display and print language-specific characters properly. Refer to
the documentation that shipped with your system software for instructions on
configuring Windows® options.
Viewing Sys- Use this procedure to view the system revisions.

tem Revisions
NOTE
To view the Access 2 system software version number, go to the Main Menu.

C42385
2. Select System Revisions F1 to display the System Revisions window.
The System Revisions window displays the following information:

• APF revision number
• PC software revision number
• PC operating system revision number
• Instrument serial number
• Instrument operating system revision number
• Instrument software revision number
• Stepper motor controller printed circuit board type (SMC Firmware)
• Stepper driver printed circuit board revision number
• Power driver printed circuit board revision number
• Ultrasonic printed circuit board revision number
• Instrument Backplane printed circuit board revision number
• Instrument I/O printed circuit board revision number and part number
3. Select OK F1 to exit the window.
Setting the Use this procedure to set the date and time for the workgroup.
Date and Time
NOTES
• The Date/Time Settings fields are displayed on the server system only.
• To set the date and time formats, see the Setting the Date and Time Formats
procedure.
• If your lab is in an area with seasonal time changes such as daylight saving
time, remember to reset the workgroup time when the changes occur.
WARNINGS
• If you set the date forward one or more days, the Auto-Delete function may
delete unexpected patient test and QC results from the database. For more
information about deleting results, see the Setting the Auto-Delete Function
procedure in Section 4.10: PC Administration Setup.
• Changing the date and time may affect derived results or reflex tests, which
function on results generated within a time frame.
1. Confirm that the system is in the Ready or Not Ready mode.

C42385
3. Select Set Workgroup Date/Time F3.

The Set WorkGroup Date/Time window is displayed.
4. In the Date field, enter the current date in the format for your system.
5. In the Time field, enter the current time in the format for your system.
6. Select OK F1 to save and apply the changes and exit the window.
Setting the Use this procedure to set the date and time formats for the system.
Date and Time
NOTES
Formats
• Each system in a workgroup may display and print a different date and time
format.
• If you change the language setting, the date and time formats revert to the
default settings.
• When you enter dates and times elsewhere in the system, you must follow the
format set on the System Setup screen.
2. Select the Date Format list to display the list of date format options. Select the
date format that is appropriate for your laboratory.
3. Select the Time Format list to display the list of format options. Select the time
format that is appropriate for your laboratory.

C42385
Changing the The following functions are secured by password:

System Pass- • Deleting test result data (see Section 5.3: Managing Test Results in the
word Operator's Guide)
• Deleting a QC point (see Section 7.2: Reviewing Quality Control Charts and
Data in the Operator's Guide)
• Deleting Quality Controls (see Section 7.4: Setting Up Quality Controls inthe
Operator's Guide)
• Performing PC backup functions (see Section 4.10: PC Administration
Setup)
• Setting the Auto-Delete function (see Section 4.10: PC Administration
Setup)
• Restarting the PC, depending on the version of your PC (see
Section 7.3: Rebooting, Shutting Down, and Restarting Procedures)
If your laboratory has authorized you to do so, use this procedure to change the
system password.
NOTES
• The Password Setup F5 button is available only on the server system.
• Your password is case sensitive.
• The password you set on the server system is valid on all of the systems in
the workgroup.
• To keep your password private, asterisks display in the field when you type
your password.
2. Select Password Setup F5 to display the Password Setup window.

3. In the Current Password field, type the current password.
NOTES
• If you do not know the current password, contact the lab supervisor.
• The default password is Access2Admin. However, you should change this
password immediately after your system is installed.
• If you cannot remember or find the current password, contact Technical
Support.
4. In the New Password field, enter the new password.
5. In the Confirm New Password field, enter the new password again.

C42385
Setting Up Use this procedure to define general laboratory information. The system prints the
Reports general laboratory information in the headers of all reports for this instrument. You
can set up different header information on different instruments in the workgroup.
NOTES
• All fields on the Reports Setup window are optional. If you leave a field
blank, the corresponding line on the report is skipped and the next line rises
in its place.
• Do not use double quotation marks (" ") in the Reports Setup window fields.
• Your report header information changes take effect immediately and will
appear on all subsequent reports.
2249B.bmp
Figure 4-6 Reports Setup Window
Report Header (6 Fields) You use the Report Header Information fields to
Information type the information for your laboratory. The information
appears at the top of all reports printed from the system.
Table 4-7 Reports Setup Window Descriptions

C42385
Auto Print (4 Boxes) Select the reports to print automatically when the
corresponding tests are complete or cancelled.
If the Continuous Sample Report box is selected, you can
select another box to add the patient name to the report.
For examples of the reports, see Figure 5-35, Figure 5-37,
and Figure 6-12 in the Operator's Guide.
Printer (Field) Select the printer connected to your system from the
list.
Table 4-7 Reports Setup Window Descriptions (continued)
Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, thenselect System Setup F1,
2. Select Reports Setup F7 to display the Reports Setup window.
3. Fill in the appropriate information for your lab in the Report Header Information
fields. You can enter a maximum of 56 alphanumeric characters in each field.
 (Optional) In the Institution field, type the institution name.
 (Optional) In the Lab Name field, type the laboratory name.
 (Optional) In the Address 1 field, type the first line of the laboratory address.
 (Optional) In the Address 2 field, type the second line of the laboratory address.
 (Optional) In the Telephone field, type the laboratory telephone number.
 (Optional) In the Director field, type the laboratory director's name.

C42385
Automatically Use this procedure to select which reports to print automatically.

Printing
Reports Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select System Setup F1,
2. Select Reports Setup F7 to display the Reports Setup window.
3. In the Auto Print boxes, select the reports that you want to print automatically
when the samples are complete or cancelled.
For information about the Sample Report or Continuous Sample Report, see
Section 5.4: Test Result Reports in the Operator's Guide.
For information about the Calibration Report, see Section 6.3: Calibration Reports in
Selecting a One or more printers are configured for your system during installation of the
System Access 2 system. Use this procedure to select the printer from which to print reports
Printer or to print what is displayed on the monitor (using the [Print Screen] key) for this
instrument only.
Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select System Setup F1,
2. Select Reports Setup F7 to go to the Reports Setup window.
3. Select a printer from the Printer list.

C42385
4.3: Bar Code Reader Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
4.3 Bar Code Reader Setup
The internal sample bar code reader reads the printed bar code labels on sample tubes
and racks. The bar code reader can read the following bar code symbologies:
• Interleaved 2 of 5 (Sample IDs only)
• CODABAR (Sample IDs only)
• CODE 39 (Sample IDs only)
• CODE 128 (Racks and Sample IDs)
You can select what encoded information is included in the sample ID by enabling or
disabling the available bar code parameters.
The internal reagent bar code reader (available on instruments with serial numbers
≥570000) reads the printed bar code label on the reagent packs. There are no
parameters to set for the reagent bar code reader. The bar code reader is programmed
to read the bar code symbology used on the reagent pack labels. The internal reagent
bar code reader must be enabled before it can read the reagent pack bar code labels.
Sample Bar Enabling or disabling the available sample bar code reader parameters changes the
Code Reader information that is encoded in the sample ID. Parameters include check digits,
Parameters start/stop characters, and the number of bar code characters to send to the system.
NOTE
No parameter choices are available for CODE 128 symbology.
If you are not sure which parameters to enable, consult the manufacturer's bar code
printer documentation or contact the supplier of your printed bar code labels.
NOTE
The bar code parameters that are configured for the Access 2 system must match
the available parameters for the bar code symbology that is used on your printed
bar code labels. If, after consulting your bar code printer information, you cannot

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.3: Bar Code Reader Setup
identify which bar code or bar code parameters you need to configure, contact
Technical Support.
Table 4-8 lists the available parameters for the bar code symbologies that are
supported by the sample bar code reader.
Available Parameters
Symbology Check Digit Send Characters in Bar

On Send Start/Stop Code to Send
Interleaved * * not available odd or even number

2 of 5 from 4 to 15*
CODABAR    not specified
CODE 39    not specified
CODE 128 No parameter choices
Table 4-8 Available Bar Code Parameters

* For Interleaved 2 of 5, the bar code must be an even number of characters. If check digit is en-
abled, but sending check digit is not, an odd number of characters are required in the Charac-
ters field, from 5 to 15. Otherwise, an even number of characters are required in the
Characters field, from 4 to 14.
Check Digit On
Some bar code technologies can add a check digit to the bar code. The system
calculates the check digit using a standard formula applied to the characters or digits
encoded in the bar code. When you use a check digit, a higher degree of data integrity
is supplied to the system than when a check digit is not used. When it is used, the bar
code reader also calculates the check digit and verifies that the scanned bar code
matches the calculation. If the scanned bar code does not match, the system does not
accept the scanned bar code.
WARNING
Avoid using the combination of no check digit with the less accurate symbologies,
such as Interleaved 2 of 5 and CODABAR.
Send Check Digit

When a calculated check digit is included in a bar code symbology, the bar code
reader can send that digit to the system or it can hide the digit. If the check digit is
sent, it is displayed on screens and reports as part of the Sample ID.

C42385
Send Start/Stop
Some bar code symbologies add characters to the bar code to indicate where the bar
code information starts and stops. If the start and stop characters are sent, they are
displayed on screens and reports as part of the Sample ID.
Characters in the Bar Code to Send

Bar code symbologies generally require that the number of characters in the bar code
fall within an allowed range. For the Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology, the system
requires that within the allowed range, a fixed number of characters be configured to
send. The number of characters sent must fall within the requirements of the number
of characters in the Sample ID field, included on screens and reports.
Bar Code You use the Bar Code Reader Setup window to:
Reader Setup • Enable or disable the internal reagent bar code reader (available on
Window instruments with serial numbers ≥570000) to read reagent pack labels
• Configure the internal sample bar code reader to read sample IDs and to use
the selected parameters for the selected bar code symbologies
NOTE
You can configure the sample bar code reader to not read sample IDs, but the bar
code reader will continue to read the bar code labels on the racks.
You access the Bar Code Reader Setup window from the System Setup screen.
0795C.bmp
Figure 4-9 Bar Code Reader Setup Window

C42385
Read Sample IDs (Box) Select to enable the internal sample bar code reader
to read the bar codes on the sample tubes. If you clear the
box, the sample bar code reader will not read the bar codes
on the sample tubes, but will continue to read the bar codes
on the racks.
Enable Reagent (Box) Select to enable the internal reagent bar code reader
Bar Code Reader to read the bar codes on the reagent packs. If you clear the
box, the reagent bar code reader will not read the reagent
pack and you must enter the reagent pack information
manually.
NOTE: This field is available only on instruments with an
internal reagent bar code reader.
Interleaved 2 of 5 Select from the listed options to configure the
parameters used by the sample bar code reader for
Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code symbologies.
Check Digit On —(Box) Select to enable the check digit to
improve data integrity.
Send Check Digit—(Box) Select to send an enabled check
digit to the system.
Characters—(Field) Displays the number of characters in
the bar code range to send. You can also use the field to
change the number of characters in the bar code range.
CODABAR Select from the listed options to configure the
CODABAR bar code symbologies.
Check Digit On—(Box) Select to enable the check digit to
Send Start/Stop—(Box) Select to send start/stop
characters to the system.
Table 4-10 Bar Code Reader Setup Window Descriptions

C42385
CODE 39 Select from the listed options to configure the

CODE 39 bar code symbologies.
Check Digit On—(Box) Select to enable the check digit to
Send Start/Stop—(Box) Select to send start/stop
characters to the system.
Table 4-10 Bar Code Reader Setup Window Descriptions (continued)
Setting Up the Use this procedure to configure the internal sample bar code reader for the individual
Sample Bar instrument you are working on. You can configure the internal sample bar code reader
Code Reader to read sample IDs and to use the selected parameters based on the bar code
symbologies in use. You can configure the sample bar code reader for more than one
symbology. Also, you can set up each instrument in a workgroup with a unique
sample bar code reader configuration.
CAUTION
A misread label can cause one sample ID to be mistaken for another
sample ID. Use correct bar code label placement and follow bar code
symbology and configuration recommendations to keep the rate of misread
labels to a minimum. For more information, see Sample Bar Code Reader
Parameters in this section.
1. Confirm that the system is in the Ready mode.
3. Select Bar Code Reader Setup F2 to display the Bar Code Reader Setup
window.
4. Select the Read Sample IDs box to enable the sample bar code reader to scan the
bar codes on the sample tubes.
NOTE
The default for this option is enabled. You should leave the sample bar code
reader enabled unless it is malfunctioning. If it is malfunctioning, contact
Technical Support immediately.

C42385
5. Select (enable) or clear (disable) the boxes as appropriate to configure the sample
bar code reader.
For more information see the following procedures:
• Enabling Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameters
• Enabling CODABAR Parameters
• Enabling CODE 39 Parameters
• Disabling Bar Code Symbology Parameters
6. Select OK F1 to save and apply the changes.

A progress message is displayed. Another message is displayed when the
configuration is complete.
NOTE
Occasionally, the system will stall (the progress message remains on the screen
for more than two minutes). If this happens, reboot the PC. Rebooting the PC
saves and applies the bar code reader changes. For information on rebooting the
PC, see Section 7.3: Rebooting, Shutting Down, and Restarting Procedures.
7. Select OK F1 to return to the System Setup screen.
Enabling Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameters

Use this procedure to enable the Interleaved 2 of 5 check digit parameters or change
the number of characters to send.
1. Select the Check Digit On box to add a check digit.
2. Select the Send Check Digit box to send the check digit to the system, and
display it on the screens and reports, as part of the sample ID.
NOTE
Send check digit is only available if the Check Digit On box is selected.
3. Type the number of characters of the bar code to show on screens and reports in
the Interleaved 2 of 5 Characters field.
NOTE
The valid values for the Characters field are 4 to 15. You should type an even
number if you did not select the Check Digit On box, or if you selected both the
Check Digit On and the Send Check Digit boxes. You should type an odd
number if you selected the Check Digit On box, but not the Send Check Digit
box.

C42385
Enabling CODABAR Parameters

Use this procedure to enable one or both of the CODABAR parameters.
3. Select the Send Start/Stop box to send the start and stop characters to the
system, and display them on the screens and reports, as part of the sample ID.
Enabling CODE 39 Parameters

Use this procedure to enable one or more of the CODE 39 parameters.
NOTE
Send check digit is only available if the Check Digit On box is enabled.
3. Select the Send Start/Stop box to send the start and stop characters to the
system, and display them on the screens and reports, as part of the sample ID.
Disabling Bar Code Symbology Parameters

Use this procedure to disable any bar code parameter.
1. Clear any selected box.

C42385
Setting Up the If an instrument has an internal reagent bar code reader (available on instruments with
Internal serial numbers ≥570000), the status is displayed on the System Setup screen (see
Reagent Bar Figure 4-4). Use this procedure to configure the internal reagent bar code reader for
the individual instrument you are working on. The reagent bar code reader can be
Code Reader
enabled or disabled. There are no additional parameters to set for the reagent bar code
reader.
3. Select Bar Code Reader Setup F2 to display the Bar Code Reader Setup window
(see Figure 4-4).
4. Select the Enable Reagent Bar Code Reader box on the Bar Code Reader Setup
window (see Figure 4-9) to enable the reagent bar code reader to scan the bar
codes on the reagent packs.
NOTE
The Enable Reagent Bar Code Reader box is visible only on instruments that
have an internal reagent bar code reader.

C42385
4.4: Test Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
4.4 Test Setup
Available tests on the Access 2 Immunoassay System are distributed in the assay
protocol file (APF). Before you can run an available test on the Access 2 instrument,
the test must be enabled on the Tests screen. Also on the Tests screen you can
configure the following test parameters for your laboratory situation:
• Test ID (assign a unique number for each test)
• Sample type (select the usual sample type for the test, such as serum, blood,
or urine)
• Decimal precision (change the number of digits that are shown after the
decimal point when the results are displayed)
• Unit of measure (select the usual unit of measure for quantitative tests only)
• Gray zones (range of values [up to 20%] above and/or below the cutoff
value)
• Special (set special features for tests, such as a dilution factor)
You can also enable and disable tests, set most test parameters, print reports, and
update APFs using the Test Setup procedures.
NOTE
You enable tests individually on each instrument in the workgroup. Your test
configurations apply to all of the available tests on the Access 2 instruments in
your workgroup.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.4: Test Setup
Tests Screen You use the Tests screen to:

• Enable and disable tests and assign unique test IDs
• Change the default sample types and decimal precision
• Edit the default units
• Display the Ranges, Gray Zone, and Dilution Factor windows
• Print the Ranges and Tests Setup Reports
You access the Tests screen from the Configure menu.
0796B.bmp
Figure 4-11 Tests Screen
Filter (Field) Displays the filter and sort order applied to the Tests screen.
APF Revision (Field) Displays the revision of the assay protocol file.
Test Name (Field) Displays the test name, which is defined by the APF.
Table 4-12 Tests Screen Descriptions

C42385
Test ID (Field) Displays the unique test ID for the test in the Test Name field. You can
change the test ID.
Values are: 1 through 999.
Enabled (Box) Select to enable and disable tests for the individual system you are working on.
Enabled tests display on the Test menu from the Test Requests screen.
If you disable a test, it cannot be run from the instrument, and all of the test panels,
derived results, and reflex tests related to the test are also disabled.
Default Sample (Field) Displays the default sample type for the test. The default sample type is
Type displayed when you select the test on the Test Requests screen. You can change the
sample type by selecting a new type from the list.
Values are: Serum, Plasma, Blood, Urine, CSF (cerebrospinal fluid), Amniotic,
Urethral, Saliva, Cervical, Synovial, and Other (any sample type that does not
appear in this list).
Default Units (Field) Displays the unit of measure corresponding to the default sample type that is
selected for the test.
Decimal Places (Field) Displays the decimal precision that the system displays when reporting the
test result value. You can also change the number of digits that the system displays
after the decimal point from this field.
Revision (Field) Displays the revision number of the assays loaded on the system.
Pipettor (Column) Displays N/A. This column is reserved for future use.
Filter F1 (Button) Select to display the Filter window. You use the Filter window to select the
filter and sort order for the tests displayed on the Tests screen.
Edit Units F2 (Button) Select to display the Edit Units window. You use the window to change the
default unit of measure for the selected sample type.
Ranges F3 (Button) Select to display the Ranges menu. You use the menu to configure the
following ranges.
• Reference Range F1: Displays the Reference Ranges window
• Critical Range F2: Displays the Critical Ranges window
• LIS Range F3: Displays the LIS Ranges window
For more information about ranges, see Section 4.7: Ranges Setup.
Gray Zone F4 (Button) Select to display the Gray Zone window. You use the window to define
upper and lower gray zone limits for the selected test.
The button is only available for qualitative assays.
Table 4-12 Tests Screen Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Special F5 (Button) Select to display the Special menu. The menu contains special features you
can configure for some assays that support those features.
The button is not available if the test does not support special features.
Print F7 (Button) Displays the Print window. You use this window to print the following
reports:
• Tests Setup Report
• Reference, Critical, and LIS Ranges Reports
For more information, see the Printing Tests Setup and Ranges Reports procedure in
Section 4.4: Test Setup.
Update APF F8 (Button) Displays the Update APF window. You use the window to install the APF
on the system.
Table 4-12 Tests Screen Descriptions (continued)
Assigning Each test is assigned a unique test ID in the APF. However, some laboratories prefer
Unique Test to assign their own test IDs.
IDs to Tests Use this procedure to change a test ID for the workgroup.
NOTE
When assigning test IDs, the system verifies that each test ID is unique in the
workgroup. If two tests or test panels have the same test ID, the system displays a
message and prevents you from duplicating the ID.
1. Go to the Tests screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu, select
Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Tests F2.
2. Locate the test that contains the test ID to change.
3. Select the Test ID field.
4. In the Test ID field, enter a unique test ID (1 through 999). The test ID change
takes effect immediately.
 (Optional) Document your changes by printing the updated screen using [Print
Screen] on the keyboard.

C42385
Enabling and Tests must be enabled before they can be run on an instrument. Use this procedure to
Disabling enable and disable tests on the individual instrument only. (For information about
Tests requesting tests, see Section 3.2: Patient Test Requests in the Operator's Guide.)
NOTE
New tests received in an updated APF are disabled.
2. Select the Enabled box for the tests you want to be able to request on this
instrument. The tests are enabled immediately.
 (Optional) To disable a test, clear the Enabled box. The test and any test panels,
derived results, and reflex tests that include the test are disabled immediately.
Changing Use this procedure to change the default sample type for tests in your workgroup.
Default Sam-
NOTE
ple Types
You can also change the default sample type while editing the units of
measurement in the Edit Units window.
2. Locate the test that contains the sample type to change.
3. Select a default sample type from the list in the Default Sample Type field. The
default sample type changes immediately.
Changing the Use this procedure to change the number of digits the system displays after the
Decimal Pre- decimal point when it displays a test result.
cision of Test 1. Go to the Tests screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu, select
Results Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Tests F2.
2. Locate the test that contains the decimal places to change.
3. Select the number in the Decimal Places field.

C42385
4. Type the number of digits to display after the decimal point for results from
0 through 4. The new decimal precision value takes effect immediately.
Applying Fil- A tests filter is a set of parameters you apply to the Tests screen to reduce or expand
ters and Sort the number of tests displayed on the Tests screen, and to change the order in which the
Orders for tests are displayed. Use this procedure to apply a different filter and sort order for the
tests on the Tests screen.
Tests
2. Select Filter F1 to display the Filter window.
0828B.bmp
Figure 4-13 Filter (Test Setup) Window
Filter (Options) Select a filter that limits the tests that display on
the Tests screen.
Sort Order (Options) Select to change the default sort order of the
tests.
Ascending (Box) Select the box to sort the tests on the Tests screen in
ascending order and clear the box to sort the tests in
descending order.
Table 4-14 Filter (Test Setup) Window Descriptions

C42385
3. Select a filter.
4. Select a sort order.
5. Select the Ascending box to sort the tests in ascending sort order.
 (Optional) Clear the Ascending box to sort the tests in descending sort order.
The system displays the tests that meet the selected filter parameters on the Tests
screen.
Editing a Unit Use this procedure to edit a unit of measure for a single sample type that is associated
of Measure with a single test. For example, you can change the serum unit of measure for
reporting TSH test results from ng/dL to mg/mL. Units are used to calculate and
report results.
NOTES
• You can only change the units for quantitative tests.
• If you change the units, the system automatically updates the stored
ranges data (including reference ranges, critical ranges, LIS ranges, and
quality control limits) for that test and sample type with the new unit of
measure.
• The system records the change in the Event Log.
• Changing units may create problems in derived result formulas because the
system cannot automatically adjust the derived result formulas. When you
change the units, a message displays to remind you that the software will not
automatically adjust derived result formulas.
• Changing units may cause certain reference, LIS, and control ranges to
become invalid. For example, if you change the unit of measure for serum
from nanograms to milligrams, 1.0 ng becomes 0.001 mg. If the decimal
precision is only one decimal place, the range becomes zero, which may be
invalid. For more information about defining ranges, see Section 4.7: Ranges
Setup.
2. Select a test to edit.

You can only edit units for quantitative tests.
3. Select Edit Units F2.

The Edit Units window for the test is displayed.

C42385
0829A.bmp
Figure 4-15 Edit Units Window
Test Name (Field) Displays the name of the test you selected on the
Tests screen.
Test ID (Field) Displays the test ID of the test you selected on the
Tests screen.
Default (Option) Select the default sample type for the selected test.
Sample Type (Column) Displays the available sample types for the
selected test.
Units (Field) Displays the units of measure for the selected test.
Table 4-16 Edit Units Window Descriptions

C42385
4. Select a new unit of measure from the list in the Units field for one or more of the
listed sample types.
 (Optional) To select a different default sample type for this test, select the default
option to the left of the listed sample type.
A message displays to warn you that the system will not automatically adjust derived
result formulas for unit changes.
6. Select OK F1 to acknowledge the message and exit the window.
 (Optional) Document your changes by printing the updated screen or window
using [Print Screen] on the keyboard.
Setting a Gray A gray zone defines a range of values (up to 20%) above and/or below the cutoff
Zone value. The system may be configured so that it flags results in the gray zone (GRY).
The GRY flag indicates that the result is near the cutoff and may require further
interpretation.
Gray zone applies to qualitative tests only. If a gray zone is recommended for a test,
the appropriate information is included in the reagent instructions for use.
For information about the gray zone (GRY) or other non-fatal flags, see Test Result
Flags in Section A.4: Assay Troubleshooting.
Use this procedure to set a gray zone for a qualitative test in your workgroup.
2. Select the qualitative test for which you are defining a gray zone.
3. Select Gray Zone F4.

The Gray Zone window is displayed.
NOTE
The button is only available for qualitative tests.

C42385
0798b.bmp
Figure 4-17 Gray Zone Window
Test Name (Field) Displays the qualitative test name.

Test ID (Field) Displays the unique test ID for the test.
Lower Limit (Field) Enter the lower limit for the gray zone.
Values are 0.800 through 1.000, which represent a lower
limit from the cutoff value through 20% less than the cutoff
value.
Upper Limit (Field) Enter the upper limit for the gray zone.
Values are 1.000 through 1.200, which represent an upper
limit from the cutoff value through 20% more than the
cutoff value.
Table 4-18 Gray Zone Window Descriptions
4. In the Lower Limit field, type a value from 0.800 to 1.000.

The lower gray zone limit is a decimal percentage of the cutoff value. For example, a
lower limit of 0.95 represents a lower gray zone limit of 5% less than the cutoff value.

C42385
5. In the Upper Limit field, type a value from 1.000 to 1.200.

The upper gray zone limit is a decimal percentage over the cutoff value. For example,
an upper limit of 1.05 represents an upper gray zone limit of 5% more than the cutoff
value.
 (Optional) To turn off gray zone checking, set both upper and lower limits to
1.000, or leave the fields blank. The value 1.000 represents the cutoff value.
 (Optional) Document your changes by printing the updated window using [Print
Setting a Dilu- The Dilution Factor window is only available for tests that are defined in the APF to
tion Factor support this special feature. If the test does not support any special features, the
Special menu is not available.
The dilution factor range of values is defined in the APF. The system accounts for the
dilution factor and displays the results of the test like the undiluted tests.
NOTES
• Contact Technical Support before performing this procedure. A dilution
factor should only be determined by Technical Support.
• The dilution factor applies only to the instrument you are working on, not to
the workgroup.
• The dilution factor for a test is listed on the Alignment Report.
• When you set or change the dilution factor, the system records the change in
the Event Log.
• The TSH3d assay is available on the Special menu, but you cannot set or
change the dilution factor.
Use this procedure to set the dilution factor for a test.
2. Select a test that supports the dilution factor special feature.

C42385
3. Select Special F5 to display the Special menu, then select Dilution Factor F1.
The Dilution Factor window is displayed.
0825B.bmp
Figure 4-19 Dilution Factor Window
Test Name (Field) Displays the test name.

Test ID (Field) Displays the unique test ID for the test.
Lower Limit (Field) Displays the lower limit for the dilution factor as
defined in the APF.
Upper Limit (Field) Displays the upper limit for the dilution factor as
defined in the APF.
Dilution Factor (Field) Displays the dilution factor. The system multiplies
the concentration by this factor to account for the dilution
performed by the instrument. You can also change the
dilution factor from this field. The value must be between
the values in the Upper Limit and Lower Limit fields.
Table 4-20 Dilution Factor Window Descriptions

C42385
4. In the Dilution Factor field, type a number that is between the numbers in the
Upper Limit and Lower Limit fields.
A message notifies you that the change will affect future results.
6. Select OK F1 to acknowledge the message and exit the window.
 (Optional) Document your changes by printing the updated window using [Print
Printing Tests Use this procedure to print one or more of the Tests Setup and ranges reports.
Setup and
For more information about ranges and ranges reports, see Section 4.7: Ranges Setup.
Ranges
Reports NOTES
• The report information is limited to tests in the current filter and sort order.
• The Reference Ranges, Critical Ranges, and LIS Ranges Reports are very
similar. Therefore, only the Reference Ranges Report is displayed in this
section (see Figure 4-22 for an example).
2. Select Print F7 to display the Print window.
3. Select the box for one or more reports to print.

• Test Setup Report (Lists the test information for tests displayed on the Tests
window)
• Reference Range Report (Lists all reference ranges by test)
• Critical Range Report (Lists all critical ranges by test)
• LIS Range Report (Lists all LIS ranges by test)
4. Select OK F1 to print the report.

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Tests Setup Report Townsville, ST 33333
Access 2 Immunoassay System 101-555-2323 ext. 109
S/N 501240 Jane Smith
Filter: Enabled Tests—Sorted by Test ID—Ascending
Test Name Test ID Enabled Default Sample Default Decimal Revision Pipettor
Type Units Places
Prog 114 X Serum ng/mL 2 2 N/A
Dig 117 X Serum ng/mL 2 23 N/A
Ferritin 125 X Serum ng/mL 1 17 N/A
TotT4 134 X Serum ug/dL 2 3 N/A
TT3 150 X Serum ng/mL 2 2 N/A
MYO 162 X Serum ng/mL 1 3 N/A
CK-MB 163 X Serum ng/mL 1 3 N/A
FOL2 167 X Serum ng/mL 2 2 N/A
RBC2 168 X Serum ng/mL 2 2 N/A
freePSA 169 X Serum ng/mL 2 2 N/A
PSA-Hyb 170 X Serum ng/mL 2 4 N/A
VitB12 190 X Serum pg/mL 0 2 N/A
IFAb 194 X Serum AU/mL 2 3 N/A
Testo 195 X Serum ng/mL 2 4 N/A
Tg 197 X Serum ng/mL 2 3 N/A
TgAb 198 X Serum IU/mL 1 3 N/A
IL-6 210 X Serum pg/mL 2 1 N/A
Dil-Fer 218 X Serum ng/mL 0 2 N/A
aTnI 220 X Serum ng/mL 2 1 N/A
FRT4 226 X Serum ng/mL 2 1 N/A
Page 1 of 1
Technologist ________________________________________ Printed 04-04-07 10:10
0878D.bmp
Figure 4-21 Tests Setup Report

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Reference Ranges Report Townsville, ST 33333
Test Name Test ID Sample Sex Age Range Reference Range

Type
Ferritin 125 Serum Unknown 10.0–300.0 ng/mL
Ferritin 125 Serum Either 5 months –16 years 50.0–200.0 ng/mL
Ferritin 125 Serum Female 16 years–110 years 18.0–160.0 ng/mL
Ferritin 125 Serum Male 16 years –110 years 18.0–270.0 ng/mL
MYO 162 Plasma Unknown 0.0–70.0 ng/mL
CK-MB 163 Plasma Unknown 0.0–4.0 ng/mL
AFP 180 Serum Unknown 10.00–500.00 ng/mL
VitB12 190 Serum Unknown 108–914 pg/mL
VitB12 190 Serum Unknown 0 days–6 weeks 160–1300 pg/mL
Page 1 of 1
Technologist ________________________________________ Printed 10/10/10 14:52
0879D.bmp
Figure 4-22 Reference Ranges Report

C42385
Updating an To update an APF, follow the software installation instructions included with the APF
APF CD. Updating an APF adds new assays to your system, revises existing assays, and
removes assays that are no longer available.
WARNING
Interrupting the APF installation before the APF Load Successful window is
displayed may result in an incomplete APF update, potentially leading to invalid
results. If the APF Load Successful window is not presented, contact
Beckman Coulter Technical Support before testing samples.
NOTES
• If the APF includes a new test with a test ID that is not unique for your
workgroup, the system automatically renumbers the new test. The system
records the change in the Event Log.
• If the APF includes a new test with a test name that matches a test panel or
derived result name, the system changes the test panel or derived result name
to begin with the letter X. The system records the change in the Event Log.
• If any of the instruments in your workgroup are in the Running or Paused
mode, the APF cannot be loaded, and the system displays a message
indicating that one or more of the systems in the workgroup is running.
• When you install a new APF that removes a test that is no longer available,
the system removes the test and all system data that relates to the test. The
system records the change in the Event Log.
• You will install the APF on only one system in a workgroup.

C42385
4.5: Test Panels Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
4.5 Test Panels Setup
A test panel is made up of two or more tests. When a test panel is requested, all of the
tests in the test panel are run on the patient sample. The results of the individual tests
in the panel report individually.
You set up a test panel by naming the panel, assigning it a unique test ID, and adding
tests to the panel. For example, you could set up a panel named Thyroid, assign the
test ID 803, and add the tests TSH and FRT4 to the panel.
NOTE
When you set up a test panel, it is available on all Access 2 instruments in your
workgroup. However, you must enable the test panel on each instrument on
which you plan to run the test panel.
For more information about entering test requests, see Section 3.2: Patient Test
Requests in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.5: Test Panels Setup
Test Panels You use the Test Panels screen to:

Screen • Enable and disable test panels
• Add, edit, and delete test panels
• Print the Test Panels Setup Report
You access the Tests Panels screen from the Configure menu.
0800D.bmp
Figure 4-23 Test Panels Screen
Filter (Field) Displays the filter and sort order applied to the list of test panels displayed on
the screen.
Panel Name (Field) Displays the name of the test panel which is described across the row.
Test ID (Field) Displays the test ID for the named test panel. You can change the test ID by
selecting this field and typing a unique number.
Table 4-24 Test Panels Screen Descriptions

C42385
Enabled (Box) Select to enable, or clear to disable, the test panel for the individual system.
Enabled test panels displayed on the Test Menu window (see Chapter 3: Sample
Management in the Operator's Guide).
Tests in Panel (Field) Displays the list of individual tests that make up the test panel.
Filter F1 (Button) Select to display the Filter window. You use the Filter window to select the
filter and sort order for the test panels displayed on the Test Panels screen.
Add Panel F4 (Button) Select to display the Add Panel window. You use this window to create new
test panels.
Edit Panel F5 (Button) Select to display the Edit Panel window. You use this window to edit a
selected test panel.
Delete Panel F6 (Button) Select to delete a selected test panel.
NOTE: Only disabled panels can be deleted.
Print F7 (Button) Select to print the Test Panels Setup Report. Test panel information prints
for the current filter in the current sort order.
Table 4-24 Test Panels Screen Descriptions (continued)
Assigning Use this procedure to change a test ID for a test panel.

Unique Test
1. Go to the Test Panels screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu, select
IDs to Test Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Test Panels F3.
Panels
2. Select the Test ID field for the test panel that contains the test ID you want to
change.
3. Type a unique number, from 1 to 999.

C42385
Enabling and Test panels must be enabled before they can be run on an instrument. In addition, all
Disabling Test tests in a test panel must be enabled before you can enable a test panel on the
Panels individual system you are working on. Use this procedure to enable and disable test
panels.
Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Test Panels F3.
2. Select the Enabled box for the test panels you want to be able to request on the
instrument. The test panels are enabled immediately.
 (Optional) To disable a test panel, clear the Enabled box. The test panels are
disabled immediately.
Applying a A test panel filter is a set of parameters you can apply to reduce or expand the number
Test Panels of test panels displayed on the Test Panels screen, and to change the order in which
Filter the test panels are displayed. Use this procedure to apply a different filter and sort
order to the test panels on the Test Panels screen.
2. Select Filter F1 to display the Filter Window.
0833B.bmp
Figure 4-25 Filter (Test Panels) Window

C42385
Filter (Options) Select a filter that limits the test panels that display
on the Test Panels screen.
Sort Order (Options) Select to change the default sort order of the test
panels.
Ascending (Box) Select the box to sort the test panels on the Tests Panels
screen in the ascending order and clear the box to sort the test
panels in descending order.
Table 4-26 Filter (Test Panels) Window Descriptions
3. Select a filter.
4. Select a sort order.
5. Select the Ascending box to sort the tests in ascending sort order.
 (Optional) Clear the Ascending box to sort the tests in descending sort order.
The system displays the test panels that meet the selected filter parameters on the Test
Panels Screen.

C42385
Adding a Test
Panel Main Menu
All tests for

Configure
the test panel No F8
enabled? Tests
F2
Yes
Tests
Configure
F8
Test Panels Enable all tests
F3 for test panel
Test Panels
Add Panel
F4
Add Panels
Assign a unique
name and test ID
Select enabled test
Add
F3
All tests
Added? No
Yes
OK
F1
0867A.wmf
Figure 4-27 Adding a Test Panel

C42385
Use this procedure to add a test panel to all instruments in the workgroup. Any tests
that are enabled within the workgroup can be included in the Test Panel.
NOTE
You can add up to 100 test panels in your Access 2 workgroup. When the
maximum number of test panels exist, the Add Panel F4 key is no longer
available on the Test Panels screen. To add more test panels, you must delete
existing test panels.
2. Select Add Panel F4 to display the Add Panel window.
0801B.bmp
Figure 4-28 Add Panel Window
Panel Name (Field) Displays the name of the test panel you are editing.
You can also enter a new panel name into this field.
Test ID (Field) Displays the test ID of the test panel you are
editing. You can also enter a new test into this field.
Table 4-29 Add Panel Window Descriptions

C42385
Enabled Tests (Field) Displays all of the tests that are enabled on the Tests
screen. The test can be enabled on any instrument in the
workgroup.
Tests in Panel (Field) Displays the tests that make up the test panel.
Add F3 (Button) Moves the selected test names from the Enabled
Tests field to the Tests in Panel field, which adds the test
to the test panel.
Remove F4 (Button) Moves the selected test names from the Tests in
Panel field to the Enabled Tests field, which removes the
test from the test panel.
Table 4-29 Add Panel Window Descriptions (continued)
3. In the Panel Name field, enter a unique name for the test panel.
NOTES
• A test panel name must start with a letter and can contain up to eight
characters.
• A test panel name cannot share the name of another test, test panel, or
derived result.
4. In the Test ID field, enter a unique test ID.
5. From the Enabled Tests list, select a test to add to the panel, then select Add F3.
The test is added to the Tests in Panel list.
 (Optional) To add a replicate for the test, add the same test again.
6. To add more tests to the panel, repeat step 4 for each test and the optional step for
each replicate.
You can add from 2 to 24 tests to a test panel, not including replicates.
The system displays the new test panel on the Test Panels screen.
 (Optional) Document your test panel configuration by printing the updated screen
or window using [Print Screen] on the keyboard.

C42385
Editing a Test Use this procedure to edit a test panel for all instruments in the workgroup.
Panel
NOTE
If you are going to add a test to a panel, be sure that the test is enabled before
editing the test panel.
2. Select the test panel to edit.
 (Optional) To change the test ID, select the Test ID field and type a unique
number, from 1 to 999.
3. Select Edit Panel F5 to display the Edit Panel window.

The Edit Panel window is displayed. The Edit Panel window is basically the same as
the Add Panel window (see Figure 4-28).
4. To add a test to the panel, select a test from the Enabled Tests list, then select
Add F3.
5. To remove a test from the panel, select a test from the Tests in Panel field, then
select Remove F4.
NOTE
If the test panel includes replicates, selecting Remove F4 removes one replicate.
6. Repeat step 4 or step 5 to add or remove more tests in the panel.


C42385
Deleting a Use this procedure to delete a test panel from all instruments in the workgroup.
Test Panel
2. On the Test Panels screen, select the test panel to delete and clear the Enabled
box.
3. Select Delete F6 to delete the test panel.

A message displays for you to confirm your choice.
4. Select OK F1 to delete the selection and exit the window.

The test panel is removed from the Test Panels screen.
Printing the Use this procedure to print the Test Panels Setup Report.
Test Panels
Setup Report Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Tests Panels F3.
2. Select Print F7.

The Test Panels Setup Report prints for the test panels in the current filter and sort
order.

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Test Panels Setup Report Townsville, ST 33333
Filter: All Panels —Sorted by Test ID—Ascending
Panel Name Test ID Enabled Panel Members

Anemia 800 X VitB12, FOL2
Cardiac 801 CK-MB, MYO
Repro 802 X ESTRDL, TBhCG2, uE3
Thyroid 803 X TSH, FRT4
Page 1 of 1
0880D.bmp
Figure 4-30 Test Panels Setup Report

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.6: Derived Result Setup
4.6 Derived Result Setup
The system calculates a derived result using a mathematical formula that you define
or one that is included with the APF. The formulas contain numeric constants,
arithmetic operators, and test results from a single patient sample. A derived result
formula must also contain two or more elements that are operated on to create a new
result. For example, the PSA Ratio, which is used to help determine the presence of
prostate cancer, is calculated using the following formula:
free PSA (ng/mL) x 100% = percent free PSA

total PSA (ng/mL)
You define a derived result formula in the Formula field of the Add Derived Result
window. Derived result formulas contain any of the following elements.
• Test names, representing the numeric results of the tests.
• Operators, specifying mathematical operations or functions (see the Derived

Result Operators and Order of Operations Rules topic in this section).
• Numeric constants, may be integers or decimal numbers; sometimes
interpreted within context as concentrations or patient ages.
NOTE
You may include spaces between the elements in the formula to improve
readability. Spaces have no effect on the expressions. However, do not include
line returns in the formula, because line returns cause formatting problems with
the Derived Results Setup Report.

C42385
4.6: Derived Result Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
Derived Result Operators and Order of Operations Rules

Table 4-31 lists the mathematical operators that you can use to create a derived result
formula. The system evaluates the operators in the order listed in the table. The
system performs operations that have the same precedence (operators in the same
level in the order of operations table, such as + addition and - subtraction) from left to
right.
Highest priority () operations grouped within parentheses

(performed first)
abs( ), log( ), ln( ), absolute value, base 10 logarithm, natural
and exp( ) logarithm, and exponential (e^x)
(+n) and (-n) positive and negative numbers
^ exponentiation
Lowest priority * and / multiplication and division

(performed last) + and - addition and subtraction
Table 4-31 Valid Derived Result Operators
By rearranging a formula, you can change the result by causing the system to evaluate
the operators in a different order. For example:
• 1 + 2 * 3 = 7, because multiplication is done before addition
• (1 + 2) * 3 = 9, because the operation within the parentheses is done before
the multiplication
Derived Result Examples

Table 4-32 contains derived result examples. The formula examples are similar to
formulas you would enter in the Formula field in the Add Derived Result window.
The derived result formulas use these variables to represent the elements:
A = TestA, B = TestB, C = TestC, and N = Numeric constant
Derived Result Formula Formula Examples
A+B TestA + TestB

A-B TestA - TestB
A*B/N TestA * TestB / 40
A^N * N TestA ^ 2 * 8
(A + B) / C * N (TestA + TestB) / TestC * N
Table 4-32 Derived Result Examples

C42385
NOTE
To enable the system to wrap long formulas on to the following line, you may
need to add extra spaces to the formula. The system ignores the spaces.
Derived Result Error Checking

When you create a derived result formula, the system checks the formula to verify that
the formula uses valid mathematical statements. The system checks for the following
formula errors:
• Balanced parentheses (an open parenthesis must be followed by a close
parenthesis)
• Misspelled words (test names must be spelled correctly)
• Capitalization (elements in the Formula field are case sensitive, and must be
typed exactly as they appear in the Tests and Operators lists)
• Incorrect numbers (numeric constants can only contain one decimal point)
• Relationship operators (relationship operators [ =, < >, >, > =, <, < = ] are
illegal)
• Adjoined operands (two or more test names or numeric constants that are not
separated by an operator)
NOTE
You can override the adjoining operands error check by using parentheses. For
example, the system evaluates 2(3 + 4) as 7 (not 14). The system ignores the 2
because it is not separated by the * multiplication operator, as in 2 * (3 + 4).
It is possible to create a formula that contains other errors that the system considers to
be correct. To avoid generating erroneous results, Beckman Coulter recommends that
you verify your derived result formula prior to running patient samples. You can
verify your formula by running tests and generating the derived result using known
samples, such as controls and calibrators.
Derived Result Names, Calculation, and Reporting

Like a test, a derived result must have a unique name. The system reports the derived
result as it does any other test run on the sample.

C42385
Derived result formulas use the mean numeric portions of the following results:
• Quantitative and semi-quantitative tests use the concentration value (the
system uses the unit of measure that is defined for the test)
• Qualitative tests use the sample-to-cutoff ratio (the calculation cannot
distinguish between reactive and non-reactive results)
NOTE
Your derived result configurations apply to all of the derived results available to
run on the Access 2 instruments in your workgroup.
Derived results report automatically for the instruments that ran the tests when the
following conditions are met:
• Tests in the derived result formula can be run for the patient sample on any
combination of workgroup instruments.
• A derived result is only calculated when the results for all tests in the derived
result formula are less than 48 hours old.
• The systems generate valid results for the tests.
NOTE
If there is a problem with the calculation of the derived result, the derived result
reports with the CCR flag.
For more information about entering test requests, see Section 3.2: Patient Test
Requests in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Derived You use the Derived Results screen to:

Results • Enable and disable derived results
Screen • Change the decimal precision
• Display the Ranges windows
• Add, edit, and delete derived results
• Print the Derived Results Setup Report
You access the Derived Results screen from the Configure menu.
0802A.bmp
Figure 4-33 Derived Results Screen
Name (Field) Displays the name of the derived result, which is described across the row.
Enabled (Option) Select to enable or clear to disable a derived result for the instrument.
If you disable a derived result, it will not be calculated on the instrument.
Table 4-34 Derived Results Screen Descriptions

C42385
Formula (Field) Displays the formula the system uses to obtain the derived result.
Units (Field) Displays the reporting units for the derived result.
Decimal Places (Field) Displays the decimal precision that the system displays when reporting the
derived result value. You can change the number of digits that the system displays
after the decimal point from this field.
Predefined (Field) Indicates if the formula is predefined in the Assay Protocol File (APF). If the
formula is predefined, "Yes" is displayed in the field.
If a Derived Result is predefined, you cannot edit the derived result formula.
Ranges F3 (Button) Select to display the Ranges menu for the selected derived result.
• Reference Range F1: Select to add or edit a range of expected result values for a
normal demographic population.
• Critical Range F2: Select to add or edit a range of expected result values defined
by your laboratory.
• LIS Range F3: Select to add or edit a range of result values to be sent to the LIS.
For more information, see Section 4.7: Ranges Setup.
Add Derived (Button) Select to display the Add Derived Result window. You use the window to
Result F4 create new derived result formulas.
Edit Derived (Button) Select to display the Edit Derived Result window. You use the window to
Result F5 edit the selected derived result formula. This button is unavailable if the selected
derived result is enabled or predefined.
Delete F6 (Button) Select to delete the selected derived result. This button is unavailable if the
selected derived result is enabled or predefined.
Print F7 (Button) Select to print one or more of the derived result reports:
• Derived Results Setup Report
• Reference, Critical, and LIS Ranges Reports
Table 4-34 Derived Results Screen Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Enabling and Derived results must be enabled before they can be calculated. Use this procedure to
Disabling a enable or disable a derived result for the instrument.
Derived 1. Go to the Derived Results screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
Result select Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Derived
Results F4.
2. Select the Enabled box for the derived result you want to enable.
The derived result is enabled immediately.
 (Optional) To disable a derived result, clear the Enabled box.

The derived result is disabled immediately.
Changing the Use this procedure to change the number of digits the system displays after the
Decimal Pre- decimal point when it displays a derived result.
cision of a 1. Go to the Derived Results screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
Derived select Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Derived
Result Results F4.
2. Locate the derived result that contains the decimal precision to change.
3. Select the number in the Decimal Places field.
4. Type he number of digits to display after the decimal points for results from
0 through 4. The new decimal precision value takes effect immediately.
Adding a Use this procedure to add a derived result formula for your Access 2 workgroup.
Derived
NOTE
Result
You can create up to 100 derived results. After 100 derived results are
configured, the Add Derived Result button is no longer available.

C42385
1. Go to the Derived Results screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
select Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Derived Results
F4.
2. Select Add Derived Result F4 to display the Add Derived Result window.
0803b.bmp
Figure 4-35 Add Derived Result Window
Derived Result (Field) Displays the unique name for the derived result.
Name
Units (Optional) (Field) Displays the unit of measure for the derived result.
A unit of measure is optional.
Formula (Field) Displays the formula for the derived results. You
fill the field with the conditions that are listed in the Tests
and Operators fields. The values can be numeric
constants, test name variables, and relational operators.
Table 4-36 Add Derived Result Window Descriptions

C42385
Tests (List) Displays all of the enabled tests on the workgroup.

You can add these tests to the Formula field.
Operators (List) Displays the arithmetic operators (see the Derived
Result Operators and Order of Operations Rules topic in
this section). You can use these operators in the Formula
field.
Clear F3 (Button) Select to clear the Formula field.
Table 4-36 Add Derived Result Window Descriptions (continued)
3. In the Derived Result Name field, type a unique name for the derived result.
NOTES
• A derived result name must begin with a letter and can contain up to eight
characters.
• A derived result name cannot share the name of another test, test panel, or
derived result that is configured for the workgroup.
• If a test name is received in a new version of the APF which matches a
derived result name, the derived result name will change to begin with the
letter X. The system records the change in the Event Log.
 (Optional) In the Units (Optional) field, enter a unit of measure of up to eight

characters.
4. In the Formula field, enter a derived result formula. You can use numeric
constants, tests included in the Tests list, and operators included in the
Operators list.
NOTE
NOTE
If the formula contains a syntax or logic error, the system will display an error
message. You must fix the error before you can add the derived result.
 (Optional) Document your derived result configuration by printing the updated

screen or window using [Print Screen] on the keyboard.

C42385
Editing a Use this procedure to edit a derived result for your Access 2 workgroup.
Derived
NOTES
Result
• You cannot edit derived results that are defined in the APF.
• If you edit a derived result, previously calculated results will not be
recalculated. Also, if you edit a derived result, the new results may have
different meanings than previously calculated results.
select Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Derived
Results F4.
2. Select the derived result to edit on the Derived Results screen.
NOTES
• You must disable a derived result before you can edit it.
• When you edit a derived result, the changes affect all instruments in the
workgroup.
3. Select Edit Derived Result F5 to display the Edit Derived Result window.
The Edit Derived Result window is basically the same as the Add Derived Result
window (see Figure 4-35).
4. In the Formula field, change the derived result formula. You can use the numeric
constants, tests included in the Tests list, and operators included in the
Operators list.
NOTE
 (Optional) You can change the formula by selecting the text and typing or
pressing the [Delete] key.
 (Optional) You can change the unit of measure by selecting the text in the
Units (Optional) field and typing or pressing the [Delete] key. A unit of measure
can contain up to eight characters.
NOTE
Elements of mathematical equations are calculated based on the order of
operation rules (see Table 4-31).

C42385
NOTE
If the formula contains a syntax or logic error, the system will display an error
message. You must fix the error before you can save the edited derived result.

Deleting a Use this procedure to delete a disabled derived result. Only disabled derived results
Derived can be deleted.
Result NOTES
• A predefined derived result formula cannot be deleted. If it is the only
formula on the Derived Results screen, the Delete F6 button is unavailable.
• When you delete a derived result, it is deleted from all instruments in a
workgroup.
Results F4.
2. On the Derived Results screen, select the derived result to delete.

Only disabled derived results can be deleted.
3. Select Delete F6 to delete the derived result.

4. Select OK F1 to delete the selection and exit the window.

The derived result is removed from the Derived Results screen.

C42385
Printing Use this procedure to print one or more of the Derived Results Setup and ranges
Derived reports.
Results Setup For more information about ranges and ranges reports, see Section 4.7: Ranges Setup.
Reports
Results F4.
2. Select Print F7 to display the Print window.
3. Select the box for one or more reports to print. For an example of the Derived
Results Setup Report, see Figure 4-37. For an example of the Reference Range,
Critical Range, and LIS Range reports, see Figure 4-22.
• Derived Results Setup Report (Lists the information for derived results
displayed on the Derived Results screen)
• Reference Range Report (Lists all reference ranges by derived result)
• Critical Range Report (Lists all critical ranges by derived result)
• LIS Range Report (Lists all LIS ranges by derived result)
4. Select OK F1 to print the report.

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Derived Results Setup Report Townsville, ST 33333
Decimal
Name Enabled Formula Units Places Predefined
FTIndex X TotT4 * TU/40 ug/dL 2 Yes
FreePSA% X (freePSA/PSA-Hyb)*100 % 1 No
Page 1 of 1
Technologist ________________________________________ Printed 10/10/01 08:42 AM
0881C.bmp
Figure 4-37 Derived Results Setup Report

C42385
4.7: Ranges Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
4.7 Ranges Setup
The Access 2 system produces numeric results from quantitative tests,

semi-quantitative tests, and derived results. If a range is defined for the test or derived
result, the system compares the tests results to the range before reporting the results.
The system flags the results that are out of range.
A result may be compared to multiple ranges. The ranges are determined by various
factors, including patient demographics (age or sex). Some ranges are defined in the
APF. You can also add multiple ranges manually by using the Ranges windows.
When you define ranges and demographic conditions manually, you set the
parameters in the Reference, Critical, or LIS Ranges windows. The three ranges
windows are very similar.
• Reference Ranges: Used to define the range of expected values for a normal
demographic population.
• Critical Ranges: Used to define a range determined by your laboratory,
which may depend on environmental, lab policy, or other factors.
• LIS Ranges: Used to define the ranges of results to be sent directly to the
LIS. The system holds out-of-range results for your review.
You can edit the Sex, Age, and Sample Type values for the selected test or derived
result on any of the Ranges windows. The ranges display in rows on the Ranges
windows.
For information about tests, see Section 4.4: Test Setup.
For information about derived results, see Section 4.6: Derived Result Setup.
For information about non-fatal flags, see Section A.4: Assay Troubleshooting.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.7: Ranges Setup
Example - Ranges and Demographic Conditions

Results must meet a range's accompanying demographic conditions before the system
compares the results to the range. For example:
• The demographic conditions for example TestA are defined as male patients,
between 15 and 40 years old.
• The result from a patient's serum sample taken from a 40 year old female is
not compared to the example range, and is printed without a flag.
However, you can define additional demographic conditions that include this patient.
For example:
• Additional demographic conditions for example TestA are defined as female
patients, between 35 and 45 years old.
If multiple ranges exist for the same test or derived result, the system compares the
results to all of the demographic ranges and flags the results as necessary.

C42385
Ranges Win- You use the ranges windows to:

dows • View different reference ranges for a test or derived result by sample type
• View different ranges defined for a test or derived result by range type
• Set the Reference, Critical, and LIS ranges
• Set the demographic conditions for a range
NOTE
Because of their similarity, only one of the three range windows is displayed in
this manual (see Figure 4-38).
You access a range window to define a test range from the Tests screen.
You access a range window to define a derived result range from the Derived Results
screen.
0797A.bmp
Figure 4-38 Reference Ranges Window
Test Name (Field) Displays the name of the test or derived result you
selected on the Tests or Derived Results screen. To view or
change the ranges information for a different test, return to
the Tests screen. To view or change the ranges information
for a different derived result, return to the Derived Results
screen.
Test ID (Field) Displays the test ID for the selected test or derived
result.
Table 4-39 Reference Ranges Window Descriptions

C42385
Units (Field) Displays the unit of measure for the sample type.
Sample Type (Field) Displays the sample type of the displayed range. To
display or change ranges for a different sample type, select
that sample type from the list.
Values are: Serum, Plasma, Blood, Urine, CSF,
Amniotic, Urethral, Saliva, Cervical, Synovial, and
Other.
Range Type (Field) Displays the type of range displayed in the window.
To display or change the range information for a different
range type, select that range from the list.
Values are: Reference, Critical, and LIS.
Sex (Field) Select to set the sex demographic conditions for the
corresponding range from the list.
Values are: Male, Female, Unknown, or Either.
Age Range (Fields) Displays the minimum and maximum patient age
Low Units and range, and the corresponding age units. You use these
fields to set the age demographic conditions for the
High Units corresponding range.
Units values are: Days, Weeks, Months, and Years.
Range Low and (Fields) Enter the lower and/or upper limits of the
Range High Reference, Critical, or LIS ranges. The default values for
reference ranges may be defined in the APF.
Clear F3 (Button) Select to delete a selected range in the window.
Table 4-39 Reference Ranges Window Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Adding a Use this procedure to add a range to a ranges window.

Range
1. Go to the range window.
For a test range:
a. From the Main Menu, select Configure F8.
b. Select Tests F2 to display the Tests screen.
c. Select a test on the Tests screen.
d. Select Ranges F3 to display the Ranges menu.
e. Select either Reference Ranges F1, Critical Ranges F2, or LIS Ranges F3.
For a derived result range:
b. Select Derived Result F4 to display the Derived Results screen.
c. Select a derived result on the Derived Results screen.
 (Optional) To add a range for a different sample type, select the sample type from
the list in the Sample Type field.
2. Be sure that Unknown is selected in the Sex field for the first row and the Age
Range Low and High fields are blank.
You must define a generic range (does not include demographic information) before
you can define a specific range for a set of demographics.
3. Enter the low and high values in the Range Low and Range High fields.
NOTE
The Range Low and Range High fields must contain a value. However, if a test
does not have a low range, you can set the value to zero.
4. To select the next row, select the white space below the first row.
You can now define a specific range for a set of demographics in the second and
subsequent rows.
5. In the next row, select a value from the Sex field.
6. Enter the low value in the Age Range Low field. Type a number from 0 to 150.
The ages must not overlap, and must also be contiguous. For example, 1-20, 20-40,
40-80. An error message displays if the upper and lower limits are not contiguous, or
if they overlap another range.

C42385
7. Select a value from the list in the Units field. This is the unit of measure for the
low age range.
The minimum and maximum age units do not need to be the same. For example,
6 weeks to 2 years.
8. Enter the high value in the Age Range High field. Type a number from 0 to 150.
9. Select a value from the list in the Units field. This is the unit of measure for the
high age range.
The minimum and maximum age units do not need to be the same. For example,
6 weeks to 2 years.
10. Enter the low and high values in the Range Low and Range High fields.
NOTE
The Low and High fields must contain a value. However, if a test does not have a
low range, you can set the value to zero.
 (Optional) You can continue adding ranges for this sample type, select a different
sample type and add ranges, or select a different range type and add ranges.

C42385
Editing a Use this procedure to edit a range in a range window.

Range
For a test range:
 (Optional) To edit a range for a different sample type, select the sample type from
the list in the Sample Type field.
2. Select the row of the range to edit.
 (Optional) To edit the sex, select a value from the list in the Sex field.
 (Optional) To edit the low age range, select the Age Range Low field. Enter a
value from 0 to 150.
 (Optional) To edit the unit of measure for the low age range, select a value from
the list in the Units field.
 (Optional) To edit the high age range, select the Age Range High field. Enter a
number from 0 to 150.
 (Optional) To edit the unit of measure for the high age range, select a value from
the list in the Units field.

C42385
 (Optional) Enter the low and high values for the range in the Low and High fields.
NOTE
The Low and High fields must contain a value. However, if a test does not have a
low range, you can set the value to zero.
Clearing a Use this procedure to delete a range from a ranges window.

Range
For a test range:
 (Optional) To delete a range for a different sample type, select the sample type
from the list in the Sample Type field.
2. Select the row of the range to be deleted from the grid.
3. Select Clear F3. The range is deleted from the window.

C42385
4.8: Reflex Test Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
4.8 Reflex Test Setup
When you run tests on the Access 2 instrument, the system reports the results for
evaluation. You can set up the system to automatically run other tests based on the
results. For example, if the test results are out of range, the system can request
additional tests to be run on the sample. The additional tests that are requested by the
system are called reflex tests. You define reflex tests and the conditions under which
reflex tests are requested.
NOTES
• Your reflex test configurations apply to all of the tests available to run on the
Access 2 instruments in your workgroup.
• If a result that requests a reflex test generates a fatal flag, the system
generates an Event Log message and the reflex test will not run.
• Sufficient sample must be available to allow all reflex tests to be processed.
If there is insufficient sample, the tests are added to work pending.
• If a test is run STAT, the reflex tests also run STAT.
When the system requests a reflex test, it tries to find the sample onboard any
instrument in the workgroup. If the sample is located, the reflex test is scheduled. If
the system cannot find the sample onboard any instrument in the workgroup, the
reflex test becomes work pending in the work pending list, and the Work Pending
button turns yellow. You must load the sample before the system can process the
downloaded test requests.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.8: Reflex Test Setup
Reflex Test You define reflex conditions in the Add Reflex Condition window, and edit
Conditions conditions in the Edit Reflex Condition window. To define a reflex condition, you can
use the following elements:
• Tests: Test names that represent their results. These are the results that order
the reflex test.
• Keywords: Keywords indicate patient sex and age, qualitative assay
interpretation, and result flags (the keywords will not be translated into the
local language). For example: MALE, FEMALE, REACTIVE,
NONREACTIVE, LOW, and ORL.
• Operators: Operators show the relationship between elements.
• Numeric constants: Integers or decimal numbers of any decimal precision,

which may represent concentration or patient ages, depending on the
situation.
NOTES
• The system assumes that concentrations are in the unit of measure of the
sample test.
• You may include spaces between the elements in the conditions to improve
readability. Spaces have no effect on the expressions.
• You can change the order of evaluation of the condition by grouping an
expression within parentheses.
• Elements of mathematical equations are calculated based on the order of
• You can combine two or more reflex conditions by using the AND or OR
operators.
• If a number follows the test name and operators, it is taken to be the
concentration in the case of a quantitative or semi-quantitative assay, or the
sample-to-cutoff ratio (S/CO) in the case of a qualitative assay. For example,
for the quantitative assay AFP, < 2.5 would mean the concentration and for
the qualitative assay IgM-Toxo, > 1.00 would mean the S/CO.

C42385
Tests Keywords* Operators*

Enabled tests for the AGE = Equal
workgroup SEX <> Not equal
MALE < Less than
FEMALE > Greater than
REACTIVE < = Less than or equal to
NONREACTIVE > = Greater than or equal to
OVR AND
LOW OR
ORH ( ) Parentheses, used to group
ORL and change the order of
CRH operation for the
CRL expression**
GRY
REFLEXED
Table 4-40 Reflex Conditions Elements

* All keywords and operators are case sensitive.
** Refer to the Reflex Test Order of Operations table (see Table 4-42) to determine operator pre-
cedence.
Reflex Test Syntax Rules

Conditions must follow certain syntax rules. Table 4-41 lists the syntax rules.
Assay, SEX, or AGE must Assay or AGE must A number, integer,

precede equal sign precede other (non =) qualitative interpretation,
(e.g. SEX = MALE) relational operators or flag must follow an
(e.g. AGE > 10) assay.
(e.g. TestA = OVR)
SEX must precede MALE Relational operator Assay and equal sign
or FEMALE must precede a number must precede a
(e.g. SEX = MALE) (e.g. AGE >10) qualitative assay
interpretation
(e.g. TestA =
REACTIVE)
Equal sign must be between Assay or AGE must Assay and equal sign
assay and assay precede an integer must precede a flag
interpretation (e.g. AGE >10) (e.g. TestA = OVR)
(e.g. TestA = REACTIVE)
Table 4-41 Reflex Conditions Syntax Rules

C42385
Reflex Test Order of Operations Rules

Table 4-43 lists the relational operators that you can use to create a reflex condition.
The system evaluates the operators in the order listed in the table. The system
performs operations that have the same precedence (operators in the same level in the
order of operations table, such as < less than and > greater than) from left to right.
By rearranging a condition, you can change the result by causing the system to
evaluate the operators in a different order.
Highest priority (performed first) # replicate number

() parentheses
= equal, < less than, <= less than or equal to,
> greater than, >= greater than or equal to
Lowest priority (performed last) AND or OR*
Table 4-42 Reflex Test Order of Operations

* AND or OR operators combine relational tests into a single expression. For example, the expres-
sion TestA > 5 AND TestB > 10 means that the result of TestA must be greater than numeric
constant 5 and the result of TestB must be greater than numeric constant 10 for the expression to
be true.
Reflex Test Expressions

Table 4-43 shows seven of numerous possible reflex conditions. The Example column
shows how one of the conditions may be used to define a reflex condition. The
Explanation column shows how the system interprets the example.
Reflex
Example Explanation
Conditions
Concentration TSH = 10 If the TSH test result is equal to 10,

Expression then run the reflex test.
Test = X NOTE: In certain cases, using
Test <> X concentration expressions can yield
Test < X unexpected results. For more
Test <= X information, see the Reflex Test
Test > X Condition Special Considerations
Test >= X topic.
Table 4-43 Reflex Conditions

C42385
Reflex
Example Explanation
Conditions
Interpretation IgM-Toxo = If the IgM-Toxo test result is

Expression REACTIVE REACTIVE, then run the reflex test.
(Qualitative tests
only)
Test = REACTIVE
Test =
NONREACTIVE
Age Expression AGE = 10 and If the patient is 10 years old, then run
AGE > X YEARS is in the the reflex test.
Age Units field
AGE = X NOTE: Age units are specified in the
AGE < X Add Reflex Condition window, in
AGE <> X the Age Units (Optional) field. The
number must be a non-negative
integer.
Reflexed REFLEXED If the reflexed test TSH is replicated
Expression TSH #3 < 2 2 or more times, and the result for the
REFLEXED Test third replicate is less than 2, then run
the reflex test.
NOTE: If you precede a test with the
REFLEXED keyword, the test must
be a reflexed test to meet the
conditions. In addition, the
REFLEXED keyword may be
followed by a pound sign (#) and a
number, which restricts the reflex
condition to a particular replicate of
the test.
Flag Expression Dil-hCG2 = LOW If Dil-hCG2 result is flagged LOW,
Test = OVR then run the reflex test.
Test = LOW
Test = GRY
Test = ORH
Test = ORL
Test = CRH
Test = CRL
Table 4-43 Reflex Conditions (continued)

C42385
Reflex
Example Explanation
Conditions
Sex Expression SEX = MALE If the patient is male, then run the
SEX = MALE reflex test.
SEX = FEMALE NOTE: Sex expressions are usually
included in a compound expression
(an expression of two or more reflex
conditions combined with AND or
OR).
Compound (SEX = MALE) If the patient is male, over 10 years
Expressions AND (AGE > 10) old, and under 30 years old, run the
(Simple Expression) AND (AGE < 30) reflex test.
AND (Simple and YEARS is in NOTE: Two or more reflex
Expression) the Age Units conditions may be combined with
field AND or OR. Open and closing
(Simple Expression)
OR (Simple parentheses may be used to change
Expression) the order of operations.
Table 4-43 Reflex Conditions (continued)
Reflex Test Examples

Table 4-44 contains reflex conditions examples. The Reflex Conditions Examples are
similar to conditions you can enter in the Conditions field in the Add Reflex
Condition window. The reflex tests conditions use these variables to represent the
elements:
A = TestA, B = TestB, X = VariableA, and Y = VariableB
NOTES
• VariableA and VariableB may be a constant value, such as 10, or the result of
a previously run test.
• The Reflex Test is displayed in the Reflex Test field, and the Expression
appears in the Conditions field in the Add Reflex Condition window.

C42385
If Then Reflex Conditions Examples
A>X Run B Reflex Test: TestB

Expression: TestA > 1000
A<X Run B Reflex Test: TestB
Expression: TestA < 1000
A < AGE X Run B Reflex Test: TestB
AND Expression:
SEX = MALE TestA AGE < 20 AND TestA SEX = MALE
A<X Run B Reflex Test: TestB

AND > Y Expression: TestA < 1000 AND TestA > 500
A= Run B Reflex Test: TestB
REACTIVE Expression: TestA = REACTIVE
Table 4-44 Reflex Test Examples
Reflex Test Error Checking

When you create a reflex condition, the system checks the condition to verify that the
condition uses valid mathematical statements. The system checks for the following
condition errors:
• Unbalanced parentheses (an open parenthesis must be followed by a close
parenthesis)
• Misspelled words (test names, keywords, and operators must be spelled
correctly)
• Incorrect numbers (numeric constants can only contain one decimal point)
• Illegal mathematical operators (mathematical operators [+, -, *, /, ^] are
illegal)
• Repeated self-reflexing (an original test may reflex itself one time only)
• Non-integer ages (an age must be a positive integer value [no decimal point],
such as 3, 15, or 46)
• Incorrect syntax (condition must follow proper syntax rules, see Table 4-41)
It is possible to create a formula that contains other errors that the system considers to
be correct. To avoid generating erroneous results, Beckman Coulter recommends that
you verify your reflex test condition prior to running patient samples. You can verify
your condition by running tests and generating the reflex test result using known
samples, such as controls and calibrators.

C42385
For more information about test requests, see Section 3.2: Patient Test Requests in the
Operator's Guide.
For more information about work pending, see Section 4.3: Work Pending in the
Operator's Guide.
Reflex Test To ensure that the reflex conditions you define perform correctly, take note of the
Condition following special considerations.
Special Con- Precision of Results
siderations
Use the equal sign (=) cautiously when defining reflex conditions. A numeric result
will not usually be identical to a defined numeric condition. For example, a result of
1.0001 does not meet the condition Test = 1.0000.
Results Near or Outside of Calibration Curve Limits

Because the system cannot calculate results for concentrations that are outside the
limits of the assay calibration curve, a reflex condition based on concentrations near
the limits of the curve will not initiate a reflex test when the concentration falls
outside the limits. To assure that a reflex test is requested for high concentrations
(such as for reflexing a dilution assay), use the OVR flag for a reflex condition instead
of, or in addition to, a concentration value. Both methods are shown in the following
examples.
• TESTA=OVR
• TESTA>10000 OR TESTA=OVR
In the first example, the reflex test will run if the concentration is outside the
calibration curve limits.
In the second example, the reflex test will run if the concentration either is greater
than 10,000 units, or is greater than the most concentrated calibrator.

C42385
Reflex Tests You use the Reflex Tests screen to:

Screen • Enable and disable reflex tests
• Select the number of replicates for reflex tests
• Suppress reflex tests
• Add, edit, and delete reflex tests
• Print the Reflex Tests Setup Report
You access the Reflex Tests screen from the Configure menu.
0805B.bmp
Figure 4-45 Reflex Tests Screen
Reflex Test (Field) Displays the name of the reflex test. When the conditions of the reflex test are
met, this test is requested by the system.
Enabled (Box) Select to enable, or clear to disable, reflex tests for the workgroup. Enabled
reflex tests are requested automatically when the conditions for the reflex test are met.
Table 4-46 Reflex Tests Screen Descriptions

C42385
Replicates (Field) Enter the number of replicates of the reflex test to run when the conditions for
the reflex test are met.
Conditions (Field) Displays the conditions the system uses to determine when to run a reflex test.
You configure these conditions in the Add Reflex Condition window.
Suppress (Box) Select to suppress a reflex test. You suppress the reflex test when the test is
already ordered for that sample. When you select this option, the reflex test will not
run, even when the conditions for the reflex test are met.
Age Units (Field) Displays the age unit of measure only if the conditions use age as a variable.
The field is blank, or the values are: Days, Weeks, Months, and Years.
Add Reflex (Button) Select to display the Add Reflex Condition window. You use this window to
Test F4 define reflex tests.
Edit Reflex (Button) Select to display the Edit Reflex Condition window. You use the window to
Test F5 edit existing reflex test conditions.
Delete F6 (Button) Select to delete the selected reflex test for all instruments in the workgroup.
Print F7 (Button) Select to print the Reflex Tests Setup Report.
Table 4-46 Reflex Tests Screen Descriptions (continued)
Enabling and Use this procedure to enable or disable a reflex test for the workgroup.
Disabling
1. Go to the Reflex Tests screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu, select
Reflex Tests Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Reflex Tests F5.
2. Select the Enabled box of the reflex test you want to enable.
The reflex test is enabled for the workgroup immediately.
 (Optional) To disable a reflex test, clear the appropriate option in the Enabled
field.
The reflex test is enabled for the workgroup immediately.

C42385
Selecting Use this procedure to select the number of times you want a reflex test to run.
Replicates for
a Reflex Test Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Reflex Tests F5.
2. Select the Replicates field of the reflex test you want to replicate.
3. Type the number of replicates to run.

The number of replicates is added to the reflex test immediately.
Suppressing You suppress a reflex test to prevent it from running when that test is already ordered
a Reflex Test for the patient sample. You need to suppress the test because the system cannot detect
when you manually ordered a test that matches the reflex test.
Use this procedure to suppress a reflex test for the workgroup.
Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Reflex Tests F5.
2. Select the Suppress box of the reflex test to suppress.

The reflex test is suppressed immediately.
 (Optional) To release a reflex test, clear the Suppress box.

The reflex test is no longer suppressed.

C42385
Adding a Use this procedure to add a reflex test to your Access 2 workgroup.
Reflex Test
2. Select Add Reflex Test F4 to display the Add Reflex Condition window.
2122A.bmp
Figure 4-47 Add Reflex Condition Window
Reflex Test (Field) Select the name of the reflex tests to be requested.
Age Units (Field) Select an age unit of measure to include an age
(Optional) condition for the reflex test. Otherwise leave the field
blank.
Table 4-48 Add Reflex Condition Window Descriptions

C42385
Conditions (Field) Enter the conditions for requesting the reflex test.
Conditions are one or more expressions containing the
values listed in the Tests, Keywords, and Operators
fields.
For more information about conditions, see Reflex Test
Conditions.
Tests (Field) Displays the tests that are enabled for the
workgroup, and can also be included in the Conditions
field.
NOTE: You cannot include the reflexed test in the
conditions.
Keywords (Field) Displays the keyword options that can be added to
the Conditions field. For a list of keywords, see Table
4-40.
Operators (Field) Displays the relational and logical operators that
can be added to the Conditions field. For a list of
operators, see Table 4-40.
NOTE: NOT is listed as an operator in the Add Reflex
Test and Edit Reflex Test windows, but NOT is an
unrecognized entry and will not be accepted in a reflex test
condition.
Clear (Button) Clears the Conditions field.
Conditions F3
Table 4-48 Add Reflex Condition Window Descriptions (continued)
3. Select a test from the Reflex Test field. The list contains the tests you enabled on
the Tests screen of any instrument in your workgroup.
 (Optional) To include an age condition for the reflex test, select age units from
the list in the Age Units (Optional) field.

C42385
4. Define the conditions for the reflex test in the Conditions field. The valid values
are listed in the Tests, Keywords, and Operators fields.
NOTES
• NOT is listed as an operator in the Add Reflex Test and Edit Reflex Test
windows, but NOT is an unrecognized entry and will not be accepted in a
reflex test condition.
• You can add integer or decimal numbers.
• You may include spaces between the elements in the conditions to improve
readability.
• You can change the order of evaluation of the condition by grouping an
expression within parentheses.
• Elements of mathematical equations are calculated based on the order of
• You must enter ages as positive integers. For example, AGE > 15.
• More than one row on the Reflex Tests screen may show the same reflex test
to be run. In this case, an OR operator is assumed between the conditions.
Therefore, you can set up multiple conditions to run the same reflex test.
• You can combine two or more reflex conditions by using the AND or OR
operators.
The system checks the formula for errors (such as syntax), and displays a message if it
finds errors.
 (Optional) Document your reflex test configuration by printing the updated

screen or window using [Print Screen] on the keyboard.

C42385
Editing a Use this procedure to edit a reflex test for your workgroup.
Reflex Test
2. Select a reflex test to edit on the Reflex Tests screen.
3. Select Edit Reflex Test F4 to display the Edit Reflex Condition window.
The Edit Reflex Condition window is basically the same as the Add Reflex Condition
window (see Figure 4-47).
4. In the Conditions field, change the conditions for the reflex test. The valid values
are listed in the Tests, Keywords, and Operators fields.
NOTE
NOT is listed as an operator in the Add Reflex Test and Edit Reflex Test
windows, but NOT is an unrecognized entry and will not be accepted in a reflex
test condition.
The system checks the formula for errors (such as syntax), and displays a message if it
finds errors.

Deleting a Use this procedure to delete a disabled reflex test.

Reflex Test
2. Select a reflex test to be deleted.

Only disabled reflex tests can be deleted. Disable the reflex test, if necessary.
3. Select Delete F6 to delete the reflex test. The system displays a confirmation
message.
4. Select OK F1 to delete the selected reflexed test and exit the window.

C42385
Printing the Use this procedure to print the Reflex Tests Setup Report.
Reflex Tests
Setup Report Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select Reflex Tests F5.
2. Select Print F7.
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Reflex Tests Setup Report Townsville, ST 33333
Reflex Test Enable Replicates Conditions Age Units

Dig X 1 Cortisol >20 AND SEX=MALE
FOL2 X 1 Ferritin=LOW OR VitB12=LOW
freePSA X 2 PSA-Hyb>=4 AND AGE <=30 Years
TSH X 1 TU <= 10 AND AGE>6 Years
Page 1 of 1
0882B.bmp
Figure 4-49 Reflex Tests Setup Report

C42385
4.9: LIS Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
4.9 LIS Setup
The laboratory information system (LIS) interface allows your Access 2 system to
communicate with an LIS. Your LIS vendor configures the LIS to communicate with
the Access 2 system using ASTM E1394-97 and ASTM E1381-95 standard protocols
and the LIS Vendor Information document. The LIS Vendor Information document is
available on CD from Beckman Coulter. Provide the document to your LIS vendor.
An LIS interface, which is configured on for the workgroup, can be configured off for
individual instruments in the workgroup. Other LIS settings must be configured the
same for all instruments in the workgroup, and can only be configured on the server
PC. The server PC is the only system in the workgroup physically connected to the
LIS.
When the LIS interface is on, test requests can be entered at the LIS and transmitted to
the Access 2 system for processing. Received test requests are stored in the LIS
workpool until the corresponding sample IDs are assigned to racks. Sample IDs are
assigned to racks when the system scans barcoded sample containers in the racks or
when you manually enter sample IDs in a test request. When a sample ID is entered,
the system automatically adds the test request information associated with that sample
ID to the test request.
After sample processing, patient sample results and any associated flags can be
automatically sent to the LIS. Alternatively, each result can be reviewed and then
manually selected for transmission to the LIS.
To further define the test results that are automatically sent to the LIS, see
Section 4.7: Ranges Setup.
Quality control and calibration tests cannot be requested from the LIS, but quality
control test results can be transmitted to the LIS. Calibration results cannot be
transmitted to the LIS.
For more information about sample processing and the LIS, see Section 4.1: Sample
Processing in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.9: LIS Setup
LIS Setup You use the LIS Setup window to:

Window • Connect to the LIS
• Select which results are automatically transmitted to the LIS
• Enable and disable host query
• Set the data transmission speed
• Switch the global LIS interface on or off
• Configure the LIS send mode
You access the LIS Setup window from the Configure menu.
0806B.bmp
Figure 4-50 LIS Setup Window
Local LIS (Field) Select a value from the list to switch the data
Interface transmission on or off between the PC that you are working
on and the LIS.
NOTE: You can only select On if the server's global LIS
interface is On.
Values are: On or Off.
Table 4-51 LIS Setup Window Descriptions

C42385
Auto Send to LIS (Field) Select which results the system will send
automatically to the LIS. When you select Off, you can
send the results manually.
Values are: Send All Results, Send Only Auto-Verified
Results, and Off.
Host Query On (Box) Select to enable, or clear to disable, the system from
querying the LIS for specific test requests.
Port (Field) Displays the name of the port where the LIS is
connected to the current system.
This field is available on the server only.
Baud Rate (Field) Select the speed of the data transmission that
matches the LIS. The speeds are listed in baud rates.
Values are: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, and 19200.
This field is displayed on the server system only.
Data Bits (Field) Displays the number of bits that actually contain
information and are being transmitted through the RS232
data connection.
This field is available on the server system only.
Global LIS (Field) Select On to turn the LIS interface on for all
Interface instruments in the workgroup. When the interface is on for
the workgroup, the interface can be turned off for
individual instruments using the local LIS interface. When
the interface is off for the workgroup, the interface cannot
be turned on for the individual instruments. The setting
must be on in order to transfer data to the LIS.
Values are: On, Off, or Off-Line.
This list is available on the server system only and is set up
by the technical support representative when your system is
installed.
LIS Send Mode (Field) Select a mode for sending results to the LIS.
Values are: By Sample Container and By Test.
Table 4-51 LIS Setup Window Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Parity (Field) Displays the parity for the data connection, which is
used to determine the validity of the data during the
transmission.
This field is available on the server system only and is set
up by the technical support representative when your
system is installed.
Stop Bits (Field) Displays the stop bits for the data transmission. A
stop bit indicates to the LIS that a byte of data has just been
transmitted.
Start Bits (Field) Displays the start bits for the data transmission. The
start bit indicates to the LIS that a byte of data will be
transmitted.
Table 4-51 LIS Setup Window Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Connecting You can configure an individual system in the workgroup to send or receive LIS data.
One PC and Use this procedure to set the connection.
Instrument to 1. Go to the LIS Setup window. To get to this window from the Main Menu, select
the LIS Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select LIS F6.
NOTE
The actual transmission of data between an Access 2 workgroup and the LIS only
occurs at the Access 2 instrument that is the server. The interface that you
configure in the Local LIS Interface field is the interface between an individual
Access 2 instrument and the Access 2 server.
2. In the Local LIS Interface field, select an item from the list.
• Select On to enable the system to receive test requests from and send test results
to the LIS. The connection can be configured on only if the global interface is
configured on. For more information about configuring the global LIS interface
on, see the Configuring the Global LIS Settings procedure.
• Select Off to disable data communication between the system and the LIS. The
connection can be configured off for this system, and be configured on for the
workgroup.
Transmitting Use this procedure to select data transmission parameters for the connection between
Data to the the PC that you are working on and the LIS.
LIS 1. Go to the LIS Setup window. To get to this window from the Main Menu, select
Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select LIS F6.
2. In the Auto Send to LIS field, select an item from the list.
• Select Send All Requests to automatically send test results to the LIS as soon as
results are generated.
• Select Send Only Auto-Verified Results to automatically send only verified
results to the LIS. For information about setting up verification criteria, see
Section 4.7: Ranges Setup.
• Select Off to prevent automatic sending of results to the LIS. You can manually
send results to the LIS. For more information about manually sending test results,
see Section 5.3: Managing Test Results in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Enabling and If a sample ID is entered in the Test Requests screen, and no matching sample ID is
Disabling found in the LIS workpool, the Access 2 system can automatically query the LIS for
Host Query any unsent test requests.
Use this procedure to enable the host query capability.
1. Go to the LIS Setup window. To get to this window from the Main Menu, select
2. Select the Host Query On box to enable the system to query the LIS for specific
test requests.
 (Optional) Clear the Host Query On box to disable host query capability. Disable
host query if your system is not connected to an LIS.
Configuring Use this procedure to configure the global LIS settings for your workgroup.
the Global LIS
NOTE
Settings
This option is only available on the server system.
2. Select a data transmission speed from the Baud Rate list.
NOTE
The baud rate you enter must match the LIS baud rate. Refer to your LIS
documentation or contact your LIS vendor to determine the correct baud rate.
3. Select On, Off, or Offline from the Global LIS Interface field.
• Select On to enable the system to communicate with the LIS. When an LIS is
connected to the Access 2 system, the Local LIS Interface field also should be
enabled (On) to receive test requests from and send test results to the LIS.
• Select Off to disable data communication between the current system and the
LIS. You use this option if your system is not connected to an LIS.
• Select Offline to temporarily suspend the transmission of data to the LIS
interface. When the LIS interface is offline, the system stores any data waiting to
be sent to the LIS. The results are sent to the LIS when you set the Global LIS
Interface field to On.

C42385
Configuring Use this procedure to configure how your workgroup sends results to the LIS.
the LIS Send
NOTE
Mode
If you have multiple Access 2 systems, be sure that the server and client systems
are all in the Ready or Not Ready mode. All of the remaining steps in this
procedure refer to the server system only.
2. Set the Global LIS Interface field to Off. For more information about setting the
Global LIS Interface, see the Configuring the Global LIS Settings procedure.
NOTE
The system will not transmit results to the LIS while the Global LIS Interface
field is set to Off. If results are generated while the LIS interface is Off, you must
manually send those results to the LIS. For more information about manually
sending test results, see Section 5.3: Managing Test Results of the Operator's
Guide.
4. From the Main Menu, select Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then
select LIS F6 to return to the LIS Setup window.
5. Select a mode from the LIS Send Mode field.
• Select By Sample Container to send the test results to the LIS when all of the
requested tests for the sample container are complete.
• Select By Test to send the test result to the LIS as soon as the test is complete.
6. Enter your system password.
NOTES
Support.
7. Select OK F1 to exit the window.
8. Select OK F1 to confirm the change and exit the LIS Setup window.
9. Select Yes F1 to change the LIS send mode.
10. Set the Global LIS Interface field to On. For more information about setting the
Global LIS Interface, see the Configuring the Global LIS Settings procedure.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 4.10: PC Administration Setup
4.10 PC Administration Setup
The Access 2 workgroup database stores large amounts of data. This information is
critical to your laboratory. Manage it carefully. Data stored in electronic storage
media is susceptible to corruption and loss. To prevent catastrophic losses caused by a
failure, back up your data regularly. Backing up the data saves system related files,
including test results data, configuration settings, and utilities. Also, when the
database becomes very large, it can affect the efficiency of the system. To keep your
system running at peak efficiency, store only current patient test and QC results on the
database.
System backup data is stored on either of the following media:

• A backup tape, using the tape drive of your PC.
• A flash drive plugged into the USB port of the external computer.
Either medium provides sufficient storage capacity for complete system backups.
When the system stores data on the USB flash drive, the system stores the same
backup data on the disk drive of the external computer, which maintains several of the
most recent backups. This provides redundancy of backups and enables quick
restoration of data in most cases.
You can schedule the system to back up the data automatically, or you can manually
back up the data. Determining the appropriate backup schedule is a matter of
laboratory preference. You will establish a backup schedule with the technical support
representative when your system is installed.

C42385
4.10: PC Administration Setup Access 2 Reference Manual
NOTES
• To limit the amount of data that is lost in the event of catastrophic
failure, Beckman Coulter recommends that you back up your data daily.
• If using tape, keep at least three backup tapes. Cycle the tapes to be sure that
at least three backup cycles are available. Store the backup tapes in a safe
place.
• When you back up your system data, the current data overwrites the contents
of the tape or USB flash drive.
• Your PC administration setup applies to all Access 2 instruments in the
workgroup.
If a catastrophic data loss occurs, Technical Support can help you restore the system
with the most recent backup. All data generated since the last backup will be lost.
Also, the supply counts will be lost; therefore, to prevent invalid results, you must
discard all punctured reagent packs.
After running many tests on your Access 2 Immunoassay System, the amount of data
stored in the database can become very large and can affect the efficiency of the
system. If your Access 2 system performance is slow, you can use the Auto-Delete
function to delete patient test and QC results from the database.
You can set up the Auto-Delete function to run at scheduled intervals. Determining
the appropriate schedule is a matter of laboratory preference.

C42385
PC Admin You use the PC Admin screen to:

Screen • View the results of the last backup and the status of the next scheduled
backup
• Schedule automatic system backups or perform immediate system backups
• Eject a backup tape
• Restore system data
• Set up the Auto-Delete function to automatically delete patient test and QC
results from the database
• Shut down the PC
You access the PC Admin screen from the Configure menu.
0841C.bmp
Figure 4-52 PC Admin Screen

C42385
Last Backup Status — (Field) Displays the status of the last system backup, which is either
Succeeded, Failed, Aborted, or Not Available.
Began — (Field) Shows the date and time that the last system backup began.
Completed — (Field) Shows the date and time that the last system backup
completed.
Next Backup Status — (Field) Displays the status of the next scheduled system backup, which is
either Scheduled or Not Scheduled.
Begin — (Field) Shows the date and time that the next scheduled system backup will
begin.
Frequency — (Field) Shows how frequently the system backup is scheduled to
occur.
Scheduled (Button) Select to display the Scheduled Backup window. You use the window to
Backup F1 schedule system backups. Scheduled backups occur weekly or daily at the date and
time you select in the window.
This button is only available on the server system.
NOTE: You must enter a password to use this feature.
Immediate (Button) Select to display the Immediate Backup window. You use the window to run
Backup F2 an immediate backup.
This button is only available on the server system.
Eject Tape F3 (Button) Select to remove a backup tape from the instrument.
Restore F4 (Button) Select to restore backed up data only as instructed by Technical Support.
Auto-Delete (Button) Select to display the Auto-Delete Setup window. You use the window to
Setup F5 schedule the deletion of patient test results, QC results, and expired off-board reagent
packs from the database.
Remote Select to set up instrument control sharing. Use this function only as directed by your
Management F6 technical support representative.
Shut Down PC F8 (Button) Select to shut down the PC.
For information on shutting down the PC, see Section 7.3: Rebooting, Shutting
Table 4-53 PC Admin Screen Descriptions

C42385
Scheduling
System Back- Confirm that backup
ups media is present to
receive data
Main Menu
You can only schedule backups on the server

system.
Configure
F8
PC Admin
F7
PC Admin
Scheduled Backup
F1
Password
Enter your
system password
OK
F1
Scheduled Backup
1. Select the Enable automatic backup box
2. Select Daily Backup or Weekly Backup
3. For a weekly backup, select the day of the week
4. Select a time to run the backup
OK
F1
Back up runs at
scheduled time and
date
Was the For more information, see the

Back up the system
Backup No Performing Immediate System
manually
Successful? Backups procedure in this section.
Yes*
OK
F1 * Initial the Maintenance Log
0921C.wmf
Figure 4-54 Scheduling System Backups Flowchart

C42385
Use this procedure to schedule system data backups to a backup tape or USB flash
drive.
• Be sure to label the tape or flash drive either before or after the backup is
made.
• You can only schedule backups on the server system.
• The backup is postponed if there are pending tests in the workgroup, or if one
or more systems is in the Running or Paused mode. If those conditions are
present, the scheduled backup is postponed for five minutes. After 100 failed
attempts (approximately eight hours), the scheduled backup is aborted, and
the system displays a message.
1. Confirm that backup media is present to receive data.

• If you back up to tape, be sure the correct tape is in the tape drive.
• If you back up to flash drive, be sure the flash drive is plugged into the USB
port of the external computer.
3. Go to the PC Admin screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu, select
Configure F8 to display the Configure menu, then select PC Admin F7.
4. Select Scheduled Backup F1.
NOTES
Support.

C42385
6. Select OK F1.
The Scheduled Backup window is displayed.
2156A.bmp
Figure 4-55 Scheduled Backup Window
Enable automatic (Box) Select to enable scheduled system backups.

backup Scheduled system backups run automatically on a specified
day and time.
Daily Backup (Option) Select to schedule the system backup every day at
the time specified in the Start Time field.
Weekly Backup (Option) Select to schedule the system backup to run
weekly.
NOTE: When you select the Weekly Backup option, also
select a day of the week and the time of day for the backup
to run.
Start Time (Field) Select a time from the list. This is the time the
system backup will run.
Table 4-56 Scheduled Backup Window Descriptions

C42385
7. Select the Enable Automatic Backup box to enable the scheduled backup.
 (Optional) Clear the Enable Automatic Backup box to disable automatic

backups.
8. Select the Daily Backup or Weekly Backup option to set the backup frequency.
9. If you selected the Weekly Backup box, select the day from the list that you want
the backup to run.
10. Select a backup start time from the list in the Start Time field.
The backup runs at the scheduled time and date.
12. When the backup is complete, the system displays a message that notifies you if
the backup succeeded, aborted, or failed. Select OK F1 to exit the backup status
message.
• If the backup aborted or failed, manually back up the system (see the Performing
Immediate System Backups procedure).
• If the backup aborts or fails again, contact Technical Support.
13. When the backup is successful, initial the appropriate section of the Maintenance
Log (see Section 8.6: Maintenance Log in the Operator's Guide).

C42385
Performing Use this procedure to perform a system data backup to a backup tape or USB flash
Immediate drive on demand.
System Back- NOTES
ups
• Be sure to label the tape or flash drive either before or after the backup is
made.
• You can only schedule backups on the server system.
1. Confirm that backup media is present to receive data.

• If you back up to tape, be sure the correct tape is in the tape drive.
• If you back up to flash drive, be sure the flash drive is plugged into the USB port
of the external computer.
4. Select Immediate Backup F2.

NOTES
Support.
6. Select OK F1.
The Immediate Backup window is displayed.
NOTES
• If you attempt to run a backup when the system is in the Running or Paused
mode, the system displays a message.
• If you attempt to run an immediate backup while a scheduled backup is
running, a message is displayed and the immediate backup is not run.
7. When the backup is complete, the system displays a message to notify you if the
backup succeeded, aborted, or failed.
• If the backup aborted or failed, repeat this procedure.
• If the backup aborts or fails again, contact Technical Support.
When the backup is successful, initial the appropriate section of the Maintenance Log
(see Section 8.6: Maintenance Log in the Operator's Guide).
8. Select OK F1 to exit the backup status message.

C42385
Replacing the If you back up to tape, use this procedure to replace the backup tape after a scheduled
Backup Tape or immediate backup. If you back up to a USB flash drive, skip this procedure.
1. Be sure the system is in Ready or Not Ready mode.
3. Select Eject Tape F3 to eject the tape.

If no tape is in the drive, or a backup is in progress, the system displays an error
message.
4. Remove the tape from the tape drive on the external PC.
5. Label the tape according to laboratory policy. At a minimum, mark the tape with
the backup date and time and the system ID.
NOTE
For both scheduled and immediate backups, it is your responsibility to label the
tape and make sure the correct tape is in the drive.
6. Place another tape in the tape drive for the next backup. Push the tape until it is
properly seated.
Restoring Contact Technical Support for instructions on how to perform this procedure.
System Data
CAUTION
Beckman Coulter, Inc. strongly recommends that you contact Technical
Support before running restore because critical data will be erased during
the procedure.
Setting the Use this procedure to set up the auto-delete database size management function.
Auto-Delete
NOTE
Function
You can only set the Auto-Delete function from the server system.
2. Select Auto-Delete Setup F5.

C42385
NOTES
Support.
4. Select OK F1.
The Auto-Delete Setup window is displayed.
5. Select the boxes for the types of database deletions you intend to automate:
• Select the Automatically delete patient samples after box to schedule the
deletion of patient test results from the database.
• Select the Automatically delete QC samples after box to schedule the deletion
of QC results from the database.
• Select the Automatically delete off-board reagent packs 30 days after
expiration box to schedule deletion of expired off-board reagent packs.
6. In the Days field for each box you selected in step 5, enter the number of days
that must elapse before the test results are deleted from the database.
7. Select OK F1.
A confirmation window is displayed.
8. Select OK F1.
The Auto-Delete function deletes results when one of the following conditions occur:
• Immediately after you perform this procedure.
• One hour after the scheduled system backup. If no system backup is set, the
Auto-Delete function runs at a default time that does not conflict with other
system operations. For more information about scheduled system backups, see
the Scheduling System Backups procedure.
• Ten minutes after the server PC is rebooted. For information about rebooting the
PC, see the Rebooting the PC procedure in Section 7.3: Rebooting, Shutting

C42385

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5: Diagnostics
5 Diagnostics
5.1 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2 Initialize System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Initializing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3 Prime Fluidics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Priming the Fluidics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4 Volume Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Volume Checks Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Access to RVs for Volume Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Evaluating Visual Volume Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Evaluating and Troubleshooting Dispense Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Performing Substrate or Dispense Probe Visual Volume Checks . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Performing Main Pipettor Visual Volume Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Performing Aspirate Probes Visual Volume Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Handling RVs for Analytical Volume Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Performing Substrate Probe Analytical Volume Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Performing Dispense Probe Analytical Volume Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Performing Main Pipettor Analytical Volume Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Performing Aspirate Probes Analytical Volume Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

C42385
5: Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
5.5 Mechanics and Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Device Diagnostics Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Resetting the Pipettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Mechanics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Viewing Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Homing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Cycling a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Disabling or Enabling Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Aligning a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5.6 Analog and Digital Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Viewing Analog Device Temperatures and Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Pressure Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Determining a Reference Curve for Obstruction Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Turning Digital Devices Off and On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Viewing Digital Device Sensor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Running the Automated Vacuum Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Running the Manual Vacuum Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.7 Luminometer Device Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Luminometer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Viewing Luminometer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Taking a Luminometer Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5: Diagnostics
5.8 Advanced Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Viewing Ultrasonics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Performing a Level Sense Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Exercising Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Calibrating the Incubator Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Copying Diagnostic Data to a Disk or USB Flash Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5.9 LIS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
LIS Diagnostics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Performing a Query for Test Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Printing a Reply from the LIS Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Copying Data Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Clearing the Data Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.10 Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Printing Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.11 Individual System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Running Washed Check Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Running Substrate Check Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Running Unwashed Check Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

C42385
5.1: Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
5.1 Diagnostics
The Access 2 system includes features to help diagnose an instrument problem if one
occurs. Using the Diagnostics menu, you can monitor the instrument hardware,
perform diagnostic actions, and verify the effectiveness of troubleshooting steps
taken. You can print four different diagnostic reports and copy diagnostic data to a
disk or USB flash drive.
Generally, you perform instrument diagnostic activities based on troubleshooting

procedures in the Help system system or an Access 2 manual, or on instructions from
a technical support representative. Many instrument problems generate events in the
Event Log and their related troubleshooting procedures refer you to diagnostic
procedures. Troubleshooting procedures for failed System Check routine results also
refer you to diagnostics procedures, such as for volume checks and priming.
When performing diagnostic procedures, be sure to pay careful attention to the notes
and cautions in the procedures to avoid injury to yourself or damage to the instrument.
For more information about Event Log troubleshooting, in Section 6.4: List of Events.
For more information about system check or instrument troubleshooting, or for

general information about how to troubleshoot, see Appendix A: Troubleshooting.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.1: Diagnostics
Diagnostics You use the Diagnostics menu to:

Menu • View or print system parameters
• Run diagnostic or maintenance procedures
• Perform validation procedures after troubleshooting
• Copy test result information
NOTES
• Some diagnostic procedures should be used only as directed by a technical
support representative or when you are following instructions in the Help
system system or in an Access 2 manual.
• Except for LIS F5 and Diagnostic Reports F7, Diagnostics menu options
cannot be selected while the system is in the Running mode.
To get to this menu from the Main Menu, select Diagnostics F7.
0733D.bmp
Figure 5-1 Diagnostics Menu

C42385
5.1: Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
Initialize (Button) Select to initialize the primary system devices. The Initialize System
System F1 window is displayed, confirming whether you want to initialize the system.
For more information about how to use this option, see the Initializing the System
procedure in this chapter.
NOTE: The system must be in the Ready or Not Ready mode to display this
window.
Prime Fluidics F2 (Button) Select to prime the pipettor, dispense probes, or substrate fluidics. The
Prime Fluidics window is displayed, from which you select the fluidic components to
prime and the number of cycles for each component.
For more information about how to use this option, see the Priming the Fluidics
NOTE: The system must be in the Ready mode to display this window.
Volume (Button) Select to display the Volume Checks screen. You can check the accuracy of
Checks F3 the volumes dispensed or aspirated through the fluidic system probes.
For more information about volume checks, see Section 5.4: Volume Checks in this
chapter.
NOTE: The system must be in the Ready mode to display this screen.
Device (Button) Select to display the Device Diagnostics screen. You can perform advanced
Diagnostics F4 device diagnostic or service procedures from this screen.
For more information about what you can do from the Device Diagnostic screen, see
Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics in this chapter.
NOTE: The system must be in the Ready or Not Ready mode to display this screen.
LIS F5 (Button) Select to display the LIS Diagnostics screen. You can view the contents of
the LIS messages in real time and you can diagnose LIS problems.
Save Data F6 (Button) Select to display a menu of storage options for diagnostic data.
NOTE: The system must be in the Ready or Not Ready mode to display the Copy to
Disk or Export Logs windows.
• Copy to Disk F1 — (Button) Select to copy information to a disk or USB flash
drive. The Copy to Disk window is displayed.
For more information about how to use this option, see the Copying Diagnostic
Data to a Disk or USB Flash Drive procedure in this chapter.
• Export Logs F2 — (Button) Select to collect and save system status logs to a
single location. Use this function only as directed by a technical support
representative or when you are following instructions in the system documentation.
Table 5-2 Diagnostics Menu Descriptions

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.1: Diagnostics
Diagnostic (Button) Select to print one of the following diagnostic reports:

Reports F7 • Alignment Report
• Level Sense Report
• Incubator Belt Calibration Report
• Temperature Report
Table 5-2 Diagnostics Menu Descriptions (continued)

C42385
5.2: Initialize System Access 2 Reference Manual
5.2 Initialize System
When you initialize the system, a routine brings all devices to their home states. This
routine is known as initialization, and it prepares the system for further processing.
The following primary system devices move to home position:
• Main pipettor
• Precision pump
• Incubator belt
• RV rake
• RV shuttle
• Wash/read carousel
• Reagent carousel
• Sample carousel
• Wash valve
• Other mechanical devices

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.2: Initialize System
Initializing the Use this procedure to initialize the system.

System
NOTES
• Do not select any buttons or press any keys until initializing is complete.
• If the system does not successfully initialize, contact Technical Support.

2. Go to the Initialize System window. To get to this window from the Main Menu,
select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then select
Initialize System F1.
The Initialize System window is displayed, with a confirmation message.
3. Select Yes F1.

The system initializes and homes all primary system devices. If the instrument is
equipped with an internal reagent bar code reader, the system also remaps all empty
slots and reagent packs that were automatically loaded, and updates the inventory (for
information about enabling the internal reagent bar code reader, see Setting Up the
Internal Reagent Bar Code Reader on page 4-27). Messages in the window indicate
the progress of the procedure. The procedure ends in the Ready mode and the Main
Menu is displayed.

C42385
5.3: Prime Fluidics Access 2 Reference Manual
5.3 Prime Fluidics
Priming fills the lines with fluid in preparation for operating the instrument. You can
prime one or more components and you can select the number of priming cycles for
each component. Use the default setting for the number of priming cycles unless an
Access 2 manual or a technical support representative directs you to change the
number.
Priming the Use this procedure to prime the pipettor, dispense probes, or substrate fluidic lines.
Fluidics
2. Go to the Prime Fluidics window. To get to this window from the Main Menu,
select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then select Prime
Fluidics F2.
0729D.bmp
Figure 5-3 Prime Fluidics Window

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.3: Prime Fluidics
Prime (Boxes) Select one or more of the following components to

prime:
• Pipettor
• Dispense Probes
• Substrate
Cycles (Field) Select and type a number to change the number of
Requested cycles from the default for a selected component.
Possible values: 1-20 cycles. Default value: 4 cycles.
Cycles (Field) Displays the number of cycles remaining until
Remaining priming is complete for a selected component.
Start Priming F2 (Button) Select Start Priming F2 to prime the selected
or components. When priming starts, the button changes to
Stop Priming F2 Stop Priming F2.
(Button) Select Stop Priming F2 to stop priming. Priming

stops at the end of the next complete cycle.
Done F8 (Button) When priming is complete, or if you choose not to
prime, select Done F8 to exit the Prime Fluidics window
and return to the Main Menu.
Table 5-4 Prime Fluidics Window Descriptions
3. Select one or more of the components you want to prime:

• Select the Pipettor box to prime the fluidic line with wash buffer from the wash
buffer bottle through the reservoir, the precision pump, the precision valve, and
the main probe.
• Select the Dispense Probes box to prime the fluidic line with wash buffer from
the wash buffer bottle through the reservoir, the wash pump, the wash valve, and
the dispense probes.
• Select the Substrate box to prime the fluidic line with substrate from the
substrate bottle through the substrate pump, the substrate valve, the substrate
heater, and the substrate probe.
4. For each component to be primed, confirm or change the default number of

cycles displayed. Change the default number of cycles only as instructed by a
technical support representative or by a procedure you are following in the Help
system system or in an Access 2 manual. To change the number of cycles for a
component, select the Cycles Requested field across from that component and
type the number.

C42385
5.3: Prime Fluidics Access 2 Reference Manual
5. Select Start Priming F2.

The system primes the selected components and displays messages about the progress
of the maintenance procedure.
6. When priming is complete, select OK F1 to return to the Prime Fluidics window,

and then select Done F8 to return to the Main Menu.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.4: Volume Checks
5.4 Volume Checks
Volume checks measure the precision and accuracy of the dispense and aspirate
components of the fluidic module. You may need to perform one or more of the
following volume checks as part of diagnostics or troubleshooting:
• Substrate
• Pipettor volumes 50 µL, 200 µL, or 350 µL
• Dispense Probes 1, 2, or 3
• Aspirate Probes
You can use either visual or analytical procedures when performing a volume check:
• Visual volume checks rely on what you see to detect gross volume
discrepancies or dispense irregularities.
• Analytical volume checks require an analytical balance to discriminate
gravimetric volumes to the nearest hundredth (0.01) of a milligram.

C42385
5.4: Volume Checks Access 2 Reference Manual
Volume You use the Volume Checks screen to:

Checks • Check dispensed volumes of the substrate system
Screen • Check aspirated and dispensed volume residuals of the main pipettor
• Check dispensed volumes for a dispense probe
• Check the aspiration of the aspirate probes
You access the Volume Checks screen from the Diagnostics menu.
0730B.bmp
Figure 5-5 Volume Checks Screen
Substrate F1 (Button) Select to run the substrate volume check test. The Substrate Volume Check
window is displayed, from which you can start the test.
Pipettor 50 µL F2 (Button) Select to check the aspirated and dispensed volume of the main pipettor. The
Pipettor 50 µL window is displayed, from which you can load a rack and start the
volume test.
Table 5-6 Volume Checks Screen Descriptions

C42385
Pipettor (Button) Select to check the aspirated and dispensed volume of the main pipettor. The
200 µL F3 Pipettor 200 µL window is displayed, from which you can load a rack and start the
volume test.
Pipettor (Button) Select to check the aspirated and dispensed volume of the main pipettor. The
350 µL F4 Pipettor 350 µL window is displayed, from which you can load a rack and start the
volume test.
Dispense (Button) Select to check the dispensed volume of the dispense probe in position 1.
Probe 1 F5 The Dispense Probe 1 window is displayed, from which you can run the dispense
probe volume test.
probe volume test.
probe volume test.
Aspirate (Button) Select to check the aspirated volume of the three aspirate probes. The
Probes F8 Aspirate Probe window is displayed, from which you can run the aspirate probe
volume test.
Table 5-6 Volume Checks Screen Descriptions (continued)
Access to When performing a volume check, you access the RVs in shuttle positions 1, 2, and 3.
RVs for Vol-
1
ume Checks
2
3
00371.eps
1 Position 1
2 Position 2
3 Position 3
4 To RV Waste Bag
Figure 5-7 RV Shuttle Positions

C42385
Evaluating The substrate check, dispense probe checks, and main pipettor checks measure
Visual Volume dispensed volumes. You visually evaluate dispensed volumes for all three checks the
Checks same way. Refer to the following guide when comparing dispensed volumes to the
manually pipetted reference RV.
Visual Comparison Expected Result
Three dispensed RVs Three equal volumes of fluid, or the

difference in any two RVs no greater
than half of the meniscus height
Reference RV Within one meniscus height of the fluid
in each of the dispensed RVs
Table 5-8 Visual Volume Comparison
If you see a significant volume difference, contact Technical Support.
Evaluating Properly dispensed fluids leave no bubbles on the surface, or only a few small,
and Trouble- regularly sized bubbles around the edge of the surface. Refer to the following
shooting Dis- illustration when evaluating dispense characteristics.
pense
1 2 3
Characteris-
tics
0892b.eps
1 Irregular
2 Regular
3 Regular
Figure 5-9 RV Dispense Characteristics, Top View
If the dispense characteristics are irregular, take the following actions with the system
in the Ready or Not Ready mode.
1. Look for splashing up the sides of the RVs. Contact Technical Support if
splashing is noted.

C42385
2. Open the front panel, inspect the lines, and straighten any kinks. Close the front
panel.
For more information, see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures.
3. Prime the fluidic system that dispensed improperly (substrate, dispense, or

pipettor).
For more information about this step, see the Priming the Fluidics procedure in this
chapter.
4. Repeat the visual volume check procedure.
5. If irregular air bubbles continue, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Performing
Substrate or Main Menu
Dispense
Probe Visual
Diagnostics
Volume F7
Volume Checks
Checks
F3
Volume Checks
Select the button for the

volume check you are
performing
Substrate Dispense Probe 1 Dispense Probe 2 Dispense Probe 3
F1 F5 F6 F7
Substrate Dispense Probe 1 Dispense Probe 2 Dispense Probe 3
Start Test Start Test Start Test Start Test

F2 F2 F2 F2
The system begins

dispensing and displays
a message when
dispensing is complete
Open front panel,

remove RVs from
shuttle positions 1-3,
and close front panel
OK
F1
Pipette test volume of Test volumes:

wash buffer into a For substrate probe - 200 μL
reference RV and For dispense probe 1 - 150 μL
compare the volumes For dispense probe 2 - 500 μL
For dispense probe 3 - 500 μL
Significant
volume No Inspect Dispense
difference? Characteristics
Yes
Normal
characteristics No Troubleshoot
Call Technical Support ?
Refer to Evaluating and

Yes Troubleshooting Dispense
Characteristics
Done
0734b.wmf
Figure 5-10 Performing Visual Substrate or Dispense Probe Volume Checks

C42385
Use this procedure to detect gross volume errors or irregular dispense characteristics
of the substrate or dispense fluidic system. This procedure checks the substrate probe
or one dispense probe. Repeat the procedure to check another probe, as needed.
WARNINGS
• You will come in contact with potentially infectious materials during this
procedure. Handle and dispose of biohazard materials according to proper
laboratory procedures. Proper hand, eye, and facial protection is required.
• Wash buffer contains a preservative, which may cause sensitization by skin
contact. After contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
Wear suitable gloves.
Required Materials
• Forceps
• Empty rack
• Empty reaction vessel (RV)
• Pipettor to dispense from 150 µL to 500 µL
• Wash Buffer
Dispensing from the Substrate or Dispense Probe

2. Go to the Volume Checks screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then select Volume
Checks F3.

C42385
3. Identify the probe to be checked. There is one substrate probe. To identify

dispense probe numbers, see Figure 5-11.
7
6
1
5 4 3 2
1
6
3 2
5
4
0195Hc.eps
1 Dispense Probe 1 (Probe # 1)

2 Aspirate Probe 1 (Probe # 2)
7 Substrate Probe (Probe # 7)
Figure 5-11 Probe Numbers and Locations
4. From the Volume Checks screen, select the probe to check from the following
buttons:
• Substrate F1
• Dispense Probe 1 F5
The appropriate substrate volume check or dispense probe volume check window is
displayed.
5. Select Start Test F2 to begin the procedure.
The instrument dispenses the substrate or wash buffer and returns the RVs to their
shuttle positions. The system displays progress messages.

C42385
Reviewing Dispensed Volumes and Characteristics

1. When prompted by the system message, open the front panel of the instrument
For information about opening and closing the front panel, see
Section 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures.
2. With forceps, remove the dispensed RVs from shuttle positions 1, 2, and 3 and
place them in an empty rack. To locate shuttle positions, see Figure 5-7.
3. Close the front panel of the instrument, then select OK F1.

The shuttle advances three positions. The Volume Checks screen is displayed when
the instrument completes this movement.
4. Prepare a reference RV for dispensed volume comparisons by manually pipetting

the appropriate volume of wash buffer into an empty RV.
• For the substrate probe, pipette 200 µL of wash buffer.
• For dispense probe number 1, pipette 150 µL of wash buffer.
• For dispense probes number 2 or 3, pipette 500 µL of wash buffer.
5. Align the reference RV and the dispensed RVs so they are level with each other
and visually compare the volumes for gross volume discrepancies.
For a guide to evaluating the volume results, see Table 5-8.
6. If you see a significant volume difference between the reference RV and any of
the test RVs, contact Technical Support.
7. Inspect the fluid in the dispensed RVs for irregularities and troubleshoot as
needed.
For a guide to evaluating and troubleshooting dispense characteristics, see the
Evaluating and Troubleshooting Dispense Characteristics procedure in this section.

C42385
Performing
Main Pipettor Main Menu
Visual Volume
Checks
Diagnostics
F7
Volume Checks
F3
Volume Checks
Select the button for the

volume check you are
performing
Pipettor 50 µL Pipettor 200 µL Pipettor 350 µL
F2 F3 F4
Pipettor 50 µL Pipettor 200 µL Pipettor 350 µL
Pipette 1.5 ml of wash Pipette 1.5 ml of wash Pipette 1.5 ml of wash

buffer into cup and put buffer into cup and put buffer into cup and put
in sample position 1 of in sample position 1 of in sample position 1 of
rack rack rack
Load a Rack Load a Rack Load a Rack
F1 F1 F1
Put the rack on board

the instrument
Done
F1
Start Test
F2
Open front panel,

remove RVs from
Unload Rack
F1
Pipette test volume of Test Volumes:

wash buffer into a 50, 200, or 350 µL
reference RV and
compare the volumes
Significant
Inspect Dispense
volume No Characteristics
difference?
Yes
Normal
characteristics No Troubleshoot
Call Technical Support ?
Refer to Evaluating
Yes and Troubleshooting
Dispense Characteristics
Done
0874b.wmf
Figure 5-12 Performing Visual Main Pipettor Volume Checks

C42385
Use this procedure to detect gross volume aspirate or dispense errors or irregular
dispense characteristics of the main pipettor fluidic system. This procedure checks
one volume. Repeat the procedure to check another volume, as needed.
WARNINGS
Required Materials
• 2 mL sample cup
• Pipettors to dispense from 50 µL to 1.5 mL fluid
• Wash buffer
• 13 mm rack for 2 mL sample cups
• Forceps
• Empty reaction vessel (RV)
Dispensing from the Main Pipettor

Checks F3.
3. From the Volume Checks screen, select the pipettor volume to check from the
following buttons:
• Pipettor 50 µL F2
The appropriate pipettor volume check window is displayed.

C42385
0731b.bmp
Figure 5-13 Pipettor Volume Check Window
Load a Rack F1 (Button) Select Load a Rack F1 to load the rack prepared
or for the pipettor volume check. When the rack is onboard,
Unload Rack F1 the button changes to Unload Rack F1.
Select Unload Rack F1 to unload the rack when the
volume check is done.
Start Test F2 (Button) Select to start the check when the rack is onboard.
Table 5-14 Pipettor Volume Check Window Descriptions
4. Manually pipette at least 1.5 mL of wash buffer into a sample cup and place the
cup in sample position 1 of a rack.
NOTE
When performing repeated dispense checks, verify that the sample cup contains
sufficient volume to complete the three aspirations. For the 200 and 350 µL
volumes, be sure to refill the sample cup before repeating the check.
5. Select Load a Rack F1.

The instrument presents a rack position in the sample carousel.
6. Place the rack onboard the instrument.

For detailed instructions on loading a rack on the sample carousel, see the Loading
Racks procedure in Chapter 3: Sample Management of the Operator's Guide.
7. Select Done F1 to confirm that the rack is onboard.
8. Select Start Test F2 to start the procedure.

The instrument dispenses the wash buffer and returns the RVs to the shuttle. A
progress message is displayed.

C42385
9. When prompted by the system message, open the front panel of the instrument.
For information about opening and closing the front panel, (see
Section 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures).
10. With forceps, remove the dispensed RVs from shuttle positions 1, 2, and 3 and
place them in an empty rack. To locate shuttle positions, see Figure 5-7.
The shuttle advances three positions.
Unloading the Rack

1. When prompted by the system message, select Unload Rack F1.
The instrument presents the rack at the load door.
2. Remove the rack from the instrument.

For detailed instructions on unloading a rack from the sample carousel, see the
Unloading Racks procedure in Chapter 3: Sample Management of the Operator's
Guide.
3. Select Done F1 to confirm that the rack is not onboard the instrument.
Reviewing Dispensed Volumes and Characteristics

1. Prepare a reference RV for dispensed volume comparisons by manually pipetting
50 µL, 200 µL, or 350 µL of wash buffer (the same selected for this check) into
an empty RV.
2. Align the reference RV and the dispensed RVs so they are level with each other
and visually compare the volumes for gross volume discrepancies.
For a guide to evaluating the results, see Table 5-8.
3. If you see a significant volume difference between the reference RV and any of
the test RVs, contact Technical Support.
4. Inspect the fluid in the dispensed RVs for irregularities and troubleshoot as
needed.
For a guide to evaluating and troubleshooting dispense characteristics, see the
Evaluating and Troubleshooting Dispense Characteristics procedure in this chapter.

C42385
Performing
Aspirate Main Menu
Probes Visual
Volume
Check Diagnostics
F7
Volume Checks
F3
Volume Checks
Aspirate Probes
F8
Aspirate Probes
Open front panel, Repeat for RVs in shuttle

remove RV from shuttle positions 2 and 3
position 1, number, and
return to shuttle position
Start
F2
When prompted, open

the front panel, remove
aspirated RVs,
and close panel
Done
F1
Start Test
F2
Open front panel,

remove RVs from
Significant
amount of fluid No Done
remaining?
Yes
Aspirate probe failed

volume check
Clean or replace
aspirate probe
0875b.wmf
Figure 5-15 Performing Visual Aspirate Probe Volume Check

C42385
Use this procedure to detect gross volume errors of the aspirate fluidic system. This
procedure checks all three aspirate probes at the same time. A different probe
aspirates from each of three dispensed RVs.
WARNING
You will come in contact with potentially infectious materials during this
Required Materials
• Forceps
• Marker to number the dispensed RVs
Aspirate with the Aspirate Probes

Checks F3.
3. Select Aspirate Probes F8 to display the Aspirate Probes Volume Check

window.
0877b.bmp
Figure 5-16 Aspirate Probes Volume Check Window
Start Test F2 (Button) Select to start the aspirate probe visual volume
check.
Table 5-17 Aspirate Probes Volume Check Window Description

C42385
5. With forceps, remove the empty RV from shuttle position 1.

To locate shuttle positions, see Figure 5-7.
6. Number the RV based on its shuttle position, and return the RV to its shuttle
position.
NOTE
If the volume check results fail, you will need to know the shuttle position to
determine which aspirate probe to service.
7. Repeat step 3 and step 4 for the RVs in shuttle positions 2 and 3.
8. Select Start Test F2.

The instrument transports the RVs from positions 1 through 3 of the shuttle onto the
wash/read carousel and dispenses 500 µL of wash buffer into each RV. A different
aspirate probe aspirates the wash buffer from each RV. The instrument then returns
the RVs to their original shuttle positions. A progress message is displayed.
10. With forceps, remove the aspirated RVs from shuttle positions 1, 2, and 3.
The shuttle advances three positions. The Volume Checks screen is displayed when
the instrument completes this movement.
Inspecting for Fluid Remaining in the RVs

1. To verify complete aspiration, inspect for fluid remaining in the RV. There
should be no more than a small droplet (less than or equal to 4 µL) of fluid left in
the bottom of the RV.
NOTE
To determine if a drop of fluid is within the guideline, turn the RV upside down.
An amount of 4 µL or less will not run out of an RV when the RV is turned upside
down.

C42385
2. If there is a significant amount (more than 4 µL) of fluid remaining in a RV, its
corresponding aspirate probe failed the volume check. To determine which
aspirate probe failed, see Table 5-18.
RV Number/ Corresponding Wash Arm Label

Shuttle Position Aspirate Probe
1 1 2
2 2 4
3 3 6
Table 5-18 Shuttle Position Correlation to Failed Aspirate Probe
3. If an aspirate probe fails the check, clean or replace the aspirate probe as
described in see Section 8.3: Weekly Maintenance in Chapter 8: Routine
Maintenance of the Operator's Guide.
CAUTION
If an aspirate probe is plugged, disable the Utility Assay and do not run the
Daily Clean System routine or prime any component of the system until you
resolve the problem.
Handling RVs Follow the guidelines for handling and weighing RVs when performing analytical
for Analytical substrate probe, dispense probe, main pipettor, and aspirate probes volume checks.
Volume When handling and weighing RVs:
Checks • Wear gloves to prevent transferring oils onto the RVs.

• Use forceps to remove the RVs from the instrument and balance.
• Number the RVs before you weigh them to ensure correct sequences.
• Weigh the RVs immediately after dispensing to minimize evaporation.
• Take at least 10 replicates of the measurements to obtain a meaningful
representation of system precision and accuracy.

C42385
Performing
Substrate Main Menu
Probe Analyti-
cal Volume
Check Diagnostics
F7
Volume Checks
F3
Volume Checks
Substrate
F1
Substrate

position 1, number,
weigh, and replace
Start Test
F2
When prompted, open

the front panel,
remove RVs, weigh
and close panel
Continue dispensing
substrate and weighing
results until you have
enough replicates
Volume = Weight / Density

Convert RV weights to µL= mg / 1.006 mg/µL
volumes (substrate density)
Calculate the mean,

the standard deviation,
and the %CV of the
replicates
Compare the substrate Expected Results:

volume check results Target Volume 200 µL
with expected results Expected Vol. Range 196 - 206 µL
Expected %CV < 2%
Is range within
limits?
No Call Technical Support
Yes
Done
0876b.wmf
Figure 5-19 Performing Analytical Substrate Volume Check

C42385
Use this procedure to quantitatively determine the dispense precision and accuracy of
the substrate fluidic system.
WARNING
Required Materials
• Forceps
• Analytical balance
Weighing RVs and Dispensing from Substrate Probes

1. Confirm that the system is in Ready mode.
Checks F3.
3. Select Substrate F1 to display the Substrate window.
4. Open the front panel of the instrument.

5. With forceps, remove the empty RV from shuttle position 1. To locate shuttle
positions, see Figure 5-7.
6. Number the RV based on its shuttle position.
7. Weigh the RV using an analytical balance, and record the weight.
NOTE
After weighing an RV, handle it only with forceps, not with your hands.
8. Return the RV to its respective shuttle position.
9. Repeat step 5 through step 8 for the RVs in shuttle positions 2 and 3.
10. Close the front panel of the instrument, then select Start Test F2.
The instrument dispenses the substrate and returns the RVs to shuttle positions 1, 2,
and 3. The system displays a message about status of the procedure.

C42385
Weighing the Dispensed RVs

2. With forceps, remove the RV from shuttle position 1. To locate shuttle positions,
see Figure 5-7.
3. Weigh the RV using the analytical balance, and record the weight.
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 for the RVs in positions 2 and 3.
6. The shuttle advances three positions. A confirmation message is displayed.
7. Select OK F1.
The Volume Checks screen is displayed.
Calculating the Substrate Volume Check Results

8. Continue dispensing substrate and weighing your results to achieve a sufficient
number of replicates (10 or more).
9. Subtract the RV weight from the dispensed RV weight for each replicate, then
convert the remaining RV weights (in mg) to volumes (in µL) using the following
conversion equation.
Weight / Substrate Density = Volume

mg / (1.006 mg/µL) = µL
Table 5-20 Substrate Weight-to-Volume Conversion
10. Calculate the mean, the standard deviation, and the %CV of the replicates.
11. Compare the substrate volume check results to the following expected results.
Target Volume 200 µL

Expected Volume Range 194 - 206 µL
Expected %CV <2%
Table 5-21 Substrate Volume Expected Results
12. If a result is outside of the expected range, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Performing
Dispense Main Menu
Probe Analyti-
cal Volume
Check Diagnostics
F7
Volume Checks
F3
Volume Checks
Select one of the dispense

probe buttons to check
Dispense Probe 1
F5

position 1, number,
weigh, and replace
Start Test
F2
When prompted, open

the front panel,
remove RVs, weigh
and close panel
Continue dispensing
from dispense probe
and weighing until you
have enough replicates
Subtract RV weight
from dispensed weight, Weight / Wash Buffer Density = Volume
then convert remaining mg / (l.007 mg/µL) = µL
RV weights to volumes
Calculate mean, SD,

and %CV of the
replicates
Expected Results:
Target Volume - Dispense Probe 1 150 µL
Expected Volume Range 142.5 - 157.5 µL
Expected %CV <3%
Compare results with
Target Volume - Dispense Probes 2 & 3 500 µL expected results
Expected %CV <2%
Is
range within No Call Technical Support
limits?
Yes
Done
0918b.wmf
Figure 5-22 Performing Analytical Dispense Probe Volume Checks

C42385
Use this procedure to quantitatively assess the precision and accuracy of the dispense
probes. This procedure checks one dispense probe. Repeat the procedure to check
another dispense probe, as needed.
WARNING
Required Materials
• Forceps
Weighing RVs and Dispensing from Dispense Probes

2. Go to the Volume Checks screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu.
Checks F3.
3. Identify the dispense probe to be checked. To identify dispense probe numbers,

see Figure 5-11.
4. From the Volume Checks screen, select the dispense probe to check from the
following buttons:

NOTE

C42385
10. Repeat step 6 through step 9 for the RVs in positions 2 and 3.
The dispense probe you selected in step 3 dispenses the wash buffer into the three
RVs and then the RVs are returned to shuttle positions 1, 2, and 3. The system
displays a progress message.

see Figure 5-7.

The shuttle advances three positions. A confirmation message is displayed.
6. Select OK F1.
Calculating the Dispense Probe Volume Check Results

1. Continue dispensing from the dispense probes and weighing your results to
achieve a sufficient number of replicates (10 or more).
f
Weight / Wash Buffer Density = Volume
mg / (1.007 mg/µL) = µL
Table 5-23 Wash Buffer Weight-to-Volume Conversion
3. Calculate the mean, standard deviation, and %CV of the replicates.

C42385
4. Compare the dispense probe volume check results to the following expected
results.
Target Volume - Dispense Probe 1 150 µL

Expected Volume Range 142.5-157.5 µL
Expected %CV ≤ 3%
Target Volume - Dispense Probe 2 and 3 500 µL
Expected Volume Range 475.0-525.0 µL
Expected %CV ≤ 2%
Table 5-24 Dispense Probes Volume Expected Results

C42385
Performing
Main Pipettor Main Menu
Analytical
Volume
Checks Diagnostics
F7
Volume Checks
F3
Volume Checks
Open front panel,

Repeat for RVs in shuttle
Select one of the pipettor remove RV from shuttle
positions 2 and 3
volume buttons to check position 1, number,
weigh, and replace
Pipettor 50µL Start Test
F2 F2
Pipettor 50µL When prompted, open

the front panel,
Pipette 1.5mL of wash remove RVs, weigh
buffer into sample cup and close panel
and place in sample
position 1 on the rack
Load a Rack Unload the rack

F1
Load rack on the Continuing dispensing

instrument from main pipettor
and weighing until you
have enough replicates
Done
F1 Subtract RV weight
Calculate mean, SD,

and %CV of the
replicates
Expected Results:
Target Volume 50 µL Compare results with
Expected Volume Range 47.5 - 52.5 µL expected results
Expected %CV <2%

Expected %CV <1%
Is
Target Volume 350 µL range within No Call Technical Support
Expected Volume Range 332.5 - 367.5 µL limits?
Expected %CV <1%
Yes
Done
0917b.bmp
Figure 5-25 Performing Analytical Main Pipettor Volume Checks

C42385
Use this procedure to quantitatively assess the main pipettor dispense volume at
50 µL, 200 µL, and 350 µL. This procedure checks one volume. Repeat the procedure
to check another volume, as needed.
WARNINGS
Required Materials
• 2 mL sample cup
• Pipettor to dispense 1.5 to 2 mL of fluid
• Wash buffer
• Forceps
Preparing Rack for Main Pipettor Check

2. Go to the Volume Checks screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu.
Checks F3.
3. From the Volume Checks screen, select the pipettor volume to check from the
following buttons:
For an illustrated pipettor volume check window, see Figure 5-13.

C42385
4. Manually pipette at least 1.5 mL of wash buffer into a sample cup and place the
cup in sample position 1 of a rack.
NOTE
When performing repeated dispense checks, verify that the sample cup contains
sufficient volume to complete the three aspirations. For the 200 and 350 µL
volumes, remove and refill the sample cup after each group of three RVs.

The instrument presents a rack position in the sample carousel.
6. Load the rack on the instrument.

For detailed instructions on loading a rack on the sample carousel, see the Loading
Racks procedure in Chapter 3: Sample Management of the Operator's Guide.
7. Select Done F1 to confirm that the rack is onboard.
Weighing RVs and Dispensing

NOTE
The instrument dispenses the wash buffer and returns the RVs to shuttle positions 1, 2,
and 3. The system displays a message about the status of the procedure.


C42385
see Figure 5-7.

The shuttle advances three positions.
Unloading the Rack

1. When prompted by the system message, select Unload Rack F1.
The instrument presents the rack at the load door.
2. Unload the rack.
For detailed instructions on unloading a rack from the sample carousel, see the
Unloading Racks procedure in Chapter 3: Sample Management of the Operator's
Guide.
3. Select Done F1 to confirm that the rack is not onboard the instrument.
Calculating the Main Pipettor Volume Check Results

1. Continue dispensing from the main pipettor and weighing your results to achieve
a sufficient number of replicates (10 or more).
Weight / Wash Buffer Density = Volume
mg / (1.007 mg/µL) = µL
Table 5-26 Wash Buffer Weight-to-Volume Conversion
3. Calculate the mean, standard deviation, and %CV of the replicates.

4. Compare the main pipettor volume check results to the following expected
results.
Expected %CV ≤ 2%
Table 5-27 Pipettor Volume Expected Results

C42385

Expected %CV ≤ 1%
Expected %CV ≤ 1%
Table 5-27 Pipettor Volume Expected Results (continued)

C42385
Performing
Aspirate Main Menu
Probes Ana-
lytical Vol-
ume Check Diagnostics
F7
Volume Checks
F3
Volume Checks
Aspirate Probes
F8

position 1, number,
weigh, and replace
Start Test
F2
When prompted, open

the front panel,
remove RVs, weigh
and close panel
Continuing aspirating
with aspirate probes
and weighing until there
are enough replicates
Subtract RV weight
Expected Results: Compare results with

Expected Volume Range 0 - 4 µL expected results
Is Replace or clean the

range within No corresponding aspirate
limits? probe
Yes
Done
0919b.wmf
Figure 5-28 Performing Analytical Aspirate Probe Volume Check

C42385
Use this procedure to quantitatively assess the precision and accuracy of the aspirate
fluidic system. This procedure checks all three aspirate probes at the same time. A
different probe aspirates from each of the three dispensed RVs.
WARNING
Required Materials
• Forceps
Weighing RVs and Aspirating with Probes

2. Go to the Volumes Check screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
Checks F3.
3. Select Aspirate Probes F8 to display the Aspirate Probes window.

NOTE
The instrument transports the RVs from positions 1 through 3 of the shuttle to the
wash/read carousel and dispenses 500 µL of wash buffer into each RV. A different

C42385
aspirate probe aspirates the wash buffer from each RV. The instrument then returns
the RVs to their original shuttle positions. A progress message is displayed.
Weighing the Aspirated RVs

see Figure 5-7.
NOTE
When performing an analytical aspirate volume check, weigh the aspirated RVs
as quickly as possible. The small remaining volume is especially susceptible to
evaporation.
6. The shuttle advances three positions. A confirmation message is displayed.
7. Select OK F1.
Calculating the Aspirate Probe Volume Check Results

1. Continue aspirating from the aspirate probes and weighing your results to achieve
a sufficient number of replicates (10 or more).
2. Subtract the RV weight from the aspirated RV weight for each replicate. Then,
convert the remaining RV weights (in mg) to volumes (in µL).
For the wash buffer conversion equation, see Table 5-26.
3. Compare the aspirate probe volume check results to the following expected
results.
Expected Volume Range 0 - 4 µL
Table 5-29 Aspirate Volume Expected Results
4. If a result is outside of the expected range, see Table 5-18 to determine which
aspirate probe should be cleaned or replaced.

C42385
5. Replace or clean the corresponding aspirate probe.

For more information about how to clean or repair the aspirate probe, see Section 8.3:
Weekly Maintenance in the Operator's Guide.
CAUTION
If an aspirate probe is plugged, disable the Utility Assay and do not run the
Daily Clean System routine or prime any component of the system until you
resolve the problem.

C42385
5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
5.5 Mechanics and Device Diagnostics
When an Access 2 instrument is in the Ready mode, mechanical devices are aligned
properly to their sensors and to their intersecting mechanical devices.
When technical support representatives service the instrument, they often align
devices as part of their verification routine. Occasionally during troubleshooting, you
may need to view alignments, home or cycle devices, or adjust alignments.
CAUTION
Use this function only as directed by a technical support representative or if
you are following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics
Device Diag- You use the Device Diagnostics screen to:

nostics • View device information, such as alignments, temperatures, and supply
Screen levels
• Change the operational status of devices or features, or move devices during
troubleshooting
• Verify system performance after troubleshooting
• Perform diagnostic testing as directed by a technical support representative or
if you are following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual
You access the Device Diagnostics screen from the Diagnostics menu.
0911C.bmp
Figure 5-30 Device Diagnostics Screen

C42385
Mechanics F1 (Button) Select to display the Mechanics screen (see Figure 5-33 in this section). You
can use the Mechanics screen to:
• View the alignment of devices in real-time
• View the status of device sensors in real-time
• Align devices using the System Software
• View the step count and cycle data in real-time
For help on using the Mechanics screen, see Figure 5-33 in this section.
Analog (Button) Select to display a menu of the following options:
Devices F2 Analog Data F1—Select to display the Analog Devices window. You can use this
window to review the current temperatures in the instrument, the duty cycles of
temperature controllers, or the voltage of power supplies.
Pressure Monitor F2—Select to display the Pressure Monitor screen. You can use
this screen to enable and disable obstruction detection, generate a new obstruction
detection reference curve, or review the status of obstruction detection.
For help on using the Analog Devices window or the Pressure Monitor screen, see
Section 5.6: Analog and Digital Device Diagnostics.
Digital (Button) Select to display the Digital Devices window. You can use the Digital
Devices F3 Devices window to:
• View information provided by various instrument sensors, including sensed supply
levels (wash buffer and liquid waste), and open access doors.
• Turn various digital devices (pumps, valves, and motors) off or on.
For help on using the Digital Devices window, see Section 5.6: Analog and Digital
Device Diagnostics.
Luminometer F4 (Button) Select to display the Luminometer screen. You can use the Luminometer
screen to:
• View luminometer information
• Load a vessel and read the relative light units (RLUs) in the vessel
• Save the light emitting diode (LED) calibration value
• Set the high voltage control value
For help on using the Luminometer screen, see Section 5.7: Luminometer Device
Diagnostics.
Table 5-31 Device Diagnostics Screen Descriptions

C42385
Ultrasonics F5 (Button) Select to display the Ultrasonics window. You can use the Ultrasonics
window to:
• View ultrasonic information
• Perform the ultrasonic level sense test (wet and dry mode)
For help on using the Ultrasonics window, see Section 5.8: Advanced Diagnostics.
Exerciser F6 (Button) Select to display the Exerciser window. You can use the Exerciser window
to cycle the movement of mechanical devices by starting a programmed exercise
routine.
For help on using the Exerciser window, see Section 5.8: Advanced Diagnostics.
Calibrate (Button) Select to display the Calibrate Incubator Belt window. You can use the
Incubator Belt F7 Calibrate Incubator Belt window to:
• Calibrate the incubator belt
• Print the Incubator Belt Report automatically after the procedure
For help on using the Calibrate Incubator Belt window, see Section 5.8: Advanced
Diagnostics.
Reset Pipettor F8 (Button) Select to display the Reset Pipettor window. You can use the Reset Pipettor
window to prepare to continue processing after resolving a reagent pack monitoring
failure.
For help on using the Reset Pipettor window, see the Resetting the Pipettor procedure
in this section.
Table 5-31 Device Diagnostics Screen Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Resetting the Use this procedure to reset the main pipettor after troubleshooting a specific sequence
Pipettor of reagent pack monitoring problems which disabled the pipettor.
CAUTION

2. Go to the Device Diagnostics screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then select Device
Diagnostics F4.
3. Select Reset Pipettor F8 to display the Reset Pipettor window.
1057A.bmp
Figure 5-32 Reset Pipettor Window
4. To confirm that you have completed troubleshooting for the events which
disabled the pipettor and that you are ready to reset the pipettor, select OK F1.
• If you have not completed troubleshooting, select Cancel F8 or Help F12 and
continue troubleshooting.
5. A confirmation window reports the status of the operation.

• If the operation is successful, select OK F1.
• If the operation is not successful, contact Technical Support.
6. Initialize the system to bring the instrument back to the Ready mode. For more
information about initializing the system, see Section 5.2: Initialize System.
• If initialization fails, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Mechanics You use the Mechanics screen to:

Screen • View the alignment of devices in real-time
• View the status of device sensors in real-time
• Align devices using the System Software
• View the step count and cycle data in real-time
You access the Mechanics screen from the Device Diagnostics screen.
0737C.bmp
Figure 5-33 Mechanics Screen

C42385
Device (Field) Select a device from the alphabetical list of devices. The name of the selected
device is repeated at the top of the middle section of the screen, which contains
alignment information about the device.
Listed devices: Incubator Belt, Pipettor, Precision Pump, Precision Valve, Rake,
Reagent Carousel, RV Shuttle, Sample Carousel, Substrate Pump, Substrate
Valve, Wash Arm, Wash Carousel, Wash Pump, and Wash Valve.
Position (List) Select an alignment position for the device named in the Device field. Some
alignment positions are intersecting devices, while other positions indicate states such
as high resolution, off, or empty. If the position is a device, the name of the device is
repeated at the top of the right section of the screen and the section contains
alignment information about the device. If the position is only an alignment position,
the right section is empty.
Selected Device (2 Indicators) Displays a black dot to indicate the device selected for alignment. Only
one device can be aligned at a time. The homing and positioning buttons at the
bottom of the screen relate to the selected device.
• By default, the selected device is the one named in the Device field.
• If a device is also selected in the position field, you can select the other indicator to
prepare to align that device.
Offset (Field and Arrows) The offset indicates the number of steps in a positive or negative
direction that the device is positioned from a default offset of 0. Some devices have
more than one offset, such as the pipettor's X-axis (horizontal) and Z-axis (vertical)
offsets.
CAUTION
Perform alignments only as directed by a technical support representative
or if you are following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual.
Alignment procedures vary by device. For example, during an alignment procedure

you might increase or decrease the offset until the sensor indicates the device is no
longer at a position. Or you might perform certain steps and then calculate an offset.
To change an offset, select the arrows or type a number.
Step Count (Field) Displays the number of steps a device is from the home position. Most devices
display the X (or horizontal) step count. Some devices display the Z (or vertical) step
count.
Number of (Field) Displays the number of cycles completed by the device since you selected
Cycles Start Cycling F6.
Table 5-34 Mechanics Screen Descriptions

C42385
Position/Status (Indicator) Displays the status of one or more of the following device sensors for the
Indicators selected device:
• Home, Home - X, or Home - Z
• Index
• RV Sensor 1, RV Sensor 2
• Top Tube Detector, Middle Tube Detector, Bottom Tube Detector
• Left End
The indicator turns or stays bright green when the device is in that position or when
the sensor is activated.
Home Device F1 (Button) Select to move the device to the home position. When homing is complete,
the Home indicator turns bright green.
Move X to (Button) Select to move the device to an alignment position. If the device is not
Position F2 homed, the system first homes the device and then moves the device to the alignment
or position.
Move Z to Both a device and a position must be selected for the button to be available. The
Position F3 Move X to Position F2 button is available for most devices. The Move Z to Position
F3 button is available for some devices.
Advance CW F4 (Button) Select to move the device clockwise (CW) to the next position.
This button displays only when one of the following devices is named in the Device
field:
• Sample carousel
• Incubator belt
• RV rake
• RV shuttle
• Wash carousel
Table 5-34 Mechanics Screen Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Advance CCW F5 (Button) Select to move the device counterclockwise (CCW) to the next position.
This button displays only when one of the following devices is named in the Device
field:
• Sample carousel
• Incubator belt
• RV rake
• RV shuttle
• Wash carousel
Start Cycling F6 (Button) Select Start Cycling F6 to start cycling the device named in the Device field
or between home position and the alignment position. Cycling continues until you select
Stop Cycling F6 Stop Cycling F6, and the device reaches a known state at which to stop. Available for
all devices except the rake and RV shuttle.
The button name switches between Stop Cycling and Start Cycling each time you
select it.
Save Offsets F7 (Button) Select to save the offsets changed for the selected device. If you try to exit
the screen without saving offsets, a confirmation message is displayed.
Disable (Button) Select Disable Motors F8 to disable all of the mechanical device motors.
Motors F8 The motors remain disabled until you select Enable Motors F8.
or The button name switches between Disable Motors and Enable Motors each time you
Enable Motors F8 select it.
Table 5-34 Mechanics Screen Descriptions (continued)
Viewing Use this procedure to view alignments.

Alignments
CAUTION
Perform and save alignments only as directed by a technical support
representative or if you are following instructions in Help system or in an
Access 2 manual.

2. Go to the Mechanics screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu, select
Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then select Device Diagnostics
F4.
3. Select Mechanics F1 to display the Mechanics screen.

C42385
4. Select the device for which you want to view alignments from the alphabetical
list in the Device field.
Alignment information about the device is displayed in the middle section of the
Mechanics screen.
 (Optional) Select one of the device positions from the Position list and view the
alignments.
Position alignment information is displayed in the right hand section of the Mechanics
screen.
5. When you are done viewing an alignment for a device, select another device or
select an appropriate button or tab to exit this screen.
Homing a Use this procedure to home a device.

Device
CAUTION

F4.
4. Select the device to home from the alphabetical list in the Device field.
Mechanics screen.
5. Select Home Device F1.

The instrument takes the necessary steps to home the device.
• If the Home sensor indicator turns bright green, the device is homed.
• If the indicator does not turn bright green, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Cycling a Use this procedure to cycle a device.

Device
CAUTION

F4.
4. Select the device to be cycled from the alphabetical list in the Device field.
Mechanics screen.
5. If positions are available, select the end position for cycling from the Position
list.
6. Select Move X to Position F2 or Move Z to Position F3.

The device moves to home position, if it is not already at home position, and then
moves to the alignment position.
7. Select Start Cycling F6.

The device cycles rapidly back and forth between the home position and the
alignment position. The system displays progress messages.
8. Wait until the number in the Number of Cycles field for the device reaches 6, or
until the number of cycles or the amount of time directed by your technical
support representative or in the procedure you are following is reached.
9. Select Stop Cycling F6 to end the cycling procedure. Cycling stops after the
present cycle is complete.

C42385
Disabling or Use this procedure to disable motors and prevent the instrument from running, and
Enabling then to enable motors again when you are ready to run the instrument.
Motors CAUTION

2. Go to the Mechanics screen. To get to this window from the Main Menu, select
F4.
4. Select Disable Motors F8 to disable all of the mechanical device motors. The
motors remain disabled until you select Enable Motors F8.
5. When you are done performing maintenance or alignment activities, or as

instructed by a technical support representative or in the procedure you are
following, select Enable Motors F8. Motors must be enabled for the system to
run.
6. Initialize the system.

For more information about initializing the system, see Section 5.2: Initialize System.
Aligning a You must contact Technical Support if a device on the instrument needs alignment.
Device

C42385
5.6: Analog and Digital Device Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
5.6 Analog and Digital Device Diagnostics
The Access 2 instrument has several analog and digital devices. Analog devices are
controlled by the System Software, which displays device information (temperature,
power supply, voltage, obstruction detection status) in the Analog Devices window or
on the Pressure Monitor screen where you can view it. The system updates the Analog
Devices window in one second increments.
The digital devices control the hardware-related actions that take place within the
instrument. Through the System Software, you can turn the following digital devices
on and off:
• Vacuum pump
• Probe wash valve
• Mixer motor
• Stepper motor
• Peristaltic pump
You can also view the status of some of these devices (wash buffer level, waste bottle
level) or view whether something is present (waste bag present).
CAUTION
Use these procedures only as directed by a technical support representative

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.6: Analog and Digital Device Diagnostics
Viewing Ana- Use this procedure to review the temperatures of various system zones and the voltage
log Device of the related power supply.
Tempera- 1. Confirm that the system is in the Ready mode.
tures and
Voltage 2. Go to the Analog Devices window.
a. From the Main Menu, select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics

menu.
b. Select Device Diagnostics F4.
c. Select Analog Devices F2 to display the Analog Devices menu.
d. Select Analog Data F1.
0738b.bmp
Figure 5-35 Analog Devices Window
Temperature (Column) Displays the names of the temperature sensors

Sensor for analog devices.
Temp. (deg. C) (Column) Displays the temperature reading in degrees
Celsius for the temperature sensor named to the left.
Table 5-36 Analog Devices Window Descriptions

C42385
Duty Cycle (Column) Displays the percent of time (expressed in

hundredths) that the temperature control device operates in
order to maintain temperature for the device to the left. For
example, a reading of 0.23 for the incubator means that in
order to maintain temperature, the incubator heater runs 23
percent of the time that the instrument is on.
Status (2 Columns) Displays the status of the sensor temperatures
or power supply voltages. A status of 0 means normal. For
status readings other than 0, a warning or caution event is
displayed in the Event Log.
Power Supply (Column) Lists the expected power supply voltages for the
power driver, and the PMT High Voltage category for the
luminometer.
Voltage (Column) Displays the voltage readings for the power
supply categories listed to the left.
Raw Voltage (Button) Select to display the Raw Voltage Data window,
Data F2 in which you can view scaled volts and raw volts for power
driver channels, in a two column format.
Table 5-36 Analog Devices Window Descriptions (continued)

C42385
3. Select Raw Voltage Data F2.

The scaled volts and raw volts of various analog device power channels are displayed
in the Raw Voltage Data window.
0739b.bmp
Figure 5-37 Raw Voltage Data Window
Channel (2 Columns) Displays the power driver channels or

electrical paths from the PCB to the analog device listed.
Scaled Volts (2 Columns) Displays the scaled voltage reading for the
channel listed to the left.
Raw Volts (2 Columns) Displays the raw voltage reading for the
channel listed to the left.
Table 5-38 Raw Voltage Data Window Descriptions

C42385
Pressure You use the Pressure Monitor screen to:

Monitor • View the status of the obstruction detection hardware and reference curve
Screen • Establish a new obstruction detection reference curve
• Enable and disable obstruction detection
You access the Pressure Monitor screen from the Analog Devices menu.
1029B.bmp
Figure 5-39 Pressure Monitor Screen
Pressure Sensor (Field) Displays whether the pressure sensor is present.

is:
Obstruction (Field) Displays whether obstruction detection is enabled.
Detection is:
Reference Curve (Field) Displays the status of the reference curve.
Table 5-40 Pressure Monitor Screen Descriptions

C42385
Curve (Field) Displays the date that the reference curve was determined.
Determined on:
Intercept (Field) Displays the intercept of the reference curve.
Slope (Field) Displays the slope of the reference curve.
Determine (Button) Select to determine a new reference curve. For more information about
Curve F1 determining a new curve, see Determining a Reference Curve for Obstruction
Detection in this section.
Service Reset F6 (Button) Used by Technical Support after servicing the instrument to reset devices for
reagent pack monitoring (secured by password).
Enable (Button) Select Enable Detection F8 to enable obstruction detection. Obstruction
Detection F8 detection continues until you select Disable Detection F8.
or NOTE: Obstruction detection can only be enabled if the pressure sensor is installed
Disable and a reference curve is determined.
Detection F8
The button name switches between Enable Detection and Disable Detection each
time you select it.
Table 5-40 Pressure Monitor Screen Descriptions (continued)

C42385
Determining a Use this procedure to determine a reference curve for obstruction detection.
Reference
CAUTION
Curve for
Use this procedure only as directed by a technical support representative or
Obstruction if you are following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual.
Detection
2. Go to the Determine Curve window.

menu.
b. Select Device Diagnostics F4 to display the Device Diagnostics screen.
c. Select Analog Devices F2 to display the Analog Devices menu.
d. Select Pressure Monitor F2 to display the Pressure Monitor screen.
e. Select Determine Curve F1.
3. Select Yes F1 to begin running the reference curve.
A progress message is displayed while the curve is determined. When the run is
complete, a confirmation window is displayed.
4. Select OK F1 to return to the Pressure Monitor screen and review the reference
curve information.
If the curve fails, prime the pipettor for four cycles and then repeat this procedure. For
more information on priming the pipettor, see the Priming the Fluidics procedure in
Section 5.3: Prime Fluidics. If the curve fails again, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Turning Digi- Use this procedure to turn various digital devices (pumps, valves, and motors) off or
tal Devices on.
Off and On CAUTION
if you are following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual.
Diagnostics F4.
3. Select Digital Devices F3 to display the Digital Devices window.
0740c.bmp
Figure 5-41 Digital Devices Window

C42385
Vacuum Pump On — (Box) Select to turn the vacuum pump on or

off, depending on the current status.
Probe Wash Valve On — (Box) Select to turn the probe
wash vacuum valve on or off, depending on the current
status.
mm Hg — (Field) Displays the current vacuum pressure in
mm Hg.
Default value of Pump On and Probe Wash Valve On
boxes: Not checked
Mixer Motor On — (Box) Select to turn the mixer motor on or
off, depending on the current status.
Motor — (Indicators) Display the running direction
(clockwise or counterclockwise) of the mixer motor.
RPM — (Field) Displays the current mixer rotations per
minute (RPMs).
Default values of Motor On, CW, and CCW Motor options:
Not checked
Status Light Select Mode
(Only available on (List) Select a mode from the list to test the status light.
systems equipped The status light displays the color associated with the
with a status light.) chosen mode. For more information, see the Turning
Digital Devices Off and On
Peristaltic Pump Peristaltic Pump On — (Box) Select to turn the peristaltic
pump on or off, depending on the current status.
Peristaltic Pump — (Field) Displays whether or not the
peristaltic pump is running.
Default value of Peristaltic Pump On box: Not checked
Digital Sensors (Fields) Displays the status of items from several digital
sensor devices in the Access 2 instrument.
Status of items included are:
Wash buffer or waste bottle level: OK or Not OK
Waste bag present: Yes or No
RV load door or front panel: Open or Closed
Table 5-42 Digital Devices Window Descriptions

C42385
Stepper Motor (Box) Select to turn the stepper motor power off or on,
Driver PCB On depending on the current status. If the box is selected, the
stepper motor is on and the instrument is in the Ready
mode. If the box is not selected, the stepper motor power is
off and the instrument is in the Not Ready mode.
NOTE
If the stepper motor is off (box not selected), you must
turn the stepper motor power on before you can
initialize the system to bring the instrument back to the
Ready mode.
Vacuum Test F2 (Button) Select to run the vacuum test.

For more information about how to run the vacuum test,
see the Running the Automated Vacuum Test procedure in
this section.
Table 5-42 Digital Devices Window Descriptions (continued)
4. Select or clear the boxes for the following devices to turn them on or off:
• Vacuum Pump On
• Probe Wash Valve On
• Mixer Motor On (you can also select clockwise or counterclockwise direction)
• Peristaltic Pump On
• Stepper Motor Driver PCB On
 (Optional) Select a mode from the Select Mode list to cause the status light bar to
display the color associated with the chosen mode. For more information, see
Section 1.3: Software Overview in the Operator's Guide.
The Select Mode list is only available on systems equipped with a status light.

C42385
Viewing Digi- Use this procedure to view the information provided by various digital sensors,
tal Device including measured supply levels and open access doors.
Sensor Infor- 1. Confirm that the system is in the Ready or Not Ready mode.
mation
Diagnostics F4.
3. Select Digital Devices F3 to display the Digital Devices window (see Figure
5-41).
4. You can view information provided by digital sensors about the status of the
following items:
• Wash Buffer Level
• Waste Bottle Level
• Waste Bag Present
• RV Load Door
• Front Panel
Running the Use this procedure to run the automated vacuum test. This test is sometimes
Automated recommended by Technical Support to help diagnose vacuum over limit conditions.
Vacuum Test CAUTION
1. Be sure the system is in the Ready or Not Ready mode.
2. Disable the Utility Assay to prevent it from running automatically (see

Section 8.1: Routine Maintenance in the Operator's Guide).
Diagnostics F4.
4. Select Digital Devices F3 to display the Digital Devices window (see Figure
5-41).

C42385
5. Select Vacuum Test F2.

The system begins the vacuum test. The vacuum test automatically performs the
following steps:
• Verifies initial pressure is less than 90 mm Hg (12 kPa)
• Turns on the vacuum valve
• Turns on the vacuum pump
• Verifies the pressure reaches 500 mm Hg (66.7 kPa) after 30 seconds
• Turns off the vacuum pump
• Monitors the pressure for 30 seconds and verifies that it does not drop more than
100 mm Hg (13.3 kPa)
• After 30 seconds, cycles the peristaltic pump for 30 seconds to verify the pressure
does not drop more than 100 mm Hg (13.3 kPa)
• Turns off the vacuum valve
When the vacuum test is complete, the system displays a message that the vacuum test
is finished.
NOTE
If the test fails, the test stops and an error message is displayed indicating the
error. Record the error message and contact Technical Support.
6. Enable the Utility Assay.
Running the Use this procedure to perform a manual, step by step vacuum test. This procedure is
Manual Vac- sometimes recommended by Technical Support to help diagnose vacuum under limit
uum Test conditions. You should stop the test at the first sign of failure.
CAUTION

Diagnostics F4.

C42385
5. From the Digital Devices window, select the Pump On and the Probe Wash
Valve On boxes to turn on the vacuum pump and the probe wash valve. For more
information about turning digital devices off and on, see Section 5.6: Analog and
Digital Device Diagnostics.
6. Watch the vacuum level rise in the mm Hg field of the Digital Devices window.
The vacuum level should rise to a value of 450 mm Hg (60 kPa) or higher.
• If the vacuum level does not rise to 450 mm Hg (60 kPa) or higher, clear the
Pump On and the Probe Wash Valve On boxes to turn the vacuum pump and
probe wash valve off. Do not continue with this procedure. Contact Technical
Support for assistance.
7. Clear the Pump On box to turn the vacuum pump off. Leave the probe wash
valve on.
8. Watch the vacuum level fall in the mm Hg field of the Digital Devices window.
The vacuum level should not fall more than 50 mm Hg (6.7 kPa) over a
30 second time span.
• If the vacuum level falls more than 50 mm Hg (6.7 kPa) over 30 seconds, clear
the Probe Wash Valve On box to turn off the probe wash valve. Do not
continue with this procedure. Contact Technical Support for assistance.
9. Clear the Probe Wash Valve On box to turn off the probe wash valve.
10. With both the vacuum pump and the probe wash vacuum valve off, watch the
vacuum level fall in the mm Hg field in the Digital Devices window. The vacuum
level should rapidly fall to a value of nearly 0 mm Hg.
• If the vacuum level does not rapidly fall to nearly 0 mm Hg, do not continue
with this procedure. Contact Technical Support for assistance.
11. If the mm Hg level for each of the steps was within the given parameters, the
vacuum test was successful and the vacuum system is operating within normal
parameters.
Confirm that both pumps are off prior to performing other diagnostic activities or to
continuing processing.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.7: Luminometer Device Diagnostics
5.7 Luminometer Device Diagnostics
The Access 2 system generates test results by measuring the amount of light produced
in a chemiluminescent reaction between the sample, the Access 2 assay specific
reagents, and the substrate. Within the analytical module of the system, the
luminometer measures the light produced.
The luminometer is calibrated when the Access 2 system is manufactured.

Periodically, a technical support representative uses the Luminometer screen to verify
luminometer calibration. Occasionally, you may need to verify luminometer function
to assist in diagnosing a problem.
High voltage can affect the luminometer reading. A technical support representative
may need to adjust the high voltage control value during troubleshooting.
CAUTION
For more information about the function of the luminometer, see

Section 1.2: Instrument Technology in Chapter 1: Technology Overview.
For more information about luminometer calibration, see Section 3.2: Luminometer
Calibration Theory.

C42385
5.7: Luminometer Device Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
Luminometer You use the Luminometer screen to:

Screen • Turn the LED on and off
• Take an RLU reading with or without a vessel
• Save the light emitting diode (LED) calibration value
• Set the high voltage control value
You access the Luminometer screen from the Device Diagnostics screen.
0741B.bmp
Figure 5-43 Luminometer Screen
Enable LED (Box) Select to turn on the light emitting diode (LED).
Default value: Not Selected
Table 5-44 Luminometer Screen Descriptions

C42385
High Voltage (Field) Select to adjust the high voltage reading for the luminometer power supply.
Control You can enter a new value in this field and then select Save High Volt Control F4.
CAUTION
High Voltage (Field) Displays the power supply output of the luminometer.
Reading
LED Target Value (Field) Displays the LED target value either established during system installation, or
subsequently saved from this screen. This value is included on the Alignment Report.
Current RLU (Field) Displays the current RLU reading based on the results of a luminometer
reading.
For more information, see the Taking a Luminometer Reading procedure in this
section.
Current Mean (Field) Displays the current mean based on the last 20 luminometer readings (one
second each).
section.
Current %CV (Field) Displays the current coefficient of variation (%CV) of the mean based on the
results of a luminometer reading.
section.
Read F1 (Button) Select to begin readings to establish values for the Current Mean and the
Current %CV fields.
Load/Read (Button) Select to transport the vessel in RV shuttle position 1 to the luminometer.
Vessel F2 The system takes luminometer readings until you select Cancel F8.
section.
Save LED (Button) Select to save the LED reading as the LED target value. An informational
Reading F3 message is sent to the Event Log.
Save High Volt (Button) Select to save a new entry in the High Voltage Control field. After you
Control F4 select this button, an informational message is sent to the Event Log.
Cancel F8 (Button) Select to end a luminometer reading that is in progress. This button is only
available when the system is taking a luminometer reading.
Table 5-44 Luminometer Screen Descriptions (continued)

C42385
5.7: Luminometer Device Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
Viewing Lumi- Use this procedure to view information about the luminometer calibration.
nometer Infor-
CAUTION
mation
Perform luminometer readings and save values only as directed by a
technical support representative or if you are following instructions in Help
system or in an Access 2 manual.
Diagnostics F4.
3. Select Luminometer F4 to display the Luminometer screen.
4. You can view the high voltage reading and the LED target calibration value
displayed on the luminometer screen.
Taking a Use this procedure to take a luminometer reading.

Luminometer
Reading WARNING
CAUTION
Diagnostics F4.
3. Select Luminometer F4 to display the Luminometer screen.

C42385
4. Take a luminometer reading with or without a vessel according to one of the

following options.
To take a reading without a vessel, select Read F1. The luminometer reads the area
where a vessel would be positioned.
To take a reading of an empty vessel:
a. Select Load/Read Vessel F2.
b. Select OK F1. The system transports the empty RV from position 1 to the
wash/read carousel to be read by the luminometer.
To take a reading of a vessel with sample:
a. Select Load/Read Vessel F2.
b. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures).
c. Use a forceps to remove the vessel in position 1 of the RV shuttle (see
Figure 5-7) and replace it with a sample vessel.
d. Close the front panel and select OK F1. The system transports the RV to the
wash/read carousel to be read by the luminometer.
5. Wait for the luminometer to take a minimum of 20 one-second readings. The
Current RLU field begins displaying single reading results, then the Current
Mean field and Current %CV fields begin displaying results based on the mean of
the 20 most recent readings. The readings continue and the fields continuously
update with the most recent 20 readings (the rolling mean).
6. Select Cancel F8 to stop taking RLU readings.

• If you took a reading from an RV, open the front panel and use a forceps to
remove the RV. Then, close the front panel and select OK F1. The RV shuttle
advances one position.

C42385
5.8: Advanced Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
5.8 Advanced Diagnostics
The following procedures are categorized as advanced diagnostic procedures:

• Viewing ultrasonics or performing the level sense test
• Exercising devices
• Calibrating the incubator belt
• Copying database information to a disk or USB flash drive
These procedures are performed when you are diagnosing or troubleshooting an

instrument or system problem. Event log troubleshooting and corrective actions in the
troubleshooting tables in Appendix A may refer you to one or more of these
procedures.
CAUTION
Use these procedures only as directed by a technical support representative
For more information about the Event Log troubleshooting, see

Section 6.3: Troubleshooting Events, and see Section A.1: Troubleshooting.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.8: Advanced Diagnostics
Viewing Ultra- Use this procedure to view the information about the ultrasonic transducer and level
sonics sensor.
CAUTION
Turn devices off and on and change values in the Ultrasonics window only as
directed by a technical support representative or if you are following
instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual.
Diagnostics F4.
3. Select Ultrasonics F5 to display the Ultrasonics window.
0742b.bmp
Figure 5-45 Ultrasonics Window
PCB Power On (Box) Displays the on/off state of the ultrasonics printed
circuit board (PCB). The default state is selected (power
on). Clear the box to turn the PCB power off.
Sonicator On (Box) Displays the on/off state of the sonicator. The default
state is not selected (sonicator off).
Table 5-46 Ultrasonics Window Descriptions

C42385
Level Sense (Box) Displays the readiness of the ultrasonics transducer

Ready to detect a surface. You can only select this box when the
system is in the Ready mode.
Sonicator Power (Field) Displays the sonicator power setting, which is Low
when ultrasonic testing is not being performed.
Values are: Low, Med-Low, Med-High, High
Burst Frequency (Field) Displays the frequency of electrical vibrations per
(Hz) second (hertz or Hz) for the sonicator burst mode, which is
1 when ultrasonic testing is not being performed.
Value range: 1–100

Duty Cycle (%) (Field) Displays the current duty cycle percentage for the
transducer, which is 100 when ultrasonic testing is not
being performed.
Value range: 1–100
Voltage Control (Field) Displays the voltage control oscillator (Vco)
Oscillator frequency setting in hertz (Hz).
Frequency (Hz)
(Indicator) Displays the state of the Vco frequency latch,
which is Sample when ultrasonic testing is not being
performed. You may be instructed by Technical Support to
select Hold during ultrasonic testing.
Surface Detect (Field) Displays the result of a fluid surface check for the
Lower lower level of a sample cup.
• If the small quantity of fluid in the cup is detected, the
field displays Detected.
• If the small quantity of fluid in the cup is not detected,
the field displays Not Detected.
• If you have not performed a fluid surface check, the field
displays Not Detected.
Phase Lock Loop (Field) Displays the status of the phase lock loop (PLL),
Status which is Unlocked when ultrasonic testing is not being
performed.
Level Sense (Button) Select to display the Ultrasonics Level Sense Test
Test F2 window and begin the level sense test.
Table 5-46 Ultrasonics Window Descriptions (continued)
4. You can view ultrasonics information in various fields in the Ultrasonics window.
Provide information as requested to your technical support representative.

C42385
Performing a Use this procedure to test the level sensing of the ultrasonic transducer. The test
Level Sense follows the steps the system and main pipettor perform before aspirating samples
Test during sample processing.
WARNINGS
CAUTION
Required Materials
• 2 mL sample cup
• Wash buffer
• Pipettor for pipetting 200 µL of fluid
Steps
select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then.select Device
Diagnostics F4.
3. Select Ultrasonics F5 to display the Ultrasonics window.

C42385
4. Be sure that Low is selected for the Sonicator Power field, then select
Level Sense Test F2.
The Ultrasonic Level Sense Test window is displayed.
0743A.bmp
Figure 5-47 Ultrasonic Level Sense Test Window
Test Mode (Field) Select the test mode you want to run from the list.
The test values refer to the following tests:
• Dry -Tests for fluid being detected when no fluid is
present.
• Wet - Tests for fluid not being detected when fluid is
present.
• Dry and Wet
Test Repetitions (Field) Type the number of repetitions you want to run.
You can type a value from 1-999.
Dry Failure (Field) Displays the number of repetitions in which
Count ultrasonics sensed fluid when no fluid was present.
Dry Z Step Range (Field) Displays the minimum and maximum steps that the
probe was lowered during the dry test.
Table 5-48 Ultrasonic Level Sense Test Window Descriptions

C42385
Dry %CV (Field) Displays the percent coefficient of variation for the
dry z step range.
Current Test (Field) Displays the type of test that the system is currently
performing.
Values are: Dry, Wet
Steps this (Field) Displays the number of steps for the current
Repetition repetition.
Wet Failure (Field) Displays the number of repetitions in which the
Count ultrasonics did not sense fluid when fluid was present.
Wet Z Step (Field) Displays the minimum and maximum steps that the
Range probe was lowered during the wet test.
Wet %CV (Field) Displays the percent coefficient of variation for the
wet z step range.
Print report at (Box) Select to print the Level Sense Report automatically
end of Test when the level sense test is complete.
Load a Rack F1 (Button) Select to load a rack. The button text changes
or from Load a Rack F1 to Unload Rack F1 when you select
Unload Rack F1 the button.
Start Test F2 (Button) Select to start or stop the level sense test. The
or button text changes from Start Test F2 to Stop Test F2
Stop Test F2 when you select the button.
Table 5-48 Ultrasonic Level Sense Test Window Descriptions (continued)
5. Select the test or tests to run from the Test Mode list. Wet and dry refer to the
following tests:
• Dry - Tests for fluid being detected when no fluid is present.
• Wet - Tests for fluid not being detected when fluid is present.
• Dry and Wet
6. Type the number of repetitions to run in the Test Repetitions field. You can run
up to 999 repetitions. A typical number of repetitions is 25 - 50. Fifty repetitions
can take approximately one hour to run.
 (Optional) To print the Level Sense Report automatically, select the Print Report
at End of Test box.

C42385
7. Prepare a rack for the tests to be run:

• For the dry test, place an empty 2 mL sample cup in position 1.
• For the wet test, pipette a minimum of 200 µL wash buffer in a 2 mL sample cup,
then place it in position 2.
NOTE
If Technical Support requests that you use a different sample container for the
test, the technical support representative also will inform you of the minimum fill
level.
9. Place the rack on the sample carousel, then select Done F1.
For more information about loading racks, see Section 3.1: Sample Management of
10. Select Start Test F2.
The progress of the test or tests, and then the results, are reported in the fields of the
Ultrasonics Level Test window.
11. Contact Technical Support for an interpretation of the results.
12. When you are finished with the level sense testing, select Unload Rack F1.
Remove the rack from the sample carousel, then select Done F1.
For more information about unloading racks, see Section 3.1: Sample Management of
Exercising Use this procedure to cycle the movement of various mechanical devices by starting
Devices the preprogrammed exercise routine.
CAUTION
DO NOT use this function unless directed to do so by a technical support
Access 2 manual.

Diagnostics F4.

C42385
3. Select Exerciser F6 to display the Exerciser Window.

.
0744A.bmp
Figure 5-49 Exerciser Window
Selected Test (Field) Select the device to run the exercise procedure on
from the list of devices:
• Wash Arm
• Wash Carousel Transfer
• Incubator Track
• Reaction Vessel Holders
• Wash Carousel Mixer
Default device: Wash Arm
Table 5-50 Exerciser Window Descriptions

C42385
Current Test (Field) Displays the current test status. Nothing is

Status displayed if no tests have been started.
Statuses:
• In process - Displays when devices are cycling.
• Canceling - Displays when you select Stop Cycling F2,
and a cycle is ending.
• Ready - Displays after a test is complete and another test
can be selected.
Cycles (Field) Displays the number of cycles the system has
Completed completed.
Start Cycling F2 (Button) Select to begin cycling. As soon as you select this
or button, the text changes to Stop Cycling F2. When you
Stop Cycling F2 select to stop cycling, the system continues until it has
finished the cycle in progress.
Table 5-50 Exerciser Window Descriptions (continued)
4. Select a device to exercise from the list.

5. Select Start Cycling F2.
The system immediately begins the corresponding exercise routine, which vigorously
moves the component. The system continues cycling until you request it to stop. See
the table below for the approximate times needed to complete one cycle, by test.
Exerciser Test Approximate Cycle Time

Wash Arm 2 minutes
Wash Carousel Transfer 5 minutes
Incubator Track 2 minutes
Reaction Vessel Holders 3 - 4 minutes
Wash Carousel Mixer 2 minutes
Table 5-51 Approximate Exerciser Test Cycle Times for Devices
6. Select Stop Cycling F2.
NOTE
Selecting Stop Cycling F2 does not immediately stop the exercise routine. The
test stops after the present cycle is complete.

C42385
Calibrating Use this procedure to calibrate the incubator belt.

the Incubator
CAUTION
Belt
DO NOT use this function unless directed to do so by a technical support
Access 2 manual.
Diagnostics F4.
3. Select Calibrate Incubator Belt F7 to display the Calibrate Incubator Belt

window.
 (Optional) If you want a report to print when calibration is complete, select the
Print Report at End of Calibration box.
4. Select Start F2.

The system immediately begins a calibration routine on the incubator belt. The system
displays a completion message when done.
NOTE
If the calibration fails, then the calibration stops, the system changes to the Not
Ready mode, and an event is generated in the Event Log. For information about
troubleshooting an event, see Section 6.3: Troubleshooting Events.
Copying Diag- Use this procedure to copy test result data, QC data, event log information, system
nostic Data to configuration information, and other diagnostic information to a 3.5-inch high density
a Disk or USB disk or a USB flash drive.
Flash Drive NOTE

Copying data does not remove it from the database.
2. Go to the Copy to Disk window.

menu.
b. Select Save Data F6.
c. Select Copy to Disk F1.

C42385
NOTE
If your instrument has USB flash drive technology, a Drive field is displayed
beneath the File name field.
0898C.bmp
Figure 5-52 Copy to Disk (Diagnostics) Window
File Name (Field) Type a unique file name in this field and the system
adds the file extension. If you do not enter a file name, the
system automatically assigns one (based on date and time).
Start Date (Field) Type a date indicating the starting point of the data
you want copied. If you do not type a date, the system uses
the default date of 90 days ago.
Drive (List) For a USB flash drive, select the external computer
drive to which data should be copied.
Data Copied (Field) Displays the console (PC) and instrument
information to be copied.
Format Disk (Box) Select to format a 3.5-inch high density disk.
Formatting a disk prepares it for reading and writing data.
Table 5-53 Copy to Disk (Diagnostics) Window Descriptions

C42385
3. Type a file name in the File Name field.
NOTES
• If you do not specify a file extension, the system automatically adds the .csv
file extension.
• If you do not enter a file name, the system supplies a unique file name based
on the date and time.
4. Type a start date into the Start Date field. A default date (90 days ago) is
displayed, unless you type a different date.
 (Optional) If your instrument has USB flash drive technology, confirm that the
correct drive is selected from the Drive list, or select a different drive.
NOTE
Unless directed by Technical Support, do not copy data to the C: Console PC
drive or any drive labeled BACKUPDRIVE.
5. Insert the disk or flash drive into the PC.

• To copy data to a 3.5-inch disk, insert a disk into the 3.5-inch disk drive of
the PC.
NOTE
Be sure you insert the disk into the A: drive of the PC, not of the Access 2
instrument.
• To copy data to a USB flash drive, insert a flash drive into a port on the front
of the PC. If the front of the PC does not contain a USB port, use a port on the
back of the PC.
 (Optional) If the 3.5-inch disk you are using is not formatted, select the Format
Disk box, then OK F1.
A confirmation window is displayed, advising you that if the disk contains data, it will
be overwritten when it is formatted.
6. Select OK F1.
The system begins to copy the data. A progress window is displayed and you may
select Cancel F8 at any time to end the copy process.
7. If the disk or flash drive becomes full before the copy process is complete, the
system displays a status message.
• For a 3.5-inch disk:
- Remove the disk from the drive. Label it with the data file name.

C42385
- Insert a new disk and select OK F1.

- The system automatically names the file on the new disk the same as
the file on the first disk, only with the disk number at the end. For
example, mydata.csv = disk 1 and mydata(2).csv = disk 2.
• For a USB flash drive, clear sufficient space on the drive, or copy the files to a
different flash drive.
8. Remove the disk or flash drive from the PC when copying is complete. Label it
with its data file name.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.9: LIS Diagnostics
5.9 LIS Diagnostics
The Access 2 system monitors the data transmissions to and from the LIS and
displays this coded information on the LIS Diagnostics screen. With the assistance of
Technical Support, you can use the LIS Diagnostics screen to help diagnose a
problem with the connection between the LIS and the Access 2 system.
You can view the LIS information in real time. To print the information, use the [Print
Screen] key.
You cannot access LIS information if the LIS is not connected or if the LIS is
disabled. If you have any questions about how to connect the LIS, contact Technical
Support.

C42385
5.9: LIS Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
LIS Diagnos- You use the LIS Diagnostics screen with the assistance of Technical Support to:
tics Screen • View the data transmissions that occur between the LIS and the system in
real-time
• Access the LIS Setup screen to verify settings
• Perform a loopback check (if requested by a technical support representative)
• Query the LIS for an individual test request by its sample ID
• Copy the data transmissions displayed on the LIS Diagnostics screen
You access the LIS Diagnostics screen from the Diagnostics menu.
0865D.bmp
Figure 5-54 LIS Diagnostics Screen
Legend (Field) Displays a color key for the messages on the communication monitor.
Messages originating from the Access 2 system are black, while messages originating
from the LIS are blue.
Table 5-55 LIS Diagnostics Screen Descriptions

C42385
Baud Rate (Field) Displays the speed of the data transmission between the LIS and the
Access 2 system. You can change the baud rate setting on the server system only by
selecting LIS Setup F1.
Default: 9600
For more information about how to configure the baud setting, see Section 4.9: LIS
Setup.
Communication (List) Displays up to the most recent 100 data transmissions between the LIS and the
Monitor Access 2 system for all instruments in the workgroup.
The most recent transmissions are located at the bottom of the screen. You can use the
scroll bar to view the older transmissions.
Messages originating from the Access 2 system are black, while messages originating
from the LIS are blue.
LIS Setup F1 (Button) Select to display the LIS Setup window. This is the same window that
displays when you select the Configure F8 from the Main Menu, then LIS Setup F6.
For more information about how to use the LIS Setup window, see Section 4.9: LIS
Setup in this manual.
Loopback (Button) Select to run a loopback check, which verifies that the communication
Check F3 between your instrument and the LIS is working properly.
NOTE: Use this procedure only as directed by a technical support representative.
Query for Test (Button) Select to request test information for a specific sample, using the sample ID.
Requests F4
Copy to Disk F6 (Button) Select to copy all of the information from the LIS Diagnostics screen. This
button is unavailable when there are no transmissions.
For more information about how to use this option, see the Copying Data
Transmissions procedure in this section.
Clear Screen F8 (Button) Select to clear all of the information from the LIS Diagnostics screen.
Table 5-55 LIS Diagnostics Screen Descriptions (continued)

C42385
5.9: LIS Diagnostics Access 2 Reference Manual
Performing a Use this procedure with the assistance of Technical Support to query the LIS for test
Query for Test request information for a specific sample.
Requests NOTE
You can only use this procedure if the system is configured with host query
capability. For more information about enabling or disabling host query, see
Section 4.9: LIS Setup.
1. Go to the LIS Diagnostics screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then select LIS F5.
2. Select Query for Test Requests F4.

The Query for Test Requests window is displayed.
3. Type the sample ID in the Sample ID field.
4. Select OK F1.
The system asks the LIS for the test request information of the sample ID you entered.
Printing a When the LIS host replies to a query for test requests, you can view the data
Reply from transmission on the LIS Diagnostics screen. Technical Support may request that you
the LIS Host send a copy of the transmission for diagnostic interpretation. Use the [Print Screen]
key to print a copy to send.
Copying Data Use this procedure to copy the data transmissions displayed on the LIS Diagnostics
Transmis- screen to the C:\ directory of the PC.
sions 1. Go to the LIS Diagnostics screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
2. Select Copy to Disk F6.
The LIS Copy to Disk window is displayed.
3. The window indicates the data that will be copied to the C:\ directory of the PC.
4. Select OK F1.
The system displays a progress message during the copy process and assigns a file
name based on the date and the time.
5. For assistance in retrieving the data, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Clearing the Use this procedure to clear the LIS Diagnostics screen of all data transmissions to and
Data Trans- from the LIS.
missions NOTE
If you clear the screen, the record of all transmissions (up to 100) on the LIS
Diagnostics screen are deleted.
1. Go to the LIS Diagnostics screen. To get to this screen from the Main Menu,
2. Select Clear Screen F8.

All of the data transmissions are deleted.

C42385
5.10: Diagnostic Reports Access 2 Reference Manual
5.10 Diagnostic Reports
There are four types of reports you can print from the Diagnostics screen. Reports
must be selected individually for printing. As a report is being prepared for printing,
the system displays progress messages.
Alignment Report Select to print all of the alignment values for all
primary system devices. This report also includes
total instrument run time (in hours), luminometer
information, and hardware and software versions.
Level Sense Report Select to print the ultrasonic transducer status. This
report also can be automatically printed after you run
the level sense test.
For more information about the level sense test, see
Section 5.8: Advanced Diagnostics.
Incubator Belt Select to print the incubator belt calibration data.
Calibration Report This report also can be automatically printed after
you run the incubator belt calibration procedure.
For more information about setting up reports, see
Section 4.2: System Setup.
Temperature Report Select to print the temperatures, duty cycle, and
status displayed in the Analog Devices window (see
Section 5.6: Analog and Digital Device
Diagnostics). You can also print the Temperature
Report from the Maintenance screen.
Table 5-56 Diagnostic Reports

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.10: Diagnostic Reports
Printing Diag- Use this procedure to print a diagnostic report.

nostic
1. Go to the Diagnostic Reports window. To get to this window from the Main
Reports Menu, select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then Diagnostic
Reports F7.
2. Select the report you want to print from the list.

• Alignment Report
• Level Sense Report
• Incubator Belt Calibration Report
• Temperature Report
3. Select OK F1.
The system begins to print the report. Progress messages are displayed in the status
line while the system transfers information to the printer.

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Alignment Report Townsville, ST 33333
S/N 500135 T. Nguyen
Total run time: 132.33 (hours)
Target LED counts: 1380000.0
PMT high voltage control: 3.7508
Device: Pipettor
Reagent Carousel - X -1
Reagent Carousel - Z -15
Sample Carousel - X 12
Sample Carousel - Z -23
Wash Tower - X 0
Wash Tower - Z 25
RV Shuttle - X 12
RV Shuttle - Z -23
Device: Sample Carousel

Tube Detector 0
Bar Code Reader 2
Pipettor -6
Device: Reagent Carousel

Pipettor 5
Device: Incubator Belt

Shuttle Transfer -6
Wash In 5
Wash Out 8
Device: Rake
RV Shuttle -10
Device: Wash Arm

Wash Carousel / Arm 12
Device: Wash Carousel

Wash Out Align 0
CW Align 0
CCW Align 0
Device: Precision Valve

CCW Align 0
Page 1 of 2
Technologist ______________________________________________ Printed 09-09-01 12:43 PM
0901C.bmp
Figure 5-57 Alignment Report, Page 1 of 2

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
S/N 500135 Laboratory A
Device: Wash Pump
Backlash Calibration 130
Hardware Versions:
Model Number
Instrument Serial Number 500135
SMC Firmware 03
Stepper Driver PCB 48
Power Driver PCB 33
Ultrasonic PCB 38
Backplane PCB 34
I/O PCB 48
Software Versions:
Instrument Software Version 0.386
Instrument Operating System 2.2
Assay Protocol File 1.9.18
PC Software version 0.386.338.1
PC Operating System 4.0, Service Pack 4
Bar Code:
External Bar Code Reader
Internal Bar Code Reader Read Sample IDs
Interleaved 2 or 5, Characters = 10
CODABAR
CODE 39
Dilution Factor for assay Dil-AFP 18.00

Dilution Factor for assay Dil-hCG2 195.00
Page 2 of 2
Technologist __________________________________________ Printed 09-09-05
0902D.bmp
Figure 5-58 Alignment Report, Page 2 of 2

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Level Sense Report Townsville, ST 33333
S/N 500135 T. Levasseur
Test Mode: Dry and Wet Test Repetitions: 100
Dry Failure Dry Z Step Dry %CV Wet Failure Wet Z Step Wet %CV
Count Range Count Range
0 275-275 0.00 0 70-90 2.08
Page 1 of 1
Technologist ___________________________________________ Printed 09-09-05 12:43 PM
0906C.bmp
Figure 5-59 Level Sense Report

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Incubator Belt Calibration Report Townsville, ST 33333
S/N 500135 O. Wagner
Clip CW Nom CCW Nom Clip CW Nom CCWNom

Number Value Diff Value Diff Number Value Diff Value Diff
0 7185 -1 7213 -1 1 6985 -1 7013-1
2 6784 -2 6811 -3 3 6584 -2 6611 -3
4 6385 -1 6412 -2 5 6184 -2 6213 -1
6 5985 -1 6013 -1 7 5784 -2 5813 -1
8 5585 -1 5613 -1 9 5385 -1 5413 -1
10 5184 -2 5212 -2 11 4986 0 5013 -1
12 4786 0 4813 -1 13 4585 -1 4613 -1
14 4384 -2 4413 -1 15 4184 -2 4212 -2
16 3985 -1 4013 -1 17 3784 -2 3813 -1
18 3584 -2 3613 0 19 3384 -2 3411 -3
20 3186 0 3214 -2 21 2984 -2 3012 -2
22 2784 -2 2812 -3 23 2586 0 2613 -1
24 2384 -2 2411 -1 25 2185 -1 2213 -1
26 1984 -2 2013 -1 27 1784 -2 1812 -2
28 1586 0 1613 -1 29 1386 0 1413 -1
30 1186 0 1213 -1 31 0986 0 1013 -1
32 0785 -1 0813 -1 33 0586 0 0614 0
34 0386 0 0414 0 35 0186 0 0213 -1
36 11986 0 0014 0 37 11787 1 11815 1
38 11586 0 11613 -1 39 11385 -1 11413 -1
40 11186 0 11213 -1 41 10986 0 11013 -1
42 10785 -1 10813 -1 43 10585 -1 10613 -1
44 10388 2 10415 1 45 10185 -1 10213 -1
46 9986 0 10013 -1 47 9786 0 9813 -1
48 9586 0 9614 0 49 9386 0 9413 -1
50 9186 0 9213 -1 51 8985 -1 9013 -1
52 8786 0 8813 -1 53 8585 -1 8613 -1
54 8385 -1 8413 -1 55 8185 -1 8213 -1
56 7985 -1 8013 -1 57 7785 -1 7812 -2
58 7585 -1 7613 -1 59 7384 -2 7413 -1
Last Incubator Belt Calibration Date: 08-08-01

Maximum Nominal CCW Difference: 1
Minimum Nominal CW Difference: -2
Page 1 of 1
Technologist _____________________________________________ Printed 09-09-01
0904C.bmp
Figure 5-60 Incubator Belt Calibration Report

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Temperature Report Townsville, ST 33333
Access 2 Immunoassay System 101- 555 -2323 ext. 109
Temperature Sensor Temperature Operating Range Status Duty Cycle

(Degrees C) (Degrees C)
Incubator 36.44 36.13 - 36.73 0 0.23

Wash Carousel 36.44 36.23 - 36.63 0 0.21
Substrate 36.44 36.23 - 36.63 0 0.06
Refrigerator 3.14 1.00 - 5.00 0 0.66
Instrument Case 27.19 18.00 - 36.00 0 --
Page 1 of 1
Technologist __________________________________________ Printed 11-11-11
0905C.bmp
Figure 5-61 Temperature Report

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 5.11: Individual System Checks
5.11 Individual System Checks
The System Check routine consists of three individual system checks:

• Washed Check
• Substrate Check
• Unwashed Check
When you select the System Check routine as part of weekly maintenance, you run all
of the individual checks together. With information from these checks, you can
identify instrument problems and begin troubleshooting.
You can also run the individual checks to troubleshoot individual components of the
system.
For more information about troubleshooting the system with results from the System
Checks, see Section A.2: System Check Troubleshooting.
For information about the theory behind individual checks, see Section 3.5: System
Check Theory.
For information on how to run the complete system check routine, see Section 8.4:
System Check of the Operator's Guide.

C42385
5.11: Individual System Checks Access 2 Reference Manual
Running Use this procedure to run the washed check.

Washed
WARNING
Check Individ-
ually
Required Materials
WARNING
System Check Solution contains a preservative, which may cause sensitization by
skin contact. After contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.

• 2 mL sample cup
NOTE
Use only the 2.0 mL sample cups when performing the maintenance routines.
Using any other sample containers may result in level sensing errors and
cancellation of the maintenance routine.
• System Check Solution
Steps
1. Pipette 2.0 mL of undiluted System Check Solution into the sample cup in
position 7 of a rack. The sample cup should be full, but the solution level
should not be higher than the top of the cup.
2. Be sure that the system is in the Ready mode. Go to the Sample Manager screen.
To get to this screen from the Main Menu, select Sample Manager F1.
3. Be sure that the Rack ID field is selected, then type the rack ID and press [Enter].
The new rack is displayed in the Inventory list on the Sample Manager screen.
NOTE
Load the rack after requesting the maintenance routine. If you load the rack first,
the system recognizes the rack as a patient sample rack, and will not accept the
maintenance request. If the rack is already onboard, unload the rack, clear it, and
load the rack again after requesting the maintenance routine.

C42385
4. Select Maintenance Request F4.

The Request Maintenance window is displayed over the Maintenance Requests screen
(see Chapter 8: Routine Maintenance of the Operator's Guide).
NOTE
When you select Maintenance Request F4, the Sample Manager screen is no
longer displayed.
5. Select the System Check box, then select Washed from the System Check list.
6. Select OK F1.
The Maintenance Requests screen is displayed.
7. Select Load Rack X F1. (The X represents the number of the rack that you
entered into the Rack ID field.)
The system displays the Done window and presents a rack position.
8. Load the rack and select Done F1.

For more information on how to load a rack, see Section 3.1: Sample Management in
The routine, sample type, completion time, and status are displayed on the
Maintenance Requests screen.
WARNINGS
• Unless there is an emergency, let the maintenance routine run to completion.
Cancelling the routine may damage the instrument and compromise the
integrity of subsequent test results.
• If you stop the routine, do not initialize the system. Contact Technical
9. Select Run.
The system displays the test results as the samples are processed. When processing is
complete, the system runs the Utility Assay.
NOTE
To print the System Check Report, select Print Report F7 from the System
Check screen.
10. When the washed check is complete, unload the rack and select Done F1.
For more information on unloading a rack, see Section 3.1: Sample Management of

C42385
11. Compare the obtained results with the expected results listed on the report or in
Table 5-62.
• If you need assistance, contact Technical Support.
Expected %CV ≤12%

Expected RLU Mean 5,000–20,000
Table 5-62 Washed Check Expected Results
Running Sub- Use this procedure to run the substrate check.

strate Check
WARNING
Individually
Required Materials
• 2 mL sample cup
NOTE
Steps
1. Place an empty sample cup in position 9.
NOTE
maintenance request. If the rack is already onboard, unload the rack, clear it, and

C42385

The Request Maintenance window is displayed over the Maintenance Requests
screen.
NOTE
longer displayed.
5. Select the System Check box, then select Substrate from the System Check
list.
6. Select OK F1.

For more information on how to load a rack, see Section 3.1: Sample Management in
WARNINGS
9. Select Run.
NOTE
Check screen.
10. When the substrate check is complete, unload the rack and select Done F1.

C42385
11. Compare the obtained results with the expected results listed on the report or in
Table 5-63.
Expected %CV ≤ 5%
Expected RLU Mean 5,000–9,000
Table 5-63 Substrate Check Expected Results
Running Use this procedure to run the unwashed check.

Unwashed
WARNING
Check Individ-
ually
Required Materials
WARNING
System Check Solution and wash buffer contain a preservative, which may cause
sensitization by skin contact. After contact with skin, wash immediately with
soap and water. Wear suitable gloves.

• 2 mL sample cup
NOTE
• System Check Solution

• Wash buffer
Steps
1. Prepare a 1/501 dilution of System Check Solution. Mix 20 µL System Check
Solution with 10.0 mL of wash buffer.
2. Pipette 1 mL of the 1/501 diluted System Check Solution into a sample cup and
place the cup in sample position 10.

C42385
NOTE
maintenance request.If the rack is already onboard, unload the rack, clear it, and

The Request Maintenance window is displayed over the Maintenance Requests screen
(see Figure 8-3 in Chapter 8: Routine Maintenance of the Operator's Guide).
NOTE
longer displayed.
6. Select the System Check box, then select Unwashed from the System Check
list.
7. Select OK F1.

For more information on how to load a rack, see Section 3.1: Sample Management of
WARNINGS

C42385
10. Select Run.
NOTE
Check screen.
11. When the unwashed check is complete, unload the rack and select Done F1.
12. Compare the obtained results with the expected results. The results are listed in
the report and in Table 5-64.
Expected %CV ≤ 2%
Expected RLU Mean 4 to 10 million*
Table 5-64 Unwashed Check Expected Results

* Although not a system specification, the RLU mean result for the Un-
washed Check can be used as a reference guideline. If results are not in the
range of 4 to 10 million, try preparing the 1/501 dilution of System Check
Solution again and repeating the Unwashed Check procedure.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 6: Event Log
6 Event Log
6.1 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Event Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2 Reviewing Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Applying an Event Log Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Finding an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Sorting Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Printing Event Log Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3 Troubleshooting Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Viewing Troubleshooting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Viewing and Printing Event Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.4 List of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

C42385
6.1: Event Log Access 2 Reference Manual
6.1 Event Log
The Event Log is a list of events the Access 2 system generates as it monitors the
status of various system parameters. You can use these events to keep informed of
system operations and to assist with troubleshooting.
The Event Log screen displays up to 10 events, based on the current filter settings and
sort option. If more than 10 events fit the filter criteria, you can use the scroll bar to
view additional events.
NOTE
If you have a workgroup with more than one instrument, you can view only the
events that are specific for the instrument attached to the PC displaying the Event
Log.
The Event Log contains a maximum of 2,400 events for a single system or for a
workgroup, regardless of the number of instruments in the workgroup. The oldest
event is overwritten when the maximum is exceeded.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 6.1: Event Log
Event Log You use the Event Log screen to:

Screen
• View the event(s) Event Log
• Select an event and display troubleshooting information Button
about it
• Select an event and display detailed information about it
• Find a specific event
0579A.bmp
• Apply a filter to the list of events
• Sort the list of events
• Print the list of events
You can access the Event Log screen from any screen by selecting the Event Log
button or pressing [Scroll Lock].
0607B.bmp
Figure 6-1 Event Log Screen

C42385
6.1: Event Log Access 2 Reference Manual
Filter Status (Indicator) Displays the current status of the filter. The default status is Filter Off.
Indicator Values are: Filter On and Filter Off.
Type (Column) Identifies the type of event by the following icons:
Warning: A serious fault or error condition occurred. If the word FATAL

appears at the beginning of the description, you should not continue system
operation until you correct the condition.
Caution: A condition requires your attention.
Information: A notable event occurred.
Date/Time (Column) Displays the date and time when the event occurred.
Event (Column) Displays a brief description of the event.
Filter F1 (Button) Select to choose a filter to apply to the event list. With the default filter
settings, the event list includes all events.
Troubleshoot F2 (Button) Select to view troubleshooting Help system information for the selected
event.
This function is not available for information events.
Details F4 (Button) Select to view the Details window for the selected event.
The window displays technical information about the event, which may be useful for
Technical Support during troubleshooting.
Find F5 (Button) Select to search the event list for a specific event by text in the event
description. If a filter is applied, the search is limited to the events that fit the filter
criteria.
Sort F6 (Button) Select to sort the event list in ascending or descending chronological order.
Print F7 (Button) Select to print all events that fit the filter criteria or only the events currently
displayed on the screen. You can also choose to print details.
Table 6-2 Event Log Screen Descriptions

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 6.2: Reviewing Events
6.2 Reviewing Events
Under normal conditions, the Event Log button is neutral in color. The button turns
red when a warning event occurs or yellow when a caution event occurs. The button
returns to neutral when you display the Event Log screen.
If a new event occurs while you are viewing the Event Log screen, the new event is
displayed in real-time. If a caution or warning event occurs, the Event Log button
changes color accordingly.
When you display the Event Log screen, the currently selected event is highlighted.
Any events you did not previously view are displayed in blue.
To use the event log more effectively, you can:

• Apply a filter.
• Use the Find option to locate a specific event or set of events.
• Display the events sorted in either ascending or descending chronological
order.
You can also print an Event Log Report.
For an overview of Reviewing Events, see Figure 6-3.

C42385
6.2: Reviewing Events Access 2 Reference Manual
Any Screen
Event Log Filter
Select filter settings
OK
F1
Desired set
Filter
of events No F1
displayed?
Yes
Select one of the

following options,
as needed
Find Sort Print

F5 F6 F7
Find Sort Print
Display events in
Search to find a
ascending or Print Event Log Report
specific event
descending order
OK OK OK
F1 F1 F1
0659A.wmf
Figure 6-3 Reviewing Events Flowchart

C42385
Applying an An Event Log filter is a set of parameters you can change to reduce or expand the
Event Log Fil- number of events displayed on the Event Log screen.
ter The Event Log screen default is Filter Off. When the filter is off, you can view all
events.
Use this procedure to apply a different filter to the Event Log screen.
1. Go to the Filter window. To get to this window from any screen, select the Event
Log button to display the Event Log screen, then select Filter F1.
0608A.bmp
Figure 6-4 Filter (Event Log) Window
Date Range (Option) Select a date range to include in the filter. Options
are: View All Dates, Last 24 Hours, Last 7 Days, or
Specify.
Table 6-5 Filter (Event Log) Window Descriptions

C42385
Start Date and (Fields) If you select the Specify option, Start Date and
End Date End Date default to the current date.
Select the field and enter the starting and ending dates you
want to include in the filter.
The date format selected during system setup determines
the acceptable format for Start Date and End Date. The
following date entry rules apply:
• You can enter a zero in front of single-digit months and
days (not required).
• You can enter two or four digits for the year. If you do
not enter the year, the system assumes the current year.
If you enter a two-digit year that is less than 60, the
system assumes the year is after 1999.
• If the End Date is prior to the Start Date, or if you enter
an invalid date format, a message is displayed. You must
correct the dates before you continue.
Type (Boxes) Select Information to include information events
in the filter, Caution to include caution events in the filter,
and Warning to include warning events in the filter.
You must select at least one type of event.
View All (Button) Select to turn the filter off and include all events
Events F2 in the Event Log.
Table 6-5 Filter (Event Log) Window Descriptions (continued)
2. Select the settings for the filter.
 To turn the filter off, select View All Events F2.

The Event Log screen is displayed with a filter status of Filter Off.
3. Select OK F1.
The system displays the events that fit the selected filter parameters on the Event Log
screen. The system uses the selected filter until you apply a new one.

C42385
Finding an Use this procedure to search the Event Log for a specific event.
Event If a filter is applied, the search is limited to the events that fit the filter criteria.
1. Go to the Event Log screen. To get to this screen from any screen, select the
Event Log button.
 (Optional) To locate a specific event, apply a filter to reduce the number of

displayed events. For information about applying filters, see the Applying an
Event Log Filter procedure in this chapter.
2. Select Find F5.

The Find window is displayed.
0628A.bmp
Figure 6-6 Find (Event Log) Window
Find What (Field) Enter the text you want to find.

Direction (Option) Select Up or Down to change the direction of the
search. If you select Down, the system begins the search at
the current result and continues down the list. If you select
Up, the system begins the search at the current result and
continues up the list.
When a search reaches the top or bottom of the list, the
search continues from the opposite end.
Find Next F1 (Button) Select to find the next event that fits the search
criteria.
Table 6-7 Find (Event Log) Window Descriptions
3. In the Find What field, enter the text you want to find.
For example, you can type “pipettor” to find events related to the main pipettor.
 (Optional) To change the direction of the search, select the Up or Down option.

C42385
4. To find an event that fits the search criteria, select Find Next F1.
The closest match to the search parameters you entered becomes the selected event.
If the system does not find a match, it displays a message.
 (Optional) To find the next event that fits the search criteria, select Find Next F1.
5. Select Cancel F8 to exit the Find window.
Sorting Use this procedure to sort the Event Log into ascending order (most recent events at
Events the bottom) or descending order (most recent events at the top).
If a filter is applied, the list is limited to the events that fit the filter criteria.
1. Go to the Sort window. To get to this window from any screen, select the Event
Log button to display the Event Log screen, then select Sort F6.
2. To change the sort order, select the Ascending or Descending option.
3. Select OK F1.
The Event Log screen is displayed in the selected sort order. The system uses the
selected sort order until you apply a different one.
Printing Event Use this procedure to print the Event Log Report.
Log Reports If a filter is applied, the report is limited to the events that fit both the filter criteria and
the print range.
Event Log button.
 (Optional) To locate a group of events to print a report for, apply a filter to reduce
the number of events. For information about how to apply a filter, see the
Applying an Event Log Filter procedure in this chapter.
 (Optional) To find a specific event, select Find F2. For information about how to
find an event, see the Finding an Event procedure in this chapter.
2. Select Print F7.

The Print window is displayed.

C42385
0624A.bmp
Figure 6-8 Print (Event Log) Window
Print Range (Option) Select a print range for the Event Log Report.
If the filter is off, the All option prints the all events. If the
filter is on, the All option pints the events that fit the filter
criteria.
The Current Page option prints the displayed events.
Print Details (Box) Select to include the details for each event.
Table 6-9 Print (Event Log) Window Descriptions
 (Optional) To change the print range, select the All or Current Page option.
• To print all events that fit the filter criteria, select the All option.
• To print the displayed events, select the Current Page option.
 (Optional) To print details for each event, select the Print Details box. For more
information about event details, see the Viewing and Printing Event Details
3. Select OK F1.
• If you selected the All option, and there are more than 50 events in the Event Log,
a confirmation message is displayed. Select Yes F1.
The system sends the report to the printer.

C42385
Laboratories, Inc.
Laboratory A
123 Lake Street
Event Log Report Townsville, ST 33333
Filter: Off
Type Date Event

09/09/06 1:45 PM Run Completed
Code: 7c0005 Process: RunController(1F) Run Hours: 130
Run Completed
09/09/06 1:33PM Calibration Failed for assay Cortisol
Code: 750001 Process: ReduceUDR (DA) Hours: 130
Curve fit failed: Test Cortisol
09/09/06 1:18 PM Run Started
Code 7c0004 Process: RunController(22) Run Hours: 130
Run started
09/09/06 1:06 PM System Initialized
Code: 360002 Process: InstCtrl(1b) Run Hours: 130
System initialized
09/09/06 12:58 PM Run Stopped
Code: 7c001c Process: RunController(22) Run Hours: 130
Run stopped
09/09/06 12:53 PM Probe is Dirty. Maintenance Utility should be run.
Code: 710022 Process: InstCtrl(1b) Run Hours: 129
Probe is Dirty. Maintenance Utility should be run.
09/09/06 12:41 PM Run Started
Code 7c0004 Process: RunController(22) Run Hours: 129
Run started
09/09/06 12:30 PM System initialized
Code: 360002 Process: InstCtrl(1b) : 129
System initialized
09/09/06 12:14 PM Waste bag changed
Code:7c001b Process: supplies(1c) Run Hours: 129
Waste bag changed
Technologist _______________________________________ Printed 09/09/06 02:43 PM
0838B.bmp
Figure 6-10 Event Log Report

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 6.3: Troubleshooting Events
6.3 Troubleshooting Events
If a system error or potential problem generates an event in the Event Log, you can
view troubleshooting information for the event. This troubleshooting information
includes:
• Possible causes for the event.
• Brief outline of troubleshooting instructions.
• Links to detailed procedures. Always review the detailed procedures if you
are not completely familiar with them.
You can view technical information about an event in the Details window. The event
details, particularly the event code, can be useful for troubleshooting. If you contact
Technical Support for assistance, the representative may request the details for one or
more events.
For an overview of troubleshooting events, see Figure 6-11.
For more information about troubleshooting information in the Help system system,
see the Viewing Troubleshooting Help procedure.
For more information about the Help system system, see the Preface.

C42385
6.3: Troubleshooting Events Access 2 Reference Manual
Any Screen
Event Log button turns

yellow or red
Event Log
Review events
Need help? No Take appropriate action
Yes
Event Log
Select the event you

need help for
Troubleshoot
F2
Access 2 Help
Call Technical Support

Follow troubleshooting
instructions
Yes
Need to view Need Close Help and

or print event No additional No continue normal
details? assistance? operation
Yes
Details
F4
Details
Print
F7
0840B.wmf
Figure 6-11 Troubleshooting Events Flowchart

C42385
Viewing Trou- Use this procedure to view troubleshooting information for an event.
bleshooting
Help Event Log button.
2. Select the caution or warning event you want to get troubleshooting information
for.
3. Select Troubleshoot F2.

A troubleshooting Help system topic is displayed.
NOTE
Troubleshooting Help system is not available for information events.
0847C.bmp
Figure 6-12 Example Troubleshooting Help Window

C42385
6.3: Troubleshooting Events Access 2 Reference Manual
Viewing and Use this procedure to view the details for an event.
Printing Event
Details Event Log button.
2. Select the caution or warning event you want to view details for.
3. Select Details F4.

The Details window is displayed.
0630C.bmp
Figure 6-13 Details (Event Log) Window
Event (Field) Displays the event selected from the Event Log
screen.
Code (Field) Displays a system-generated number that identifies
the event.
The first two digits of the code are zeros and are not
included in the numeric List of Events.
Date/Time (Field) Displays the date and time when the event occurred.
Table 6-14 Details (Event Log) Window Descriptions

C42385
Process (Field) Displays a software process identifier, intended for

interpretation by a technical support representative.
Run Hours (Field) Indicates the number of hours the instrument had
been operating when the event occurred.
Instrument (Field) Displays the user-defined System ID.
Details (List box) Displays technical information that further
explains the event and may include an abbreviated device
or parameter name. The details information is usually
intended for interpretation by a technical support
representative.
The box may have a scroll bar.
Troubleshoot F2 (Button) Select to view troubleshooting Help system
information for the selected event.
This function is not available for information events.
Print F7 (Button) Select to print the Event Log Report for the event
displayed in the Details window.
Table 6-14 Details (Event Log) Window Descriptions (continued)
 (Optional) To view troubleshooting Help system for the event, select

Troubleshoot F2.
A troubleshooting Help system topic is displayed. You can display the same topic for
this event from the Event Log screen.
 (Optional) To print the event details, select Print F7.

The system sends the report to the printer.
4. Select OK F1 to exit the Details window.

C42385
6.4: List of Events Access 2 Reference Manual
6.4 List of Events
The List of Events provides an alphabetical listing of caution and warning events
(also referred to as error events) that can appear in the Event Log.
The List of Events includes the following information for caution and warning events.
Event Provides a brief description of each event.

Portions of some descriptions are variable, indicated as
XXX. The XXX may be replaced by text in the event
description displayed in the Event Log.
Code If several events have the same description, use the event
code to identify the correct troubleshooting. To find the
code for an event, view the Details window.
Possible Causes Lists the possible causes for each event. The most common
and/or most easily remedied causes are listed first.
Troubleshooting Provides brief instructions for troubleshooting each event.
Instructions Always review the detailed procedures if you are not
completely familiar with them.
For events that require assistance, you are instructed to
contact Technical Support.
Table 6-15 List of Events Descriptions

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 6.4: List of Events
Alphabetical List of Events
Event Possible Causes Troubleshooting Instructions
A/D Converter • Failure detected in reading ADC 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Reading Failure data. 2. Reboot the instrument (see Section 7.3).
• Defective I/O board. • If the problem persists, contact Technical Support. The I/O
board may need replacement or system software may need to
be re-installed.
3. Continue normal operation. Contact Technical Support to
report the event.
Analog Device Error detected in the control of 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Error analog devices. 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
example, waste bag was changed.
3. Reboot the instrument (see Section 7.3).
• If rebooting fails, contact Technical Support.
report the event.
APF Update APF or AAF disk is not for this 1. Remove the disk from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
Attempt with a immunoassay system. • If the removed disk is not for the Access 2 immunoassay
Disk from system, begin the update APF procedure again (see
Another System Section 4.4) with the correct system disk.
Failed
• If the disk is for the correct system, contact Technical
APF Update APF disk is from a previous APF. 1. Remove the disk from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
Attempt to a 2. From the Main Menu, select Configure F8, then Tests F2 to
Previous display the Test screen. Compare the APF revision number to
Revision Failed the number on the removed CD-ROM.
• If the removed disk is for a revision number lower than the
current APF, begin the update APF procedure again (see
Section 4.4) with the disk with the same or a higher revision
number.
• If the disk is for the same or a higher revision number,
contact Technical Support for assistance.
Bar Code Defective CPU board. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Initialization 2. Reboot the instrument (see Section 7.3).
Error
3. Contact Technical Support to report the event.
Table 6-16 Alphabetical List of Events

C42385
Calibration • Insufficient calibrator volume. 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to any
Failed For • Insufficient substrate. device error event with a date and time shortly before this
Assay XXX event.
• Expired calibrator or reagent pack.
2. If there are no device error events shortly before this event,
• Calibrators not in correct order on
follow the assay calibration troubleshooting instructions in
sample rack.
Appendix A.4: Assay Troubleshooting.
• Reagent pack in wrong slot.
3. Repeat the calibration. If you need assistance or if the problem
• Unstable or contaminated persists, contact Technical Support.
calibrator or reagent.
• Level sense failure.
• Inadequate particle washing.
Cannot XXX Device driver failed to configure or 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Luminometer disable the luminometer counter. 2. Contact Technical Support.
Counter
Cannot Fork Error detected in the system 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Database software. 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
Update Process example, waste bag was changed.
report the event.
Table 6-16 Alphabetical List of Events (continued)

C42385
Cannot Move - Software timing error. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Intersecting 2. From the Mechanics screen, check if the Incubator Belt, RV
Device Moving Shuttle, and Wash Carousel (Devices) are at the home or
index position (see Section 5.5).
3. Follow the steps for the appropriate situation below.
If the incubator belt and shuttle are at home or index and the wash
carousel is not:
1. Home the Wash Carousel (see Section 5.5).
• If homing fails, contact Technical Support.
report the event.
If the incubator belt and wash carousel are at home or index and
the shuttle is not:
1. Home the RV Shuttle (see Section 5.5).
• If homing fails, review the Event Log and troubleshoot
according to the error events with a similar date and time to
this event.
report the event.
If neither the incubator belt nor the wash carousel are at home or
index:
1. Clear the shuttle path (see Section 7.5).
2. Select Disable Motors F8, then manually rotate the incubator
belt until the index sensor is lit, then select Enable Motors F8.
3. Clear the wash carousel (see Section 7.8).
4. Home the Incubator Belt (see Section 5.5).
5. Be sure all covers are closed and reboot the instrument (see
Section 7.3).
6. Calibrate the incubator belt (see Section 5.8).
report the event.
Communication Error in communication between the 1. Go to the screen that was displayed when the error occurred.
Error instrument and the PC. Exit and re-enter the screen.
• If the problem persists, continue troubleshooting.
2. Reboot the PC (see Section 7.3).
• If the problem persists, continue troubleshooting.
• If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

C42385
CPU Timeout CPU cannot process the transmitted 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Error information within the allotted time. 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
3. Allow time for all tests in process to complete and listen for
processing sounds to stop.
5. Repeat tests if necessary. Contact Technical Support to report
the event.
Crosstalk Leakage light from one RV to an 1. Review the event details for the date and time of the event and
Counts Outside adjacent RV exceeded 10,000 the crosstalk counts (see Section 6.3).
Limits RLUs. • If the crosstalk counts for the event are >21,000, repeat the
tests completed just before and after the event to verify the
results.
• If the crosstalk counts are <21,000, continue normal
operation. Crosstalk counts of <21,000 do not have a marked
effect on adjacent sample results.
• If you cannot find the crosstalk counts or the tests completed
just before and after the event, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Dark Counts • Improperly closed covers 1. From the Digital Devices window, turn on the vacuum pump
Outside Limits • Bright lighting near instrument. and probe wash valve (see Section 5.5).
• Electrical noise. 2. From the Luminometer screen, select Load/Read Vessel F2
(see Section 5.7).
• Fluid spill in wash carousel.
3. Observe the Current RLU field for 2 - 3 minutes, then select
Cancel F8. Typical values are below 50 and should be below
100.
4. Turn off the vacuum pump and probe wash valve.
5. Check if all covers are closed tightly to prevent light from
entering the instrument (see Section 7.2).
• If covers are not closed tightly, close them properly and
repeat step 1 through step 4.
– If RLU values decrease, continue normal operation.
• If all covers were closed tightly, check if bright lighting,
such as a lamp or window, is located near the instrument.
– If bright lighting is present, shield the instrument or
remove the light source and repeat step 1 through step 4.
– If RLU values decrease, remove the light source
permanently if possible, or contact Technical Support
for assistance with relocating the instrument.
• If all covers were closed tightly and there is no bright
lighting present, repeat step 1 through step 3.
– Continue to observe the Current RLU field for 5 - 10
minutes, and record atypical RLU values. Turn off the
vacuum pump and probe wash valve.
– If values were above 100, or if they began low and
increased or spiked, contact Technical Support.
6. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the
problem persists, contact Technical Support.
Device Failed Device motion sequence failure. 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the error
During Motion events with a similar date and time to this event.
Sequence 2. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the
Device Failed Error received from device 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the error
During Timing controller or from another process. events with a similar date and time to this event.
Pitch 2. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the
Drift Correction Significant change occurred within 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Factor Outside the luminometer circuit. 2. Contact Technical Support.
Limits
Error Recovery Exceeded maximum attempts 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the error
Failed - No New allowed for device error recovery. events with a similar date and time to this event.
Tests Started 2. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the

C42385
FATAL Device Fatal instrument error. 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the error
Error - Tests In events with a similar date and time to this event.
Progress 2. Run QC (see Section 3.4 in the Operator's Guide) for all
Cancelled assays and evaluate any out-of-range results
(see Appendix A.4).
FATAL System Fatal error detected within the 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Software Error system software. 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
report the event.
Incubator Belt Minor deviation detected during 1. Calibrate the incubator belt (see Section 5.8).
Calibration incubator belt calibration. • If calibration fails or if the error recurs, continue
Error - Belt May Note: troubleshooting.
Need Service
The system is operable, but the 2. Switch the vessel holder positions (see Section 7.5).
incubator belt may need service 3. Be sure all covers are closed and initialize the system (see
soon. Try to improve the incubator Section 5.2). If you need assistance or if the problem persists,
belt calibration results by contact Technical Support.
troubleshooting.
Incubator Belt Defective incubator belt. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Calibration 2. Contact Technical Support.
Error - Belt
Needs Service
Incubator Belt • Missing or damaged vessel holder 1. From the Maintenance Review screen, select Disable Utility
Calibration or sensor flag. Assay F6 (see Section 8.1 in the Operator's Guide).
Error - Check • Incubator jam. 2. Replace any missing or damaged vessel holders (see
Belt Section 7.5).
4. Be sure all covers are closed and initialize the system (see
Section 5.2).
6. Cycle the belt for 1 minute (see Section 5.5).
7. Exercise the belt for 2 cycles (see Section 5.8).
8. Enable the Utility Assay and continue normal operation. If you
need assistance or if the problem persists, contact Technical
Support.

C42385
Incubator Belt Mechanical or electrical failure. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Motion Error 2. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to any error
event with a date and time shortly before this event.
3. From the Maintenance Review screen, select Disable Utility
Assay F6 (see Section 8.1 in the Operator's Guide).
4. From the Mechanics screen, check if the RV Shuttle and Wash
Carousel (Devices) are at the home or index position (see
Section 5.5).
• If the shuttle is not at home:
a. Clear the shuttle path (see Section 7.5).
b. Home the RV Shuttle. If homing fails, review the Event
Log and troubleshoot according to the error events with
a similar date and time to this event.
• If the wash carousel is not at home or index:
a. Open the front panel.
b. Select Disable Motors F8, then manually rotate the
incubator belt until the index sensor is lit, then select
Enable Motors F8.
c. Clear the wash carousel (see Section 7.8).
4. Check for fallen RVs in the shuttle transfer position and in the
front corners of the analytical module (see Section 7.5).
5. Replace missing or damaged vessel holders (see Section 7.5).
Section 7.3).
• If you replaced any vessel holders, calibrate the incubator
belt (see Section 5.8), cycle the belt for 1 minute (see
Section 5.5), and exercise the belt for 2 cycles (see
Section 5.8).
8. Enable the Utility Assay and continue normal operation.
Contact Technical Support to report the event.
Incubator Belt Incubator belt has not been Calibrate the incubator belt (see Section 5.8). If you need
Not Calibrated calibrated since software was assistance or if the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
loaded.

C42385
IND flag is • For sandwich assays, which use 1. For IND flagged results which meet the following criteria,
associated with positive slope calibration curves, dilute and rerun the sample:
the result the result is at the low end of the • The result is on a competitive assay, and
concentration curve and cannot be
• Sample dilution is allowed for the assay, and
distinguished from a system
failure because the RLU reading is • The sample RLU is low.
too low. See the reagent instructions for use to determine the assay type
• For competitive assays, which and whether sample dilution is allowed.
use negative slope calibration 2. Rule out a system problem by reviewing the Event Log for
curves, the result is at either: error events with a date and time shortly before this event.
• The high end of the Troubleshoot accordingly.
concentration curve and 3. If you have ruled out a system problem and the IND flag event
cannot be distinguished from a is the only issue, recalibrating the affected assay may resolve
system failure because the the problem.
RLU reading is too low, or • Recalibrate the assay using a new reagent pack and a new set
• The low end of the of calibrators.
concentration curve and • Run QC.
cannot be distinguished from a
system failure because the • Repeat the test on the affected sample.
RLU reading is too high. If IND flags persist, contact Technical Support.
Invalid Invalid firmware revision for a 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Firmware On device axis detected on the SMC 2. Contact Technical Support. The SMC board may need
SMC Board board. replacement.
Invalid Sensor Invalid sensor input detected on the 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Input On SMC SMC board. 2. Contact Technical Support. The SMC board may need
Board replacement.
Luminometer Device driver did not receive 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Read Failed acknowledgement from the 2. Contact Technical Support.
luminometer.
Main Pipettor • Fluid leak. 1. Visually inspect the tubing leading from the precision pump
Detected an • Sensor failure. valve to the pressure monitor, and from the pressure monitor to
Abnormal the main pipettor (see Figure 1-3). If you see leaks, bubbles, or
Pressure crystalline deposits, contact Technical Support for assistance.
2. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
3. Contact Technical Support. The pressure sensor may need
replacement.
Main Pipettor Obstruction detected due to: 1. Be sure the sample is free of clots or other solids.
Detected an • Solid matter in sample, or highly 2. Be sure the ID of the rack you are using is appropriate for the
Obstruction viscous sample. sample container (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide).
While
• Incorrect sample container for 3. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot any other events with
Aspirating
rack ID. a similar date and time to this event.
Sample
• Plugged primary probe. 4. Repeat the test. If you need assistance or if the problem
persists, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Main Pipettor Pressure monitor detected five or 1. Prime the pipettor twice (see Section 5.11), determine a new
Detected Too more obstructions in multiple reference curve for obstruction detection (see Section 5.5), be
Many samples due to: sure the sample is free of clots or other solids, and repeat the
Consecutive • Plugged primary probe. test.
Obstructions 2. If the failure recurs, run the Special Clean routine (see
• Damaged primary probe.
Section 8.5 in the Operator's Guide), run the System Check
• Mechanical problem or alignment.
routine, and determine a new reference curve for obstruction
detection. Repeat the test.
3. If the failure recurs, contact Technical Support to verify the
need to replace the primary probe.
Main Pipettor • Missing reagent packs. 1. If reagent packs might have been removed from the reagent
Disabled after • Leak in the fluidic system. carousel without using the user interface, look for packs using
Repeated the Retrieving Misplaced Packs procedure (see Section 2.7 in
• Precision pump failure.
Dispensing the Operator's Guide).
Failures • Pressure monitor failure.
• If there are missing or misplaced packs, unload and reload
all reagent packs according to the Retrieving Misplaced
Packs procedure. Then, continue troubleshooting with step
2.
• If the carousel contains the correct reagent packs in the
correct slots, contact Technical Support before continuing
troubleshooting.
2. Reset the pipettor and initialize the system (see Section 5.5).
3. Continue normal operation. Run canceled tests again.

C42385
Main Pipettor • Obstruction in vertical path of the 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
Motion Error main pipettor. 2. Inspect the primary probe for damage (see Section 8.3 of the
• Obstruction in horizontal path of Operator's Guide).
the main pipettor. 3. Check for obstructions in the main pipettor pathway:
• Debris buildup on lower pipettor • In the vertical path, such as caps left on sample containers or
gantry shaft. reagent packs improperly seated in the reagent carousel.
• Mechanical or electrical failure. • In the horizontal path.
• If you find an obstruction, remove it.
4. Close the front panel (see Section 7.2).
5. From the Mechanics screen, home the Pipettor (see
Section 5.5).
according to the error events listed.
6. Open the front panel.
7. Carefully slide the main pipettor from left to right. Check if the
probe touches the wash tower or incubator cover.
• If the probe touches the wash tower, contact Technical
Support.
• If the probe touches the incubator cover, be sure the
incubator cover is positioned correctly (see Section 7.2).
• If the probe does not touch the wash tower or incubator
cover, clean the lower pipettor gantry shaft (see Section 7.6).
8. Close the front panel and initialize the system (see
Section 5.2).
9. If the probe is damaged, or if you found an obstruction in the
vertical or horizontal path of the probe, contact Technical
Support.
Main Pipettor • Front panel not completely closed. 1. Be sure the front panel is completely closed (see Section 7.2).
Motion Error - • Defective interlock switch. 2. Initialize the system (see Section 5.2).
Front Panel
Open
Main Pipettor Defective main pipettor Z-axis home 1. Test the pipettor Z-axis home sensor (see Section 7.6).
X-Axis Motion sensor. 2. From the Mechanics screen, home the Pipettor (see
Error - Pipettor Section 5.5).
Z-Axis Not
Home
according to the error events listed.
3. Select any Position except the Wash Tower. Select Move X to
Position F2, then Start Cycling F6 for 10-15 cycles, then
Stop Cycling F6. Select Home Device F1.
• If cycling or homing fails, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Mixer Belt • Broken mixer belt. 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
Speed Error - • Defective sensor. 2. Check the mixer belt to verify that it is intact (see Figure 7-35).
Outside Limits
• Defective motor. • If the mixer belt is broken, contact Technical Support.
3. From the Digital Devices window, turn on the mixer motor,
then verify the RPM field reads 2500 +/- 20 (see Section 5.6).
• If the RPM is not within 2500 +/- 20, contact Technical
Support.
4. Turn the motor off.
5. Close the front panel and continue normal operation. If you
Support.
Mixer Belt Mixer speed measurement not 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Break Detection supported by I/O board. 2. Contact Technical Support. The I/O board may need
Not Supported replacement.
No Empty Instrument sequencer was unable to 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Position Found find an empty position for an RV on 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
On Incubator the incubator belt. example, waste bag was changed.
Belt
report the event.
No RV In • Missing RV from RV cartridge. 1. Check for fallen or missing RVs in the shuttle and shuttle
Pipetting • Dirty or defective RV sensor. transfer position (see Section 7.5).
Position 1 Or 2 • If no RVs are fallen or missing, test the RV sensors and
clean them if necessary (see Section 7.5).
• If RVs are fallen or missing, remove all the RVs in the
shuttle and continue troubleshooting.
2. Close the front panel.
3. From the Mechanics screen, home the RV Shuttle (see
Section 5.5).
4. Select Rake (Device) at RV Shuttle (Position). Select Home
Device F1, then Move Z to Position F3.
• If RVs are still fallen or missing in the shuttle, repeat step 1
through step 4 (omit the first bullet under step 1) until no
RVs are missing.
Section 5.2).
NVRAM Test NVRAM test failure during software 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Failed During installation. 2. Contact Technical Support. The I/O board may need
Installation replacement.

C42385
Peristaltic Movement of peristaltic pump 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
Pump Running detected when the pump should be 2. From the Digital Devices window, turn on the peristaltic pump
Error stopped. (see Section 5.5).
3. Verify that the peristaltic pump status is Running and the
peristaltic pump is rotating (see Figure 1-5).
• If the pump is not in Running status and rotating, contact
Technical Support.
4. Turn off the peristaltic pump.
5. Verify that the peristaltic pump status is Stopped and the
peristaltic pump stops rotating.
• If the pump is not in Stopped status and it continues
rotating, contact Technical Support.
Support.
Peristaltic No movement of peristaltic pump 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
Pump Stopped detected when the pump should be 2. From the Digital Devices window, turn on the peristaltic pump
Error running. (see Section 5.6).
3. Verify that the peristaltic pump status is Running and the
peristaltic pump is rotating (see Figure 1-5).
• If the pump is not in Running status and rotating, contact
Technical Support.
4. Turn off the peristaltic pump.
5. Verify that the peristaltic pump status is Stopped and the
peristaltic pump stops rotating.
• If the pump is not in Stopped status and it continues
rotating, contact Technical Support.
Support.
PMT H.V. • Failure to write in DAC setup 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Supply - DAC values. 2. Contact Technical Support.
XXX • Corrupted data within NVRAM.

C42385
Possible Rake • Fallen RVs in RV loader. 1. Check for fallen or missing RVs in the shuttle (see
Motion Error • Missing or extra RVs in the RV Section 7.5).
During Row loader. • If RVs are fallen or missing, remove all the RVs in the
Advance shuttle and continue troubleshooting.
• RVs improperly loaded.
Section 5.5).
through step 4 until no RVs are missing.
Section 5.2).
Precision • Debris buildup on valve. 1. Clean the precision valve (see Section 7.7).
Valve/Pump • Utility Assay disabled and 2. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the
Motion Error instrument idle for extended time. problem persists, contact Technical Support.
• Precision valve failure.
• Mechanical or electrical failure.
Pump Stay • Precision pump motion error 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the error
Awake routine • Precision valve motion error events with a similar date and time to this event.
failed to start 2. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the
QC Result Not • Previous device motion error. 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to any
Obtained - No device motion error event with a date and time shortly before
Value Stored this event.
2. Repeat the test with a freshly prepared control. If you need
assistance or if the problem persists, contact Technical
Support.
Rake Homing • Obstruction interfering with rake 1. Check for fallen RVs or other obstructions between the rake
Error movement. and the wall of the incubator track (see Section 7.5).
• Mechanical failure. 2. Close the front panel.
Section 5.5).
Section 5.2).

C42385
Rake Motion • Fallen RVs in RV loader. 1. Check for fallen or missing RVs in the shuttle, and check for
Error • Missing or extra RVs in the RV fallen RVs or other obstructions between the rake and the wall
loader. of the incubator track (see Section 7.5).
• Obstruction interfering with rake • If RVs are fallen or missing, remove all the RVs in the
movement. shuttle and continue troubleshooting.
• Mechanical failure. 2. Close the front panel.
• RVs improperly loaded. 3. From the Mechanics screen, home the RV Shuttle (see
Section 5.5).
through step 4 until no RVs are missing.
Section 5.2).
Reading Patient LIS test request did not include the 1. The Patient ID is required information in an LIS test request.
Record: Patient Patient ID. The test must be requested again with the Patient ID.
ID Missing 2. Share this information with the LIS vendor and if needed, refer
the vendor to Technical Support for clarification.
Reagent • Improperly loaded reagent pack 1. From the Mechanics screen, select Disable Motors F8 (see
Carousel interfering with movement. Section 5.5).
Motion Error • Defective sensor. 2. Slide the carousel door to the left and open the reagent
• Defective thermistor allowed ice carousel door.
to form in the carousel. 3. Manually rotate the reagent carousel in both directions,
• Defective bearings. checking the tops of the reagent packs for signs of damage.
• Mechanical or electrical failure. • If you cannot rotate the carousel, contact Technical Support.
4. Remove damaged reagent packs.
5. Select Enable Motors F8.
6. Select Reagent Carousel (Device) at Pipettor (Position).
Select Home Device F1, then Move X to Position F2, then
Start Cycling F6 for six cycles, then Stop Cycling F6 (see
Section 5.5).
• If homing or cycling fails, contact Technical Support.
7. Close the reagent carousel door and the carousel door.
8. Initialize the system (see Section 5.2).
• If you removed reagent packs, go to the Supplies screen and
unload and delete any reagent pack you removed (see
Chapter 2 in the Operator's Guide). Discard the reagent
packs.

C42385
Reagent pack • Pack was moved by an operator 1. From the Supplies screen, select a reagent pack button with
bar code • Pack was loaded out of sequence ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot Number fields.
discrepancy 2. Unload the pack.
• Pack was loaded without using the
identified
Load Packs function 3. Reload the pack using the external bar code reader.
Reagent pack • Incorrect bar code 1. From the Supplies screen, select a reagent pack button with
bar code is • Damaged bar code label ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot Number fields.
invalid 2. Unload the pack.
• Problem with bar code reader
3. Load the pack again using the external bar code reader.
• If the system correctly reads the bar code, the pack is now
loaded and can be used by the system to run tests. To
determine if the internal reagent bar code reader is broken,
skip to step 4 to troubleshoot the internal reagent bar code
reader.
• If the external bar code reader also failed to read the bar
code, the label may be unreadable. Enter the code manually
using the keyboard, and then skip to the last step in this
procedure.
4. If the pack was successfully read with the external bar code
reader in step 3, the pack is now correctly loaded on the
instrument. To troubleshoot the internal reagent bar code
reader, try loading a pack with a known good bar code label,
using the internal bar code reader. If the system fails to read
the bar code, contact Technical Support to troubleshoot the
internal bar code reader.
5. Review the Supplies screen for additional instances of reagent
pack buttons with ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot
Number fields. Repeat this procedure for each instance.

C42385
Reagent pack • Pack was improperly removed 1. From the Supplies screen, select a reagent pack button with
bar code is from the instrument ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot Number fields.
unreadable or • Bar code is no longer readable 2. Unload the pack.
the slot is
NOTE: If the slot is empty when you attempt to unload a pack,
empty
complete the unload operation to allow the system to properly
identify the empty slot. Then, skip to the last step in this
procedure.
reader.
procedure.

C42385
Reagent pack • Incorrect bar code 1. From the Supplies screen, select a reagent pack button with
bar code length • Damaged bar code label ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot Number fields.
is incorrect 2. Unload the pack.
• Problem with bar code reader
reader.
procedure.

C42385
Reagent pack • Packs were moved by an operator The system will automatically recover from this error by
found in • A pack was loaded out of remapping empty slots and packs that were automatically loaded.
slot XXX was sequence, without using the Load However, any packs that were manually entered will not be
not expected Packs function remapped. In this case, perform the following steps.
1. Review the reagent pack buttons on the Supplies screen, and
Reagent pack • Packs were moved by an operator take one of the following actions:
found in
• If no buttons are found with ???? in the Reagent Pack
unexpected
Name and Lot Number fields, skip the remaining steps of
slot. Expected
this procedure. No additional action is needed.
slot contains
another pack. • If buttons with ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot
Number fields are found, select one of the buttons and
continue with the remaining steps of this procedure.
2. Unload the pack.
reader.
procedure.
Number fields. Repeat this procedure or each instance.

C42385
Reagent pack • Pack has been marked as deleted Unload the pack and discard it. If you can locate the pack on the
has been in the database, but was found on Reagent Inventory, unload it from that screen. If not, perform the
deleted the instrument following steps.
1. From the Mechanics screen, select Disable Motors F8 (see
Section 5.5).
2. Slide the carousel door to the left and open the reagent
carousel door.
3. Manually rotate the reagent carousel clockwise until the pack
is in the loading position.
4. Remove the pack and discard it.
6. Select Reagent Carousel in the Device list. Select Home
Device F1.
8. Remap the reagent packs (from the Reagent Inventory or
Supplies screen, select Remap F3).
Reagent pack • Expired reagent pack was loaded Unload the expired pack and discard it.
has expired
Reagent pack is • Duplicate bar code 1. From the Supplies screen, select a reagent pack button with
already loaded • Pack was improperly moved from ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot Number fields.
one instrument to another in a 2. Unload the pack.
workgroup 3. Repeat step 1 and step 2 for all instances of reagent pack
buttons with ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot
Number fields.
4. Visually inspect the bar code on each unloaded pack.
• For packs with duplicate bar codes, contact Technical
Support. Do not use packs that have the same bar code as
another pack.
• For unloaded packs with bar codes that are not duplicates,
reader.
using the keyboard.

C42385
Reagent pack is • Pack is empty Unload the pack and discard it. If you can locate the pack on the
empty • Reagent pack monitoring detected Reagent Inventory screen, unload it from that screen. If not,
an issue perform the following steps.
Section 5.5).
carousel door.
4. Remove the pack and discard it.
Device F1.
8. Remap the reagent packs (from the Reagent Inventory or
Supplies screen, select Remap F3).
Reagent Pack • Insufficient reagent pack volume. 1. Unload the reagent pack and load a new reagent pack (see
Monitoring • Misplaced pack. Section 2.7 in the Operator's Guide).
Detected • If the lot number of the new reagent pack is different than
Insufficient the removed pack, recalibrate the assay (see Section 3.3 in
Reagent the Operator's Guide).
• If the pack removed is not the correct pack, unload and
reload all reagent packs using the Retrieving Misplaced
Packs procedure (see Section 2.7 in the Operator's Guide).
Reagent Pack • Missing or disconnected pressure 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Monitoring monitor. 2. Contact Technical Support.
Device Failure • Pressure monitor failure.
Reagent Pack • Pack shared among instruments 1. Unload the reagent pack, discard it, and load a new reagent
Rejected after that are not in a workgroup. pack (see Section 2.7 in the Operator's Guide).
Repeated • Insufficient reagent pack volume. • If the lot number of the new reagent pack is different than
Monitoring the removed pack, recalibrate the assay (see Section 3.3 in
• Misplaced or misaligned reagent
Failures the Operator's Guide).
pack.
• Precision pump failure. • If the pack discarded was not the correct pack, unload and
reload the remaining reagent packs using the Retrieving
• Air in the pipettor tubing.
Misplaced Packs procedure (see Section 2.7 in the
• Pressure monitor drift or failure. Operator's Guide).
• If the reagent pack you removed is the correct pack, but does
not seem low on reagent, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Reagent pack • Pack was improperly removed Locate the pack in the carousel or in an external location. If the
was not found from the instrument pack is found in the carousel, reload it manually.
or the bar code • Bar code is no longer readable To locate the pack in the carousel, perform the following steps:
is not readable
• Database error 1. From the Mechanics screen, select Disable Motors F8 (see
Section 5.5).
carousel door.
4. Remove the pack.
Device F1.
7. Reload the pack manually. For more information, see the
Loading a Reagent Pack and Manually Entering Bar Code
Information procedure in Section 2.7 of the Operator's Guide.
Remap • An error occurred during the Troubleshoot according to recent related events.
completed with remap operation. One or more
errors additional events will be displayed

C42385
Reagent pack • Packs were moved by an operator The system will automatically recover from this error by
found in • A pack was loaded out of remapping empty slots and packs that were automatically loaded.
slot XXX was sequence, without using the Load However, any packs that were manually entered will not be
not expected Packs function remapped. In this case, perform the following steps.
1. Review the reagent pack buttons on the Supplies screen, and
Reagent pack • Packs were moved by an operator take one of the following actions:
found in
• If no buttons are found with ???? in the Reagent Pack
unexpected
Name and Lot Number fields, skip the remaining steps of
slot. Expected
this procedure. No additional action is needed.
slot contains
another pack. • If buttons with ???? in the Reagent Pack Name and Lot
Number fields are found, select one of the buttons and
2. Unload the pack.
reader.
procedure.
Number fields. Repeat this procedure or each instance.
Remap • An error occurred during the Troubleshoot according to recent related events.
completed with remap operation. One or more
errors additional events will be displayed

C42385
RV Cleanout Failure to clean out RVs due to error 1. Open the front panel, then remove the supply cover and
Error detected in RV tracking scheme. incubator cover (see Section 7.2).
Codes: 2. Remove any RVs remaining in the shuttle (see Figure 7-18)
360101 and clear the shuttle path (see Section 7.5).
360201 3. From the Mechanics screen, home the RV Shuttle (see
Section 5.5).
360a01
4. Select Disable Motors F8 (see Section 5.5).
5. Manually rotate the incubator belt one complete turn, checking
the shuttle transfer position for remaining RVs.
• If there are remaining RVs, remove them from the shuttle
transfer position.
6. Select Enable Motors F8 and home the Incubator Belt (see
Section 5.5).
8. Home the Incubator Belt, then the Wash Carousel.
9. Replace and close all covers, then initialize the instrument (see
Section 5.2).
report the event.
RV Cleanout Failure to clean out RVs due to error 1. Open the front panel, then remove the supply cover and
Error detected in RV tracking scheme. incubator cover (see Section 7.2).
Codes: 2. Remove any RVs remaining in the shuttle (see Figure 7-14).
360301 3. Replace and close all covers, then reboot the instrument (see
360501 Section 7.3).
report the event.
RV Cleanout Failure to clean out RVs due to error 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the error
Error detected in RV tracking scheme. events with a similar date and time to this event.
Code: 2. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the
360b01 problem persists, contact Technical Support.
RV Cleanout Loss of NVRAM due to: 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Error • Battery backup loss while power 2. Contact Technical Support.
Code: was down.
360c01 • Changed or removed I/O board.

C42385
RV Cleanout Motion error occurred before Caution:

Error cleanout. If this error is not corrected, the instrument may be damaged.
Codes: 1. Open the front panel, then remove the supply cover and
360401 incubator cover (see Section 7.2).
360601 2. Check for fallen RVs or other obstructions in the shuttle (see
360701 Section 7.5).
Section 5.5).
5. Manually rotate the incubator belt one complete turn, checking
for obstructions.
• If there are obstructions, remove them.
8. Home the Incubator Belt, then the Wash Carousel.
9. Replace and close all covers, then initialize the system (see
Section 5.2).

C42385
RV Cleanout Device is not on an index flag. 1. From the Mechanics screen, check if the Incubator Belt, RV
Error Note: Shuttle, and Wash Carousel (Device) are at the home or index
Codes: position (see Section 5.5).
This event usually occurs after a
360801 motion error. 2. Follow the steps for the appropriate situation below.
360901 If the incubator belt and shuttle are at home or index and the wash
carousel is not:
1. Home the Wash Carousel (see Section 5.5).
• If homing fails, contact Technical Support.
If the incubator belt and wash carousel are at home or index and
the shuttle is not:
1. Home the RV Shuttle (see Section 5.5).
according to the error events with a similar date and time to
this event.
If neither the incubator belt nor wash carousel are at home or

index:
2. Select Disable Motors F8, then manually rotate the incubator
belt until the index sensor is lit, then select Enable Motors F8.
Section 5.2).
RV Ejected With • No RV waste bag present. 1. Open the supplies door and locate the waste bag.
No Waste Bag • Improperly seated RV waste bag. • If no waste bag is present, install the waste bag currently in
Present use (if it is not full), or install a new waste bag, following the
• Undetectable plastic collar on
waste bag. Changing the RV Waste Bag procedure (see Section 2.6 in
the Operator's Guide). Continue normal operation.
• Improperly adjusted or defective
sensor. 2. Press firmly on the plastic collar on the waste bag to be sure it
is fully seated into the slot on the waste chute.
3. Test the waste bag sensor (see Section 7.4). If you need to
adjust the waste bag sensor, or if the problem persists after
adjustment, contact Technical Support.

C42385
RV Location RV to be read by luminometer does 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Conflict not match test ID requested by 2. Contact Technical Support.
system sequencer.
RV Location • Instrument was unable to find a 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Software Error specific RV. 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
• Instrument was unable to find an example, waste bag was changed.
empty position on a device for an 3. Reboot the instrument (see Section 7.3).
RV.
report the event.
RV Waste Bag • RV waste bag does not have 1. Install a new waste bag, following the Changing the RV Waste
has Insufficient enough room left to complete the Bag procedure (see Section 2.6 in the Operator's Guide).
Capacity operation. Continue normal operation.
RV Waste Bag • No RV waste bag present. 1. Open the supplies door and locate the waste bag.
is Missing • Improperly seated RV waste bag. • If no waste bag is present, install the waste bag currently in
• Undetectable plastic collar on use (if it is not full), or install a new waste bag, following the
waste bag. Changing the RV Waste Bag procedure (see Section 2.6 in
the Operator's Guide). Continue normal operation.
• Improperly adjusted or defective
sensor. 2. Press firmly on the plastic collar on the waste bag to be sure it
3. Test the waste bag sensor (see Section 7.4). If you need to
adjust the waste bag sensor, or if the problem persists after
adjustment, contact Technical Support.
Sample • Improperly positioned sample 1. Open the front panel and remove the supply cover, then close
Carousel rack, electrical wiring, or other the front panel (see Section 7.2).
Motion Error obstruction interfering with 2. From the Mechanics screen, select Disable Motors F8 (see
movement. Section 5.5).
• Mechanical or electrical failure. 3. Manually rotate the carousel in both directions, checking for
improperly positioned racks, electrical wiring, or other
obstructions.
• If you find an obstruction, try to reposition or remove it, then
rotate the carousel one full rotation.
• If you cannot rotate the carousel freely, contact Technical
Support.
5. Select Sample Carousel (Device) at Bar Code Reader
(Position). Select Home Device F1, then Move X to Position
F2, then Start Cycling F6 for six cycles, then Stop Cycling F6
(see Section 5.5).
• If homing or cycling fails, contact Technical Support.
6. Replace and close all covers and initialize the system (see
Section 5.2).

C42385
Sample Counts • Empty substrate bottle. 1. Check the substrate bottle.

Outside Limits • Constricted or loose tubing. • If the bottle is empty, change it and prime the substrate (see
• Mechanical failure. Section 2.4 in the Operator's Guide). Continue normal
operation.
• Poor aspiration by aspirate
probe 3. • If the bottle is not empty, continue troubleshooting.
2. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
3. Check the fittings on the substrate cap and the substrate tubing
along the visible path from the substrate bottle to the substrate
pump (see Figure 1-5) and substrate probe (see Figure 5-11).
Note: If the substrate cap contains a fitting lock (see Figure 2-11 in
the Operator's Guide), do not attempt to manipulate the fittings.
• If a fitting is loose, tighten it (finger-tight). If the tubing is
loose or constricted, correct it. Continue normal operation.
• If the fittings and tubing are not loose or constricted,
continue troubleshooting.
4. Review the result report for a SYS flag.
• If you find a SYS flag, contact Technical Support.
5. Perform the visual dispense probe volume check (see
Section 5.5).
6. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to any
mechanical error event with a similar date and time to this
event.
• If the problem persists, perform the visual aspirate probe
volume check (see Section 5.4).
7. Be sure all covers are closed and continue normal operation. If
you need assistance or if the problem persists, contact
Technical Support.
Sample • Insufficient sample volume. 1. Be sure you use an approved sample container, and pipette
Quantity Not • Overfilled sample container. sufficient sample for the requested tests into the sample
Sufficient (QNS) container (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide). Do NOT
• Incorrect sample container for
overfill.
rack ID.
2. Be sure the ID of the rack you are using is appropriate for the
• Incorrectly loaded sample
sample container (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide).
container or rack.
3. Properly place the sample container in the rack and load the
• Damaged primary probe tip.
rack on the instrument (see Section 3.1 in the Operator's
• Incorrectly torqued primary probe. Guide).
• Defective connections between 4. Rerun the test(s) (see Section 5.2 in the Operator's Guide). If
the main pipettor and pipettor the problem persists, continue troubleshooting at step 5.
interface board.
5. Remove the primary probe and check the tip. Replace the
probe if it is pitted (see Section 7.6).
6. Be sure the primary probe is installed and torqued correctly
(see Section 7.6).

C42385
Shuttle Motion • Overfilled RV waste bag. 1. From the Supplies screen, note the RV Waste number (see
Error • Improperly seated RV waste bag. Section 2.1 in the Operator's Guide).
• Mechanical or electrical failure. 2. Open the supplies door to view the waste bag. If the waste bag
is bulging, it may be overfilled.
• Obstruction in the path of the
shuttle. 3. Follow the steps for the appropriate situation below.
If the waste bag appears overfilled, but the RV Waste number is

far less than 300:
1. Change the waste bag (see Section 2.6 in the Operator's
Guide).
Section 5.5).
If the waste bag is not full, but it is not seated correctly:

1. Press firmly on the plastic collar on the waste bag to be sure it
2. Close the supplies door.
If the waste bag is not full and is seated correctly:

1. Check for fallen RVs in the shuttle transfer position (see
Section 7.5).

C42385
Snugging RVs • Missing RV from RV cartridge. 1. Check for fallen or missing RVs in the shuttle and shuttle
Into Shuttle • Fallen RV. transfer position (see Section 7.5).
Failed • If no RVs are fallen or missing, test the RV sensors and
• Dirty or defective RV sensor.
clean them if necessary (see Section 7.5).
• If RVs are fallen or missing, remove all the RVs in the
shuttle and continue troubleshooting.
Section 5.5).
through step 4 (omit the first bullet under step 1) until no
RVs are missing.
Section 5.2).
Software Data Corrupted hard drive. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Formatting 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
Error example, waste bag was changed.
report the event.
Software Failure detected during a database 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Database update operation. 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
Update Failure example, waste bag was changed.
report the event.
Software File Corrupted hard drive. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Accessing Error 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
report the event.
Software Device did not complete a command 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Timeout Error from the software within the allotted 2. Reboot the instrument (see Section 7.3).
time.
3. Contact Technical Support to report the event.

C42385
Status Error detected while status 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Controller controller was initializing 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
Initialization instrument parameters. example, waste bag was changed.
Error
report the event.
Supplies Insufficient supplies for the number 1. Check the Supplies Required screen to determine the supplies
Insufficient For of tests requested. needed (see Section 4.2 in the Operator's Guide).
Requested 2. Load the necessary supplies (see Chapter 2 in the Operator's
Tests Guide) and verify that supplies are sufficient on the Supplies
Required screen.
Supply • Insufficient wash buffer volume. 1. Check the wash buffer reservoir (see Figure 1-6).
Condition - • Defective buffer valve assembly. • If the buffer volume is low, change the wash buffer bottle
Scheduler (see Section 2.2 in the Operator's Guide). Continue normal
• Broken float level sensor wire.
Paused operation.
Code: • If the buffer volume is not low, continue troubleshooting.
521c03 2. Check the wire to the float level sensor.
• If the wire is broken, contact Technical Support.
• If the wire is intact, order a new wash buffer valve assembly
and replace the current one (see Figure 2-4 in the Operator's
Guide).
Supply • Liquid waste bottle full. 1. Check the liquid waste bottle (see Figure 1-6).
Condition - • Defective waste bottle scale. • If the bottle is full, change it (see Section 2.3 in the
Scheduler Operator's Guide). Continue normal operation.
Paused
• If the bottle is not full, continue to step 2 to obtain
Code: information for Technical Support.
521d03 2. Remove the liquid waste bottle from the scale.
3. Press down on the center of the scale and observe if it springs
back.
4. Contact Technical Support.
System Check • Hardware failure 1. Be sure all maintenance routines have been performed (see
result out of • Reagent failure Section 8.1 in the Operator's Guide).
range 2. Repeat the System Check routine. Be sure to follow the
instructions as written in the Running the System Check
Routine procedure in Section 8.4: System Check in the
Operator's Guide.
3. If System Check results are still out of range, display, print,
and review System Check result data (see Section 8.4 in the
Operator's Guide).
4. Contact Technical Support for assistance.

C42385
System Non-fatal error detected in the 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Software Error system software. 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
report the event.
Timeline Instrument scheduler was unable to 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Scheduler Error schedule all requested tests into the 2. Record instrument operations preceding the event; for
instrument timeline. example, waste bag was changed.
report the event.
Ultrasonic Ultrasonic board revision is invalid 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Board Revision for the software revision. 2. Contact Technical Support. The ultrasonic board may need
Invalid replacement.
Ultrasonic Ultrasonic control process failure. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Board Status 2. Contact Technical Support.
Reading Failed
Ultrasonic • Damaged primary probe tip. 1. Remove and check the primary probe tip. Replace the probe if
Phased Lock • Incorrectly torqued primary probe. it is pitted (see Section 7.6).
Loop Failed... 2. Be sure the primary probe is installed and torqued correctly
• Defective connections between
the main pipettor and pipettor (see Section 7.6).
interface board. 3. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the
Ultrasonic Defective ultrasonic board. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Surface 2. Contact Technical Support. The ultrasonic board may need
Detection Failed replacement.
Before
Lowering Probe
Ultrasonic Ultrasonic probe failed to detect 1. Be sure you use an approved sample container, and pipette
Surface surface of sample due to: sufficient sample for the requested tests into the sample
Detection Failed • Insufficient sample volume. container (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide). Do NOT
While Lowering overfill.
• Overfilled sample container.
Probe 2. Be sure the ID of the rack you are using is appropriate for the
• Incorrect sample container for
sample container (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide).
rack ID.
3. Properly place the sample container in the rack and load the
• Incorrectly loaded sample
rack on the instrument (see Section 3.1 in the Operator's
container or rack.
Guide).
• Ultrasonic hardware or interface
4. Repeat the test(s). If you need assistance or if the problem
circuitry failure.
Ultrasonic XXX Ultrasonic hardware or interface 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Failed... circuitry failure. 2. Contact Technical Support.

C42385
Unable to • Attempt to initialize system before 1. If reagent packs might have been removed from the reagent
Initialize successfully completing carousel without using the user interface, look for packs using
System Due to troubleshooting instructions when the Retrieving Misplaced Packs procedure (see Section 2.7 in
Disabled Main main pipettor disabled. the Operator's Guide).
Pipettor • If there are missing or misplaced packs, unload and reload
all reagent packs according to the Retrieving Misplaced
Packs procedure. Then, continue troubleshooting with step
2.
• If the carousel contains the correct reagent packs in the
correct slots, contact Technical Support before continuing
troubleshooting.
2. Reset the pipettor and initialize the system (see Section 5.5).
Unexpected RV • Fallen RV. 1. Check for fallen or missing RVs in the shuttle and shuttle
In Front Of Rake • Dirty or defective RV sensor. transfer position (see Section 7.5).
2. Test the RV sensors and clean them if necessary (see
Section 7.5).
Section 5.2).
Vacuum Offset Defective vacuum pressure sensor. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Over Limit 2. Contact Technical Support.
Vacuum Over • Constricted waste tubing. 1. Check the tubing from the liquid waste bottle (see
Limit Error • Failing vacuum valve. Figure 7-11).
• Obstructed vacuum system tubing • If the tubing is constricted, clear it. Continue normal
or waste filter. operation.
2. From the Maintenance Review screen, select Disable Utility
Assay F6 (see Section 8.1 in the Operator's Guide).
3. From the Digital Devices window, select Vacuum Test F2 to
run the automated vacuum test (see Section 5.6).
• If the vacuum test fails, contact Technical Support.
5. Remove the tubing from the waste filter at the quick
disconnect and place the end of the tubing in one of the
adjacent holes (see Figure 7-11). This may temporarily resolve
the error until you can install a new waste filter assembly.
6. Continue normal operation.
• If the event does not recur, order a new waste filter assembly
and replace the current one.

C42385
Vacuum Under • Leak in vacuum system. 1. From the Maintenance Review screen, select Disable Utility
Limit Error • Missing or failing splash guard in Assay F6 (see Section 8.1 in the Operator's Guide).
vacuum reservoir bottle. Fluid in 2. Open the top cover (see Section 7.2).
the waste filter bottle 3. Inspect the vacuum reservoir bottle (see Section 7.7).
• Failing vacuum pump or valve. • If the tubing is constricted, clear it.
• Damaged or leaking peristaltic • If the tubing is damaged or leaking, or if it contains debris,
waste pump or waste pump tubing. contact Technical Support.
• If the splash guard is missing, is not in position, or is
cracked, contact Technical Support.
• If there is fluid in the bottle, contact Technical Support.
4. Check the waste filter bottle for fluid.
• If there is fluid in the bottle, replace it (see Section 7.4).
5. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
6. Inspect the peristaltic waste pump (see Figure 1-5) and tubing
for damage or leaking.
• If the pump is damaged or leaking, contact Technical
Support.
• If the tubing is damaged or leaking, replace the tubing (see
Section 7.7).
7. Run the manual vacuum test (see Section 5.6).
• If the mm Hg level for any of the steps is not within the
given parameters, contact Technical Support.
8. Close the top cover and front panel.
Wash Arm • Obstruction in the area of the Check for wash arm obstructions (see Section 7.8). If you need
Motion Error sensor. assistance or if the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
• Bent probe in wash arm.
• Defective home sensor.
Wash Carousel Wash carousel exceeded the 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Alignment Error cautionary limit of steps allowed 2. Contact Technical Support.
- May Need during a diagnostic procedure.
Service
Wash Carousel Wash carousel exceeded the limit of 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Alignment Error steps allowed during a diagnostic 2. Do not continue operating the instrument.
- Needs Service procedure.
3. Contact Technical Support.

C42385
Wash Carousel Mechanical or electrical failure. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Motion Error 2. From the Mechanics screen, check if the RV Shuttle and
Incubator Belt (Devices) are at the home or index position
(see Section 5.5).
• If the shuttle is not at home:
a. Clear the shuttle path (see Section 7.5).
b. Home the RV Shuttle. If homing fails, review the Event
Log and troubleshoot according to the error events with
a similar Date/Time to this event.
• If the incubator belt is not at home or index:
a. Select Disable Motors F8, then manually rotate the
incubator belt until the index sensor is lit, then select
Enable Motors F8.
3. Cycle the Wash Carousel for 4 cycles (see Section 5.5).
• If cycling fails, contact Technical Support.
Section 7.3).
report the event.
Wash • Utility Assay disabled and 1. Clean the wash valve (see Section 7.7).
Valve/Pump instrument idle for extended time. 2. Continue normal operation. If you need assistance or if the
Motion Error • Debris buildup on valve. problem persists, contact Technical Support.
• Wash valve failure.
XXX Hardware Open or shorted circuit. 1. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
Error 2. Contact Technical Support.

C42385
XXX Outside • System recently restarted. 1. Review the event details (see Section 6.3).
Limits • Recently opened instrument • If the Details field indicates a device temperature is outside
covers. limits, check the device temperature on the Maintenance
• Analog reference outside limits. Review screen. If the temperature is outside the acceptable
limits, periodically monitor the temperature until it is within
• Power supply voltage outside
the acceptable limits.
limits.
a. If the system was rebooted or instrument covers were
• Vacuum pressure outside limits.
recently opened, wait up to 30 minutes for the
• Defective device. temperature to normalize.
b. If the system was recently restarted, wait up to 1 hour for
the temperature to normalize.
c. Continue normal operation. If the problem persists,
• If the Details field indicates a condition other than a device
temperature outside limits:
a. Print the event details (see Section 6.3).
b. Contact Technical Support.

C42385

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7: System Support Procedures
7 System Support Procedures

7.1 System Support Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2 Instrument Cover Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Opening and Closing the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Opening and Closing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Removing and Replacing the Supply and Incubator Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3 Rebooting, Shutting Down, and Restarting Procedures . . . . . . . 7-12
Rebooting the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Rebooting the Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Shutting Down the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Restarting the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.4 Fluids Tray and Instrument Base Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Decontaminating the Substrate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Testing the RV Waste Bag Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Adjusting the RV Waste Bag Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Replacing the Waste Filter Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Rinsing the Wash Buffer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

C42385
7: System Support Procedures Access 2 Reference Manual
7.5 Incubator Belt and Shuttle Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Clearing the RV Shuttle Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Checking for Fallen or Missing RVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Replacing Missing or Damaged Vessel Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Testing and Cleaning the RV Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Switching Vessel Holder Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.6 Main Pipettor Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Inspecting and Cleaning the Pipettor Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Testing the Pipettor Z-Axis Home Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Removing and Replacing the Primary Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.7 Pump, Valve, and Vacuum Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Cleaning the Precision Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Cleaning the Wash Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Replacing the Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Inspecting the Vacuum Reservoir Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
7.8 Wash/Read Carousel Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Clearing the Wash/Read Carousel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Checking for Wash Arm Obstructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
Removing and Replacing the Substrate Probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7.1: System Support Procedures
7.1 System Support Procedures
When you experience a system problem, you can sometimes perform procedures on
the Access 2 instrument to isolate or correct the problem. In most cases, you should
only perform these system support procedures when you are instructed by an Access 2
troubleshooting procedure or a technical support representative. For these restricted
procedures, a cautionary statement is included in the introductory section of the
procedure.
A few support procedures are commonly performed, such as opening covers to

maintain your instrument or restarting the system to install software. Regardless of the
frequency with which you perform a procedure, regularly review the written
procedures, including their cautions for protecting the instrument from damage, and
their warnings for ensuring your personal safety.
Be sure you understand all of the instructions in a support procedure before you begin
working on the instrument. If you have any questions about a support procedure,

C42385
7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures Access 2 Reference Manual
7.2 Instrument Cover Procedures
You must open instrument covers to reach various components in the instrument.
Open a cover only when you are directed to do so by a technical support
representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
WARNING
The Access 2 instrument has moving parts and uses high voltage in the ultrasonic
transducer. Both present an injury hazard. You should not operate the Access 2
instrument with the covers open.
This section includes the following procedures:

• Opening and Closing the Front Panel
• Opening and Closing the Top Cover
• Removing and Replacing the Supply and Incubator Covers

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures
Opening and Use this procedure to open or close the front panel of the instrument.
Closing the
Front Panel WARNING
Opening the Front Panel

2. Grasp the lower portion of the left and right sides of the front panel (see
Figure 7-1).
3. Pull the bottom of the panel toward you, then lift the panel upward.
0073Fc.eps
1 Front Panel
2 Captive Screw
3 Status Light Bar (not available on all systems)
Figure 7-1 Opening Front Panel/Locating Captive Screw

C42385
Closing the Front Panel

1. Gently pull the panel toward you and lower it to a closed position.
2. Be sure the lower corners are secure so the flag is fully engaged in the interlock
switch (see Figure 7-2).
0887Ac.eps
1 Flag
2 Front Panel Hinge
3 Interlock Switch
Figure 7-2 Interlock Switch

C42385
Opening and Use this procedure to open or close the top cover of the instrument.
Closing the
Top Cover WARNING
Opening the Top Cover

2. Open the front panel (see the Opening and Closing the Front Panel procedure).
3. To release the top cover, loosen the captive screw located at the top of the pipettor
gantry (see Figure 7-1). You can loosen or tighten the captive screw, but you
cannot remove it.
5. Retract the top cover by sliding both sides back toward the rear of the instrument
approximately 1/4-in (6 mm) (see Figure 7-3).
0074Ec.eps
1 Top Cover
Figure 7-3 Opening Top Cover
CAUTION
Do not try to lift the top cover before the cover is retracted.
6. Lift the top cover upward until it rests in a vertical position.

C42385
Closing the Top Cover

1. Gently pull the top cover down until the cover is horizontal.
2. Press down firmly on both rear corners of the top cover to be sure that the cover is
in the correct position.
3. Pull the top cover forward until the edge of the top cover meets the edge of the
front panel.
5. Tighten the captive screw located at the top of the pipettor gantry to secure the
top cover. If necessary, gently push the screw into place while turning it.
Removing Use this procedure to remove or replace the supply cover and incubator cover.
and Replacing
Required Materials
the Supply
and Incubator • 9/64-in hex wrench
Covers • Small screwdriver
Removing the Supply Cover
WARNING
2. Open the front panel (see the Opening and Closing the Front Panel procedure).
3. Remove the 9/64-in hex screw from each end of the supply cover. The screws are
located where the supply cover meets the instrument frame (see Figure 7-4).
NOTE
The 9/64-in hex screws may not be present if they were not replaced during a
previous procedure.

C42385
4
3
2
0241Bc.eps
1 Front Panel
2 Carousel Door
3 Hex Screws (under Front Panel)
4 Base Panel
5 Supply Cover
6 Supplies Door
Figure 7-4 Covers and Hex Screw Locations
4. Open the supplies door and remove the reaction vessel (RV) waste bag.
NOTE
Do not go to the Supplies screen and select Change RV Waste Bag F6 unless the
RV waste bag is full and you need to change it.
5. Remove the 9/64-in hex screw in the bottom of the RV waste bag well.
NOTE
The 9/64-in hex screw may not be present if it was not replaced during a previous
procedure.
6. While facing the instrument, grasp the back edge of the supply cover (see
Figure 7-4) with one hand and the front edge with the other hand. Pull the supply
cover up and toward you to remove it. Set the cover aside.

C42385
Removing the Incubator Cover
WARNING
1. Remove the supply cover (see the Removing the Supply Cover procedure).
2. Release the RV load door latch by pulling it toward you with a small screwdriver,
then raise the RV load door (see Figure 7-5).
The system sounds a warning alarm when you raise the RV load door. The alarm turns
off when you lower the door.
3. To remove the incubator cover, pull lightly outward on the incubator cover
release tabs and lift the cover up and toward you (see Figure 7-5). Set the cover
aside and lower the RV load door.
5
2
4
3
0341Cc.eps
1 Incubator Cover Retaining Slots

2 RV Load Door Frame Retainers
3 RV Load Door Latch
4 RV Load Door
5 Incubator Cover Release Tabs
Figure 7-5 RV Load Door and Incubator Cover

C42385
Replacing the Incubator Cover
WARNING
1. Use the small screwdriver to raise the RV load door slightly.

The system sounds a warning alarm when you raise the RV load door. The alarm turns
off when you lower the door.
2. Move the RV load door through the large opening in the incubator cover, and
slide the cover retaining slots under the RV load door frame retainers (see
Figure 7-5). Lower the RV load door.
3. Hook both cover release tabs over the front corners of the incubator housing (see
Figure 7-5).
4. Replace the supply cover (see the Replacing the Supply Cover procedure).
Replacing the Supply Cover
WARNING
1. Grasp the back edge of the supply cover with one hand and the front edge with
the other hand. Be sure the carousel door is closed (see Figure 7-4).
2. Raise the back edge of the supply cover slightly and guide the RV waste bag well
into place behind the base panel. Lower the back edge of the supply cover into
place and be sure all edges of the supply cover are seated snugly.
3. Reinstall the 9/64-in hex screws in the bottom of the waste bag well and at each
end of the supply cover.
4. Reinstall the RV waste bag.

C42385
7.3: Rebooting, Shutting Down, and Restarting Procedures Access 2 Reference Manual
7.3 Rebooting, Shutting Down, and

Restarting Procedures
You can reboot the PC, the instrument, or both. Rebooting either one does not affect
the other. You may use a reboot procedure in the following situations:
• The user interface (UI) is not responding correctly (PC reboot).
• You are directed to do so by a technical support representative or if you are
following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual (PC and/or
instrument reboot).
During the instrument rebooting process, the instrument system software is reset and a
routine brings all devices to their home, or known, states. This routine is called
initialization, and it prepares the system for further processing.
NOTES
• If you are rebooting both the PC and the instrument, you can reboot them in
any order. For simplicity, the procedures instruct you to reboot the PC first,
then the instrument.
• If you are rebooting an Access 2 PC that is a workgroup server, first you
must shut down the other PCs (clients) in the workgroup. Next, restart the
server PC. Finally, restart the client PCs.
• If you reboot only the PC, the instrument continues sample processing if it is
in the Running mode. When the PC reestablishes communication with the
instrument, the test data is automatically sent to the PC.
The instrument does not require periodic shutdowns. However, you should shut down
the instrument before moving it or whenever the power will be turned off for an
extended period of time (more than 5 days). Before shutting down the instrument,
contact Technical Support to confirm your decision.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7.3: Rebooting, Shutting Down, and Restarting Procedures
Rebooting the To reboot the PC, you shut it down and then restart it. You do not need to reboot the
PC instrument unless you are directed to do so. Use this procedure to reboot the PC.
Shutting Down the PC Under Normal Conditions
NOTES
• Depending on the version of your PC, you may need the system password to
restart the PC. If you do not know the password, contact the lab supervisor.
• If you are shutting down a workgroup server PC, you must shut down each of
the client PCs in the workgroup first.
2. Select Shut Down PC F8. A confirmation message is displayed.

3. Select Yes F1 to shut down the PC.
If you are preparing to shut down the server, repeat step 1 through step 3 for each of
the client PCs first. Then repeat step 1 through step 3 for the server.
4. Press and hold the PC power switch for at least 15 seconds to turn off the power
to the PC.
5. Wait about 20 seconds, then perform the restarting procedure (see the Restarting
a PC that Is Shut Down procedure).
Shutting Down the PC When the UI is not Accessible
NOTES
• Depending on the version of your PC, you may need the system password to
• If the server UI is the only UI that is not accessible, shut down each of the
client PCs (see step 1 through step 3 of the Shutting Down the PC Under
Normal Conditions procedure in this section). Then use this procedure to shut
down the server.
• If a client UI is not accessible, use this procedure to shut down that client PC.
• If the keyboard does not respond during the performance of this procedure,
press the PC power switch on the front of the PC to turn the power off. The
power switch is identified by the power switch symbol (see Figure 7-7).

C42385
1. Take one of the following actions:

• If you know the software operating system on your Access 2 system PC, proceed
to the appropriate instructions in the table below.
• To determine the software operating system on your Access 2 system PC, press
the Windows® key [®] on the computer keyboard, or press [Ctrl] + [Esc].
For PCs operating with Windows® 8e, the Windows® 8e Start screen is displayed.
The image below (see Figure 7-6) is visible in the upper left portion of the screen. If
the Windows® 8e Start screen is not displayed, your system is operating with
Windows® XPe.
2379A.bmp
Figure 7-6 Windows® 8e Start Screen
Windows® XPe Windows® 8e
1. Simultaneously press the [Ctrl], [Alt], and 1. If necessary, press the Windows® key [ÿ®] on
[Delete] keys, then select Shutdown. the keyboard to display the Start screen.
The Shut Down Windows window is displayed. 2. Move the mouse cursor to the lower-right corner
2. Select Restart or Shut down from the list, of the Start screen.
depending upon whether you want to A narrow vertical panel of icons is displayed along
immediately restart the PC software. the right side of the screen.
3. Select OK. 3. Select the Settings icon.
4. Wait about 20 seconds, then perform the
restarting procedure.
2380A.bmp
The Settings panel is displayed.

4. Select the Power icon.
5. Select Shut down or Restart, depending upon
whether you want to immediately restart the PC
software.
6. If a screen displays with a button named Shut
down anyway or Restart anyway near the
bottom of the screen, select the button.
7. If you selected to shut down the PC, wait 20
seconds, then perform the restarting procedure.

C42385
Restarting a PC that Is Shut Down
NOTE
If you are restarting multiple Access 2 PCs in a workgroup, restart the workgroup
server first, then restart the client PCs.
1. Press the PC power switch on the front of the PC to turn the power on. The power
switch is identified by the power switch symbol (see Figure 7-7).
1054B.eps
Figure 7-7 PC Power Switch Symbol
 Depending on the version of your PC, you may need the system password to
2. Wait until the Main Menu screen appears before you continue normal operation.
If rebooting fails, contact Technical Support.
NOTE
If communication between the PC and the instrument is interrupted for an
extended time (more than 30 minutes) while the instrument is processing tests, it
may take a few minutes for test results to be sent to the PC after communication is
reestablished. Do not use the system until the PC receives all the test results.
Go directly to the Test Results screen and filter the results by completion time (see
Section 5.2: Reviewing Test Results in the Operator's Guide). Watch the Result and
Comp. Time columns. When it appears that the test results that were obtained while
communication was interrupted have been transferred to the PC, you can continue
normal operation.
If you have any questions, contact Technical Support.
Rebooting the Use this procedure to reboot the Access 2 instrument. There are two different ways to
Instrument reboot the instrument:
• You can reboot using the reset button. This is also called a warm boot.
• You can reboot using the power switch. This is also called a cold boot.
NOTES
• Do not select any buttons or press any keys until rebooting is complete. After
you initiate a reboot, there is a pause of approximately 2 minutes as the

C42385
software resets. Then the system enters the Not Ready mode and system
initialization begins.
• During system initialization, the system homes mechanical devices and
displays a flashing message in the system mode area. When most system
devices complete initialization, the system changes to the Ready mode.
• The system continues to initialize the remaining devices and displays a
flashing message in the system mode area. When the message disappears,
system initialization is complete.
• If the system does not successfully initialize, contact Technical Support.
Rebooting Using the Reset Button
WARNING
1. Open the front panel of the instrument (see the Opening and Closing the Front
Panel procedure in this chapter).
2. Locate the reset button, just to the right of the pipettor gantry (see Figure 7-8).
3. Push and hold in the reset button for one second, then release.
0045Cc.eps
Figure 7-8 Reset Button

C42385
4. Close the front panel of the instrument immediately.
NOTE
If the front panel remains open too long, the system cannot home the mechanical
devices. If this occurs, press the reset button a second time, then close the front
panel immediately.
5. Wait until the system is in the Ready mode and no message appears in the blue
system mode area before you continue normal operation.
Rebooting Using the Power Switch

1. Be sure the front panel of the instrument is closed.
2. Locate the power switch on the lower, right side near the back of the instrument
(see Figure 7-9). Press the lower part of the switch to turn the power off
(O position).
0042Dc.eps
Figure 7-9 Instrument Power Switch
3. Wait about 20 seconds, then press the top part of the switch to turn the power on
( | position).
system mode area before you continue normal operation.

C42385
Shutting Use this procedure only if you plan to move the instrument or if the system power will
Down the be turned off for an extended period of time (more than 5 days). Before you shut down
Instrument the instrument, contact Technical Support to confirm your decision.
WARNINGS
• If you are moving the instrument, make sure that the new location is
properly plumbed. Reagents, calibrators, and controls used with the system
may contain small quantities of sodium azide preservative. Sodium azide
preservative may form explosive compounds in metal drain lines. Refer to
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Bulletin: Explosive
Azide Hazards (8/18/76).
Use this procedure to shut down the Access 2 system.
1. Run the Special Clean routine (see Section 8.5: Special Clean in the Operator's
Guide).
2. Empty the liquid waste bottle (see Section 2.3: Liquid Waste in the Operator's
Guide).
3. If necessary, shut down the PC (see the Rebooting the PC procedure).
(see Figure 7-9). Press the lower part of the switch to turn the power off (O
position).
Restarting the Use this procedure to restart the instrument following an extended shutdown.
Instrument
NOTE
You must let the substrate equilibrate to room temperature for the time specified
in the reagent instructions for use before you load it on the instrument. See the
substrate reagent instructions for use for detailed information.
Turning the Power On

1. If the PC was shut down, restart it (see the Rebooting the PC procedure).
(see Figure 7-9). Press the upper part of the switch to turn the power on
( | position).

C42385
system mode area before you continue the procedure.
If initialization fails, review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to any error
event with a similar date and time to the attempted initialization.
Priming the System Fluidics
WARNING
Wash buffer contains a preservative, which may cause sensitization by skin
contact. After contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water. Wear
suitable gloves.
1. Be sure that the wash buffer supply is adequate, and change the wash buffer bottle
if necessary (see Section 2.2: Wash Buffer in the Operator's Guide).
Fluidics F2.
3. Select the Pipettor and Dispense Probes boxes. Use the default number (4) of
cycles. For more information about priming fluidics, see Section 5.3: Prime
Fluidics.
5. When priming is complete, select Cancel F8.
Performing the Probe Volume Checks
WARNING
1. Perform the Visual Dispense Probe Volume Check procedure (see

Section 5.4: Volume Checks).
If the results of this procedure fail, contact Technical Support.
2. Perform the Visual Aspirate Probe Volume Check procedure (see

Section 5.4: Volume Checks).
If the results of this procedure fail, clean and/or replace the appropriate aspirate probe
(see Section 8.3: Weekly Maintenance in the Operator's Guide).

C42385
3. If you cleaned and/or replaced an aspirate probe in the previous step, perform the
Visual Aspirate Probe Volume Check procedure again.
If the results fail, contact Technical Support. Your technical support representative
may instruct you to replace the tubing on the peristaltic waste pump (see
Section 7.7: Pump, Valve, and Vacuum Procedures).
4. If you replaced the waste pump tubing in the previous step, perform the Visual
Aspirate Probe Volume Check procedure again. If the results fail, do not
continue. Contact Technical Support.
Replenishing Supplies, Running the Special Clean and System

Check Routines
WARNING
1. Change the current bottle of substrate with a fresh bottle and prime the substrate
(see Section 2.4: Substrate in the Operator's Guide).
2. Be sure that the RV supply is adequate, and load more RVs if necessary (see
Section 2.5: Reaction Vessels (RVs) in the Operator's Guide).
3. Be sure that the liquid waste container and the RV waste bag are not full. Change
the liquid waste container and change the RV waste bag if necessary (see
Section 2.3: Liquid Waste and see Section 2.6: Reaction Vessel Waste Bag, both
in the Operator's Guide).
4. Run the Special Clean routine (see Section 8.5: Special Clean in the Operator's
Guide).
5. Run the System Check routine (see Section 8.4: System Check in the Operator's
Guide).
If the results are outside the expected limits, repeat the System Check routine with a
fresh dilution of System Check Solution. If the out-of-range results persist,
troubleshoot according to Section A-2: System Check Troubleshooting.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7.4: Fluids Tray and Instrument Base Procedures
7.4 Fluids Tray and Instrument Base

Procedures
The fluids tray and instrument base procedures involve the components in the fluids
tray and the molded base of the instrument.

• Decontaminating the Substrate System
• Testing the RV Waste Bag Sensor
• Adjusting the RV Waste Bag Sensor
• Replacing the Waste Filter Bottle
• Rinsing the Wash Buffer Reservoir

C42385
7.4: Fluids Tray and Instrument Base Procedures Access 2 Reference Manual
Decontami- If the substrate gets contaminated, all system components that come into direct
nating the contact with the substrate must be decontaminated.
Substrate CAUTION
System
Perform this procedure only when you are instructed by a technical support
representative.
Use this procedure to decontaminate the substrate system.
Determining Substrate System Contamination

Substrate contamination either increases or decreases RLU values. Any of the
following symptoms may indicate substrate system contamination:
• High substrate check values (>9000 RLUs) from the System Check routine
(see Section 8.4: System Check in the Operator's Guide)
• Low substrate check values (<3000 RLUs) from the System Check routine.
• Increase in zero calibrator RLUs for sandwich assays
• Shift up in the analyte concentration responses for sandwich assays
• Shift down in the analyte concentration responses for competitive assays
• Increased variability of results, especially low signal calibrators
Possible substrate system contaminants include bacteria, oils from fingers, talc from
gloves, alkaline phosphatase from a test reagent pack, wash buffer, metal ions, dust,
and residual Citranox cleaning solution from an unsuccessful decontamination.
Required Materials for Substrate System Decontamination

• Citranox cleaning solution
• Deionized water
• Small container for measuring 30 mL of diluted Citranox cleaning solution
• Pipette for measuring 6 mL and 24 mL
• Supply of lint-free tissues
• Rubber gloves (without talc)
• New, unopened bottle of substrate equilibrated to room temperature
NOTE
You must let the substrate equilibrate to room temperature for the time specified
in the reagent instructions for use before you load it on the instrument. See the
substrate reagent instructions for use for detailed information.

C42385
Preparing Diluted Cleaning Solution

Use this procedure to prepare 30 mL of a 1/5 dilution of Citranox cleaning solution.
WARNING
Citranox cleaning solution is acidic and may cause eye or skin irritation. See the
manufacturer’s label for details.
1. Pipette 24 mL of deionized water into a small container.

2. Add 6 mL of Citranox cleaning solution.
Priming with Cleaning Solution

2. Put on the rubber gloves (without talc) and saturate a clean, lint-free tissue with
diluted Citranox cleaning solution.
3. Remove the cap and tubing from the substrate container. Use the saturated tissue
to thoroughly wipe down the inside surface of the cap and exterior surface of the
substrate tubing that was exposed to the substrate.
NOTE
To avoid contaminating the substrate again, only touch the tubing or inside of the
substrate cap with a clean, lint-free tissue. Do not allow the substrate tubing to
come in contact with any surface.
4. Place the substrate tubing into the container of diluted Citranox cleaning solution,
where the tubing can draw cleaning solution for the next priming cycle.
Fluidics F2.
6. Select the Substrate box, and enter the number 10 for the number of substrate
priming cycles (see Section : Priming the Fluidics).
8. While waiting for the cycles to complete, remove the contaminated bottle of
substrate from the fluids tray and discard the bottle.
9. Once priming is complete, remove the substrate tubing from the container of
diluted Citranox cleaning solution. Thoroughly wipe down the surfaces of the cap
and the substrate tubing exterior with a clean lint-free tissue.
10. Place the substrate tubing on a clean lint-free tissue and change the number of
substrate priming cycles to 2.

C42385
11. Select Start Priming F2, then wait for the cycles to complete.This creates an air
gap in the substrate tubing.
12. When priming is complete, select Done F8.
Priming with New Substrate

1. Select the Substrate button to go to the Supplies screen.
2. Scan and load a new bottle of substrate without priming the substrate fluidic lines.
When the system prompts you to prime the substrate fluidic lines, select No F2.
For more information, see Section 2.4: Substrate of the Operator's Guide.
3. Return to the Prime Fluidics window. To get to this window from the Main
Menu, select Diagnostics F7 to display the Diagnostics menu, then select Prime
Fluidics F2.
4. Select the Substrate box, then change the number of substrate priming cycles to
20 (the maximum), then select Start Priming F2.
5. When priming is complete, change the number of substrate priming cycles to 10
and select Start Priming F2.
6. When priming is complete, select Done F8.
Verifying System Performance After Substrate

Decontamination
1. Run the substrate check. For more information, see the Running Substrate Check
Individually procedure in Section 5.11: Individual System Checks.
2. Compare the substrate check results with the expected results.
• If the results are within the expected limits, continue to step 5.
• If you observe one or more substrate check RLUs with a value of 0, or if the
substrate check RLUs trend upward by more than 500 counts, continue to step 3.
3. Prime the substrate for an additional 20 cycles, then repeat the substrate check.
4. Compare the substrate check results with the expected results.
• If the substrate check results are within the expected limits, continue to step 5.
• If the substrate check results fail again, contact Technical Support.
5. Run the System Check routine. For more information, see Section 8.4: System
6. Run QC for all assays you use to analyze patient samples. Evaluate out-of-range
QC results. For more information, see Chapter 7: Quality Controls in the
Operator's Guide.

C42385
Testing the The RV waste bag sensor notifies the system that the waste bag is present. Test the
RV Waste Bag waste bag sensor only when you are directed to do so by a technical support
Sensor representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
Use this procedure to test the RV waste bag sensor.
Required Materials
• Up to three unused RV waste bags from different lots (if testing more than
one bag is necessary)
• Fiber-free swab applicator (if cleaning the sensor is necessary)
• Deionized water (if cleaning the sensor is necessary)
Steps
WARNING
2. Open the supplies door (see Figure 7-4).
3. Go to the Device Diagnostics screen. To get to this window from the Main Menu,
Diagnostics F4.
5. Observe the status of the Waste Bag Present field while you remove and
reinstall the waste bag.
• If the status changes appropriately, be sure the waste bag is fully seated into the
slot on the waste chute, close the supplies door, and continue normal operation.
You do not need to continue.
• If the status does not change, continue to the next step.
6. Remove the waste bag and install another waste bag (from a different lot if
possible), while observing the status of the Waste Bag Present field. The
original waste bag may have a defective plastic collar.
• If the status changes, select the RV Waste Bag button and follow the standard
Changing the RV Waste Bag procedure (see Section 2.6: Reaction Vessel Waste
Bag in the Operator's Guide). Be sure the new waste bag is fully seated into the
You do not need to continue.

C42385
• If the status does not change, repeat this step up to 2 more times with waste bags
from different lots. If the status still does not change, continue to the next step.
7. Remove the waste bag and observe the status of the Waste Bag Present field
when you place your finger in front of the sensor (see Figure 7-10).
• If the status changes, adjust the sensor (see the Adjusting the RV Waste Bag
Sensor procedure).
CAUTION
Adjusting the waste bag sensor is an advanced troubleshooting procedure.
Perform this procedure only when you are directed to do so by a technical
support representative.
• If the status still does not change, continue to the next step.
8. Slightly moisten a fiber-free swab applicator with deionized water and gently
wipe the sensor.
9. Place your finger in front of the RV waste bag sensor and observe the status of the
Waste Bag Present field.
• If the status changes, select the RV Waste Bag button and follow the standard
Changing the RV Waste Bag procedure to install a new waste bag (see
Section 2.6: Reaction Vessel Waste Bag in the Operator's Guide). Confirm that
the status changes appropriately, then close the supplies door and continue
normal operation.
• If the status still does not change, contact Technical Support. The sensor may be
defective.
2
3
0888Ac.eps
1 Opening to Waste Chute

2 Waste Bag Sensor
3 Mounting Screws
Figure 7-10 Waste Bag Sensor

C42385
Adjusting the
RV Waste Bag CAUTION
Sensor Perform this procedure only when you are directed to do so by a technical
Use this procedure to adjust the RV waste bag sensor. Ordinarily, you will have just
performed the Testing the RV Waste Bag Sensor procedure.
Required Materials
• 1/16-in Allen wrench
Steps
WARNING
2. Open the front panel and remove the supply cover (see Section 7.2: Instrument
Cover Procedures).
3. Locate the waste bag sensor mounting screws underneath the waste bag sensor
(see Figure 7-10).
You cannot see the screws, but you can feel them under the sensor.
4. With the short end of the Allen wrench, loosen the mounting screws. Slide the
sensor toward the front of the instrument and tighten the mounting screws.
5. Go to the Device Diagnostics screen. To get to this window from the Main Menu,
Diagnostics F4.
7. Observe the status of the Waste Bag Present field while you remove and
reinstall the waste bag (see Section 5.6: Analog and Digital Device Diagnostics).
• If the status changes appropriately, be sure the waste bag is fully seated into the
• If the status still does not change, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Replacing the Replace the waste filter bottle when:

Waste Filter • You find fluid in the bottle during weekly maintenance (see Section 8.3:
Bottle Weekly Maintenance in the Operator's Guide).
• You are directed to do so by a technical support representative.
• You are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
NOTE
The entire waste bottle/filter assembly should be replaced once each year. For
more information about replacing the assembly, contact Technical Support.
Use this procedure to replace the waste filter bottle.
WARNING
Required Materials
• Clean waste filter bottle.
For convenience, the system includes two waste filter bottles. You can install one
bottle on the system while you remove, decontaminate, and empty the other.
Replacing the Bottle

1. Unscrew the waste filter bottle from the top of the waste filter/bottle assembly.
Two fluids trays are available. The tubing and location of the bottles on the fluids
trays are slightly different (see Figure 7-11).
WARNING
The filter has sharp edges and it is a biohazard. Do not touch or remove the
filter, or lay it down on any surface. Immediately place the filter in a clean waste
filter bottle.
2. Place the top of the waste filter/bottle assembly in a clean waste filter bottle and
screw on the top.

C42385
1064A.eps
1 Waste Filter Bottle

2 Top of Waste Filter/Bottle Assembly
3 Quick Disconnect
4 Holes Adjacent to Quick Disconnect
Figure 7-11 Waste Filter/Bottle Assembly Configurations
Cleaning the Removed Bottle

1. Before disposal, decontaminate the contents of the removed waste filter bottle
according to proper laboratory procedures.
2. Empty the contents of the bottle.
3. Rinse the bottle thoroughly by filling it with tap water and discarding the
contents.
4. Rinse the bottle a second time and allow it to air dry.

If you prefer, you can autoclave the waste filter bottle.
5. Retain the clean bottle for the next time you need to replace the waste filter bottle.

C42385
Rinsing the
Wash Buffer CAUTION
Reservoir Use this procedure only as directed by a technical support representative or
when you are following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual.
Use this procedure to rinse the wash buffer reservoir in the fluids tray.
WARNING
Wash buffer contains a preservative, which may cause sensitization by skin
contact. After contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water. Wear
suitable gloves.
Required Materials
• Distilled or deionized water
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
9
0224H.eps
1 Wash Buffer Reservoir

2 Wash Buffer Reservoir Receptacle
3 Actuator Rod
4 Access Hole in the Tray Tower
5 Harness Clamp
6 Tubing with Luer Fitting
7 Black Strain Relief
8 Float Level Sensor
9 Reservoir Output Tubing and Quick Release Tab
Figure 7-12 Wash Buffer Reservoir

C42385
Removing Connections to the Reservoir

1. Be sure that the system is in the Ready or Not Ready mode.
2. Lift and remove the wash buffer bottle from the reservoir in the fluids tray on the
left side of the instrument.
3. Rotate the wash buffer reservoir receptacle 1/4 turn counterclockwise and lift it
out of the reservoir. Set the reservoir receptacle aside on a clean surface.
CAUTION
Be sure that the actuator rod inside the wash buffer reservoir receptacle
stays in place.
4. Slide the front of the fluids tray away from the instrument to allow you access to
the connections.
5. From the access hole in the tray tower, disconnect the black connector on the wire
that goes to the float level sensor.
6. Push the connector on the wire out through the black strain relief.
7. From the access hole in the tray tower, grip the tubing and luer fitting (located
below the black strain relief) and rotate them 3/4 turn counterclockwise. Pull the
tubing and luer fitting away from the wash buffer reservoir.
8. Press the quick release tab on the reservoir output tubing and pull the fitting and
tubing away from the reservoir.
Removing and Rinsing the Reservoir

1. Carefully lift the wash buffer reservoir up and out of the fluids tray.
CAUTION
Remove the reservoir as gently as possible. Agitating the reservoir
excessively may cause some wash buffer to splash out of the reservoir
receptacle opening.
2. Carry the reservoir to a sink and pour the contents out through the receptacle
opening.
3. Fill the reservoir through the receptacle opening with distilled or deionized water
until it is approximately 3/4 full. Gently swirl the reservoir for a few seconds to
rinse and then pour out the contents into the sink.

C42385
4. Repeat step 3 four more times. Be sure to thoroughly drain the reservoir after the
final rinse.
NOTE
If you suspect that the wash buffer supply was contaminated, you should also
rinse the wash buffer reservoir receptacle with distilled or deionized water.
Reinstalling the Reservoir

1. Return the wash buffer reservoir to its proper position in the fluids tray.
2. Press the quick release tab on the reservoir output tubing and insert the tubing and
fitting onto the reservoir.
3. From the access hole in the tray tower, connect the luer fitting. Rotate the tubing
and fitting 3/4 turn clockwise.
CAUTION
After connecting the luer fitting and tubing, route the tubing upward into
the harness clamp in the access hole to prevent a siphon effect if the reservoir
is overfilled.
4. Push the black connector on the wire back through the black strain relief.
5. From the access hole in the tray tower, reconnect the wire.
6. Reinsert the wash buffer reservoir receptacle into the reservoir opening. Rotate
the receptacle 1/4 turn clockwise.
7. Slide the fluids tray back to its original position next to the instrument and then
insert a new wash buffer bottle into the wash buffer reservoir receptacle.
8. Prime the pipettor for 12 cycles and the dispense probes for 8 cycles.
For more information about priming the pipettor and dispense probes, see Section 5.3:
Prime Fluidics.
9. Run the System Check routine.

For more information about running the System Check routine, see Section 8.4:
System Check in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7.5: Incubator Belt and Shuttle Procedures
7.5 Incubator Belt and Shuttle Procedures
The incubator belt and shuttle procedures involve the incubator belt and shuttle areas
of the analytical module.

• Clearing the RV Shuttle Path
• Checking for Fallen or Missing RVs
• Replacing Missing or Damaged Vessel Holders
• Testing and Cleaning the RV Sensors
• Switching Vessel Holder Positions

C42385
7.5: Incubator Belt and Shuttle Procedures Access 2 Reference Manual
Clearing the Clear the RV shuttle path only when you are directed to do so by a technical support
RV Shuttle representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
Path Use this procedure to clear the RV shuttle path.
NOTE
If the Event Log button turns yellow or red at any time during this procedure,
check the Event Log before proceeding.
Required Materials
• Hemostat
Steps
WARNING
2. Open the front panel and remove the supply cover and incubator cover (see

C42385
3. With the hemostat, remove all RVs from the shuttle area (see Figure 7-13).
Discard the RVs.
1
2
3
4 6
0908Ac.eps
1 Shuttle Position 1
4 Shuttle Area
5 RV Load Door
6 3 Vessel Holders at Shuttle Transfer Position
Figure 7-13 RV Shuttle and Shuttle Transfer Position
4. Remove the 3 vessel holders, and any RVs in them, at the shuttle transfer position
(see Figure 7-13). To remove vessel holders, pull up on the tab at the top. Save all
of the vessel holders you remove.
NOTE
You remove the RVs in the shuttle and 3 vessel holders to create openings so the
shuttle can move freely regardless of the belt position. This prevents jams and
breakage.

C42385
CAUTION
If you do not immediately proceed to the next steps, leave the front panel
open or disable the Utility Assay until you are ready to continue. This will
prevent the Utility Assay from running automatically (see Section 8.1:
Routine Maintenance in the Operator's Guide).
Diagnostics F4 to display the Device Diagnostics screen.
8. Select RV Shuttle from the list in the Device field.
WARNING
Do not get close to the shuttle while it is moving.
9. Select Home Device F1.

The shuttle moves to its home position. For more information about homing devices,
see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics.
10. Open the front panel and replace the vessel holders. To replace vessel holders,
push them down onto the incubator belt. They gently snap into place when they
are fully seated.
11. Continue troubleshooting as you are directed by a technical support

representative or by instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual.
Instructions should include the following steps after you remove and replace vessel
holders:
• Replace the incubator cover and supply cover, then close the front panel.
• Initialize the system (see Section 5.2: Initialize System).
• Calibrate the incubator belt (see Section 5.8: Advanced Diagnostics).
• If you disabled the Utility Assay before step 6, be sure it is enabled.

C42385
Checking for Check for fallen or missing RVs only when you are directed to do so by a technical
Fallen or support representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2
Missing RVs manual.
NOTE
RVs can fall between the rake and the wall of the incubator if you do not load the
RVs properly by selecting Load RVs F4 from the Supplies or Supplies Required
screen.
Use this procedure to check for fallen or missing RVs in the incubator area.
Required Materials
• Hemostat
Steps
WARNING
3. If you are instructed to check for missing, fallen, or tilted RVs or other
obstructions in the shuttle or other visible areas of the incubator, inspect the areas
identified (see Figure 7-14).
With the hemostat, remove any fallen/tilted RVs or other obstructions.
• If an RV is missing or fallen/tilted in a position on the right side of the shuttle
(closest to the shuttle transfer area), remove all the RVs in the shuttle.
• If an RV is missing or fallen/tilted in one of the rows in front of the shuttle,
remove all the RVs across in the row. Approximately three rows of RVs are
visible in front of the shuttle.

C42385
2
1
3
5
0909Ac.eps
1 Area in Front of Shuttle

2 Shuttle Area
3 Shuttle Transfer Position
4 Area Between Rake and Incubator Wall (Under RV Load Door)
5 Front Corners of Incubator
Figure 7-14 Areas to Check for Fallen or Missing RVs
4. If you are instructed to look for fallen RVs or other obstructions between the rake
and the wall of the incubator, open the RV load door. To open the door, pull the
latch toward you with the hemostat, and raise the RV load door (see Figure 7-5).
The system sounds a warning alarm when you raise the door. The alarm turns off
when you lower the door.
• Remove any fallen RVs in the area toward the front of the incubator.
• Close the RV load door.
5. Be sure all of the visible vessel holders are pushed firmly down onto the
incubator belt.
Instructions should include the following steps if you removed RVs:
• Replace the incubator cover and supply cover, then close the front panel.

C42385
Replacing The legs of the vessel holders (also called incubator belt clips) sometimes bend or
Missing or break, or an entire vessel holder may come off the incubator belt. This can cause a jam
Damaged in the incubator.
Vessel Hold- Replace vessel holders only when you are directed to do so by a technical support
ers representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
Use this procedure to find and replace any damaged or ejected vessel holders.
NOTE
If the Event Log button turns yellow or red at any time during this procedure,
check the Event Log before proceeding.
Required Materials
• Hemostat
• Vessel holders
• Home vessel holder (if needed for replacement)
Removing Damaged Vessel Holders
WARNING
3. Close the front panel to enable the system motors.

Diagnostics F4.

C42385
7. Select RV Shuttle from the list in the Device field, and check if it is at the Home
position (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).
• If the shuttle is not at the Home position, home the shuttle.
• If homing fails, clear the RV shuttle path (see the Clearing the RV Shuttle Path
procedure).
8. Remove any loose RVs and any broken, bent, or ejected vessel holders or legs
(see Figure 7-15) from the visible area of the incubator belt.
• Use the hemostat to remove RVs. Discard the RVs.
• Use the hemostat to remove vessel holder legs and vessel holders that are not
attached to the incubator belt. Save these loose parts.
• Remove vessel holders with broken or bent legs by pulling up on the tab at the
top of the vessel holder (see Figure 7-15). Save these vessel holders.
0235Bc.eps
1 Home Vessel Holder (Magnet on Top)

2 Incubator Belt
3 Tab
4 Vessel Holder
5 Dovetail
6 Vessel Holder Leg
Figure 7-15 Incubator Belt, Vessel Holders, and Dovetail
9. Select Disable Motors F8 (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).

C42385
10. Try to manually rotate the incubator belt clockwise.
To manually rotate the belt, turn the incubator belt pulleys (see Figure 7-16) or pull
horizontally on the dovetails or vessel holders (see Figure 7-15).
CAUTION
If the incubator belt resists movement, stop rotating it and remove any
visible vessel holders that may be damaged. Contact Technical Support.
11. Repeat step 8 as you rotate the incubator belt one full turn.
2
0236Bc.eps
1 Incubator Belt Pulleys

2 Incubator
Figure 7-16 Incubator Belt Pulleys
12. To be sure there are no vessel holder pieces left in the instrument, matchthe
number of broken vessel holders you removed to the number of broken legs you
retrieved from the instrument.
CAUTION
If there are still vessel holder legs or pieces missing, contact Technical
Support. If they are left in the instrument they may cause damage.

C42385
Replacing the Vessel Holders
WARNING
1. Replace any broken or damaged vessel holders with new ones.

a. Manually rotate the incubator belt as needed to find the empty locations.
b. To replace vessel holders, push them down onto the incubator belt. They
gently snap into place when they are fully seated.
c. If the home (with magnet) vessel holder is broken, be sure to replace it with
another home vessel holder. Be sure there is only one home vessel holder on
the incubator belt.
d. If the belt resists moving, contact Technical Support.
2. Be sure all of the vessel holders are pushed firmly down onto the incubator belt.
Manually rotate the incubator belt as needed.
If the belt resists moving, contact Technical Support.
3. Manually rotate the incubator belt one full turn clockwise and counterclockwise,
and Enable Motors F8.
If the belt resists moving, contact Technical Support.

Instructions should include the following steps after you replace vessel holders with
new holders:
• Home the incubator belt (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).
• Replace and close all covers (see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures).
• Enable the Utility Assay (see Section 8.1: Routine Maintenance in the Operator's
Guide).
• Calibrate the incubator belt (see Section 5.8: Advanced Diagnostics)
• Cycle the incubator belt for 1 minute (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device
Diagnostics).
• Exercise the incubator belt for 2 cycles (see Section 5.8: Advanced Diagnostics).
If any of the steps fail, contact Technical Support.
5. If necessary, reorder any CARE kit parts that you used. For ordering information,
see the Instructions for Use.

C42385
Testing and Test and clean the RV sensors only when you are directed to do so by a technical
Cleaning the support representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2
RV Sensors manual.
Use this procedure to test and clean the RV sensors.
Required Materials
• Hemostat
• Fiber-free swab applicator (if cleaning the sensors is necessary)
• Deionized water (if cleaning the sensors is necessary)
Testing the RV Sensors
WARNING
2. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures).
5. Select RV Shuttle from the list in the Device field (see Section 5.5: Mechanics
and Device Diagnostics).
6. With the hemostat, individually lift and replace the RVs from shuttle positions 1
and 2 (see Figure 7-13). Observe whether the RV Sensor 1 and RV Sensor 2
position indicators on the Mechanics screen display the correct status.
RV Status of Position Indicator
In position Lit (bright green)

Removed Not lit
Table 7-17 RV Sensor Position Indicator Status
• If the status displays correctly for both RVs, close the front panel. The sensors
pass the test.
• If the status does not display correctly for either RV, clean the sensors.

C42385
Cleaning the RV Sensors
WARNING
1. Remove the supply cover and incubator cover (see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover
Procedures).
2. With the hemostat, remove the RVs from the first 3 positions in the shuttle and
the RVs from the first 3 positions in the row in front of the shuttle (see
Figure 7-13).
3. Slightly moisten a fiber-free swab applicator with deionized water.
4. Angle the applicator tip toward the bottom of the shuttle and gently wipe the
round black RV sensors (see Figure 7-18).
0910Ac.eps
1 RV Sensors
Figure 7-18 RV Sensors
5. Replace the RVs in the first 2 positions of the RV shuttle (see Figure 7-13).
6. Retest the sensors.
With the hemostat, individually lift and replace the RVs from shuttle positions 1 and 2
(see Figure 7-13). Observe whether the RV Sensor 1 and RV Sensor 2 position
indicators on the Mechanics screen display the correct status (see Table 7-17).
• If the status displays correctly for both RVs, continue to step 7.
• If status does not display correctly for either RV, contact Technical Support.
7. Replace the remaining RVs that you removed in step 2.

8. Replace the incubator cover and supply cover, then close the front panel.

C42385
Switching To try to improve incubator belt calibration for a belt that may soon require servicing,
Vessel Holder you can switch vessel holder positions.
Positions Switch the vessel holder positions only when you are directed to do so by a technical
support representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2
manual.
WARNING
Use this procedure to switch the vessel holder positions.
1. Be sure the system is in either the Ready or Not Ready mode.
2. Open the front panel, then remove the supply cover and incubator cover (see
3. Switch the home vessel holder with another vessel holder 5 positions away (see
Figure 7-19).
To remove vessel holders, pull up on the tab at the top. To replace vessel holders,
push them down onto the incubator belt. They gently snap into place when they are
fully seated.
0889Ac.eps
1 Home Vessel Holder (Magnet on Top)

2 Incubator Belt
3 Vessel Holder 5 Positions Away From Home Vessel Holder
Figure 7-19 Switching Vessel Holder Positions

C42385
4. Close the front panel and calibrate the incubator belt (see Section 5.8: Advanced
Diagnostics).
• If incubator belt calibration fails, repeat step 3 and step 4 up to 11 times. Move
the home vessel holder in the same clockwise or counterclockwise direction each
time.
• If incubator belt calibration still fails, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7.6: Main Pipettor Procedures
7.6 Main Pipettor Procedures
The procedures in this section support the operation of the main pipettor module.

• Inspecting and Cleaning the Pipettor Gantry
• Testing the Pipettor Z-Axis Home Sensor
• Removing and Replacing the Primary Probe

C42385
7.6: Main Pipettor Procedures Access 2 Reference Manual
Inspecting Inspect and clean the pipettor gantry only when you are directed to do so by a
and Cleaning technical support representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an
the Pipettor Access 2 manual.
Gantry
WARNING
CAUTIONS
• Wipe ONLY the lower pipettor gantry shaft to remove debris. The lower
shaft is not lubricated.
• The upper pipettor gantry shaft is coated with a special lubricant to
protect it from corrosion. DO NOT wipe, touch, or remove the lubricant
from the upper shaft.
• A thin film of lubricant on the upper shaft is normal. It is not harmful if
a small amount of surface dust accumulates on the upper shaft.
Use this procedure to inspect and clean the pipettor gantry.
Required Materials
• Lint-free tissue
Steps
3. Inspect the upper pipettor gantry shaft for corrosion (see Figure 7-20).
If you notice significant corrosion or suspect that fluid or some other material came in
contact with the pipettor gantry, contact Technical Support.
4. Wipe the lower pipettor gantry shaft to either side of the main pipettor carriage
with a clean, lint-free tissue to remove debris (see Figure 7-20).
The lower pipettor gantry shaft is not lubricated, so there is no risk of inadvertently
removing the lubricant.

C42385
1 2
3
5
0036H.eps
1 Upper Pipettor Gantry Shaft

2 Main Pipettor Line (Pressure Monitor Is Not Shown)
3 Main Pipettor Carriage
4 Lower Pipettor Gantry Shaft
5 Pulley
Figure 7-20 Pipettor Gantry
5. Move the main pipettor carriage a few inches to the right or left to expose the
section of the lower pipettor gantry shaft that was covered by the carriage.
6. Wipe the remaining section of the lower pipettor gantry shaft with the tissue.
10. Select Pipettor from the list in the Device field, then select Home Device F1 (see
Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).

C42385
Testing the A sensor recognizes when the main pipettor is in the correct position. Test the sensor
Pipettor only when you are directed to do so by a technical support representative or if you are
Z-Axis Home following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
Sensor
WARNING
Use this procedure to test the main pipettor z-axis sensor.
5. Select Pipettor from the list in the Device field (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and
Device Diagnostics).
6. To move the pipettor down, rotate the pulley downward (see Figure 7-20).
Verify that the Home-Z sensor on the Mechanics screen is not lit.
7. To move the pipettor up, rotate the pulley upward until it stops (see Figure 7-20).
Verify that the Home-Z sensor on the Mechanics screen is lit.
8. If the Home-Z sensor does not light correctly, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Removing Replace the primary probe when:

and Replacing • The probe is plugged, bent, or otherwise damaged.
the Primary • You are directed to do so by a technical support representative.
Probe
• You are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
Use this procedure to remove and replace the primary probe.
Required Materials
• Biohazard eye, hand, and facial protection
• 5/16-in open end wrench
• 1/4-in open end or box end wrench
• Pipettor torque tool
• Replacement primary probe
Removing the Primary Probe
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not use the pipettor torque tool to remove the primary probe. You can
damage the tool if you use it in a manner other than as described for
installing the primary probe.

C42385
3. Move the main pipettor slightly to the left of the probe wash tower (see
Figure 7-21).
4
7
6
5
0304D.eps
1 Pressure Monitor (When Installed)

2 Probe Wash Tower
3 Main Pipettor
4 Lower End of Ultrasonic Transducer
5 Primary Probe
6 Probe Nut
7 Flat Sides Above Probe Nut (Position the 5/16-in Wrench Here)
Figure 7-21 Primary Probe Assembly
4. Position the 5/16-in wrench on the flat sides of the lower end of the ultrasonic
transducer above the probe nut (see Figure 7-21).
You use this wrench to reduce stress on the ultrasonic transducer when you loosen the
probe nut.
CAUTION
Do not exert pressure with the 5/16-in wrench, or you may damage the
pipettor.

C42385
5. Position the 1/4-in wrench on the probe nut with the handle to the right of the
probe nut (see Figure 7-21).
6. To loosen the probe nut, hold the 5/16-in wrench in place and move the 1/4-in
wrench to the left (counterclockwise).
7. Remove both wrenches.
8. Continue to turn the nut by hand until it detaches (with the probe inside) from the
lower end of the ultrasonic transducer.
9. Separate the primary probe from the probe nut. Dispose of the probe according to
proper laboratory safety procedures.
10. Retain the probe nut for use with the new primary probe.
Replacing the Primary Probe
WARNING
1. Inspect the new primary probe to be sure it is straight and there is no blockage
inside.
2. Insert the new primary probe into the probe nut (see Figure 7-22).
3. Screw the probe and nut (finger-tight) onto the lower end of the ultrasonic
transducer (see Figure 7-21).
1
0293Bc.eps
1 Primary Probe
2 Probe Nut
Figure 7-22 Inserting Primary Probe into Probe Nut

C42385
4. Position the 5/16-in wrench on the flat sides of the lower end of the ultrasonic
transducer above the probe nut (see Figure 7-21).
You use this wrench to reduce stress on the ultrasonic transducer when you torque the
probe nut.
CAUTION
Do not exert pressure with the 5/16-in wrench, or you may damage the
pipettor.
5. With the stationary bar toward the left side of the instrument, fit the 1/4-in hex
opening of the pipettor torque tool (see Figure 7-23) over the probe nut.
1 2
4 3
0296Bc.eps
1 Thumb Notch (Press Here to Rotate)

2 Stationary Bar
3 1/4-in Hex Opening
4 Tension Bar (Do Not Touch)
Figure 7-23 Pipettor Torque Tool
6. While holding the 5/16-in wrench in place, place your finger or thumb in the
notch on the pipettor torque tool (see Figure 7-23) and press the stationary bar to
the right (toward the reagent/sample carousel) until the stationary bar touches the
tension bar.
CAUTION
Do not touch the tension bar while rotating the pipettor torque tool.
7. Remove the 5/16-in wrench and torque tool.
9. If necessary, reorder any CARE kit part that you used. For ordering information,
see the Instructions for Use.

C42385
Verifying Primary Probe Installation

1. Initialize the system (see Section 5.2: Initialize System).
2. Prime the Pipettor, using the default number (4) of cycles (see Section 5.3: Prime
Fluidics).
3. If the pressure monitor is installed on your system, determine a reference curve

for obstruction detection. For more information, see Section 5.6: Analog and
Digital Device Diagnostics.
Guide).
If the System Check results fail, contact Technical Support.
5. Calibrate and run quality controls for all tests (see Chapter 3: Sample
Management in the Operator's Guide).
If the QC results are not within the acceptable ranges, recalibrate the tests and rerun
the quality controls.

C42385
7.7: Pump, Valve, and Vacuum Procedures Access 2 Reference Manual
7.7 Pump, Valve, and Vacuum Procedures
Pump, valve, and vacuum procedures support the proper operation of the wash and
waste pumping functions of the fluidic module.

• Cleaning the Precision Valve
• Cleaning the Wash Valve
• Replacing the Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing
• Inspecting the Vacuum Reservoir Bottle

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7.7: Pump, Valve, and Vacuum Procedures
Cleaning the Clean the precision valve only when you are directed to do so by a technical support
Precision representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
Valve Use this procedure to clean the precision valve.
WARNING
You must shut the instrument off before opening the top cover.
Required Materials
• Alcohol wipes
• Deionized water
Disassembling the Precision Valve
WARNING
4. Select Precision Valve from the list in the Device field, then select
Home Device F1 (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).
5. When homing is complete, select Pipettor from the list in the Device field, then
select Home Device F1 (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).
6. When homing is complete, turn the instrument off by pressing the lower part of
the power switch to off (O position). See Figure 7-8.
7. Open the top cover (see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures).

C42385
8. Locate the precision valve to be disassembled (see Figure 7-24).
0055Dc.eps
1 Precision Pump
2 Precision Valve
3 Wash Valve
4 Wash Pump
Figure 7-24 Pump and Valve Location

C42385
9. Turn the precision valve cap counterclockwise and remove it (see Figure 7-25).
The gasket may be stuck to the cap when you remove it.
2
3
12
5
11
1
10
9 5
7
3
0890B.eps
1 Precision Valve Cap 7 Black Dot on Manifold

2 Gasket 8 Keying Pin
3 Rotor Indicator Line 9 Manifold
4 Rotor 10 Wash Valve Cap
5 Stator 11 Precision Valve Cap Spacer
6 Precision Valve Seal 12 Stator Keying Notch
Figure 7-25 Precision Valve Assembly
10. If the gasket was not removed with the precision valve cap, remove the gasket,
then the precision valve cap spacer.
11. Pull upward on the short end of the rotor shaft to remove the rotor.
The stator may be stuck to the rotor when you remove it.

C42385
12. If the stator does not come out with the rotor, remove the stator from the
manifold. To remove the stator, insert the short end of the rotor shaft into the
center hole of the stator, tilt the rotor gently toward the keying pin, and lift out the
stator.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the stator and manifold, do not use a pointed tool to
pry out the stator.
13. If the precision valve seal is stuck to the stator, remove it and reseat it in the
manifold. Be sure that the keying notch on the precision valve seal is aligned with
the keying pin in the manifold.
Cleaning the Precision Valve Components
WARNING
1. With alcohol wipes, clean:

• The rotor shaft, short and long ends.
• The bottom surface of the rotor.
• The top surface of the stator.
• The perimeter of the center hole in the stator.
2. Rinse the cleaned components with deionized water and dry them with lint-free
tissue.
3. Examine the coupling surfaces of the rotor and stator to be sure there are no nicks
or scratches.
If the surfaces have nicks or scratches, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Reassembling the Precision Valve
WARNING
1. Replace the stator and rotor. Be sure that:

• The keying notch on the stator is aligned with the keying pin in the manifold.
• The holes in the precision valve seal and stator are aligned.
• The rotor indicator line points toward the black dot on the manifold.
2. Replace the gasket on the rotor.
3. Replace the precision valve cap spacer.
4. Replace the precision valve cap. Turn the cap clockwise to hand tighten it.
5. Turn the instrument back on by pressing the top part of the power switch to on
( | position). See see Figure 7-9.
Verifying the Precision Valve Reassembly
WARNING
2. From the Mechanics screen, with the Precision Valve still in the Device field,
select Home Device F1.
3. Through the glass in the valve cap, check the rotor indicator line. Be sure the line
points to the black dot on the manifold.
4. If the indicator line is not in the correct position, turn the instrument off and
disassemble and reassemble the components again. Repeat the verification.
If the indicator line is still not in the correct position, contact Technical Support.
5. With the Precision Valve still in the Device field, select Main Pipettor from the
Position list.

C42385
6. Select Start Cycling F6. Let the precision valve cycle for approximately 40
cycles, then select Stop Cycling F6.
If cycling fails, contact Technical Support.
7. Go to the Prime Fluidics window. To get to this window from the Main menu,
Prime Fluidics F2.
8. Select the Pipettor box, then enter a minimum of 4 cycles, then select
Start Priming F2 (see Section 5.3: Prime Fluidics).
9. Be sure there are no air bubbles in the main pipettor line when priming is
complete. For the location of the main pipettor line, see Figure 7-20.
If there are air bubbles in the line, prime the main pipettor again. If the problem
10. Close the top cover.
Verifying the Precision Valve Function

Guide).
2. Run quality controls for all tests.


C42385
Cleaning the Clean the wash valve only when you are directed to do so by a technical support
Wash Valve representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2 manual.
Use this procedure to clean the wash valve.
WARNING
You must shut the instrument off before opening the top cover.
Required Materials
• Paper towels
• Alcohol wipes
• Deionized water
Disassembling the Wash Valve
WARNING
4. Select the Wash Valve from the list in the Device field, then select
Home Device F1 (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).
5. When homing is complete, turn the instrument off by pressing the lower part of
the power switch to off (O position). See Figure 7-8.
6. Open the front panel and the top cover (see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover
Procedures).
7. Place paper towels under the dispense probes identified with the numbers 1, 3,
and 5 (see Figure 7-26).
The towels will absorb the wash buffer that drips from the dispense probes during this
procedure.

C42385
7
6
1
5 4 3 2
1
6
3 2
5
4
0195Hc.eps
1 Dispense Probe 1 (Probe #1)

2 Aspirate Probe 1 (Probe #2)
7 Substrate Probe (Probe #7)
Figure 7-26 Dispense, Aspirate, and Substrate Probes
9. Locate the wash valve to be disassembled (see Figure 7-24).

C42385
10. Turn the wash valve cap counterclockwise and remove it (see Figure 7-27).
The gasket may be stuck to the cap when you remove it.
1
2
3
4
11
5
10 1
9
1
5
3 6
7
8
0891Ac.eps
1 Wash Valve Cap 7 Black Dot on Manifold

2 Gasket 8 Manifold
3 Rotor Indicator Line 9 Stator Keying Pin
4 Rotor 10 Ten-Hole Rubber Gasket
5 Stator 11 Keying Notch
6 Precision Valve Cap
Figure 7-27 Wash Valve Assembly
11. If the gasket was not removed with the wash valve cap, remove the gasket.
12. Pull upward on the short end of the rotor shaft to remove the rotor.
The stator and the ten-hole rubber gasket may be stuck to the rotor when you remove
it.

C42385
13. If the stator does not come out with the rotor, remove the stator from the
manifold. To remove the stator, insert the short end of the rotor shaft into the
center hole of the stator, tilt the rotor gently toward the keying pin, and lift out the
stator.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the stator and manifold, do not use a sharp or pointed
tool to pry out the stator.
The ten-hole rubber gasket may be stuck to the stator when you remove it.
14. If necessary, place the ten-hole rubber gasket back in the manifold.
Be sure that the keying notch on the rubber gasket is aligned with the keying pin in the
manifold and that the holes in the rubber gasket are aligned with the holes in the
manifold.
Cleaning the Wash Valve Components
WARNING
1. With alcohol wipes, clean:

• The rotor shaft, short and long ends.
• The bottom surface of the rotor.
• The top surface of the stator.
2. Rinse the cleaned components with deionized water and dry them with lint-free
tissue.
3. Examine the coupling surfaces of the rotor and stator to be sure there are no nicks
or scratches.
If the surfaces have nicks or scratches, contact Technical Support.

C42385
Reassembling the Wash Valve
WARNING
1. Replace the stator and rotor. Be sure that:

• The keying notch on the stator is aligned with the keying pin in the manifold.
• The holes in the stator are aligned with the holes in the ten-hole rubber gasket.
• The rotor indicator line points toward the black dot on the manifold.
2. Replace the gasket on the rotor.
3. Replace the wash valve cap. Turn the cap clockwise to hand tighten it.
4. Remove and dispose of the paper towels from under the dispense probes.
5. Turn the instrument back on by pressing the top part of the power switch to on
( | position). See Figure 7-8.
Verifying the Wash Valve Reassembly
WARNING
2. From the Mechanics screen, with Wash Valve still in the Device field, select
Home Device F1.
3. Through the glass in the wash valve cap, check the rotor indicator line. Be sure
the line points to the black dot on the manifold.
4. If the indicator line is not in the correct position, turn the instrument off and
disassemble and reassemble the components again. Repeat the verification.
If the indicator line is still not in the correct position, contact Technical Support.
5. With the Wash Valve still in the Device field, select Probe Wash from the
Position list.

C42385
6. Select Start Cycling F6. Let the wash valve cycle for approximately 40 cycles,
then select Stop Cycling F6.
If cycling fails, contact Technical Support.
7. Go to the Prime Fluidics window. To get to this window from the Main menu,
Prime Fluidics F2.
8. Select the Pipettor box, then enter a minimum of 4 in the Cycles field.
9. Select the Dispense Probes box, then enter a minimum of 10 in the Cycles field,
then select Start Priming F2 (see Section 5.3: Prime Fluidics).
10. Be sure there are no air bubbles in the main pipettor and dispense probe lines
when priming is complete. For the location of the main pipettor line, see
Figure 7-20. For the location of the dispense probes, see Figure 7-26.
If there are air bubbles in the line, prime the main pipettor and dispense probes again.
If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
Verifying the Wash Valve Function

Guide).


C42385
Replacing the The peristaltic waste pump draws waste fluids from either the vacuum reservoir bottle
Peristaltic or the aspirate probes. The pump uses tubing that occasionally needs replacement.
Waste Pump Replace the waste pump tubing only when you are directed to do so by a technical
support representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2
Tubing
manual.
Determining if Waste Pump Tubing Needs Replacement

The following symptoms may indicate the waste pump tubing needs replacement:
• High %CV values
• Incomplete aspiration of RVs
• Waste not cleared from the vacuum reservoir bottle
You can replace pieces of the tubing or all of the tubing. A technical support
representative will help you determine which tubing you need to replace.
WARNING
Use this procedure to replace the peristaltic waste pump tubing.
Identifying Your Waste Pump Configuration

Two waste pump assemblies are available. Before you change the peristaltic waste
pump tubing, you must identify the pump assembly on your system.
2. Open the front panel of the instrument to expose the peristaltic waste pump
located in the front, on the left side of the instrument.

C42385
3. Determine if your system has the original or new waste pump assembly (see
Figure 7-28).
1 2
0285A.eps
1 New peristaltic waste pump assembly

2 Original peristaltic waste pump assembly
3 Lever guard present on the original peristaltic waste pump
assembly
Figure 7-28 Comparing the Original and New Waste Pump Assemblies
An original waste pump assembly contains a lever guard. The new pump assembly
does not contain the lever guard.
4. Follow the procedure appropriate for your pump assembly:
Pump assembly Follow this procedure

New Replacing the Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing: New
Pump Assembly on page 7-71
Original Replacing the Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing: Original
Pump Assembly on page 7-78

C42385
Replacing the Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing: New Pump

Assembly
Required Materials
• Small cup for aspirate probes
• Scissors for cutting tubing to length
• Tubing, peristaltic pump vacuum, as needed
• Tubing, peristaltic pump aspirate, as needed
For catalog information about replacement tubing, see the Instructions for Use.
Locating the Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing
WARNING
2. Open the front panel of the instrument to expose the peristaltic waste pump
located in the front, on the left side of the instrument.

C42385
3. Determine which tubing you need to replace (see Figure 7-29). If you need
assistance, contact Technical Support.
3
7
6 4
0287A.eps
1 Vacuum Tubing 2 Aspirate Tubing

(Right Side of Pump) (Right Side of Pump)
3 Square Fittings 4 Clear Tubing to Aspirate
Probes
5 Waste Pump Base 6 Plastic Fittings
(Aspirate Tubing)
7 Plastic Fittings
(Vacuum Tubing)
Figure 7-29 Peristaltic Waste Pump
Replacing Vacuum Tubing
WARNING
NOTE
Beckman Coulter recommends that you replace the tubing for one cassette at a
time.

C42385
1. Pull the end of the vacuum tubing off the waste pump base on the left side of the
pump.
NOTE
If a metal connector on the base of the pump pulls out of its plastic fitting while
you are disconnecting the tubing:
a. Pull the metal connector free from the tubing.

b. Loosen (turn counterclockwise) the plastic fitting on the pump base.
c. Insert the metal connector into the fitting as far as it will go.
d. Tighten the fitting to the base (turn clockwise) before proceeding.
2. Pull the other end of the tubing off the waste pump base on the right side of the
pump.
3. To release the cassette from the pump, use your thumb and index finger to
simultaneously grasp the right side of the cassette and press the black tab on the
left side of the cassette (see Figure 7-30).

C42385
4. Pull the cassette toward you and slide it free of the waste pump.
0288A.eps
1 Black Tabs - When cassettes are installed properly, black tabs are
on the left side of the pump. The ridged black tab on the cassette
is a release lever.
2 Tubing Retainer Clips
3 Cassette
Figure 7-30 Peristaltic Waste Pump with Cassette Removed
5. Pull the tubing from the center of the cassette.
6. Use the tubing you removed as a measuring guide. Align the retainer clips and cut
the new vacuum tubing to the correct length with scissors.
7. Push the new tubing into the cassette, keeping the retainer clips positioned
outside of the cassette (see Figure 7-30).

C42385
8. Return the cassette to the waste pump by following the instructions below:
a. Grasp the cassette with your forefinger on the ridged portion of the right side
of the cassette and your thumb in front of the ridged black tab on the left side
of the cassette (see Figure 7-31).
b. Slide the right side (spring side) of the cassette into position on the pump
head, and then push on the left side until you hear or feel it click into place.
Release the cassette.
c. Press on the middle of the cassette (see Figure 7-31) to be sure it is
properly seated.
0286A.eps
1 Ridged portion on the right side of the cassette - Grasp this

portion of the cassette with your forefinger.
2 Spring
3 Area in front of the ridged black tab - Grasp this area of the
cassette with your thumb.
4 Middle of the cassette - Press on this area to fully seat and lock
the cassette into position on the pump.
Figure 7-31 Reinstalling the Peristaltic Waste Pump Cassette

C42385
9. Push the left end of the new tubing onto the metal connector on the left side of the
pump.
10. Push the right end of the tubing onto the connector on the right side of the pump.
11. Repeat step 1 through step 10 to replace the remaining vacuum tubing.
12. Confirm that all cassettes are properly seated by pushing on the middle (see
Figure 7-31) of each cassette.
Replacing Aspirate Tubing
WARNINGS
• You must shut the instrument off while replacing the aspirate tubing.
NOTE
Beckman Coulter recommends that you replace the tubing for one cassette at a
time.
1. Turn the instrument off by pressing the lower part of the power switch to off
(O position)(see Figure 7-9).
2. Pull the end of the aspirate tubing off the waste pump base on the left side of the
pump.
NOTE

3. Trace the aspirate tubing on the right side of the pump to the aspirate probe it
connects to.
Remove the aspirate probe from the wash arm and place it in a cup to prevent any
fluid from dripping into the instrument. For information about how to remove an
aspirate probe, see the Replacing the Aspirate Probes procedure in the Access 2
system documentation.

C42385
4. Disconnect the tubing from the aspirate probe at the square fitting. The fitting
remains with the aspirate probe.
5. To release the cassette from the pump, use your thumb and index finger to
simultaneously grasp the right side of the cassette and press the black tab on the
left side of the cassette (see Figure 7-30).
8. Use the tubing you removed as a measuring guide. Align the retainer clips and cut
the new vacuum tubing to the correct length with scissors.
10. Return the cassette to the waste pump by following the instructions below:
a. Grasp the cassette with your forefinger on the ridged portion of the right side
of the cassette and your thumb in front of the ridged black tab on the left side
of the cassette (see Figure 7-31).
b. Slide the right side (spring side) of the cassette into position on the pump
head, and then push on the left side until you hear or feel it click into place.
Release the cassette.
c. Press on the middle of the cassette (see Figure 7-31) to be sure it is
properly seated.
pump.
12. Push the right end of the tubing onto the square fitting that remained with the
aspirate probe in step 4.
13. Reinstall the aspirate probe in the wash arm. For information about how to install
an aspirate probe, see the Replacing the Aspirate Probes procedure in
Section 8.3: Weekly Maintenance of the Operator's Guide.
14. Repeat step 1 through step 13 to replace the remaining aspirate tubing.
15. Inspect the aspirate probes on the wash arm to be sure they are seated correctly
(see the Replacing Aspirate Probes procedure in the Operator's Guide). Gently
pull up on each aspirate probe. They should spring back into place.
Adjust probes if necessary.
16. Confirm that all cassettes are properly seated by pushing on the middle (see
Figure 7-31) of each cassette.

C42385
17. Close the front panel of the instrument.
Be sure that the tubing on the left side of the pump does not get caught in the front
panel hinge.
18. Turn the instrument on by pressing the upper part of the power switch to on
(| position)(see Figure 7-9).
Verifying the Tubing Installation

Guide).

the quality controls. If quality controls are still not within the acceptable ranges,
Replacing the Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing: Original Pump

Assembly
Required Materials
• Small cup for aspirate probes
• 3/32-in hex wrench
• Tubing, peristaltic pump vacuum, as needed
• Tubing, peristaltic pump aspirate, as needed
For catalog information about replacement tubing, see the Instructions for Use.
Locating the Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing
WARNING

C42385
2. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover Procedures in this
chapter).
The peristaltic waste pump is in the front, on the left side of the instrument (see
Figure 1-5 in Chapter 1: Technology Overview).
3. Determine which tubing you need to replace (see Figure 7-32). If you need
assistance, contact Technical Support.
2
1
12
11
10 5
9
8 6
7
0282Dc.eps
1 Vacuum Tubing 7 Waste Pump Base

(Right Side of Pump)
2 Square Fittings 8 Plastic Fitting
(Aspirate Tubing #5)
3 Clear Tubing to Aspirate 9 Plastic Fitting
Probes (Aspirate Tubing #4)
4 Aspirate Tubing 10 Plastic Fitting
(Right Side of Pump) (Aspirate Tubing #3)
5 Lever Guard 11 Plastic Fitting
(Vacuum Tubing #2)
6 Hex Screws 12 Plastic Fitting
(Vacuum Tubing #1)
Figure 7-32 Peristaltic Waste Pump

C42385
Replacing Vacuum Tubing
WARNING
1. Use a 3/32-in hex wrench to loosen the hex screws that secure the lever guard,
and remove the guard.
2. Pull the end of vacuum tubing #1 off the waste pump base on the left side of the
pump.
NOTE

3. Pull the other end of the tubing off the waste pump base on the right side of the
pump.
4. On the cassette you are removing the tubing from, push the lever as far to the
right as possible to release the cassette from the pump (see Figure 7-33).

C42385
2
3
0284Bc.eps
1 Cassette
2 Lever
3 Tubing Retainer Clips
Figure 7-33 Peristaltic Waste Pump with Cassette Removed
7. Using the tubing you removed for measuring, match the retainer clips and cut the
new vacuum tubing to the correct length.
9. Slide the cassette back into position in the waste pump and push the lever about
90° to the left.
pump.
11. Push the right end of the tubing onto the connector on the right side of the pump.
12. Repeat step 2 through step 11 for vacuum tubing #2.

C42385
Replacing Aspirate Tubing
WARNING
1. Use a 3/32-in hex wrench to loosen the hex screws that secure the lever guard,
and remove the guard (see Figure 7-32).
2. Pull the end of aspirate tubing #3 off the waste pump base on the left side of the
pump.
NOTE

3. Trace aspirate tubing #3 on the right side of the pump to the aspirate probe it
connects to.
Remove the aspirate probe from the wash arm and place it in a cup to prevent any
fluid from dripping into the instrument. For information about how to remove an
aspirate probe, see Section 8.3: Weekly Maintenance in the Operator's Guide.
4. Disconnect the tubing from the aspirate probe at the square fitting. The fitting
remains with the aspirate probe.
5. On the cassette you are removing the tubing from, push the lever as far to the
right as possible to release the cassette from the pump (see Figure 7-33).
8. Using the tubing you removed for measuring, match the retainer clips and cut the
new aspirate tubing to the correct length.

C42385
10. Slide the cassette back into position in the waste pump and push the lever about
90° to the left.
pump.
12. Push the right end of the tubing onto the square fitting that remained with the
aspirate probe in step 4.
13. Reinstall the aspirate probe in the wash arm. For information about how to install
an aspirate probe, see Section 8.3: Weekly Maintenance of the Operator's Guide.
14. Repeat step 2 through step 13 for aspirate tubing #4 and #5.
15. Replace the lever guard and tighten the screws.
16. Inspect all the probes on the wash arm to be sure they are seated correctly (see
Figure 7-26). Gently pull up on each aspirate and dispense probe (probes #1
through #6). They should spring back into place.
Adjust probes if necessary.
17. Close the front panel of the instrument.
Be sure that the tubing on the left side of the pump does not get caught in the front
panel hinge.
Verifying the Tubing Installation

Guide).


C42385
Inspecting the Use this procedure to inspect the vacuum reservoir bottle tubing and splash guard.
Vacuum Res-
ervoir Bottle WARNING

3. Open the top cover, which is located on top of the instrument (see
4. Locate the vacuum reservoir bottle. The bottle is located at the back of the
instrument, on the left side as you face the instrument (see Figure 1-5 in
Chapter 1: Technology Overview).
5. Inspect the tubing leading to and from the vacuum reservoir bottle (see
Figure 7-34).
• If the tubing is constricted, clear it.
• If the tubing is damaged or leaking, or if it contains debris, contact Technical
Support.

C42385
2 3
5
6
1056B.eps
1 Vacuum reservoir bottle holder

2 Wash tower fitting and tubing
3 Liquid pump fitting and tubing
4 Vacuum pump fitting and tubing
5 Splash guard
6 T fitting for the wash tower tubing
Figure 7-34 Vacuum Reservoir Bottle
6. Lift the bottle from the vacuum reservoir bottle holder only as high as needed for
you to inspect the splash guard (see Figure 7-34).
7. Verify that the splash guard is present in the bottle, is securely attached to the
tubing leading to the W TOWER fitting, and is not cracked.
• If the splash guard is missing, is not in position, or is cracked, contact Technical
Support.
• If there is fluid in the bottle, contact Technical Support.
8. Return the bottle to its position in the vacuum reservoir bottle holder. Be sure the
bottle is seated vertically in the holder, and is not at an angle.

C42385
7.8: Wash/Read Carousel Procedures Access 2 Reference Manual
7.8 Wash/Read Carousel Procedures
The procedures in this section involve the wash/read carousel and wash arm.

• Clearing the Wash/Read Carousel
• Checking for Wash Arm Obstructions
• Removing and Replacing the Substrate Probe

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual 7.8: Wash/Read Carousel Procedures
Clearing the Clear the wash/read carousel only when you are directed to do so by a technical
Wash/Read support representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2
Carousel manual.
Use this procedure to clear the wash/read carousel of RVs.
Required Materials
• Thin forceps
Steps
WARNING
4. Select the Incubator Belt from the list in the Device field, and check if the
incubator belt is at the home or index position.
If the incubator belt is not at the home or index position, select Disable Motors F8.
Manually rotate the incubator belt until the index sensor is lit, then select Enable
Motors F8.
5. Select the Wash Carousel from the list in the Device field, then select
Home Device F1 (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics). While
the wash/read carousel homes, watch for RVs in the access hole (see
Figure 7-35).

C42385
1 2
7
6
1
5 4 3 2
6 5 4 3
0195Ic.eps
1 Sensor
2 Wash Arm (in Raised Position)
3 Wash/Read Carousel Housing
4 Access Hole
5 Nut/Nut Sleeve
6 Mixer Belt
Figure 7-35 Wash Arm Area
6. From the Mechanics screen, with Wash Carousel still in the Device field, select
Advance CW F4 or Advance CCW F5.
The wash/read carousel advances one position.

7. If an RV is in the access hole, remove it with the forceps.
8. Repeat step 6 and step 7, advancing the wash/read carousel in the same direction
each time.
There are 55 positions on the wash/read carousel.
9. Home the wash carousel again and watch for RVs in the access hole.
• If you see any RVs in the access hole, repeat step 6 through step 9.
10. If you do not need the covers open for further troubleshooting, close the front
panel.

C42385
Checking for Check for wash arm obstructions only when you are directed to do so by a technical
Wash Arm support representative or if you are following instructions in Help or in an Access 2
Obstructions manual.
WARNING
Use this procedure to check for obstructions that may prevent wash arm movement.
4. Select the Wash Arm from the list in the Device field, then select
Disable Motors F8 (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).
6. Locate the wash arm and inspect the tubing (see Figure 7-35).
• If the wash arm is raised, lower it by pushing down on the nut/nut sleeve. Be sure
to keep at least a 3/4” (2 cm) space between the wash arm and the wash/read
carousel housing.
• Check for and reposition any tubing or wiring in the area of the sensor.
• If the wash arm is lowered, check for and reposition any tubing or wiring in the
area of the sensor.
7. Raise the wash arm as far as it will go by pushing up on the nut/nut sleeve, then
check the Home indicator light on the Mechanics screen.
If the indicator is not lit, contact Technical Support.
9. Select Home Device F1 (see Section 5.5: Mechanics and Device Diagnostics).
If homing fails, contact Technical Support.
10. Check if any of the probes are bent.
If a probe is bent, contact Technical Support.

12. Initialize the system (see Section 5.2: Initialize System).

C42385
Removing Use this procedure to replace the substrate probe.

and Replacing
WARNING
the Substrate
Probe You will come in contact with potentially infectious materials during this
CAUTION
when you are following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2 manual.
Required Materials
• Replacement substrate probe
Removing the Substrate Probe

1. Be sure that the system is in the Ready or Not Ready mode.
2. Open the front panel and top cover (see Section 7.2: Instrument Cover
Procedures).

C42385
3. Locate the substrate probe (see Figure 7-36).
4
5
7
6
1
5 4 3 2
0924B.eps
1 Substrate Probe (Probe #7)

2 Locking Nut
3 Fitting Nut
4 O-Ring
5 Flared End of Tubing
6 To Substrate Heater Assembly
Figure 7-36 Substrate Probe Location
NOTE
The probe positions are numbered sequentially from right to left on the wash arm.
If you cannot identify the substrate probe (probe #7), contact Technical Support.
4. Gently grasp the locking nut above the wash arm. Gently push down on the
locking nut, then rotate it 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
5. While holding the probe by the locking nut, lift up to remove the substrate probe
from the wash arm.
6. Unscrew the fitting nut from the substrate heater assembly and remove the nut.
Be sure that the o-ring is removed with the fitting nut.
7. Dispose of the probe according to proper laboratory safety procedures.

C42385
Replacing the Substrate Probe
CAUTION
Handle the substrate probe with extreme care. The probe is fragile, and it
will not function properly if bent.
1. Gently grasp the locking nut on the new substrate probe and route the probe body
through the opening in the wash arm.
2. Gently push down on the locking nut and rotate it 1/4 turn clockwise.
3. Install the fitting nut with o-ring into the substrate heater assembly. Screw in the
fitting nut until finger-tight.
4. Close the front panel and top cover.
5. Prime the substrate for 4 cycles.

For more information about priming the substrate, see Section 5.3: Prime Fluidics.

For more information about running the System Check routine, see
Section 8.4: System Check in the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual A: Troubleshooting
A Troubleshooting
A.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3
Troubleshooting Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Identifying the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Finding the Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Correcting the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Recording Troubleshooting Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.2 System Check Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9
Substrate Check Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Unwashed Check Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Washed Check Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Wash Efficiency Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. A-1

C42385
A: Troubleshooting Access 2 Reference Manual
A.3 Instrument Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-24
General Instrument Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Instrument Start-Up Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Power Supply Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Printer Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Bar Code Reading Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Air in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Main Pipettor Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Communication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A.4 Assay Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-35
Assay Calibration Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Quality Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Patient Sample Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Test Result Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
A-2 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual A.1: Troubleshooting
A.1 Troubleshooting
System event troubleshooting is available by selecting the Troubleshoot F2 button

from the Event Log screen. For more information, see Chapter 6: Event Log.
Three additional types of troubleshooting procedures are available for identifying and
correcting problems that may occur during processing.
• System Check troubleshooting
• Instrument troubleshooting
• Assay troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures describe symptoms, possible causes, and the corrective

actions you can take to resolve a problem. Assay troubleshooting includes test result
flag troubleshooting, which is available by selecting the Troubleshoot F2 button
from the Test Results screen. For more information, see Chapter 5: Test Results in the
Operator's Guide and see Section A.4: Assay Troubleshooting.
The system monitors various diagnostic parameters. As a part of troubleshooting, you

may need to view these parameters or perform diagnostic tests. For more information,
see Chapter 5: Diagnostics.
Also, as part of troubleshooting, you may need to perform unscheduled maintenance

on the instrument. Such maintenance or support procedures must only be performed
as instructed by an Access 2 manual or a technical support representative. For more
information, see Chapter 7: System Support Procedures.

C42385
A.1: Troubleshooting Access 2 Reference Manual
Troubleshoot- Troubleshooting a problem is a three-step process:

ing Process 1. Identify the problem.
Overview 2. Find the appropriate troubleshooting information.
3. Follow the corrective actions to fix the problem.
Throughout this process, Beckman Coulter recommends that you keep a record of
your diagnostic and troubleshooting activities.
Keep a record of your

troubleshooting
activities throughout Event Log
this process.
Diagnostics Menu
Identify the problem
using diagnostic
resources System Check
Result Flags
Troubleshooting
Records
Find troubleshooting
information using
Event Log Help
troubleshooting
resources
Troubleshooting tables
in Help or in manual
chapters
Technical Support, if
needed after you try
other resources
Follow corrective
actions from
troubleshooting
information
Is problem Contact Technical

No
corrected? Support
Yes
Begin processing
0732A.wmf, rev 1.4

Figure A-1 Troubleshooting Flowchart

C42385
Identifying the You should always identify a problem before attempting any corrective action. Some
Problem problems, such as power failure, are easy to identify. You will need to investigate
other problems thoroughly before you can determine the cause and select a corrective
action. The Access 2 system provides several resources to assist you in this process.
Resource Identifying the Problem
Event Log The Event Log contains codes and messages related to
system processing. If the Event Log button is red or yellow,
review the message immediately to identify the problem.
From the Event Log, select Troubleshoot F2 to find more
information about the message and the corrective actions
you can take.
You can print the Event Log to use as a record of
troubleshooting related messages.
For more information about the events and Event Log
troubleshooting, see Chapter 6: Event Log.
Diagnostics From the Main Menu, select Diagnostics F7 to display a
Menu menu of diagnostic screens and windows from which you
can view instrument parameters that the system monitors,
or perform diagnostic tests.
For more information about Diagnostics, see
Chapter 5: Diagnostics.
System Check The System Check routine verifies that the system is
operating properly, and can detect some system
performance problems. The System Check routine is
performed each week as a part of regular maintenance. The
System Check routine, or the individual checks, can assist
you in identifying and troubleshooting a performance issue.
When you complete a corrective action for a failed result,
run the System Check routine again to determine if the
instrument is functioning properly, or if further
troubleshooting is required.
For information about performing the System Check
routine, see Section 8.4: System Check in the Operator's
Guide.
Table A-2 Problem Identification Resources

C42385
Resource Identifying the Problem
Flags The Access 2 system includes an encoded test result flag

when a result requires your attention. You can review the
flags on the Test Results screen or on the printed test result
report. The flag will be either a fatal or non-fatal flag,
depending upon the severity of the problem. From the
Sample Details window, select Troubleshoot F2 to find
more information about the flag and the corrective actions
you can take.
Troubleshooting Beckman Coulter recommends that you keep a record of
Records problems for each instrument. If you maintain a
troubleshooting record, you can review it to determine
whether your problem is related to another issue, or if it has
occurred before.
For a sample format of a troubleshooting log, see the
Recording Troubleshooting Activity topic.
Technical If your problem is too difficult to define easily, or if the
Support troubleshooting information in Help system or an Access 2
manual doesn’t appear to address your problem, contact
Technical Support.
Table A-2 Problem Identification Resources (continued)
Finding the After you identify the problem, locate the appropriate troubleshooting information in
Information Help system or in the Access 2 manuals. If the problem generates an Event Log
message or a test result flag, the system provides suggested troubleshooting
procedures you can follow.
For more information about Event Log troubleshooting, see

Section 6.3: Troubleshooting Events.
For more information about test result flags, see Section A.4: Assay Troubleshooting.

C42385
If the problem does not generate an Event Log message or test result flag, consult one
of the three sections in this appendix. Each section is separated into specific problem
areas.
System Check Instrument Assay

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Substrate check General instrument Calibration

Unwashed check Instrument start-up Quality control
Washed check Power supply Patient sample
Wash efficiency Keyboard Test result flags
Printer
Bar code reading
Air in system
Main pipettor
Communication
Table A-3 Troubleshooting Information in this Appendix
The troubleshooting tables are organized with symptoms in the left column, possible
causes for the symptoms in the middle column, and corrective actions in the right
column. Read across a row to match the symptom that best describes your problem to
the possible causes and corrective actions you can take.
NOTES
• If no troubleshooting information in Help system or in an Access 2 manual
fits the problem, contact Technical Support.
• Contact Technical Support as instructed in troubleshooting information, or
before taking any corrective action that you are not sure of.

C42385
Correcting the Perform the corrective action suggested in the troubleshooting information. If the
Problem corrective action is successful, you can begin processing. If the corrective action is
not successful, you will need to troubleshoot the problem further to identify another
possible cause and corrective action.
If you need assistance during this process, contact Technical Support.
Recording Beckman Coulter recommends that you keep a record of performance or component
Troubleshoot- problems for each instrument. The record can consist of printed Event Log pages,
ing Activity System Check results, screen printouts, test result reports, or notes from Technical
Support consultations. When a problem occurs, add new information to the record and
review the existing record to determine if the problem has occurred before. Keep the
information available for review with a technical support representative.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual A.2: System Check Troubleshooting
A.2 System Check Troubleshooting
The System Check routine is typically run as part of weekly maintenance to verify
that the Access 2 system is operating properly. It may also be run to troubleshoot
another problem with the system, or to verify proper operation after unscheduled
maintenance is performed.
The System Check routine includes the substrate, unwashed, and washed checks.
These three checks verify that the substrate, pipetting, and washing systems are in
good working order. Each of these checks can be performed individually. When they
are run together during the System Check routine, additional results based on
individual check components are obtained.
When you troubleshoot failed results from the System Check routine, troubleshoot in
the following order to determine which instrument system is causing the problem:
• Substrate check problems
• Unwashed check problems
• Washed check problems
• Washed efficiency problems
For example, if the results for the substrate check are acceptable, you can eliminate
the substrate system from any further troubleshooting. Next, look at the unwashed
check results.
NOTES
• Always repeat the System Check routine after the first set of failed results to
rule out a procedural error. When you repeat the routine, use a new aliquot of
undiluted System Check solution and a freshly prepared 1/501 dilution.
• When you have completed the troubleshooting process for an individual
check, repeat the System Check routine to verify that the system is working

C42385
A.2: System Check Troubleshooting Access 2 Reference Manual
again. Performing an individual check would not provide complete

information.
• For procedural information about the System Check routine, see Section 8.4:
System Check in the Operator's Guide.
• For procedural information about running individual checks, which you
would only do when instructed by an Access 2 manual or by a technical
support representative, see Section 5.11: Individual System Checks.
If you are unable to identify the cause of a problem, or if the problem persists after
performing the corrective actions, contact Technical Support for assistance.
To review the expected values for the System Check routine, see Section 8.4: System
Check of the Operator's Guide.

C42385
Substrate Check Problems

If the System Check results are not within the expected ranges, troubleshoot the
substrate check first. You should start here because problems with the substrate
system can directly affect the unwashed and washed checks, and because the substrate
check uses the fewest system components. When the substrate check results are
within the expected ranges, the substrate and substrate system can be ruled out as the
cause of the problem you are troubleshooting.
Symptoms Possible Causes Corrective Action
High %CV Insufficient supply of substrate 1. Check the level of substrate in the bottle.
throughout the 2. If necessary, change the substrate bottle from the
run Supplies screen (see Section 2.4 in the Operator's Guide).
3. Repeat the System Check routine.
Air in the substrate lines 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
2. Visually inspect the tubing at the substrate pump and
heater for air bubbles (see Figure 1-5).
3. If air bubbles are present:
• Check the substrate pump and heater fittings, and the
fitting on top of the substrate bottle. Finger-tighten any
loose connections. Be careful not to overtighten any of
the fitting connections.
• Close the front panel and prime the substrate system for
4 cycles (see Section 5.3).
4. Open the front panel and inspect the tubing again.
• If the bubbles are gone, close the front panel and repeat
the System Check routine.
• If you still see bubbles, contact Technical Support for
further instructions.
Leak in the substrate system tubing 1. With the front panel open, open the top cover (see
Section 7.2).
2. Visually inspect the tubing leading to, and away from the
substrate pump/valve/heater assembly for leaks and/or
crystalline deposits (see Figure 1-5).
3. Deposits may indicate the tubing is damaged and should
be replaced.
• If you find deposits, contact Technical Support for
• If you find no deposits, continue troubleshooting other
possible causes.
Table A-4 Substrate Check Troubleshooting

C42385
High %CV Kinked substrate system tubing 1. With the front panel and top cover open (see Section 7.2),
throughout the visually inspect the tubing leading to, and away from the
run substrate pump/valve/heater assembly for kinks (see
(continued) Figure 1-5).
• If no kinks are found, continue troubleshooting other
possible causes.
2. Straighten any kinks. Close the top cover and front panel.
• If the kinked tubing is part of the substrate probe,
remove and replace the substrate probe (see
Section 7.8).
3. Close the top cover and front panel.
4. If you straightened kinks, but did not need to replace the
substrate probe:
• Prime the substrate system for 4 cycles (see
Section 5.3).
• Repeat the System Check routine.
Bent substrate probe tip 1. With the front panel open (see Section 7.2), inspect the
substrate probe tip (see Figure 8-11 in the Operator's
Guide).
• If the substrate probe tip is not bent, continue
troubleshooting other possible causes.
2. If the substrate probe tip is bent, remove and replace the
substrate probe (see Section 7.8).
Substrate pump or valve failure Contact Technical Support.
Luminometer problem Contact Technical Support.
High %CV from System Check solution diluted 1. Prepare a new 1/501 dilution using a new vial of System
high values in the incorrectly Check solution.
last one or two 2. Repeat the System Check routine.
replicates
Sample containers out of order in the 1. Place the sample containers in the correct order.
maintenance rack 2. Repeat the System Check routine.
Table A-4 Substrate Check Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
High RLU mean Wash/read carousel or substrate 1. Check the wash carousel and substrate temperatures on
temperatures too high (results may the Maintenance Review screen (see Section 8.1 in the
be flagged TRS or TRW) Operator's Guide).
2. If the temperatures for either device are displayed in red
(out of range), contact Technical Support.
System Check solution diluted 1. Prepare a new 1/501 dilution using a new vial of System
incorrectly Check solution.
Substrate pump delivering too much Run the Visual Substrate Volume Check procedure (see
substrate Section 5.4).
• If the results do not fail, continue troubleshooting other
possible causes.
• If the results fail, contact Technical Support.
Contaminated substrate supply 1. Contact Technical Support to verify the need to

decontaminate the substrate system.
2. If Technical Support agrees, decontaminate the substrate
system and then verify system performance (see
Section 7.4).
Low RLU mean Expired substrate 1. Review the expiration date on the Supplies screen (see
Section 2.1 in the Operator's Guide).
2. If necessary, change the substrate bottle from the
Supplies screen (see Section 2.4 in the Operator's Guide).
Improperly stored substrate (bottle 1. Check the date the bottle was placed at room temperature.
stored at room temperature for too 2. If necessary, change the substrate bottle from the
long) Supplies screen (see Section 2.4 in the Operator's Guide).
Insufficient supply of substrate 1. Check the level of substrate in the bottle.

2. If necessary, change the substrate bottle from the
Supplies screen (see Section 2.4 in the Operator's Guide).
Wash/read carousel or substrate 1. Check the wash carousel and substrate temperatures on
temperatures too low (results may be the Maintenance Review screen (see Section 8.1 in the
flagged TRS or TRW) Operator's Guide).
2. If the temperatures for either device are displayed in red
(out of range), contact Technical Support.

C42385
Low RLU mean Incomplete priming of the substrate 1. Prime the substrate system for 20 cycles again (see
(continued) after substrate system Section 5.3).
decontamination 2. Repeat the System Check routine.
Substrate bottle contaminated with 1. Change the substrate bottle from the Supplies screen (see
Citranox cleaning solution during Section 2.4 in the Operator's Guide). Do not prime the
substrate system decontamination substrate system when prompted as you change the bottle.
2. Prime the substrate system from the Prime Fluidics
window for 20 cycles (see Section 5.3).
Substrate dispense volume too low Run the Visual Substrate Volume Check procedure (see
Section 5.4).
• If the results do not fail, continue troubleshooting other
possible causes.
No RLU values Substrate bottle contaminated with 1. Change the substrate bottle from the Supplies screen (see
RLUs trending up Substrate delivery inconsistent Troubleshoot according to the High %CV symptoms for
or down over time substrate check.
Substrate bottle contaminated with 1. Change the substrate bottle from the Supplies screen (see

C42385
High substrate Dirty or plugged aspirate probes 1. Clean the aspirate probes (see Section 8.3 in the
ratio Operator's Guide).
Fluid dripping from aspirate probes 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
2. Visually inspect the tubing, and the area under the tubing,
from the peristaltic waste pump to the aspirate probes for
leaks and/or crystalline deposits (see Figure 1-5).
3. Deposits may indicate that the tubing is damaged and
should be replaced.
• If you find deposits, contact Technical Support for
further assistance.
• If you find no leaks/deposits, continue troubleshooting
other possible causes.
Plugged waste air filter 1. Check the tubing from the liquid waste bottle for
constrictions (see Figure 7-11).
• If the tubing is constricted, clear it and repeat the
2. If the results fail, remove the tubing from the waste filter
at the quick disconnect and place the end of the tubing in
one of the adjacent holes (see Figure 7-11). This may
temporarily resolve the error until you can install a new
waste filter assembly.
• If the results are acceptable, contact Technical Support
for assistance in ordering and replacing the waste filter
assembly.

C42385
Unwashed Check Problems

Begin troubleshooting the unwashed check once you have determined that the
substrate check results are within the expected ranges. The unwashed check
troubleshooting table provides information about the pipetting system, and does not
provide detail on problems related to the substrate or washing systems.
High %CV Air in the main pipettor fluid lines 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
2. Visually inspect the main pipettor line for air bubbles. Be
sure to check the tubing leading out of the precision pump
and entering the main pipettor (see Figure 1-3).
3. If bubbles are present, prime the pipettor (see
Section 5.3).
4. Inspect the tubing again.
• If the bubbles are gone, run the System Check routine.
Wash buffer supply lines kinked 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
2. Visually inspect the tubing from the wash buffer supply
to the main pipettor for kinks (see Figure 1-3 and see
Figure 1-6).
possible causes.
3. Straighten any kinks and close the front panel.
4. Prime the pipettor (see Section 5.3).
No wash buffer 1. Check the wash buffer supply in the fluids tray.
• If the wash buffer reservoir is empty, but the Wash
Buffer status button is not red, contact Technical
Support.
2. If necessary, change the wash buffer bottle (see
Table A-5 Unwashed Check Troubleshooting

C42385
High %CV Precision pump, valve, fittings, or 1. Open the front panel and the top cover (see Section 7.2).
(continued) tubing damaged and leaking 2. Visually inspect the tubing leading from the precision
pump valve, to the pressure monitor if applicable, and
then to the main pipettor for leaks and/or crystalline
deposits (see Figure 1-3).
3. Examine the precision pump and valve for leaks and/or
crystalline deposits.
4. Deposits may indicate that the pipetting system is
damaged and should be replaced.
• If you see deposits, contact Technical Support for
further assistance.
• If you do not see deposits, continue troubleshooting
Worn or damaged precision pump Contact Technical Support.

seals
Problems with the substrate system: 1. If the substrate check %CV result is within the expected
• Insufficient supply of substrate range, the substrate system is not the cause of the high
%CV for the unwashed check. Continue troubleshooting
• Air in the substrate lines
• Leak in the substrate system
2. If the substrate check result is not within the expected
tubing
range, troubleshoot the substrate check result (see Table
• Kinked substrate system tubing A-4).
• Bent substrate probe
• Substrate pump or valve failure
Primary probe partially plugged 1. Look at the Pressure Monitor screen (see Section 5.6) to
determine if a pressure sensor is present, and that
obstruction detection is enabled.
• If the pressure sensor is not present, or if it is present
but obstruction detection is disabled, continue with
step 2.
• If obstruction detection is enabled, review the Event
Log, and troubleshoot according to the events related to
main pipettor obstructions or abnormal pressures (see
Section 6.3).
2. Run the Special Clean routine (see Section 8.5 in the
Operator's Guide).
4. If the results fail, contact Technical Support to verify the
5. When needed, remove and replace the primary probe (see
Section 7.6).
Splashing in the RVs Contact Technical Support.
Table A-5 Unwashed Check Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
High RLU mean System Check solution diluted 1. Prepare a new 1/501 dilution using a new vial of System
Problems with the substrate system: 1. If the substrate check mean RLU result is within the
• Wash/read carousel or substrate expected range, the substrate system is not the cause of
temperatures too high the high mean RLU result for the unwashed check.
Continue troubleshooting other possible causes.
• Contaminated substrate supply
• Substrate pump delivering too
much substrate
A-4).
Low RLU mean System Check solution diluted 1. Prepare a new 1/501 dilution using a new vial of System
System Check expired or stored 1. Prepare a new 1/501 dilution using a new vial of
incorrectly unexpired System Check solution.
Problems with the substrate system: 1. If the substrate check RLU mean result is within the
• Expired substrate expected range, the substrate system is not the cause of
the low RLU mean result for the unwashed check.
• Insufficient supply of substrate
• Wash/read carousel or substrate
temperatures too low
• Incomplete priming after substrate A-4).
system decontamination
• Substrate supply contaminated
with Citranox cleaning solution
during substrate system
decontamination
• Substrate dispense volume too low
Low RLU outliers Ultrasonic transducer problem Contact Technical Support.
Table A-5 Unwashed Check Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
Washed Check Problems

Begin troubleshooting the washed check once you have determined that the substrate
check and unwashed check results are within the expected ranges. The washed check
troubleshooting table provides information about the reaction vessel (RV) wash
system, and does not provide detail on problems related to the substrate or the
pipetting systems.
High %CV Dirty or plugged aspirate probes 1. Clean the aspirate probes (see Section 8.3 in the
Operator's Guide).
Damaged aspirate probes 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
2. Visually inspect the aspirate probes on the wash arm (see
Figure 8-19 in the Operator's Guide).
3. Replace any probes that are damaged (see Section 8.3 in
the Operator's Guide).
4. With the front panel closed, repeat the System Check
routine.
5. If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
• If the results are acceptable, order a new waste filter
assembly and replace the current one.
Damaged peristaltic waste pump 1. Open the front panel and top cover (see Section 7.2).
tubing 2. Visually inspect the tubing, and the area under the tubing,
from the peristaltic waste pump to the aspirate probes for
leaks and/or crystalline deposits (see Figure 1-5).
3. Deposits may indicate that the tubing is damaged and
should be replaced.
• If you see deposits, contact Technical Support for
further assistance.
• If you do not see deposits, continue troubleshooting
Table A-6 Washed Check Troubleshooting

C42385
High %CV One or more aspirate probes stuck in 1. With the front panel open (see Section 7.2), verify that
(continued) the “up” position the aspirate probes can move up and down (see Figure
8-19 in the Operator's Guide).
• Grasp each probe gently just below the wash arm.
• The probe should move up and down slightly.
2. Replace any probe that does not move freely (see
routine.
Air in the wash pump system tubing 1. With the front panel open (see Section 7.2), visually
inspect the tubing from the wash buffer supply to the
dispense probes for air bubbles (see Figure 8-11 in the
Operator's Guide).
2. If you see bubbles, close the front panel and prime the
dispense probes for 4 cycles (see Section 5.3).
3. Open the front panel and inspect the tubing again.
• If the bubbles are gone, close the front panel and repeat
the System Check routine.
Kinked wash pump system tubing 1. With the front panel open (see Section 7.2), visually
inspect the tubing from the wash buffer supply to the
dispense probes for kinks (see Figure 8-11 in the
Operator's Guide).
possible causes.
2. Straighten any kinks.
3. Close the front panel and prime the dispense probes for 4
cycles (see Section 5.3).
4. Repeat the System check routine.
Problems with the substrate system: 1. If the substrate check %CV result is within the expected
• Insufficient supply of substrate range, the substrate system is not the cause of the high
%CVs for the washed check. Continue troubleshooting
• Air in substrate lines
other symptoms.
tubing
• Kinked substrate system tubing A-4).
• Bent substrate probe
Table A-6 Washed Check Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
High %CV Problems with the pipetting system: 1. If the unwashed check %CV result is within the expected
(continued) • No wash buffer range, the pipetting system is not the cause of the high
%CV for the washed check. Continue troubleshooting
• Worn or damaged precision pump
seals
2. If the unwashed check result is not within the expected
• Partially plugged primary probe
range, troubleshoot the unwashed check result (see Table
• Precision pump, valve, fittings, or A-5).
tubing damaged and leaking
Incorrect aspirate probe height Contact Technical Support.
Defective peristaltic waste pump Contact Technical Support.
RV mixing problem Contact Technical Support.
Splashing in the RVs Contact Technical Support.
High RLU mean Dirty or plugged aspirate probes 1. Clean the aspirate probes (see Section 8.3 in the
Operator's Guide).
Damaged aspirate probes 1. Open the front panel (see Section 7.2).
2. Visually inspect the aspirate probes on the wash arm (see
Figure 8-19 in the Operator's Guide).
3. Replace any probes that are damaged (see Section 8.3 in
routine.
One or more aspirate probes stuck in 1. With the front panel open (see Section 7.2), verify that
the “up” position the aspirate probes can move up and down (see Figure
8-19 in the Operator's Guide).
• Grasp each probe gently just below the wash arm.
• The probe should move up and down slightly.
2. Replace any probe that does not move freely (see
routine.
Problems with the substrate system: 1. If the substrate check RLU mean result is within the
• Wash/read carousel or substrate expected range, the substrate system is not the cause of
temperatures too high the high RLU mean. Continue troubleshooting other
possible causes.
• Contaminated substrate supply
• Substrate pump delivering too
much substrate
A-4).
Incorrect aspirate probe height Contact Technical Support.

C42385
Low RLU mean Diluted System Check solution used 1. Be sure that sample container number one contains
instead of undiluted undiluted System Check solution.
Containers 1 and 4 switched in the 1. Be sure that sample container number one contains
maintenance rack undiluted System Check solution and number four
contains 1/501 diluted System Check.
Problems with the pipetting system 1. If the unwashed check %CV result is within the expected
range, the main pipettor is not the cause of the low RLU
mean result for the washed check. Continue
A-5).
Problems with the substrate system: 1. If the substrate check %CV and RLU mean results are
• Air in the substrate lines within expected ranges, the substrate system is not the
cause of the low RLU mean result for the washed check.
tubing
2. If the substrate check results are not within the expected
• Kinked substrate system tubing
ranges, troubleshoot the substrate check result (see Table
• Bent substrate probe A-4).
• Expired substrate
• Insufficient supply of substrate
• Wash/read carousel or substrate
temperatures too low
• Incomplete priming after substrate
system decontamination
• Substrate supply contaminated
with Citranox cleaning solution
during substrate system
decontamination
• Substrate dispense volume too low

C42385
Wash Efficiency Problems

The wash efficiency is a calculation based upon the results from the substrate,
washed, and unwashed checks of the System Check routine. The wash efficiency
value provides information about the washing system.
Wash Efficiency Problems with the RV wash system Troubleshoot the washed check result (see Table A-6).
PPM fails to meet (washed check mean RLUs or %CVs too
criteria high)
Problems with the pipetting system Troubleshoot the unwashed check result (see Table
(unwashed check mean RLUs too low) A-4).
Problems with the substrate system Troubleshoot the substrate check result (see Table
(contaminated substrate bottle) A-4).
Table A-7 Wash Efficiency Troubleshooting

C42385
A.3: Instrument Troubleshooting Access 2 Reference Manual
A.3 Instrument Troubleshooting
Instrument troubleshooting information can help you identify and correct instrument
problems that are not resolved during System Check troubleshooting. Most
instrument troubleshooting is available through the Event Log. The information in
this section addresses problems you notice during operation or inspection that do not
generate a caution or warning event. The information is sorted into the following
categories:
• General instrument troubleshooting
• Start-up problems
• Power supply problems
• Keyboard problems
• Printer problems
• Bar code reading problems
• Air in the system
• Main pipettor problems
• Communication problems
If you are unable to identify the cause of a problem, or if the problem persists after
performing the corrective actions, contact Technical Support for assistance.
NOTE
Some corrective actions listed in this section ask you to run the System Check
routine. For procedural information about this routine, see Section 8.4: System
For information about event troubleshooting, see Section 6.3: Troubleshooting

Events.

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual A.3: Instrument Troubleshooting
General Instrument Problems

Use the following table to troubleshoot the instrument when the system is in the Not
Ready mode or a system event has occurred.
System mode is System rebooting or initializing Wait for the instrument to finish rebooting (see Section 7.3)
Not Ready or initializing (see Section 5.2). When this occurs the system
mode will change to the Ready mode and any text message in
the system mode area will disappear.
Many circumstances other than Warning:

rebooting or initializing can place If the system is in the Not Ready mode because Stop was
the instrument in the Not Ready selected during a maintenance routine, do not initialize
mode, some examples are: the system. Contact Technical Support for assistance.
• Front panel of the instrument is The system must be initialized to return to the Ready mode.
open
• If you are experienced at initializing the system, and are
• Pipettor gantry was just cleaned following instructions in Help system or in an Access 2
• System detected a device motion manual, initialize the system. For more information about
error initializing, see Section 5.2.
• Stop was selected during a • If you are not experienced at initializing the system or you
maintenance routine are not following instructions in Help system or in an
Access 2 manual, contact Technical Support.
The Event Log System event occurred Review the event log message and its troubleshooting
button is yellow information (see Chapter 6: Event Log). Take the
or red recommended corrective action.
System Database contains too many test and 1. Set up the system to automatically delete test and QC
performance is QC results results from the database (see Section 4.10).
slow 2. If the Auto-Delete function is already set up, consider
reducing the number of days that must elapse before the
test results are deleted.
Table A-8 General Instrument Troubleshooting

C42385
Instrument Start-Up Problems

Use the following table to troubleshoot the instrument if you are having problems
rebooting or initializing the Access 2 system and no events report in the Event Log. If
an event is generated, follow the Event Log troubleshooting procedures (see
Section 6.3: Troubleshooting Events).
System fails No power to instrument Refer to the power supply troubleshooting table (see Table
during reboot A-10).
CD in CD-ROM or DVD drive, or Remove the CD from the CD-ROM or DVD drive, or remove
data disk in 3.5-inch disk drive the disk from 3.5-inch disk drive and reboot the instrument
(see Section 7.3).
Instrument hardware (power supply, Reboot the instrument (see Section 7.3).
internal hard drive, CPU, printed
circuit board) or software failure
System fails Interlock switch detects front panel Close the front panel of the instrument (see Section 7.3) and
during of instrument is open initialize the system (see Section 5.2).
initialization
Table A-9 Instrument Start-Up Troubleshooting

C42385
Power Supply Problems

Use the following table to troubleshoot when the instrument or the peripheral devices
do not have power. The peripheral devices that require a power supply include the
external computer (PC), touch screen monitor, and printer.
No power to the Faulty power outlet or power strip 1. Plug the instrument and the peripherals into a different
instrument or power outlet or strip.
peripherals 2. If the problem persists, troubleshoot the power system for
the instrument and each peripheral device individually.
3. When the source of the problem has been identified,
contact Technical Support if necessary.
No power to the Instrument power switch not on Turn on the power switch located on the right side of the
instrument instrument (see Figure 7-9).
Power cord connector loose at either Be sure that the power cord connections to the outlet and
end instrument are plugged in tightly.
Faulty power supply or circuit Contact Technical Support.

breaker
No power to Peripheral device power switch not 1. Turn on the peripheral device power switch.
peripheral(s) on 2. If you cannot locate the power switch, see the
documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Peripheral device power cord Be sure that the power cord connections to the outlet and
connector loose at either end peripheral device are plugged in tightly.
Defective peripheral device Contact Technical Support.
Table A-10 Power Supply Troubleshooting

C42385
Keyboard Problems
Use the following table to troubleshoot situations when the computer keyboard is not
responding to your key strokes.
No response from Loose connector Be sure that the cable connections (located on the back side of
the keyboard the external computer) between the keyboard, the external bar
code reader, and the computer are plugged in tightly.
Invalid key selected Look at the status line above the function buttons near the
bottom of the screen to verify that the key selected is an
acceptable keyboard response (see Figure 1-18 in the
Operator's Guide).
System Software not responding Reboot the PC (see Section 7.3).
Hardware problem Contact Technical Support.
Table A-11 Keyboard Troubleshooting
Printer Problems
Use the following table to troubleshoot problems with the printer.
Print job was not Communication interrupted between 1. Check the printer paper tray.
printed, or is system and printer • If empty, load paper into the printer paper tray.
incomplete
2. Try to print the missing or incomplete report once.
• If print service is restored, continue normal operation.
3. If print service is not restored, reboot the PC (see
Section 7.3).
4. If print service is not restored, locate missing report and
print from the appropriate screen. For example, print a
missing Calibration report from the Calibration screen.
5. If the report does not print, be sure the cable connections
between the printer and the computer are plugged in
tightly.
6. Reload paper into the printer paper tray.
7. Try to print the report again.
8. If report still does not print, contact Technical Support.
Table A-12 Printer Troubleshooting

C42385
Bar Code Reading Problems

Use the following table to troubleshoot when the bar code reader does not scan bar
code information.
Sample rack bar Bar code label attached incorrectly Attach the bar code label correctly (see Section A.1 in the
code label was to the rack Operator's Guide).
not read by the
internal bar code Incorrect system bar code label on If the sample rack is labeled with an Access (not an Access 2)
reader rack system label, the rack cannot be used.
Either replace the bar code label with an Access 2 rack label
(see Section A.1 in the Operator's Guide) or move the
samples to an Access 2 labeled rack.
Bar code reader not operating Contact Technical Support.

properly
Sample bar code Sample bar code reading not enabled Set up the bar code reader to read sample IDs (see
label was not read Section 4.3).
by the internal bar
code reader Sample container placed incorrectly Turn the sample container until its bar code label faces the
in the rack same direction as the rack bar code label, and is visible
through the slot in the sample rack (see Figure A-4 in the
Operator's Guide).
Bar code label applied incorrectly on Apply the bar code label correctly on the sample container
the sample container (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide).
Bar code reader not set up to read Set up the bar code reader parameters to match the symbology
the sample bar code symbology you are using (see Section 4.3).
Bar code symbology or parameters 1. Verify that the bar code symbology and parameters used
not supported on the sample label are supported (see Section 4.3).
2. If the symbology or parameters are not supported, contact
Technical Support.
Number of bar code characters on 1. Check the number of characters entered for the
label does not agree with the number Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology in the Bar Code Reader
of characters specified in the Bar Setup window (see Section 4.3).
Code Reader Setup window (for 2. If necessary, change the number of characters to match
Interleaved 2 of 5 only) the number of characters on the label.
3. If the number of characters match, contact Technical
Support.
Table A-13 Bar Code Reader Troubleshooting

C42385
No response from Incorrect scanning technique 1. Verify the following:

the external bar • The correct screen or window is displayed for the item
code reader you are scanning.
• The correct field is selected.
2. Scan the label a second time (see Section 2.1 in the
Operator's Guide).
Loose connector Be sure that the cable connections (located on the back side of
the external computer) between the keyboard, the external bar
code reader, and the computer are plugged in tightly.
System Software not responding Reboot the PC (see Section 7.3).
External bar code reader not Contact Technical Support.

configured properly
Hardware problem Contact Technical Support.
Table A-13 Bar Code Reader Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
Air in the System

Air bubbles in the fluid lines can lead to poor precision. If you notice air in the lines,
use the following table to troubleshoot the problem.
Air in the fluid Insufficient priming 1. Prime all fluidic components (see Section 5.3).
lines 2. Run the System Check routine.
System prime lost due to a leak in 1. Be sure the connections between the fittings (located on
the fluidic system the left side of the instrument) and the fluids tray (see
Figure 1-6) fit together tightly. Visually inspect the
tubing and fittings for leaks and deposits.
2. Visually inspect the fluidic module tubing and fittings for
leaks and deposits (see Figure 1-5).
3. Inspect the precision pump valve and valve fittings for
leaks and deposits (see Figure 1-3).
4. Leaks and deposits may indicate that the fluidics system
is damaged.
• If you find leaks and deposits, contact Technical
Support for further assistance.
• If you find no leaks or deposits, continue
Kinked tubing in the fluids tray 1. Visually inspect all tubing leading away from the fluids
tray components for kinks (see Figure 1-6). Pay close
attention to the tubing leading away from the substrate
bottle.
possible causes.
2. Straighten any kinks.
3. Prime all fluidic components (see Section 5.3).
• If the results are acceptable, order a new waste filter
assembly and replace the current one.
Table A-14 Troubleshooting Air in the System

C42385
Main Pipettor Problems

Problems with the main pipettor can lead to poor precision. If you notice any leaking
or deposits, use the following table to troubleshoot the problem.
Main pipettor Primary probe partially plugged 1. Look at the Pressure Monitor screen (see Section 5.6) to
leaking determine if a pressure sensor is present, and that
obstruction detection is enabled.
• If the pressure sensor is not present, or if it is present
step 2.
Section 6.3).
Operator's Guide).
Section 7.6).
Loose fitting between the main 1. Open the front panel and top cover (see Section 7.2).
pipettor and precision pump valve 2. Visually inspect the fittings between the primary probe
and precision pump valve for leaks and deposits (see
Figure 7-24).
3. Inspect all fluid fittings to the manifold for leaks and
deposits.
4. Leaks or deposits may indicate that the tubing or fittings
are damaged.
• If you find leaks or deposits, contact Technical Support
for further assistance.
• If you find no leaks or deposits, continue
Table A-15 Main Pipettor Troubleshooting

C42385
Main pipettor Primary probe partially plugged, 1. Look at the Pressure Monitor screen (see Section 5.6) to
dispensing fluid causing the main pipettor to determine if a pressure sensor is present, and that
with excess dispense fluid with too much obstruction detection is enabled.
pressure pressure • If the pressure sensor is not present, or if it is present
step 2.
Section 6.3).
2. Check RV locations 1 and 2 of the RV Shuttle for
crystalline deposits (see Figure 7-13).
• If you find no deposits, continue troubleshooting other
possible causes.
Operator's Guide).
Section 7.6).
Table A-15 Main Pipettor Troubleshooting

C42385
Communication Problems
Use the following table to troubleshoot communication problems between the
external computer (PC) and the instrument, or other systems in your workgroup.
Communication Function that requires Contact Technical Support.

between PC and communication between the PC and
instrument the instrument, such getting a rack
interrupted for or loading supplies, was attempted
more than 30 while the PC was updating the Test
minutes during a Results screen
run, PC locks up
after
communication is
reestablished
Workgroup Loose connection between PC and 1. Be sure that the Access 2 instrument power switch is on.
communication other systems in the workgroup • If the power switch is off, restart the instrument (see
error occurs Section 7.3).
during rebooting
• If the power switch is on, but there is no power to the
process
instrument, refer to the power supply troubleshooting
table (see Table A-10).
2. Check both ends of the cable connecting the PC to the
other systems in your workgroup:
• If the cable connection is loose at either end, connect it
securely.
• If the cable is not loose, contact Technical Support.
3. Reboot the PC (see Section 7.3).
Table A-16 Communications Troubleshooting

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual A.4: Assay Troubleshooting
A.4 Assay Troubleshooting
Assay troubleshooting information provides troubleshooting tables to help you

identify and correct assay-related problems. The information is provided in the
following categories:
• Assay calibration problems
• Quality control (QC) problems
• Patient sample problems
• Test result flags
Before using assay troubleshooting information to troubleshoot assay issues, run the
System Check routine and troubleshoot unexpected results. Running the System
Check routine will help you to identify and correct, or rule out, some system issues as
the cause of your problem. Some examples are:
• Inadequate washing
• Expired or contaminated substrate
• Inaccurate delivery of substrate
• Inaccurate delivery of sample or reagents
For procedural information about the System Check routine, see Section 8.4: System
If you are unable to identify the cause of an assay-related problem, or if the problem
persists after performing the specified troubleshooting procedure(s), contact
Technical Support for assistance.

C42385
A.4: Assay Troubleshooting Access 2 Reference Manual
Assay Calibration Problems

When a calibration fails, the system displays a failure code in the reason field on the
Calibration Data screens. Use the following table to help you troubleshoot the
calibration problem.
For additional information about assay calibration and calibrators, see the following
references:
• For more information about calibration theory, see Chapter 3: Theory of
Operation.
• For more information about reviewing calibrations, see Section 6.2:
Reviewing Calibration Data in the Operator's Guide.
• For more information about setting up calibrators, see Section 6.4: Setting
Up Calibrators in the Operator's Guide.
• For more information about requesting assay calibrations, see Section 3.3:
Calibration Test Requests in the Operator's Guide.
Although Multi-level calibrators pipetted out 1. Be sure that the calibrators are placed in the rack in the
precision is good, of order: proper order.
the calibration • Calibration curve does not ascend 2. Repeat the calibration.
fails for any or descend smoothly.
reason other than
• Calibration cutoff is opposite of
Insuff Data
the expected result.
Expired calibrator 1. Check the expiration date on the calibrator vial(s) or the
Calibrator Setup screen.
2. If the calibrator is expired, add a new, unexpired
calibrator on the Calibrator Setup screen (see Section 6.4
3. Repeat the calibration.
Calibrator unstable or contaminated Repeat the calibration. If possible, repeat with a new set of the
due to improper handling same calibrator lot.
Reagent pack unstable or 1. Unload the reagent pack and load a new reagent pack (see
contaminated due to improper Section 2.7 in the Operator's Guide).
handling • If the lot number of the new reagent pack is different
than the removed pack, recalibrate the assay.
2. For calibration problems, repeat the calibration.
Contaminated substrate supply 1. Contact Technical Support to verify the need to

decontaminate the substrate system.
2. If Technical Support agrees, decontaminate the substrate
system and then verify system performance (see
Section 7.4).
Table A-17 Failed Assay Calibration Troubleshooting

C42385
Although Incorrect calibration information 1. Verify the calibration information on the Calibrator Setup
precision is good, entered during calibrator setup screen.
the calibration 2. If necessary, edit the information on the Calibrator Setup
fails for any screen (see Section 6.4 in the Operator's Guide).
reason other than
Insuff Data
(continued)
Although Wrong calibrator placed in rack 1. Be sure that the correct calibrator is loaded on the rack.
precision is good, 2. Repeat the calibration.
the quantitative
curve is flat or the Wrong reagent pack loaded, or 1. Verify that the reagent pack was loaded by checking the
qualitative result placed in an incorrect position on the Supplies screen. If it is missing, load a reagent pack (see
is No Value; reagent carousel Section 2.7 in the Operator's Guide).
calibration fails 2. If the reagent pack is listed on the screen, verify its
for any reason location by unloading it from the carousel (see
other than Insuff Section 2.7 in the Operator's Guide).
Data
• If the reagent pack is on-board, but is not presented
during this process, contact Technical Support for
assistance.
• If Technical Support confirms a misplaced reagent
pack, retrieve the pack (see Section 2.7 in the
Operator's Guide).
3. Reload the reagent pack after you have verified its
location.
Poor precision, Daily or weekly maintenance not 1. Perform daily (see Section 8.2 in the Operator's Guide)
and calibration performed or weekly (see Section 8.3 in the Operator's Guide)
fails for any maintenance.
reason other than 2. Repeat the calibration.
Insuff Data
Problems with the pipetting system: 1. If the System Check routine results are within the
• Air in the main pipettor fluid lines. expected ranges, the pipetting system is not the cause of
the calibration failure. Continue troubleshooting other
• Wash buffer supply lines kinked.
possible causes.
• Precision pump, valve, fittings, or
tubing damaged and leaking.
A-5).
Problems with the substrate system: 1. If the System Check routine results are within the
• Insufficient supply of substrate. expected ranges, the substrate system is not the cause of
the calibration failure. Continue troubleshooting other
• Air in the substrate lines.
possible causes.
• Kinked substrate system tubing.
• Leak in the substrate system range, troubleshoot the substrate check result (see Table
tubing. A-4).
Reagent gone because it leaked out 1. Load a new reagent pack (see Section 2.7 in the
of the pack during off-board storage Operator's Guide).
Table A-17 Failed Assay Calibration Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
RLUs are too low Reagent pack switch occurred, and 1. Verify that the second reagent pack was loaded by
at one end of the the second reagent pack is missing checking the Supplies screen. If the pack is missing, load
calibration curve, or loaded incorrectly (RLUs drop off a new reagent pack.
and calibration suddenly at the end of the calibration 2. If the second reagent pack is listed on the screen, verify
fails for any curve) its location by unloading it from the carousel (see
reason other than Section 2.7 in the Operator's Guide).
Insuff Data
assistance.
Operator's Guide).
3. Reload the second pack after you have verified its
location.
Calibration fails Quantity of calibrator not sufficient 1. Calculate the correct volume of calibrator needed for the
for the reason for testing (QNS result flag and number of replicates and type of sample container used
Insuff Data event) (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide for equation).
2. Pipette the amount of calibrator calculated in step 1 into
the appropriate sample container.
3. Be sure the rack and rack ID are correct (see Section A.2
5. If the calibration fails again, contact Technical Support
for assistance.
Two or more replicates not 1. Review the Event Log messages (see Section 6.2) for
calculated due to instrument error device errors prior to the calibration failure.
2. Review the Test Results screen for any error messages
(see Section 5.2 in the Operator's Guide).
3. Troubleshoot the device errors (see Section 6.4). If
necessary, contact Technical Support for assistance.
4. After resolving the device errors, repeat the calibration.
Sample container missing or placed 1. Be sure that the sample containers are in the proper order
in incorrect position in the rack in the rack.
Table A-17 Failed Assay Calibration Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
Quality Control Problems

When a quality control result violates an applied QC rule, the Quality Control button
turns red. The button remains red until you review the QC Data screen. Use the
following table to help you troubleshoot problems with your QC results.
For information about reviewing quality control results, see Section 7.2: Reviewing
Quality Control Charts and Data in the Operator's Guide.
Controls violate Daily or weekly maintenance not 1. Perform daily (see Section 8.2 in the Operator's Guide)
applied QC rule performed or weekly (see Section 8.3 in the Operator's Guide)
maintenance.
2. Repeat the test(s).
Wrong quality control loaded onto 1. Load the correct quality control.
the sample rack 2. Repeat the test(s).
Wrong quality control lot number Repeat the test(s) using the correct lot number.
selected for the test
Wrong mean and/or standard 1. Review the QC information using Edit Control F2 from
deviation information entered when the QC Setup screen.
setting up the quality controls 2. If necessary, edit the information (see Section 7.4 in the
Operator's Guide).
Quality control sample type does not 1. Verify that the sample type used matches what is listed on
match QC setup the Test Requests screen (see Section 3.2 in the
Operator's Guide).
2. Verify that the sample type used matches the sample type
set up for the quality control (see Section 7.4 in the
Operator's Guide).
3. If the quality control sample type entered during setup is
incorrect, you must delete the control and set up the
control again using the correct sample type (see
Expired quality control Load new, unexpired quality control, and repeat the test(s).
Quality controls unstable or 1. Prepare new quality controls according to the procedure
contaminated due to incorrect provided by the manufacturer.
handling 2. Load the freshly prepared quality controls and repeat the
test(s).
Quality controls reconstituted 1. Reconstitute new quality controls according to the

incorrectly procedure provided by the manufacturer.
2. Load the freshly reconstituted quality controls and repeat
the test(s).
Table A-18 Quality Control Troubleshooting

C42385
Controls violate Quantity of quality control not 1. Calculate the correct volume of quality control needed for
applied QC rule sufficient for testing (QNS result the number of replicates and type of sample container
(continued) flag and event) used (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide for
equation).
2. Pipette the amount of quality control calculated in step 1
into the appropriate sample container.
5. If the test(s) fail again, contact Technical Support for
assistance.
Quality controls evaporating from 1. Load a fresh aliquot of each quality control.
being on the instrument too long 2. Repeat the test(s). Be sure the controls are pipetted into
the RVs within one hour of loading onto the instrument.
Be sure controls from 3 mL sample containers are
pipetted into the RVs within two hours of loading.
Wrong reagent pack loaded, or 1. Verify that the reagent pack was loaded by checking the
placed in an incorrect position on the Supplies screen. If it is missing, load a reagent pack.
reagent carousel 2. If the reagent pack is listed on the screen, verify its
location by unloading it from the carousel (see
assistance.
Operator's Guide).
location.
Expired reagent pack 1. Check the reagent pack expiration date on the Reagent
Inventory screen (see Section 2.8 in the Operator's
Guide).
2. Unload the expired reagent pack and load a new one (see
• If the lot number of the new reagent pack is different
than the expired pack, recalibrate the assay.
Table A-18 Quality Control Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
Controls violate Wrong sample container and/or rack Load the samples using appropriate sample containers and
applied QC rule racks. Be sure that the sample containers are in a rack with the
(continued) correct rack ID (see Section A.1 and see Section A.2 in the
Operator's Guide).
Expired assay calibration 1. Check the Reagent Pack button on the Supplies screen
(see Section 2.1 in the Operator's Guide). If the lot
number is red, the calibration has expired.
2. View the test results (see Section 5.2 in the Operator's
Guide). Any test results calculated with an expired
calibration will be flagged.
3. Recalibrate the assay.
Quality controls (QC) not run after 1. Run QC (see Section 3.4 in the Operator's Guide).
preventive maintenance or repair 2. Evaluate any out-of-range QC results according to your
established laboratory procedures.
3. Troubleshoot any test result flags, and recalibrate the
assay (see Section 3.3 in the Operator's Guide) if
necessary.
4. Repeat the test.
Substrate not equilibrated to room The substrate must be at room temperature for specified
temperature when loaded on the period of time before it is loaded.
system For more information about the substrate, refer to the reagent
instructions for use.
Increasing values Quality controls evaporating from 1. Load a fresh aliquot of each quality control.
across the run being on the instrument too long 2. Repeat the test(s). Be sure the controls are pipetted into
the RVs within one hour of loading onto the instrument.
Be sure controls from 3 mL sample containers are
pipetted into the RVs within two hours of loading.
Table A-18 Quality Control Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
Patient Sample Problems

Use the following table to troubleshoot problems with your patient sample test results.
If a special circumstance exists for a test result, the Access 2 system will code the
result with a flag. The flags are either fatal (no calculated result), or non-fatal (the
result was calculated, but a condition exists for that result). You can use these flags to
assist you in the troubleshooting process.
For more information about test result flags and their meaning, see Test Result Flags
in this chapter.
Unexpected Incorrect patient sample type Refer to the reagent instructions for usefor the appropriate
sample results sample types for each assay.
Patient sample handled incorrectly Be sure that sample is stored and handled according to proper
laboratory procedures. Refer to individual assay reagent
instructions for use for proper sample handling instructions.
Microclots present in the serum 1. Spin the sample again or use a serum filter to separate the
sample serum from any microclots.
Quantity of patient sample not 1. Calculate the correct volume of patient sample needed for
sufficient for testing (QNS result the number of replicates and type of sample container
flag and event) used (see Section A.2 in the Operator's Guide for
equation).
2. Pipette the amount of quality control calculated in step 1
into the appropriate sample container.
5. If the test(s) fail again, contact Technical Support for
assistance.
Patient samples evaporating from 1. Load a fresh aliquot of each patient sample.
being on the instrument too long 2. Repeat the test(s). Be sure the sample is pipetted into the
RVs within one hour of loading it onto the instrument. Be
sure sample from 3 mL sample containers is pipetted into
the RVs within two hours of loading.
Table A-19 Patient Sample Troubleshooting

C42385
Unexpected Wrong reagent pack loaded, or 1. Verify that the reagent pack was loaded by checking the
sample results placed in an incorrect position on the Supplies screen. If it is missing, load a reagent pack.
(continued) reagent carousel 2. If the reagent pack is listed on the screen, verify its
assistance.
Operator's Guide).
location.
Expired reagent pack 1. Check the reagent pack expiration date on the Reagent
Inventory screen (see Section 2.8 in the Operator's
Guide).
necessary.
4. Repeat the test.
Table A-19 Patient Sample Troubleshooting (continued)

C42385
Unexpected Partial bottles of substrate combined 1. Change the substrate bottle and prime the substrate (see
sample results Section 2.4 in the Operator's Guide).
(continued) 2. Repeat the test(s).
Daily or weekly maintenance not 1. Perform daily (see Section 8.2 in the Operator's Guide)
performed or weekly (see Section 8.3 in the Operator's Guide)
maintenance.
Wrong sample container and/or rack Load the samples using appropriate sample containers and
racks. Be sure that the sample containers are in a rack with the
correct rack ID (see Section A.1 and see Section A.2 in the
Operator's Guide).
Sample values are Patient samples evaporating from 1. Load a fresh aliquot of each patient sample.
too high being on the instrument too long 2. Repeat the test(s). Be sure the sample is pipetted into the
Low sample value Incorrect dilution factor 1. If the sample result was generated with an automated
flag dilution (for example, the Diluted βhCG assay), repeat
the sample in the standard assay format (Total βhCG
assay).
2. If the results are still too high, contact Technical Support.
Patient sample handled incorrectly Be sure that sample is stored and handled according to proper
laboratory procedures. Refer to individual assay reagent
instructions for use for proper sample handling instructions.
Increased assay Wrong reagent pack loaded, or 1. Verify that the reagent pack was loaded by checking the
variability/poor placed in an incorrect position on the Supplies screen. If it is missing, load a reagent pack.
precision reagent carousel 2. If the reagent pack is listed on the screen, verify its
assistance.
Operator's Guide).
location.

C42385
Unexpected shift Expired reagent pack 1. Check the reagent pack expiration date on the Reagent
in assay results Inventory screen (see Section 2.8 in the Operator's
Guide).
necessary.
4. Repeat the test.
Wash buffer contaminated 1. Contact Technical Support to verify the need to rinse the
wash buffer reservoir.
2. If Technical Support confirms, rinse the wash buffer
reservoir (see Section 7.4).
3. If the System Check results are acceptable:
• Recalibrate the assay.
• Run controls and repeat the test(s).
4. If the System Check results are not acceptable, contact
Technical Support.
Increasing values Patient samples evaporating from 1. Load a fresh aliquot of each patient sample.
across the run being on the instrument too long 2. Repeat the test(s). Be sure the sample is pipetted into the

C42385
Test Result Flags

Use the following tables to troubleshoot fatal (no calculated result) or non-fatal (the
result was calculated, but a condition exists for that result) test result flags.
NOTE
The system may print the same test result flag twice on a sample report. Ignore
the duplicate flag. For example, if the flag NCRNCR appears on the sample
report, review the Reference Manual or Help system system for information
about the NCR flag.
Fatal Flags
Fatal Flag Description Corrective Action
CCR A result could not be calculated because: 1. Take one of the following actions:
• One of the tests included in a derived • For results other than derived results, skip to step 2.
result formula (see Section 4.6) did not • For derived results, review each test result used in the
produce a result. derived result formula. If a result failed, troubleshoot
• A confirmatory test result could not be according to the flag for that result.
calculated. Usually this occurs because 2. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the
the samples for the qualitative and error events with a similar date and time to this event (see
confirmatory tests were not aspirated at Section 6.3).
the same time (see Section 3.3).
3. Repeat the test.
• Another error prevented the system
• For a derived result, repeat all tests included in the
from calculating a result.
derived result formula.
• For a confirmatory result, repeat the confirmatory and
qualitative tests.
CLT An obstruction was detected. 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the
error events with a similar date and time to this event (see
Section 6.3).
2. Repeat the test.
Table A-20 Fatal Flags

C42385
IND • For sandwich assays, which use 1. For IND flagged results which meet the following
positive slope calibration curves, the criteria, dilute and rerun the sample:
result is at the low end of the • The result is on a competitive assay, and
concentration curve and cannot be
• Sample dilution is allowed for the assay, and
distinguished from a system failure
because the RLU reading is too low. • The sample RLU is low.
• For competitive assays, which use See the reagent instructions for use to determine the assay
negative slope calibration curves, the type and whether sample dilution is allowed.
result is at either: 2. Rule out a system problem by reviewing the Event Log
• The high end of the concentration for error events with a date and time shortly before this
curve and cannot be distinguished event. Troubleshoot accordingly.
from a system failure because the 3. If you have ruled out a system problem and the IND flag
RLU reading is too low, or event is the only issue, recalibrating the affected assay
• The low end of the concentration may resolve the problem.
curve and cannot be distinguished • Recalibrate the assay using a new reagent pack and a
from a system failure because the new set of calibrators.
RLU reading is too high. • Run QC.
• Repeat the test on the affected sample.
If IND flags persist, contact Technical Support.
NCR No calibration data existed for the reagent 1. Calibrate the assay (see Section 3.3 in the Operator's
lot when the result was processed. Guide).
QSD Insufficient reagent volume was 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the
dispensed into an RV. error events with a similar date and time to this event (see
Section 6.3).
2. Run cancelled tests again.
QNS The sample volume is insufficient. 1. Follow the troubleshooting instructions for the QNS
Additional tests will not be scheduled for event in the Event Log (see Section 6.4).
this sample. Tests already scheduled will 2. Repeat the test(s).
be completed.
RLU The relative light units (RLUs) are 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the
outside the acceptable luminometer error events with a similar date and time to this event (see
measuring range. Section 6.3).
SYS A device error occurred during 1. Review the Event Log and troubleshoot according to the
processing. error events with a similar date and time to this event (see
Section 6.3).
Table A-20 Fatal Flags (continued)

C42385
TRI The temperature of the incubator was 1. Check the incubator temperature on the Maintenance
outside the acceptable limits. All tests Review screen. If the temperature is outside the
being incubated when the temperature acceptable limits, periodically monitor the incubator
was outside limits are flagged. temperature on this screen until it is within the acceptable
limits.
• If the system was rebooted or instrument covers were
recently opened, you may need to wait up to 30 minutes
for the temperature to normalize.
• If the system was recently restarted, you may need to
wait up to 1 hour for the temperature to normalize.
2. When the incubator temperature is within the acceptable
limits, repeat the test(s).
3. If the temperature does not normalize, or if the problem
TRS The temperature of the substrate was 1. Check the substrate temperature on the Maintenance
outside the acceptable limits when it was Review screen. If the temperature is outside the
dispensed. acceptable limits, periodically monitor the substrate
temperature on this screen until it is within the acceptable
limits.
2. When the substrate temperature is within the acceptable
limits, repeat the test(s).
TRW The temperature of the wash/read 1. Check the wash/read carousel temperature on the
carousel was outside the acceptable Maintenance Review screen. If the temperature is outside
limits. All tests with RVs in the the acceptable limits, periodically monitor the wash/read
wash/read carousel when the temperature carousel temperature on this screen until it is within the
was outside limits are flagged. acceptable limits.
2. When the wash/read carousel temperature is within the
acceptable limits, repeat the test(s).
Table A-20 Fatal Flags (continued)

C42385
Non-Fatal Flags
Non-Fatal
Description Corrective Action
Flag
CEX The calibration curve or cut-off value is 1. Recalibrate the assay (see Section 3.3 in the Operator's
expired. Guide).
CRH The result is above the upper limit of the This is a valid test result. No corrective action is necessary.
critical range.
Not applicable for QC or calibrations.
CRL The result is below the lower limit of the This is a valid test result. No corrective action is necessary.
critical range.
EXS The substrate is expired. 1. Change the substrate bottle from the Supplies screen (see
GRY For qualitative assays, the result is within This is a valid test result. No corrective action is necessary.
the specified gray zone.
LEX The reagent pack lot is expired. 1. Unload the expired reagent pack and load a new one (see
LRH The result is above the upper limit of the 1. Review the result.
LIS range. The system does not send 2. Take one of the following actions:
results with this flag to the LIS.
• Send the result to the LIS manually (see Section 5.3 in
Notes: the Operator's Guide).
• This flag is displayed only when the • Delete the result (see Section 5.3 in the Operator's
Auto-Send to LIS option is set to Guide) and repeat the test(s).
Verify.
• This flag is for quantitative assays,
semi-quantitative assays, and derived
results only.
LRL The result is below the lower limit of the 1. Review the result.
LIS range. The system does not send 2. Take one of the following actions:
results with this flag to the LIS.
• Send the result to the LIS manually (see Section 5.3 in
Notes: the Operator's Guide).
• This flag is displayed only when the • Delete the result (see Section 5.3 in the Operator's
Auto-Send to LIS option is set to Guide) and repeat the test(s).
Verify.
• This flag is for quantitative assays,
semi-quantitative assays, and derived
results only.
LOW The result is lower than the minimum No corrective action is necessary.
reportable result value defined in the
APF.
Table A-21 Non-Fatal Flags

C42385
Non-Fatal
Description Corrective Action
Flag
ORH The result is above the upper limit of the No corrective action is necessary.
reference range.
ORL The result is below the lower limit of the No corrective action is necessary.
reference range.
OVR The calculated concentration is above the 1. Review the Event Log for error events with a similar date
highest or most concentrated calibrator. and time to this event (see Section 6.2).
This flag is only used for quantitative and • If events occurred, troubleshoot (see Section 6.3).
semi-quantitative assays.
2. Take one of the following actions:
• If events occurred, and you performed troubleshooting
procedures, run controls and then repeat the test.
- If the controls are in range, and the test result is
reported as greater than the value of the highest
calibrator (>X), you may be able to dilute the
sample. To identify whether the assay allows
dilutions, see the reagent instructions for use.
- If the controls are not in range, follow the QC
troubleshooting instructions.
• If no events occurred, take one of the following actions:
- If the test result is reported as >X, you may be able
to dilute the sample. To identify whether the assay
allows dilutions, see the reagent instructions for use.
If dilutions are allowed, dilute and repeat the test.
- If dilutions are not allowed, no further action is
necessary.
3. If you have questions about the result, or if the problem
PEX The open pack stability time has elapsed 1. Unload the expired reagent pack and load a new one (see
for the reagent pack. The system Section 2.7 in the Operator's Guide).
measures this from the time it first • If the lot number of the new reagent pack is different
punctures the pack. than the expired pack, recalibrate the assay.
QCF A quality control violates one or more 1. Display the QC Chart and Data screen to review which
QC rules. criteria is not met.
2. Follow the QC troubleshooting instructions in
Section A.4: Assay Troubleshooting.
QEX The quality control lot is expired. 1. Add a new, unexpired quality control (see Section 7.4 in
RFX The result is from a reflex test. This is a valid test result. No corrective action is necessary.
Table A-21 Non-Fatal Flags (continued)

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual Glossary
Glossary
%CV
See coefficient of variation (CV).
A
acceptance limits
For qualitative assays, the APF defines acceptance limits for the RLUs obtained for means and replicates
of each calibrator. If the RLUs obtained are outside these limits, the assay calibration fails.
The APF defines acceptance limits for the %CV of the RLUs obtained for replicates of the S0 (zero)
calibrator for some quantitative assays. If the %CV obtained is outside these limits, the calibration fails.
active calibration
The assay calibration currently being used for reporting assay results.
ADC
See A/D converter (ADC).
A/D converter (ADC)
A device that converts the analog signals from the instrument into a binary coded form for the computer.
alkaline phosphatase
An enzyme that acts on a wide variety of organic compounds by removing a phosphate group
(dephosphorylation). The enzyme label used in Access 2 system assays to produce chemiluminescence
when substrate is added.
analyte
The specific substance in the sample (blood, urine, or other body fluid) that is being measured or
otherwise evaluated.
analytical module
The part of the instrument that includes the RV loader, incubator belt, wash/read carousel, and
luminometer.
antibody
A protein in body fluid that is formed in response to, and is capable of binding with, an antigen.
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Glossary-1

C42385
Glossary Access 2 Reference Manual
antibody detection immunoassay

An assay that detects the presence of an antibody in a patient sample. The antibody binds to the
paramagnetic particles, and is detected by an enzyme-labeled antibody that binds to the antibody captured
on the particle. For this assay, the measured RLUs are proportional to the amount of antibody in the
sample.
antigen
A protein or other molecule that initiates the production of antibodies by an organism.
APF
See assay protocol file (APF).
aspirate probe
A probe that aspirates fluids from RVs after the instrument separates the paramagnetic particles.
assay protocol file (APF)
A software file that provides processing instructions specific for each assay. An updated APF may be
supplied by Beckman Coulter, Inc. to introduce new assays or change existing assay protocols.
assigned concentration
The stated concentration of analyte in calibration material, as provided by the manufacturer. For contrast,
see calculated concentration.
auto sample ID
A system function used to simplify manual test request entry. When activated, the system automatically
assigns sequential sample IDs to samples. After you enter the initial sample ID, the system increments
each subsequent sample ID by 1.
B
bar code
A computer-readable array of varying width parallel rectangular bars and spaces. Used on reagent packs,
substrate bottles, calibrator cards, rack labels, and sample labels to permit the scanning of data into the
system using the internal bar code reader or the external bar code reader.
bar code reader
See internal sample bar code reader or external bar code reader.
batch request
A system function used to simplify manual test request entry. When activated, the system automatically
selects the same test IDs to run on each additional sample ID you enter.
baud rate
The unit of measure of data transmission speed.
board
See printed circuit board (PCB).
bound analyte
The components of an assay that are bound to a paramagnetic particle to form an immune complex.
Glossary-2 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

C42385
broadcast
A download of information that is initiated by the laboratory information system (LIS).
C
calculated concentration
The concentration of analyte in calibration material, as measured and calculated by the system. For
contrast, see assigned concentration.
calibrators
A set of solutions containing precisely measured amounts of analyte spanning a range of concentrations.
You run calibrators on the system to establish a calibration curve or cutoff. The system uses the curve or
cutoff to determine patient and quality control test results for quantitative, semi-quantitative assays, or
qualitative assays.
CARE kit
A parts and repair kit that contains spare instrument parts.
carousel module
The part of the instrument that includes the sample carousel, reagent carousel, cup/tube detector, and
central processing unit (CPU)
The part of a computer or instrument that processes the data stored in memory. Both the external
computer (PC) and the instrument computer have CPUs.
chemiluminescence
The emission of light resulting from a chemical reaction.
Citranox cleaning solution
An industrial solvent used to clean appropriate parts of the instrument according to documented Access 2
procedures.
clean check
A part of the System Check routine that evaluates how effectively the instrument washes the aspirate
probes. The clean check cannot be requested as an individual check.
client
A PC in an Access 2 workgroup of multiple instruments that is not the server. A workgroup can have up
to three clients and one server. See also server.
coefficient of variation (CV)
A measure of the relative precision of a group of data points. The CV is calculated by dividing the
standard deviation by the mean. Calculating the CV allows you to measure the precision of different sets
of data that have different means. The CV is often calculated as the %CV, which is the CV * 100.
cold boot
To reboot the instrument using the power switch. See also reboot and warm boot.

C42385
competitive binding assay

An assay in which a labeled analyte (the assay reagent) and an unlabeled analyte (antigen in the test
sample) compete for a limited number of binding sites on the binding reagent.
compound expression
A reflex condition that is made up of two or more expressions connected by AND or OR. See also reflex
test.
concentration
The amount of analyte in a sample. See also assigned concentration or calculated concentration.
confirmatory test
An assay that is run to confirm the results of a qualitative assay. You can configure a confirmatory assay
to run automatically as a reflex test.
conjugate
The antigen or antibody reagent that has an enzyme (alkaline phosphatase) label attached to it. The
substrate reacts with the conjugate present in bound immune complexes, which results in
chemiluminescence.
console
See personal computer (PC).
Contrad 70 cleaning solution
A solution used to clean or decontaminate appropriate parts of the instrument according to documented
Access 2 procedures.
control
See quality controls (QC).
corrupted
An item that is altered from its correct or original form.
critical range
A range of results determined by your laboratory, which may depend on demographics, lab policy, or
other factors. You can configure critical ranges by test. The system flags results that are out of range. See
also reference range and LIS range.
crosstalk count
A check to verify that light emitted by a sample on the wash/read carousel is not influencing the test
results of an adjacent sample. When crosstalk counts exceed expected limits, an event is posted in the
Event Log.
cutoff value
The level of response which distinguishes reactive from non-reactive (positive from negative) qualitative
assays.
CV
See coefficient of variation (CV).

C42385
D
D/A converter (DAC)
A device that converts digital pulses into analog signals.
DAC
See D/A converter (DAC).
daily maintenance
The inspection, cleaning, and priming procedures you perform every day on the Access 2 system.
dark counts
The background light that is present in the instrument when there is no RV in front of the luminometer.
Dark counts are measured in RLUs. High dark counts affect results.
dead volume
The amount of sample in a sample container that is not available for processing and must be included in
the sufficient sample volume calculation.
deionized water (DI water)
The purified water created by removing ions through ion exchange. It is used to clean appropriate parts of
the instrument according to documented Access 2 procedures.
demographics
The characteristics of patients, especially their age, sex, weight, height, and other physical attributes.
derived result
A calculated result that is generated when a test result is operated on by a derived result formula. Derived
result formulas are either predefined in the APF or are set up according to laboratory preference. Derived
results are included on the test result reports and they can be sent to the LIS.
detection phase
The part of an assay that occurs when the immune complexes that are bound to paramagnetic particles
(the solid phase) are detected by adding substrate and measuring the resulting chemiluminescence.
dioxetane
A chemiluminescent compound that is activated by alkaline phosphatase.
dispense probe
A probe that dispenses wash buffer into RVs to wash the paramagnetic particles.
distilled water
The purified water created by successive evaporation and condensation. It is used to clean appropriate
parts of the instrument according to documented Access 2 procedures.
download
The process of transmitting data to the Access 2 system from a host computer, usually a laboratory
information system (LIS).

C42385
drift correction factor

A correction factor applied to the luminometer output, which accounts for small changes to the
photomultiplier tube as it ages.
To determine the appropriate drift correction factor, the luminometer reads the amount of light produced
by an LED (light emitting diode) on the wash/read carousel. The reading is taken at pre-programmed
intervals, after which the system compares this observed value to the LED target value retained in
memory. The system then calculates the drift correction factor by dividing the LED target value by the
observed LED value.
duty cycle
The relationship between a device’s operating and rest times. Also, the repeatable operations under
different loads. For example, the amount of time a temperature control device operates in order to
maintain temperature for a device, compared to the overall operating time of the instrument. A duty cycle
of 23 for the incubator means that the incubator heater runs 23 percent of the time the instrument is on in
order to maintain the correct incubation temperature.
E
e format
A method of expressing numbers with many digits by placing the decimal to the right of the first single
digit, by rounding the last digit to the right of the decimal, and by indicating the number of places right (-)
or left (+) that the decimal shifted from the original number. For example, the 11-character number
12345678.99 is expressed as the 10-character number 1.235e+007 in e format. The Access 2 system uses
e format in some calculated fields.
electronics module
The part of the instrument that includes the power supply, reset button, interlock switch, reaction vessel
load door alarm, internal hard drive, 3.5-inch disk drive, and printed circuit boards.
error band
The calculated acceptable limits of variability around a calibration curve.
event details
The technical information you can display for an event. Technical Support may use the event details to
troubleshoot the instrument if you contact them for assistance.
Event Log
A list of events the Access 2 system generates as it monitors the status of various system parameters. An
event can be one of three types: Information, Caution, or Warning.
external bar code reader
The Access 2 peripheral device that reads printed bar codes on calibrator cards, substrate labels, and
reagent packs. You can also use the external bar code reader as a backup to the internal bar code reader for
reading sample IDs and rack IDs. The instrument is equipped with an external handheld bar code reader
or an external bar code wand. For some Access 2 systems the handheld bar code reader also operates in a
hands-free mode.

C42385
F
fatal event
A condition that stops the Access 2 system, or a portion of the system, and must be corrected before the
system can continue processing samples.
fatal flag
A flag applied to a test result when the system encounters a condition that may cause the result to be
invalid. The system suppresses these test results.
filter
A system function used to find the data stored in the Access 2 system database that fits a selected set of
parameters. You can apply a different filter or change the set of parameters to reduce or expand the
number of items the system displays.
firmware
A software program that is contained permanently on a hardware device. For example, the SMC board
contains firmware for the Access 2 stepper motor controller.
flags
The codes the Access 2 system attaches to test results when a special circumstance requires your
attention. Also, a mechanism that indicates to a sensor that a device is in a specified position.
fluidic module
The part of the instrument that includes the vacuum pump, wash pump, vacuum reservoir bottle, wash
valve, substrate pump/valve/heater, probe wash tower, probe wash valve, peristaltic waste pump, and
fluids tray.
G
gray zone
A range of values (up to 20%) above and/or below the cutoff value. The system can be configured so that
it flags (GRY) results in the gray zone. The GRY flag indicates that the result is near the cutoff.
H
heterogeneous assay
An assay that requires the separation of bound labeled material from unbound labeled material.
home position
A set starting position for any instrument device.
host query
An information request from the Access 2 system to the laboratory information system (LIS) for new test
requests. When a rack is loaded without test requests, and host query is enabled, the Access 2 system
sends a host query instead of waiting for a download.

C42385
I
immune complex
An antigen and antibody that are physically bound together.
immunoassay
An analytical method that depends on the antigen-antibody reaction to detect the substance being
measured.
initialization
A routine that resets the Access 2 system software, and brings all devices to a known safe state.
Initialization prepares the system for further processing.
input/output (I/O)
A transfer of data between the central processing unit and a peripheral device.
instrument software
A software program that controls the motion of devices in the instrument’s processing modules.
interlock switch
A safety feature designed to protect you from injury. When you open the front panel, the interlock switch
disengages, which cuts off power to the main pipettor.
internal reagent bar code reader
A device in the Access 2 instrument carousel module that reads the printed bar codes on reagent packs
(available on instruments with serial numbers ≥570000).
internal sample bar code reader
A device in the Access 2 instrument carousel module that reads the printed bar codes on sample
containers and racks.
L
laboratory information system (LIS)
A computer system that manages the entire workflow in a clinical laboratory from the point of specimen
collection to the creation of final patient reports. The LIS can interface with the Access 2 system to
provide test request information and receive results.
last run calibration
The results of the most recent calibration test request that either passed or failed.
LED
An abbreviation for light emitting diode. See light emitting diode (LED).
Levey-Jennings chart
A graphical representation of quality control test results that shows each result as a point on, above, or
below the expected mean result in distances measured in units of standard deviation (SD) between -3SD
and +3SD. Also called a Shewhart chart.

C42385
light emitting diode (LED)

A semiconductor diode that emits light of a constant wavelength and intensity throughout its life when a
voltage is applied.
The Access 2 system uses an LED as an on-board reference standard to maintain luminometer reading
consistency. The LED is located on the wash/read carousel, directly across from the luminometer, and is
automatically read at pre-programmed intervals. The system calculates a correction factor based on the
LED reading and applies this factor to all raw RLU measurements.
liquid waste bottle
The plastic container on the fluids tray that holds waste fluid removed from the instrument.
LIS
See laboratory information system (LIS).
LIS interface
The connection between the Access 2 system and the LIS.
LIS range
A range of results to be sent directly to the LIS, as determined by your laboratory and configured by test.
The system holds out-of-range results for your review. See also critical range and reference range.
LIS workpool
A list of tests that have been requested by the LIS, but that the system cannot schedule because the
associated samples are not on board any instrument in the workgroup.
luminometer
The photomultiplier tube (PMT) in the analytical module that measures the amount of light in relative
light units (RLUs) produced by the chemiluminescent reaction in a reaction vessel.
M
main pipettor
A device in the main pipettor module that transfers measured volumes of samples and reagents to reaction
vessels and prepares on-board sample dilutions (if necessary). See also primary probe.
main pipettor module
The part of the instrument that includes the precision pump, precision valve, pipettor gantry, pressure
monitor, and main pipettor (ultrasonic transducer and primary probe).
maintenance log
A record you use to document the completion of daily and weekly maintenance procedures.
math model
The statistical formula the Access 2 system uses to fit an assay’s calibration data to a curve.
methanol
A light, volatile, and flammable poisonous liquid alcohol (CH3OH). It is used to clean appropriate parts
of the instrument according to documented Access 2 procedures.

C42385
minimum sample volume

The amount of sample required to minimize the effects of evaporation and to allow for factors that can
cause variations in sample height, such as clot or gel height, in a sample container.
N
non-fatal event
A condition that does not stop the Access 2 system, but is posted to the event log, and should be examined
before the system continues processing samples.
non-fatal flag
A flag applied to a test result when the system encounters a notable condition. The system does not
suppress these test results.
non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
A data storage area that maintains critical system information. The NVRAM is backed up by a battery, so
the information is maintained when the power is off.
NVRAM
See non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM).
O
obstruction detection
A process performed by the pressure monitor in the main pipettor module to detect whether sufficient
sample is being aspirated, or whether there is an obstruction in the sample, such as a clot. A test requested
on a sample with an obstruction will be canceled and marked with the fatal flag CLT. If two consecutive
obstructions are detected for the same sample, all tests for that sample will be canceled.
onboard
The location of the rack or sample when it is in the instrument.
override
A feature that allows the system to start sample processing using expired supplies or calibrations listed on
the Supplies Required screen. The system flags tests results obtained using expired supplies or
calibrations.
P
paramagnetic
The ability to react to magnetism without holding residual magnetism.
paramagnetic particles
The particles used as the solid phase in assays to capture and then separate bound from unbound analyte.
Commonly made from ferrous oxide surrounded by cellulose or polystyrene and milled to a particle size
of 1-3µm.
PC
An abbreviation for personal computer. See personal computer (PC).

C42385
PCB
An abbreviation for printed circuit board. See printed circuit board (PCB).
peripheral module
The part of the instrument that includes the external computer, keyboard, mouse, monitor, printer, and
external bar code reader.
personal computer (PC)
The external computer that is connected to an Access 2 system. The PC has its own 3.5-inch disk drive
(on some instruments), CD-ROM or DVD drive, modem, and tape drive or USB flash drive. The
following peripheral devices are connected to the PC: touch screen monitor, keyboard, printer, mouse,
and external bar code reader.
plot
The method of marking a point on a grid using coordinates.
precision profile
The method the Access 2 system uses to determine if a quantitative or semi-quantitative assay’s
calibration meets the determined acceptance criteria.
previous active calibration
The calibration that was previously the active calibration.
primary probe
The probe through which the main pipettor transfers sample, reagents, or wash buffer into RVs. See also
main pipettor.
primary test
The test name on a reagent pack. Some assays can provide a secondary test from the same reagent pack,
such as Folate (primary) and RBC Folate (secondary).
prime (priming)
To fill the fluidic lines with liquid and eliminate air in the lines, which ensures that the system dispenses
and aspirates accurate volumes.
prime fluidics
The process of filling the instrument’s fluidic lines with liquid.
printed circuit board (PCB)
A flat board that holds silicon chips and other electronic components.
Q
QC
See quality controls (QC).
QC Rules
See Westgard QC rules.

C42385
qualitative assay
An assay that uses a cutoff value to classify a test result as reactive or non-reactive for the analyte. See
also cutoff value.
quality control (QC) calculations
The comparison of results to the acceptable range of expected values you entered during QC setup. QC
calculations include the mean (average) test result value, the standard deviation (SD) from the mean, and
the percent coefficient of variation (%CV).
quality controls (QC)
Samples of known reactivity, composed of a material similar to patient samples, which are run along with
patient samples to monitor system performance.
quantitative assay
An assay that uses a calibration curve to convert the measured response in RLUs to analyte concentration,
and expresses the results in incremental units.
R
rack
A device used to load samples onto the instrument. Each rack holds up to ten samples, and the instrument
holds up to six racks. The rack ID identifies the type of sample containers in the rack.
reaction vessel (RV)
The container where the chemical reaction between patient sample and assay-specific reagents occurs.
reaction vessel load door alarm
An alarm that sounds when you attempt to open the reaction vessel load door when the instrument is not
prepared for loading RVs. The alarm does not sound when you follow the proper procedure for loading
RVs.
reagent
A substance used to perform an assay. Access 2 system reagents include conjugate, paramagnetic
particles, and other assay-specific reagents such as antigens or antibodies specific for the analyte being
detected, stripping agents, or buffered protein solutions.
reagent inventory
A system process that defines and tracks the reagent name, lot number, serial number, number of tests
left, expiration date, and reagent carousel slot number (if the pack is on-board the instrument) for each
reagent pack.
reagent pack
A package that holds up to five assay-specific reagents in separate compartments. Reagent packs are
loaded on the instrument in the reagent carousel.
reagent pack monitoring
A measuring process performed by the pressure monitor when the main pipettor transfers reagent from a
reagent pack to an RV. Reagent pack monitoring may cancel a test when reagent packs are identified as
supplying insufficient reagent to complete the test. The process is intended to prevent errors from reagent

C42385
packs that are missing, improperly loaded, or used on more than one instrument (when not in a
workgroup).
real-time
In the same time frame. Real-time responses or file updates occur immediately. For example, when
diagnosing an LIS transmission problem, you can view LIS messages on the LIS Diagnostics screen in
real-time (as they happen).
reboot
The process of restarting the system software and the instrument. See cold boot or warm boot.
receiver
The device that receives data from the sender, according to communications protocols. The receiver may
be an Access 2 system or the LIS.
reference range
The range or expected test result values for a normal demographic population, as configured by your lab.
The system flags results that are out of range. See also critical range and LIS range.
reflex test
A test that the system runs automatically in response to one or more test results that meet predefined
conditions. For example, if the total ßhCG test result is greater than 1000, then the system runs the diluted
ßhCG test without needing additional information being entered into the system.
relative light unit (RLU)
A unit of measure used to express the amount of light reaching the luminometer.
replicate
The multiplier for the number of times a test is run on the system. Tests are run in replicates of 1, 2, 3, and
so on.
RLU
See relative light unit (RLU).
RV
See reaction vessel (RV).
RV waste bag
The container that collects the used RVs. The RV waste bag contents are considered biohazardous waste.
S
sample
The material loaded onto the instrument for processing.
sample processing
The process of performing requested tests on samples. Sample processing begins after you verify
supplies, load samples, enter or verify test request information, and select Run.
sample type
The type of body fluid being analyzed, such as serum, urine, or plasma.

C42385
sandwich immunoassay
An assay in which unlabeled analyte (antigen in the test sample) is sandwiched between an antibody
bound to the paramagnetic particles and a labeled antibody (conjugate).
secondary test
An alternative format for a test that uses the same reagent pack as the primary test. For example, RBC
Folate is a secondary test for Folate.
semi-quantitative assay
An assay that uses a calibration curve to convert the measured response in RLUs to analyte concentration
and may express the results in interpretive units, such as reactive, non-reactive, or equivocal.
sender
The device that sends (transmits) data to the receiver, according to communication protocols. The sender
may be an Access 2 system or the LIS.
separator gel
The gel in a sample container that separates blood from serum when the sample is centrifuged.
server
The PC that allocates resources for a workgroup, such as storing files and managing workgroup
communication with the LIS. See also client.
SMC
See stepper motor controller (SMC).
solid phase
The part of an assay that occurs when the immune complexes bind to paramagnetic particles and are then
separated from unbound materials.
sort order
The order that items are displayed on a screen or on a report. For example, you can sort test results by
sample ID, then by completion time in ascending (or descending) sort order.
Special Clean
A maintenance routine that prevents the buildup of debris on the primary probe and aspirate probes. The
Special Clean routine is run when the instrument is shut down, restarted, or as instructed by a technical
spooling
The acronym for simultaneous peripheral operations on-line. Spooling refers to loading a document to
print in a special area in memory where the printer can access the document at its own rate. You can then
perform other operations on the system while the printing takes place in the background. Spooling also
lets you make multiple print requests without waiting for each one to finish before requesting the next
one.
stepper motor controller (SMC)
A programmable device that translates motion commands from the central processing unit into signals
that are usable by the stepper motors to move devices within the instrument.

C42385
substrate
A substance acted upon by an enzyme. In an Access Immunoassay system assay, the substrate is a
dioxetane-based chemiluminescent compound that emits light in response to the amount of alkaline
phosphatase (enzyme) to which it is exposed.
substrate check
An individual system check that evaluates the performance of the instrument’s substrate dispense system
and luminometer.
substrate probe
A probe that dispenses substrate into the RVs to initiate a chemiluminescent reaction.
substrate ratio
A calculation based on results from the substrate check. A failed substrate ratio is indicative of a
compromised waste system.
substrate : washed ratio
A calculation based on results from the substrate and washed checks. A failed substrate : washed ratio
could be caused by an improperly performed System Check routine, or by contaminated substrate.
supplies
The consumables that can be depleted and the waste containers that must be emptied or replaced.
Consumables are wash buffer, substrate, RVs, and reagent packs. Waste containers are the liquid waste
bottle and the RV waste bag.
System Check
A maintenance routine that verifies the wash efficiency and pipetting precision of the Access 2 system.
The System Check routine is part of weekly maintenance but may be performed more frequently or as
part of a troubleshooting procedure.
system mode
The operational state of the Access 2 system displayed in the upper left corner of each screen. System
modes include Ready, Running, Paused, and Not Ready.
system status buttons
Round pictorial icon buttons that display at the top of every screen. They notify you of supply and waste
container conditions, QC failures, test requests, pending samples not on board, and events that require
your attention.
T
test request
The sample and test information you enter for each sample to be processed.
test result
The analyte concentration in a sample. The system calculates the test result by comparing the RLU
measurement to a calibration curve or cutoff value.
test result flags
See flags.

C42385
thermal zones
The areas of the instrument that are cooled or heated by temperature control devices.
troubleshooting Help
The online troubleshooting information from the Access 2 system Help system that you can display for a
test result flag or for a caution or warning event by selecting Troubleshoot F2.
U
ultrasonic transducer
The instrument device on the main pipettor that applies ultrasonic vibrations to the tip of the primary
probe that mixes reagents in the reagent pack before sampling, mixes the contents in the RV, cleans the
probe after each use, and senses the level of the sample fluid.
unbound analyte
The components of an assay that have not formed immune complexes.
unwashed check
An individual system check that evaluates the precision of the instrument’s main pipettor module.
upload
The process of moving data from the Access 2 system to a host computer, usually a laboratory
information system (LIS).
user interface (UI) software
The software you use to interface with, and direct, the instrument system software. The UI contains
database, sample calibration, quality control, and LIS information, as well as the assay protocol file
(APF). The UI software is stored on the hard drive of the external computer (PC).
utility assay
A maintenance assay that flushes the instrument's probes and fluidic lines. When the utility assay is
enabled, it runs automatically every four hours. The assay can also be run manually when additional
cleaning is requested by Technical Support or required for troubleshooting.
W
warm boot
To reboot the instrument using the reset button. See also cold boot and reboot.
wash buffer
The buffered solution used by the Access 2 system to remove unbound material during assay processing,
to clean the probes, and to dilute sample for some assays.
wash efficiency
A calculation based on the results from the washed, substrate, and unwashed checks. To obtain a wash
efficiency result you must run the System Check routine.
washed check
An individual system check that evaluates the performance of the instrument’s RV wash and mixing
systems.

C42385
weekly maintenance
The inspection, cleaning procedures, and system check routine you perform every seven days to keep the
system running at optimal efficiency.
Westgard QC rules
A set of interpretive rules the system uses to avoid excessive false rejection rates, improve quality
monitoring, and decrease subjectivity of data analysis. (Also called Westgard rules or QC rules.)
The application of a Westgard QC rule consists of screening quality control test results for an amount of
standard deviation above or below the mean, and the number of consecutive occurrences. For example,
the 41S rule checks for 4 consecutive results that exceed ±1 SD from the mean. Your laboratory
determines the QC rules to apply and the course of action you need to take when a result violates a rule.
The Access 2 system uses five Westgard QC rules (12S, 13S, 22S, 41S, 10X).
work pending
The tests the system cannot schedule because it cannot find an on-board sample. Work pending tests can
be created because the system requested a reflex test, the LIS requested a test, or an operator requested a
test to be rerun.
workpool
See LIS workpool.
workgroup
A complete Access 2 Immunoassay System installation, which consists of from one to four instruments.
Within a workgroup, one PC is configured as the server. Additional PCs are clients. See also client and
server.

C42385

C42385
Access 2 Reference Manual Index
Index Main Pipettor (Flowchart), 5-37

Main Pipettor Expected Results, 5-40
Substrate (Flowchart), 5-30
Substrate Expected Results, 5-32
Substrate Weight-to-Volume Conversion,
A 5-32
Acceptance Criteria Antibody Detection Assays, 1-23

Qualitative Calibration, 3-12 APF
Quantitative Calibration, 3-9 Assay Technology, 1-19
Semi-Quantitative Calibration, 3-9 Revision Number, 4-14
Access 2 System Documentation, Preface-3 Updating, 4-43
Air in the Lines, Troubleshooting, A-31 Articulated Arm

Instrument Peripheral, 1-17
Alarm, RV Load Door, 1-16
Aspirate Probes
Alignments
Analytical Volume Check, 5-42
Performing, 5-57
Analytical Volume Checks (Flowchart),
Report, 5-94, 5-96, 5-97
5-42
Viewing, 5-54
Locations, 7-64
Analog Devices Shuttle Positions, 5-29
Diagnostics, 5-58 Tubing Replacement, 7-76, 7-82
Viewing Temperatures, 5-59 Visual Volume Check, 5-27
Viewing Voltages, 5-59 Visual Volume Check (Flowcharts), 5-26
Viewing Voltages, Raw, 5-61 Volume Check Window, 5-27, 5-50
Window, 5-59
Assay Calibration Failures
Analytical Module Flat Quantitative Curve, A-37
Incubator Belt, 1-11 Insufficient Data, A-38
Luminometer, 1-11 No Response for Qualitative Assay, A-37
RV Loader, 1-10 Precision Good, A-36, A-37
Technical Overview, 1-10 Precision Poor, A-37
Wash/Read Carousel, 1-11 RLUs Too Low at One End of Curve, A-38
Analytical Volume Checks Troubleshooting Table, A-36
Aspirate Probe Expected Results, 5-44 Assay Calibrations
Aspirate Probes, 5-42 Calibration Types, 3-9
Aspirate Probes (Flowchart), 5-42 Qualitative, 3-9
Dispense Probe, 5-34 Quantitative, 3-9
Dispense Probe (Flowchart), 5-33 Semi-Quantitative, 3-9
Dispense Probe Expected Results, 5-36 Theory, 3-8
Handling RVs, 5-29 When to Perform, 3-8
Main Pipettor, 5-37
© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Index-1

C42385
Index Access 2 Reference Manual
Assay Protocol File Symbology Parameters, 4-20

See APF Troubleshooting, A-29
Assay Technology Bar Code Reading Problems
Antibody Detection Assays, 1-23 External Reader, A-30
Chemiluminescence, 1-20 Sample Not Read, A-29
Competitive Binding, 1-21 Sample Rack Not Read, A-29
Overview, 1-19 Troubleshooting Table, A-29
Paramagnetic Particles, 1-20 Bar Code Symbologies
Qualitative Assays, 1-19 Characters to Send, 4-22
Quantitative Assays, 1-19 Check Digits, 4-21
Reagent Pack Monotoring, 1-25 Parameters, 4-20
Reagent Pack Usage, 1-24 Start and Stop Characters, 4-22
Reagent Packs, 1-24 Bar Code Wand
Sandwich Assays, 1-22 See Bar Code Readers
Semi-Quantitative Assays, 1-19
Bar Codes
Assay Troubleshooting Label Specifications, 2-12
Assay Calibration Problems, A-36
Beckman Coulter
Overview, A-35
Contact Information, Preface-4
Patient Sample Problems, A-42
Belt
Quality Control Problems, A-39
Calibrating the Incubator Belt, 5-85
ASTM Standards, 4-92
Incubator (Technical Overview), 1-11
Auto-Delete Function, 4-108
Buttons
Event Log, 6-3, 6-5
B Reset, 1-15
Backup Power Supply, 2-6 Reset to Reboot, 7-16
Backups
Immediate System, 4-107 C
Replacing Tapes, 4-108 Calibrations
Scheduled Backup Window, 4-105 Assay, Theory, 3-8
Scheduling System, 4-103 Incubator Belt, 5-85
Bar Code Labels Incubator Belt Report, 5-99
Print Quality, 2-13 Luminometer Information, 5-74
Quiet Zones, 2-12, 2-13 Luminometer, Theory, 3-7
Sample Tube Requirements, 2-13 Qualitative Assay, 3-12
Specifications, 2-12 Carousel Module
Bar Code Readers Internal Bar Code Readers, 1-7
Disabling Parameters, 4-26 List of Events, 6-19
Handheld, Performance Properties, 2-11 Reagent Carousel, 1-7
Handheld, Technical Overview, 1-17 Sample Carousel, 1-6
Internal, 4-24, 4-27 Technical Overview, 1-6
Internal (Technical Overview), 1-7 Cautions
Internal, Performance Properties, 2-12 Event Log, 6-18
Setting Up Parameters, 4-27 Events, 6-4
Setup Overview, 4-20 Indicators of Instrument Damage,
Setup Window, 4-22 Preface-4
Specifications, 2-11
Index-2 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

C42385
CCR Fatal Flag, A-46 Covers

CEX Non-Fatal Flag, A-49 Front Panel, 7-5
Check Digits, Bar Codes, 4-21 Hex Screw Locations, 7-9
Incubator, 7-8
Chemiluminescence, 1-20
Supply, 7-8
Circuit Boards
Support Procedures, 7-4
See Printed Circuit Boards
Top Cover, 7-7
Clean Check, Theory, 3-17
CRH Non-Fatal Flag, A-49
Cleaning
Critical Ranges, Setup, 4-68
Pipettor Gantry, 7-48
CRL Non-Fatal Flag, A-49
Precision Valves, 7-57
RV Sensors, 7-44 Curve
Wash Valves, 7-63 Fitting Calibration Data, 3-10
Obstruction Detection, 5-64
CLT Fatal Flag, A-46
Cutoff, Calculating, 3-12
CODABAR
Bar Code Reader Setup, 4-20 Cycling
Enabling Parameters, 4-26 Devices, 5-56
Parameters, 4-21
CODE 128 D
Bar Code Reader Setup, 4-20 Data Transmissions To LIS, 4-96
Parameters, 4-21 Database
CODE 39 Capacities, 2-9
Bar Code Reader Setup, 4-20 Deleting Results, 4-108
Enabling Parameters, 4-26 Management, 4-108
Parameters, 4-21 Date
Code, Event, 6-18 Format, 4-15
Communication Problems System Setup, 4-14
PC Locks Up, A-34 Decimal Precision
Troubleshooting Table, A-34 Changing for a Derived Result, 4-61
Workgroup Communication Error, A-34 Test Result Setup, 4-32
Competitive Assays, 1-21 Decontaminating
Configure Substrate System, 7-22
LIS, 4-97 Waste Filter Bottle, 7-29
Menu, 4-7 Demographic Conditions, 4-69
System, 4-5 Derived Results
Confirmatory Assay Calibration Theory, 3-12 Add Derived Result Window, 4-62
Contamination, Substrate System, 7-22 Adding, 4-61
Continuous Access, Sample Processing, 3-2 Adding Result Ranges, 4-72
Conversions Decimal Precision, Changing, 4-61
Substrate Weight-to-Volume, 5-32 Deleting, 4-65
Wash Buffer Weight-to-Volume, 5-35, Disabling, 4-61
5-40 Editing, 4-64
Copying Data Editing Units of Measure, 4-34
Diagnostics Data, 5-85 Enabling, 4-61
LIS, 5-92 Error Checking, 4-57

C42385
Examples, 4-56 Mechanics, 5-46

Formula, 4-55 Menu, 5-5
Names, 4-57 Overview, 5-4
Printing Setup Reports, 4-66 Pressure Monitor, 5-62
Rules, 4-56 Printing Reports, 5-95
Screen, 4-59 Reports, 5-94
Setting Up Ranges, 4-68 Ultrasonics, 5-77
Setup, 4-55 Viewing Alignments, 5-54
Setup Report, 4-67 Volume Checks, 5-13
Details Digital Devices
Event, 6-13 Diagnostics, 5-58
Event Viewing and Printing, 6-16 Sensor Information, 5-68
Device Diagnostics Turning Off and On, 5-65
Aligning Devices, 5-57 Window, 5-65
Cycling Devices, 5-56 Dilution Factors
Homing, 5-55 Setting, 4-38
Luminometer, 5-71 Window, 4-39
Overview, 5-46 Disks
Resetting the pipettor, 5-50 3.5-Inch (Electronics Module), 1-16
Screen, 5-47 3.5-Inch (Peripherals Module), 1-18
Sensor Information, 5-68 Copying Diagnostics Data, 5-85
Viewing Alignments, 5-54 Internal Hard Drive (Technical Overview),
Devices 1-16
Aligning, 5-57 Dispense Characteristics
Analog Window, 5-59 Evaluating, 5-16
Cycling, 5-56 Irregular, 5-16
Diagnostics, 5-46, 5-58 Reviewing, Dispense Probe, 5-21
Digital Devices Window, 5-65 Reviewing, Main Pipettor, 5-25
Exercising, 5-82 Reviewing, Substrate, 5-21
Homing, 5-55 Troubleshooting, 5-16
Diagnostics Dispense Probes
Advanced, 5-76 Analytical Volume Check, 5-34
Calibrating the Incubator Belt, 5-85 Analytical Volume Checks (Flowchart),
Copy to Disk Window, 5-86 5-33
Copying Data, 5-85 Locations, 7-64
Cycling Devices, 5-56 Visual Volume Checks, 5-19
Device, 5-46 Visual Volume Checks (Flowchart), 5-18
Device Diagnostics Screen, 5-47 Documentation
Device, Analog, 5-58 LIS Vendor Information, Preface-3
Device, Digital, 5-58 System, Preface-3
Exercising Devices, 5-82
Identifying the Problem, A-5 E
Level Sense Test, 5-79
Electrical
LIS, 5-89
Backup Power Supply, 2-6
LIS Screen, 5-90
Current Consumption, 2-5
Luminometer Device, 5-71

C42385
Heat Production, 2-5 Exercising Devices

Line Conditioning, 2-5 Exerciser Window, 5-83
Line Requirements, 2-4 Procedure, 5-82
Power Consumption, 2-5 Test Cycle Times, 5-84
Specifications, 2-4 Expected Results
Surge Suppressors, 2-5 Aspirate Volume, 5-44
Electronics Module Aspirate Volume, Analytical, 5-44
3.5-inch Disk Drive, 1-16 Dispense Volume, Analytical, 5-36
Interlock Switch, 1-16 Main Pipettor Volume, Analytical, 5-40
Internal Hard Drive, 1-16 Substrate Check, 5-106
Power Supply, 1-15 Substrate Volume, Analytical, 5-32
Printed Circuit Boards, 1-15 Washed Check, 5-104
Reset Button, 1-15 EXS Non-Fatal Flag, A-49
RV Load Door Alarm, 1-16 External Computer
Technical Overview, 1-15 See PCs
Environmental Requirements, 2-2
Operating, 2-3
F
Errors
Factor, Dilution
Derived Results Formula, 4-57
See Dilution Factors
Reflex Test Conditions, 4-82
Fatal Flags, A-46
Event Log
Applying an Filter, 6-7 Filters
Button, 6-3 Applying an Event Log, 6-7
Button Color, 6-5 Test Panel, 4-47
Details Window, 6-16 Test Setup, 4-33
Overview, 6-2 Flash Drives
Printing Reports, 6-10 Copying Diagnostics Data, 5-85
Report, 6-12 Internal Hard Drive, 1-16
Reviewing, 6-5 Peripherals Module, 1-18
Screen, 6-3 System Backup, 4-99, 4-104, 4-107
Sorting, 6-10 Flowcharts
Events Add Panel, 4-49
Alphabetical List, 6-19 Aspirate Probe Volume Check, Analytical,
Codes, 6-13, 6-18 5-42
Details, 6-16 Aspirate Probe Volume Check, Visual,

5-26
Event Log, 6-2
Dispense Probe Volume Checks,
Finding, 6-9
Analytical, 5-33
List Descriptions, 6-18
Dispense Probe Volume Checks, Visual,
List of, 6-18 5-18
Printing Reports, 6-10 Main Pipettor Volume Checks, Analytical,
Reviewing, 6-5 5-37
Reviewing (Flowchart), 6-6 Main Pipettor Volume Checks, Visual,
Sorting, 6-10 5-22
Troubleshooting, 6-13 Obstruction Detection, 3-20
Troubleshooting (Flowchart), 6-14 Reviewing Events, 6-6
Viewing Help, 6-15 Substrate Volume Check, Analytical, 5-30

C42385
Substrate Volume Checks, Visual, 5-18 Homing a Device, 5-55

System Configuration, 4-6 Host Query
Troubleshooting Events, 6-14 Disabling, 4-97
Troubleshooting Process, A-4 Enabling, 4-97
Fluidic Module LIS Setup, 4-93, 4-94
Fluids Tray, 1-13 LIS Test Requests, 5-92
Peristaltic Waste Pump, 1-13 Printing a Reply, 5-92
Priming, 5-10
Probe Wash Tower, 1-13 I
Substrate Pump, Valve, Heater, 1-13
Immunoassays
Technical Overview, 1-12
Competitive, 1-21
Vacuum Pump, 1-13
Sandwich, 1-22
Vacuum Reservoir Bottle, 1-13
System Overview, 1-2
Wash Pump and Valve, 1-13
Fluids Tray
Incubator Belt
Calibrating, 5-85
Calibration Report, 5-94, 5-99
Formats
Dovetail, 7-40
Date and Time, 4-15
Pulleys, 7-41
Front Panel Support Procedures, 7-33
Closing, 7-6 Technical Overview, 1-11
Opening, 7-5 Vessel Holders, 7-40
Sensor, 5-68
Incubator Cover
Removing, 7-10
G Replacing, 7-11
Gantry, Pipettor RV Load Door and, 7-10
See Pipettor Gantry IND Fatal Flag, A-47
Gray Zones Information Event, 6-4
Setting Up, 4-36 Initialize System
Window, 4-37 During Reboot, 7-12
GRY Non-Fatal Flag, A-49 Overview, 5-8
Procedure, 5-9
H Initializing System
After Reboot, 7-16
Hard Drive
Copying LIS Data, 5-92 Inspecting
Internal, 1-16 Vacuum Reservoir Bottle, 7-84
Heater, Substrate, 1-13 Instructions for Use

Instrument, Preface-3
Help
Cautions, Preface-4 Instrument
Event Troubleshooting Window, 6-15 Cautions Regarding Possible Damage,
Preface-4
Notes, Preface-4
Connecting to the LIS, 4-96
System, Preface-3
Dimensions, 2-2
Troubleshooting, 6-13
Moving location, 7-18
Viewing Troubleshooting, 6-15
Operating Characteristics, 2-7
Warnings, Preface-4

C42385
Performance Characteristics, 2-7

Reboot, 7-15 L
Restart, 7-18 Laboratory Information System
Shut Down, 7-18 See LIS
Software Revision, 4-14
Languages
Technology Overview, 1-5
Japanese Considerations, 4-13
Temperatures, 2-8
Selecting, 4-13
Troubleshooting, A-24
Simplified Chinese Considerations, 4-13
Weight, 2-3
Level Sense Test
Instrument Troubleshooting
Performing, 5-79
Air in the Lines, A-31
Report, 5-98
Bar Code Reading Problems, A-29
Window, 5-80
Communication Problems, A-34
LEX Non-Fatal Flag, A-49
Event Log Button Yellow or Red, A-25
General Problems, A-25 Light Emitting Diode (LED), 3-7
Initialization Failure, A-26 LIS
Keyboard Problems, A-28 Clearing Data Transmissions, 5-93
Main Pipettor Problems, A-32 Configuring Global Settings, 4-97
Not Ready Mode, A-25 Configuring Send Mode, 4-98
Overview, A-24 Connecting One PC, 4-96
Power Supply Problems, A-27 Copying Data Transmissions, 5-92
Reboot Failure, A-26 Diagnostics, 5-89
Slow Performance, A-25 Diagnostics Screen, 5-90
Start-Up Problems, A-26 Host Query Setup, 4-97
Interface, LIS Interface, 1-4
See LIS LIS Vendor Information, Preface-3, 4-92
Printing Data on the Diagnostics Screen,
Interleaved 2 of 5
5-92
Bar Code Reader Setup, 4-20
Query for Test Requests, 5-92
Enabling Parameters, 4-25
Ranges, 4-68
Parameters, 4-21
Setup, 4-92
Interlock Switch Setup Window, 4-93
Closing the Front Panel, 7-6 Technical Overview, 1-4
Technical Overview, 1-16 Transmitting Data to, 4-96
Internal Bar Code Readers LIS Vendor Information Document, Preface-3
Properties, 2-12
Log, Troubleshooting, A-9
Setup, 4-20, 4-24, 4-27
LOW Non-Fatal Flag, A-49
LRH Non-Fatal Flag, A-49
LRL Non-Fatal Flag, A-49
K
Luminometer
Keyboard
Calibration Theory, 3-7
Instrument Technology, 1-17
Device Diagnostics, 5-71
No Response, A-28
Performance Characteristics, 2-8
Troubleshooting Table, A-28
Screen, 5-72
Taking a Reading, 5-74
Viewing Information, 5-74

C42385
Mouse
M Instrument Peripheral, 1-17
Main Pipettor
Analytical Volume Checks, 5-37 N
Analytical Volume Checks (Flowchart), NCR Fatal Flag, A-47
5-37
Non-Fatal Flags, A-49
Excess Pressure when Dispensing, A-33
Leaking, A-32
Module, 1-8 O
Primary Probe Replacement, 7-51 Obstruction Detection
Resetting, 5-50 CLT Flag, 3-19
Sensor Testing, Z-Axis, 7-50 Determining Curve, 5-64
Support Procedures, 7-47 Flowchart, 3-20
Troubleshooting Table, A-32 Pressure Monitor Screen, 5-62
Visual Volume Checks, 5-22 Theory, 3-19
Visual Volume Checks (Flowchart), 5-22
Online
Volume Check Window, 5-24 Support, USA and Canada, Preface-4
Main Pipettor Module Operator’s Guide, Preface-3
Pipettor Gantry, 1-9
Order of Operations
Precision Pump and Valve, 1-8
Derived Result Rules, 4-56
Pressure Monitor, 1-9
Reflex Test, 4-79
Primary Probe, 1-9
Reflex Test Rules, 4-78
Ultrasonic Transducer, 1-9
ORH Non-Fatal Flag, A-50
ORL Non-Fatal Flag, A-50
Manuals
Operator’s Guide, Preface-3 OVR Non-Fatal Flag, A-50
Mechanical Devices
Diagnostics, 5-46 P
Mechanics Screen, 5-51 Paramagnetic Particles, 1-20
Menus Password
Configure, 4-7 Changing, 4-16
Diagnostics, 5-5 Default, 4-16
Mixer Motor Setup, 4-16
Turning Off and On, 5-65 Patient Sample Problems
Modules Increased Assay Variability, A-44
Analytical Module, 1-10 Increasing Values Across Run, A-45
Carousel Module, 1-6 Low Sample Value Flag, A-44
Electronics Module, 1-15 Poor Precision, A-44
Fluidic Module, 1-12 Sample Values Too High, A-44
Main Pipettor Module, 1-8 Test Result Flags, A-42
Peripherals Module, 1-17 Troubleshooting Table, A-42
Monitor Unexpected Sample Results, A-42, A-43,
Touch Screen Technology, 1-17 A-44
Unexpected Shift in Assay Results, A-45
Motors
Disabling or Enabling, 5-57 PCBs
Mixer, 5-65 See Printed Circuit Boards

C42385
PCs PEX Non-Fatal Flag, A-50

Admin Screen, 4-101 Pipettor Gantry
Administration Setup, 4-99 Diagram, 7-49
Connecting to the LIS, 4-96 Inspecting and Cleaning, 7-48
Database Management, 4-108 Technical Overview, 1-9
Operating System Revision, 4-14 Pipettor Reset, 5-50
Power Switch, 7-15
Pipettor Torque Tool, 7-54
Replacing Backup Tapes, 4-108
Power Supply
Restarting, 7-15
Backup, 2-6
Restoring Data, 4-108
No Power, A-27
Scheduling Backups, 4-103
No Power to Instrument, A-27
Setting Up Auto-Delete, 4-108
No Power to Peripherals, A-27
Shutting Down, 7-13
Software Revision, 4-14
Weight, 2-3 Power Switch
Instrument, 7-17
Performance Characteristics
PC, 7-15
Database Capacities, 2-9
Instrument Operation, 2-7 Precision Pump
Instrument Temperatures, 2-8 Technical Overview, 1-8
Luminometer Performance, 2-8 Precision Valve
Reaction Vessel Properties, 2-9 Assembly, 7-59
Specifications, 2-7 Cleaning, 7-57
Supply and Sample Capacities, 2-10 Technical Overview, 1-8
Peripherals Verifying Reassembly, 7-61
Device Weights, 2-3 Precision, Decimal
Peripherals Module See Decimal Precision
3.5-inch Disk Drive, 1-18 Pressure Monitor
Articulated Arm, 1-17 Reference Curve Theory, 3-19
External Computer (PC), 1-18 Screen, 5-62
Flash Drive, 1-18 Technical Overview, 1-9
Handheld Bar Code Reader, 1-17 Primary Probe
Keyboard, 1-17 Assembly, Diagram, 7-52
Monitor, 1-17 Pipettor Torque Tool, 7-54
Mouse, 1-17 Probe Nut, 7-53
Printer, 1-17 Replacement, 7-51
Technical Overview, 1-17 Technical Overview, 1-9
Peristaltic Waste Pumps Verifying Installation, 7-55
Cassette Removed, 7-74, 7-75, 7-81 Priming Fluidics
Diagram, 7-72, 7-79 Cleaning the Substrate Lines, 7-23
Technical Overview, 1-13 Instrument Restart, 7-19
Tubing, Locating, 7-71, 7-78 Overview, 5-10
Tubing, Replacing, 7-69 Procedure, 5-10
Turning Off and On, 5-65 Substrate after Decontamination, 7-24
Verifying Tubing Installation, 7-78, 7-83

C42385
Printed Circuit Boards Qualitative Calibrations

Revision Information, 4-14 Acceptance Criteria, 3-12
Technical Overview, 1-15 Assay Theory, 3-12
Printer Calculating Test Results, 3-12
Instrument Technology, 1-17 Confirmatory Assays, 3-12
Problems, A-28 Quality Control Problems
System Setup, 4-19 Controls Violate QC Rule, A-39, A-40,
A-41
Printing
Event Details, 6-16 Increasing Values Across Run, A-41
Printing Reports
Derived Results Setup, 4-66 Quality Control Theory, 3-14
Diagnostics, 5-95 Quantitative Assays
Event Log, 6-10 Technical Overview, 1-19
Ranges, 4-40 Quantitative Calibrations
Reflex Tests Setup, 4-91 Acceptance Criteria, 3-9
Test Panels Setup, 4-53 Assay Theory, 3-9
Tests Setup, 4-40 Calculating Predicted Precision, 3-10
Troubleshooting, A-28 Calculating Test Results, 3-11
Probe Wash Tower Comparing Precision To Limits, 3-11
Technical Overview, 1-13 Fitting Data To Math Model, 3-10
Valves, Turning Off and On, 5-65 Query for Test Requests, 5-92
Probes Query, LIS
Also See Aspirate Probes See Host Query
Also See Dispense Probes
Locations, 7-64 R
Numbers and Locations, 5-20
Racks
Primary (Technical Overview), 1-9
Bar Code Reading Problems, A-29
Volume Checks at Restart, 7-19
Bar Code Symbology, 4-20
Pulleys, Incubator Belt, 7-41
Carousel Module, 1-6
Pumps Database Capacities, 2-9
Locations, 7-58
Rake and Fallen RVs, 7-37
Precision (Technical Overview), 1-8
Random Access
Substrate (Technical Overview), 1-13
Sample Processing, 3-2
Vacuum (Technical Overview), 1-13 Ranges
Wash (Technical Overview), 1-13 Adding to Derived Results, 4-72
Waste (Technical Overview), 1-13 Adding to Tests, 4-72
Clearing, 4-75
Critical, 4-68
Q Demographic conditions, 4-69
QCF Non-Fatal Flag, A-50 Editing, 4-74
QEX Non-Fatal Flag, A-50 Examples, 4-69
QNS Fatal Flag, A-47 LIS, 4-68
QSD Fatal Flag, A-47 Printing Setup Reports, 4-40
Reference Report, 4-42
Qualitative Assays
Reference Window, 4-70

C42385
Setting Up Reference, 4-68 Reflex Tests

Setup, 4-68 Add Reflex Condition Window, 4-87
Windows (Setup), 4-70 Adding, 4-87
Reaction Vessel Conditions, 4-77
Also See RVs Conditions, Special, 4-83
Load Door Alarm, 1-16 Deleting, 4-90
Loader (Technical Overview), 1-10 Disabling, 4-85
Properties, 2-9 Editing, 4-90
Reaction Vessel Transport Enabling, 4-85
Ejection Stage, 3-6 Error Checking, 4-82
Incubation Stage, 3-5 Examples, 4-81, 4-82
Luminometer Reading Stage, 3-6 Expressions, 4-79
Pipetting Stage, 3-5 Order of Operations, 4-79
RV Washing, 3-5 Order of Operations Rules, 4-78
Substrate Addition, 3-6 Printing the Setup Report, 4-91
Theory, 3-4 Screen, 4-84
Selecting Replicates, 4-86
Reagent Carousel, 1-7
Setup, 4-76
Reagent Packs
Setup Report, 4-91
Assay Technology, 1-24
Suppressing, 4-86
Mixing, 1-24
Reports
Monitoring, 1-25
Alignment, 5-96, 5-97
Usage, 1-24
Derived Results Setup, 4-66, 4-67
Reboot
Diagnostics, 5-94
Instrument, 7-15
Event Log, 6-12
PC, 7-13
Incubator Belt Calibration, 5-99
System, 7-12
Using the Power Switch, 7-17
Printing Automatically, 4-19
Using the Reset Button, 7-16
Ranges, 4-40
Reference Curve Reference Ranges, 4-42
Obstruction Detection, 5-64 Reflex Tests Setup, 4-91
Reference Ranges Setting Up Information, 4-17
Also See Ranges Setup Window, 4-17
Derived Results Report, 4-66 Temperature, 5-100
Editing Units of Measure, 4-34 Test Panels Setup, 4-53, 4-54
Report, 4-42 Tests Setup, 4-41
Reports, 4-40 Requirements
Setup, 4-68 Space and Environmental, 2-2
Window, 4-70
Reservoir Bottle Inspection, 7-84
Reflex Conditions
Reset Button
Elements, 4-77, 4-78
Location, 7-16
Equal sign, 4-83
Examples, 4-81
Restart
OVR flag, 4-83
Instrument, 7-18
Special, 4-83
PC, 7-15
Syntax Rules, 4-78
Priming the Fluidics, 7-19
Test Expressions, 4-79

C42385
Procedure, 7-12
Replenishing Supplies, 7-20 S
Running Special Clean, 7-20 Safety
Running System Check, 7-20 Interlock Switch, 1-16
Volume Checks, 7-19 Warnings, Preface-4
Restore System Data, 4-100, 4-102, 4-108 Sample
Results Bar Code Reading Problems, A-29
Also See Derived Results Carousel, 1-6
Also See Test Results Instrument Capacities, 2-10
RFX Non-Fatal Flag, A-50 Sample Processing
RLU Fatal Flag, A-47 Adding Substrate, 3-6
RLUs Continuous Access, 3-2
Current Luminometer Readings, 5-75 Luminometer Reading, 3-6
Luminometer Reading, 5-72 On-Board Incubation, 3-5
Rules Pipetting Position, 3-5
Derived Result Formulas, 4-56 Processing Order, 3-2
Reflex Conditions Syntax, 4-78 Random Access, 3-2
Reflex Test Order of Operations, 4-78 RV Wash, 3-5
STAT Access, 3-2
RV Load Door
Test Requests, 3-2
Removing Incubator Cover, 7-10
Theory, 3-2
Sensor, 5-68
Sample Types, Changing Default, 4-32
RV Loader, 1-10
Sandwich Assays, 1-22
RV Shuttle
Aspirate Probe Positions, 5-29 Screens
Clearing the Path, 7-34 Also See Menus
RV Positions, 5-15 Derived Results, 4-59
Support Procedures, 7-33 Device Diagnostics, 5-47
Transfer Position, 7-35 Diagnostics (Menu), 5-5
Event Log, 6-3
RV Waste Bag Sensor
LIS Diagnostics, 5-90
Adjusting, 7-27
Luminometer, 5-72
Testing, 7-25
Mechanics Screen, 5-51
RVs
PC Admin, 4-101
Checking for Fallen or Missing, 7-37
Pressure Monitor, 5-62
Dispense Characteristics, 5-16
Reflex Tests, 4-84
Sensor Testing and Cleaning, 7-43
System Setup, 4-10
Sensors, Diagram, 7-44
Test Panels, 4-45
Vessel Holders, 7-39
Tests, 4-29
Vessel Transport, 3-4
Volume Checks, 5-14
Volume Checks, Access, 5-15
Semi-Quantitative Assays
Wash Stages, 3-5
Waste Ejection, 3-6
Semi-Quantitative Calibrations
Acceptance Criteria, 3-9
Assay Theory, 3-9
Calculating Predicted Precision, 3-10

C42385
Calculating Test Results, 3-11 Line Conditioning Transformers, 2-5

Comparing Precision To Limits, 3-11 Luminometer, 2-8
Fitting Data To Math Model, 3-10 Operating Environment, 2-3
Sensors Peripheral Weights, 2-3
Adjusting the RV Waste Bag, 7-27 Power Consumption, 2-5
Digital Device Information, 5-68 Reaction Vessels, 2-9
Front Panel, 5-68 Space Requirements, 2-2
RV Load Door, 5-68 STAT Access, Sample Processing, 3-2
RV Testing and Cleaning, 7-43 Stepper Motor Driver PCB
RV, Diagram, 7-44 Turning Off and On, 5-65
Testing Pipettor Z-Axis, 7-50 Substrate
Testing the RV Waste Bag, 7-25 Dispensing Technology, 1-13
Wash Buffer Level, 5-68 Supply Decontamination, 7-22
Waste Bag, 7-26 System Overview, 1-2
Waste Bag Present, 5-68 Verifying System Decontamination, 7-24
Waste Bottle Level, 5-68
Substrate : Washed Ratio, Theory, 3-18
Server
Substrate Check Problems
Rebooting, 7-12
High %CV Throughout Run, A-11
Shutting Down, 7-13
High RLU Mean, A-13
Setting Up Ranges, 4-68 High Substrate Ratio, A-15
Shutting Down High Values in Last 1-2 Replicates, A-12
Instrument, 7-18 Low RLU mean, A-13, A-14
PC, 7-13 No RLU Values, A-14
Shuttle RLUs Trending Up or Down, A-14
See RV Shuttle Troubleshooting Table, A-11
Sodium Azide Substrate Checks
Plumbing, 7-18 Expected Results, 5-106
Software Revisions Running Individually, 5-104
APF, 4-14 Theory, 3-16
Instrument, 4-14 Substrate Probe
PC, 4-14 Analytical Volume Checks (Flowchart),
5-30
Space Requirements
Clearance, 2-2 Location, 7-64, 7-91
Instrument, 2-2 Removing and Replacing, 7-90
Instrument Dimensions, 2-2 Visual Volume Checks, 5-19
Visual Volume Checks (Flowchart), 5-18
Special Clean at Restart, 7-20
Substrate Ratio, Theory, 3-16
Specifications
Backup Power Supply, 2-6 Supply Capacities, 2-10
Bar Code Hardware, 2-11 Supply Cover
Bar Code Labels, 2-12 Hex Screw Locations, 7-9
Electrical Current, 2-5 Removing, 7-8
Electrical Requirements, 2-4 Replacing, 7-11
Heat Production, 2-5 Support
Instrument Temperatures, 2-8 Cover Procedures, 7-4
Instrument Weights, 2-3 Fluids Tray Procedures, 7-21

C42385
Incubator Belt Procedures, 7-33 Support Procedures, 7-3

Instrument Base Procedures, 7-21 Technology Overview, 1-2
Main Pipettor Procedures, 7-47 Verifying Performance after Substrate
Primary Probe Replacement, 7-51 Decontamination, 7-24
Procedures, 7-3 System Check Theory
Pump Procedures, 7-56 Clean Check, 3-17
Reboot Procedure, 7-12 Overview, 3-15
RV Holders, Replacing, 7-39 Substrate : Washed ratio, 3-18
RV Sensors, 7-43 Substrate Check, 3-16
RV Shuttle Procedures, 7-33 Substrate Ratio, 3-16
Shut Down Procedure, 7-12 System Check Routine, 3-15
Substrate Probe Replacement, 7-90 Unwashed Check, 3-17
Substrate System Decontamination, 7-22 Wash Efficiency, 3-18
Switching Vessel Holders, 7-45 Washed Check, 3-16
Technical Assistance, Preface-4 System Check Troubleshooting
Vacuum Procedures, 7-56 Overview, A-9
Vacuum Reservoir Bottle Inspection, 7-84 Substrate Check Problems, A-11
Valve Procedures, 7-56 Unwashed Check Problems, A-16
Wash Buffer Reservoir, Rinsing, 7-30 Wash Efficiency Problems, A-23
Wash Valve Cleaning, 7-63 Washed Check Problems, A-19
Wash/Read Carousel Procedures, 7-86 System Checks
Waste Bag Sensor, Adjusting, 7-27 Individual, 5-101
Waste Bag Sensor, Testing, 7-25 Instrument Restart, 7-20
Waste Filter Bottle, Replacing, 7-28 Substrate Check Only, 5-104
Waste Pump Tubing Replacement, 7-69 Theory, 3-15
Surge Suppressor, 2-5 Unwashed Check Only, 5-106
Switches Washed Check Only, 5-102
Instrument Power, 7-17 System Configuration
Interlock, 7-6 Also See System Setup
PC Power, 7-15 Bar Code Reader, 4-27
Symbologies Derived Results, 4-55
See Bar Code Symbologies Flowchart, 4-6
SYS Fatal Flag, A-47 LIS Setup, 4-92
System Overview, 4-5
Backup, 4-103 PC Administration, 4-99
Configuration, 4-5 Reflex Tests, 4-76
Database Capacities, 2-9 Test Panels, 4-44
Dimensions, 2-2 Test Result Ranges, 4-68
Documentation, Preface-3 Tests, 4-28
ID, 4-7, 4-12 System Documentation, Preface-3
Initializing, 5-8, 5-9 System Setup
Performance Characteristics, 2-7 Date and Time, 4-14
Restore, 4-108 Date and Time Formats, 4-15
Revisions, 4-13 Laboratory Information, 4-17
Scheduling Backups, 4-103 Overview, 4-9
Setup, 4-9 Password, 4-16

C42385
Printer, 4-19 Test Setup

Printing Reports, 4-19 Report, 4-41
Reports, 4-17 Tests, 4-68
Screen, 4-10 Also See Test Panels
Selecting a Language, 4-13 Adding Result Ranges, 4-72
System ID, 4-7, 4-12 Applying a Filter, 4-33
Viewing Revisions, 4-13 Assigning Test IDs, 4-31
Automated Vacuum, 5-68
T Decimal Precision Setup, 4-32
Derived Results, 4-55
Tapes
Disabling, 4-32
Replacing the Backup, 4-108
Edit Units Window, 4-35
System Backup, 4-99, 4-104, 4-107
Editing Units, 4-34
Technical Support, Preface-4
Enabling, 4-32
Technology Level Sense, 5-79
Assay Overview, 1-19 Level Sense Report, 5-98
Continuous Access, 1-2 Manual Vacuum, 5-69
Instrument Overview, 1-5 Printing Setup Reports, 4-40
Overview, 1-1 Reflex, 4-76
Random Access, 1-2 Sample Type Setup, 4-32
System Overview, 1-2 Screen, 4-29
Temperatures Setting Dilution Factors, 4-38
Analog Devices, 5-59 Setting Gray Zones, 4-36
Instrument Requirements, 2-8 Setup, 4-28
Operational, 2-3 Updating APF, 4-43
Report, 5-94, 5-100 Theory
Test IDs Assay Calibration, 3-8
Assigning for Test Panels, 4-46 Luminometer Calibration, 3-7
Assigning for Tests, 4-31 Obstruction Detection, 3-19
Test Panels Quality Control, 3-14
Add Window, 4-50 Reaction Vessel Transport, 3-4
Adding, 4-50 Sample Processing, 3-2
Adding (Flowchart), 4-49 System Check, 3-15
Applying a Filter, 4-47 Time
Assigning Test IDs, 4-46 Formats, 4-15
Deleting, 4-53 System Setup, 4-14
Disabling, 4-47 Top Cover
Editing, 4-52 Closing, 7-8
Enabling, 4-47 Opening, 7-7
Screen, 4-45
Torque Tool, Pipettor, 7-54
Setup, 4-44
TRI Fatal Flag, A-48
Setup Report, 4-53, 4-54
Troubleshooting
Test Results
Assay Results, A-35
Flags, A-42, A-46
Assay Troubleshooting, A-35
Troubleshooting, A-42
Correcting the Problem, A-8

C42385
Diagnostics, 5-4 Unit of Measure, Editing (Tests), 4-34

Dispense Characteristics, 5-16 Unwashed Check Problems
Events, 6-13 High %CV, A-16, A-17
Events (Flowchart), 6-14 High RLU Mean, A-18
Finding Troubleshooting Information, A-6 Low RLU Mean, A-18
Help, 6-13 Low RLU Outliers, A-18
Identifying the Problem, A-5 Troubleshooting Table, A-16
Initialize System, 5-8 Unwashed Checks
Instrument Problems, A-24 Running Individually, 5-106
Log, A-9 Theory, 3-17
Logging Activity, A-8
UPS unit, 2-6
Methodology, A-3
Patient Sample Problems, A-42
Priming Fluidics, 5-10 V
Printer Problems, A-28 Vacuum, 7-84
Process Overview, A-4 Automated Test, 5-68
Process Overview (Flowchart), A-4 Manual Test, 5-69
Recording Activity, A-8 Reservoir Bottle, 1-13, 7-85
Resources, A-5 Tubing Replacement, 7-72, 7-80
Result Flags, A-42 Vacuum Pump
Start-up Problems, A-26 Overview, 1-13
Substrate Check Problems, A-11 Turning Off and On, 5-65
Valves
System Checks, A-9 Cleaning Precision, 7-57
System Checks, Individual, 5-101 Cleaning Wash, 7-63
Unwashed Check Problems, A-16 Locations, 7-58
Viewing Help, 6-15 Precision, Assembly, 7-59
Washed Check Problems, A-19 Support Procedures, 7-56
TRS Fatal Flag, A-48 Wash Assembly, 7-65
TRW Fatal Flag, A-48 Verifications
Tubing Peristaltic Waste Pump Tubing, 7-78, 7-83
Replacing Aspirate, 7-76, 7-82 Precision Valve Function, 7-62
Replacing Peristaltic Waste Pump, 7-69 Primary Probe Installation, 7-55
Replacing Vacuum, 7-72, 7-80 Substrate Decontamination, 7-24
System Check, 3-15
U Wash Valve Function, 7-68
Vessel Holders
Ultrasonics
Diagram, 7-40
Level Sense Report, 5-98
Replacing Missing or Damaged, 7-39
Switching Positions, 7-45
Level Sense Test Window, 5-80
Report, 5-94 Visual Volume Checks
Technical Overview, 1-9 Aspirate Probes, 5-27
Viewing Information, 5-77 Aspirate Probes (Flowchart), 5-26
Window, 5-77 Comparison, 5-16
Dispense Probe, 5-19
Dispense Probe (Flowchart), 5-18

C42385
Evaluating, 5-16 Reinstalling, 7-32

Main Pipettor, 5-22 Removing and Rinsing, 7-31
Main Pipettor (Flowchart), 5-22 Removing Connections, 7-31
Substrate, 5-19 Rinsing, 7-30
Substrate Probe (Flowchart), 5-18 Wash Efficiency
Voltages PPM Problems, A-23
Analog Devices, 5-59 Problems, A-23
Raw Voltage Data Window, 5-61 Theory, 3-18
Volume Checks Wash Pump, Technical Overview, 1-13
Also See Visual Volume Checks Wash Tower, Probe, 1-13
Access to RVs, 5-15 Wash Valve
Analytical Aspirate Probe, 5-42 Assembly, 7-65
Analytical Aspirate Probe (Flowchart), Cleaning, 7-63
5-42
Analytical Dispense Probe, 5-34
Verifying Reassembly, 7-67
Analytical Dispense Probe (Flowchart),
5-33 Wash/Read Carousel
Analytical Main Pipettor, 5-37 Clearing, 7-87
Analytical Main Pipettor (Flowchart), 5-37 Support Procedures, 7-86
Analytical Substrate (Flowchart), 5-30 Technical Overview, 1-11
Handling RVs for Analytical, 5-29 Wash Arm Obstructions, 7-89
Instrument Restart Procedure, 7-19 Washed Check Problems
Overview, 5-13 High %CV, A-19, A-20, A-21
Screen, 5-14 High RLU Mean, A-21
Visual Dispense Probe, 5-19 Low RLU Mean, A-22
Visual Evaluation, 5-16 Troubleshooting Table, A-19
Visual Main Pipettor, 5-22 Washed Checks
Visual Main Pipettor (Flowchart), 5-22 Expected Results, 5-104
Visual Substrate or Dispense Probe Running Individually, 5-102
(Flowchart), 5-18 Theory, 3-16
Visual Substrate Probe, 5-19
Waste Bag Sensor, 5-68
Diagram, 7-26
W Waste Bottle Level Sensor, 5-68
Warnings Waste Filter Bottle
Event Log, 6-18 Assembly, 7-29
Events, 6-4 Decontaminating, 7-29
Indicators of Harm, Preface-4 Replacing, 7-28
Instrument Covers, 1-16 Waste Pump, Peristaltic, 7-72, 7-79
Wash Arm Website
Checking for Obstructions, 7-89 Technical Documents, Preface-3
Diagram, 7-88 Technical Support, Preface-4
Wash Buffer Weight-to-Volume Conversions
Level Sensor, 5-68 Substrate, 5-32
Weight-to-Volume Conversion, 5-35, 5-40 Wash Buffer, 5-35, 5-40
Wash Buffer Reservoir
Fluids Tray, Technology, 1-13

C42385
Westgard QC Rules, 3-14

Windows
Add Derived Result, 4-62
Add Panel, 4-50
Add Reflex Condition, 4-87
Analog Devices, 5-59
Aspirate Probes Volume Check, 5-27, 5-50
Bar Code Reader Setup, 4-22
Copy to Disk (Diagnostics), 5-86
Details (Event Log), 6-16
Digital Devices, 5-65
Dilution Factor (Test Setup), 4-39
Edit Units (Test Setup), 4-35
Event Help, Troubleshooting, 6-15
Exerciser, 5-83
Filter (Event Log), 6-7
Filter (Test Panels), 4-47
Filter (Test Setup), 4-33
Find (Event Log), 6-9
Gray Zone (Test Setup), 4-37
LIS Setup, 4-93
Pipettor Volume Check, 5-24
Print (Event Log), 6-11
Ranges, 4-70
Raw Voltage Data, 5-61
Reference Ranges, 4-70
Reports Setup, 4-17
Scheduled Backup, 4-105
Ultrasonic Level Sense Test, 5-80
Ultrasonics, 5-77
Workgroups
Event Log, 6-2
Rebooting Server, 7-12
Server, 1-4
Shutting Down, 7-13

C42385

Reference Manual: C42385 January 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Reference Manual: C42385 January 2020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Manual: C42385 January 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Manual

1 Technology Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

3 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. i

4.8 Reflex Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

6 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

7 System Support Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

ii © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. iii

iv © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

Access 2 System Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface-3

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface-4

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface-4

© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Preface-1

Table 1 Reference Manual Chapters

Preface-2 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

Chapter 7 • How to service the instrument as needed for

Table 1 Reference Manual Chapters (continued)

Access 2 Sys- The Access 2 system includes the following documentation.

© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Preface-3

(Note icon) Notes highlight or provide additional

(Caution icon) Cautions emphasize the possibility

(Warning icon) Warnings emphasize the

Table 2 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Technical For technical assistance with the Access 2 Immunoassay System:

Preface-4 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

LIS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.2 Instrument Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Carousel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Main Pipettor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Analytical Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Fluidic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Electronics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Peripherals Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

1.3 Assay Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Paramagnetic Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Competitive Binding Assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Sandwich Assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Antibody Detection Assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Reagent Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. 1-1

1.1 System Technology Overview

The Access 2 Immunoassay System is an automated analyzer that performs a wide

The immunoassays are heterogeneous, enzyme-mediated assays. Coated

In a workgroup of one to four immunoassay systems, one external computer (PC) is

To optimize laboratory efficiency, the system provides random, continuous, and

1-2 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

Interface Functions For

Optional Link to 1-3

© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. 1-3

Workgroups A workgroup consists of 1 to 4 Access 2 Immunoassay Systems. Sample information

For more information about workgroup database capacities, see

1-4 © 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

1.2 Instrument Technology

© 2020 Beckman Coulter, Inc. 1-5

1 Internal Sample Bar Code Reader